JP6877855B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine that can shift to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a first identification information display device (first) is provided on the condition that a game ball launched into a game area on a game board passes through a first starting area (first starting port). The first identification information (first special symbol) is variablely displayed on the special symbol display device), and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, so that a specific gaming state (big hit game) advantageous to the player is performed. The second identification information (second identification information display device) in the second identification information display device (second special symbol display device), provided that the game ball passes through the second start area (second start port) while shifting to the state). There is a device that shifts to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player by displaying the variation of the special symbol) and then stopping and displaying the second identification information in a specific mode. In the specific game state, a round game in which the variable winning device (large winning opening) provided in the game area fluctuates so as to be in the open mode and the closed mode is executed a plurality of times, and the game ball is placed in the open variable prize device. By winning a prize, a predetermined number of game balls will be paid out.

By the way, the conventional gaming machine is provided with two variable winning devices (the first variable winning device and the second variable winning device), and the gaming ball passes through the inside of the second variable winning device, which is one of them (the first variable winning device and the second variable winning device). A specific area where a prize can be won) is provided, and when a game ball wins a prize in a specific area during the specific game state (hereinafter, also referred to as “V prize”), the game state after the end of the specific game state is changed to the specific game state. A device that controls a special gaming state (probability-changing gaming state) that easily shifts to is proposed (see Patent Document 1).

In such a conventional gaming machine, the first identification information or the second identification information is exclusively varied and displayed on either the first identification information display device or the second identification information display device, while the identification information is variable. If the game ball passes through the first starting area or the second starting area while the display is in progress, the variable display of the identification information is suspended in association with the passed starting area. After that, when the identification information is stopped and displayed on either the first identification information display device or the second identification information display device, the variable display of the reserved identification information is started. At this time, if the variable display of the identification information is suspended in both the first identification information display device and the second identification information display device, the second identification information is displayed more than the first identification information display device. The variable display of the second identification information in the identification information display device is given priority.

Further, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, in one specific gaming state, a round game in which the first variable winning device opens and closes is executed a plurality of times, and a specific round game in which the second variable winning device opens and closes is executed only once. It is supposed to be done. As the opening / closing mode (opening / closing pattern) of the specific round game related to the second variable winning device, a long opening / closing pattern that is continuously opened for a relatively long time and a short opening / closing mode that is opened in a shorter time than the long opening / closing pattern. An opening / closing pattern is provided.

When the second variable winning device is in the open mode based on the long opening / closing pattern described above, the game ball is likely to win a prize for the second variable winning device, and thus the game ball is likely to win a V prize for the specific area. As a result, in the long opening / closing pattern, it is easy to shift to the special gaming state. On the other hand, when the second variable winning device is in the open mode based on the short opening / closing pattern, it is difficult for the game ball to win a prize for the second variable winning device, and it becomes difficult for the game ball to win a V prize for a specific area. .. As a result, it becomes difficult to shift to the special gaming state in the short opening / closing pattern.

Further, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode on the first identification information display device, the ratio of shifting to the specific gaming state in which the specific round game of the short opening / closing pattern is executed is In addition to 50%, the ratio of shifting to the specific game state in which the specific round game of the long opening / closing pattern is executed is 50%. On the other hand, when the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode on the second identification information display device, the ratio of shifting to the specific game state in which the specific round game of the short opening / closing pattern is executed is 0%. On the other hand, the ratio of shifting to the specific game state in which the specific round game of the long opening / closing pattern is executed is 100%.

As a result, when the variable display of the first identification information is suspended, when the variable display of the reserved first identification information is executed, the specific game state in which the specific round game of the short opening / closing pattern is executed is executed. There is a possibility of migration. Therefore, even if the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode to shift to the specific gaming state, after the end of the specific gaming state, a non-special gaming state (non-probability changing gaming state) that is disadvantageous to the player. There is a risk of becoming.

In order to avoid such a disadvantageous situation, the first identification is performed by sustaining the state in which the variable display of the second identification information is suspended as much as possible and preferentially displaying the variable display of the second identification information. The second identification information may be stopped and displayed in a specific manner before the information.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-248385

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there are cases where the hold related to the variable display of the first identification information does not determine the transition to the specific gaming state in which the specific round game of the short opening / closing pattern is executed. Yes, the reservation of the first identification information does not necessarily shift to the non-special gaming state. Therefore, it may not be necessary to maintain the state in which the variable display of the second identification information is suspended.

There was a drawback that the game in the special game state became monotonous.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of eliminating the monotony of a special gaming state.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.
(I)
A game board having a game area in which the game medium can be rolled, and
A passing area provided in the game area and through which the game medium can pass,
A determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state on condition that the gaming medium has passed through the passing area.
A game state transition means for shifting to the specific gaming state based on the determination result of the determination means, and
A variable winning device that can be displaced into an open state in which it is easy to accept the game medium and a closed state in which it is more difficult to accept the game medium than in the open state.
A non-special game state control means that is a game state that is controlled after the specific game state ends and can be controlled to a non-special game state that is difficult to shift to the specific game state.
A special game state control means capable of controlling a special game state in which the specific game state is easily shifted to the specific game state after the specific game state is completed.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
In the specific game state, a round game for controlling the opening and closing of the variable winning device can be executed a plurality of times.
Even during the opening / closing control, if a predetermined number of winnings are generated in the variable winning device, it is possible to execute the control to end the round game of that time.
When the first round game is started, the effect executing means can win a prize determined from a plurality of types of prizeable numbers with respect to the display regarding the number of prizes that can be won in the variable winning device in one specific game state. Based on the fact that after the initial display regarding the number is performed, the initial display is continuously displayed even after the first round game is completed and the variable winning device is closed, and the subsequent round game is started. Therefore, it is possible to execute an additional display effect in which the number related to the winning number is increased from the initial display.
At least from the special gaming state, a specific display based on the cumulative total of game values given to the player in the round game from the start of the specific gaming state to the transition to the special gaming state to the transition to the non-special gaming state is displayed. When the round game is executed a plurality of times in the shifted specific game state, it can be displayed together with an effect image showing the end display pattern of the specific game state.
The specific indication and wherein the go not appear when a particular round game not appear effect image indicating the completion display pattern in the case of executing a plurality of times the round game in the specific game mode is executed A game machine to play.
(1)
A game board having a game area in which the game medium can be rolled, and
A variable winning device provided in the game area and capable of varying into a first mode in which the game medium is easily accepted and a second mode in which the game medium is difficult to accept.
A first starting area provided in the game area and into which the game medium can enter, and
A first game state determining means for determining whether or not to set a specific gaming state advantageous to the player on condition that the game medium has entered the first starting area.
A second starting area provided in the game area and into which the game medium can enter, and
A second game state determining means that makes a determination for determining whether or not to enter the specific gaming state on condition that the game medium has entered the second starting area.
A round game executing means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning device is changed to the first mode and the second mode in the specific game state, and
A special game state control means capable of controlling a special game state in which it is easy to shift to the specific game state after the specific game state ends.
A non-special game state control means capable of controlling a non-special game state in which it is difficult to shift to the specific game state after the specific game state ends.
A notification means capable of transmitting predetermined information and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The specific gaming state is
The first specific game state in which the easy-to-win round game in which the variable winning device easily accepts the game medium is executed the first time, and the second specific game in which the easy-to-win round game is executed a second time less than the first time. There is a state,
The first specific gaming state is a specific gaming state in which the transition to the non-special gaming state is easier than the second specific gaming state.
The gaming machine is characterized in that it is possible to perform a predetermined notification on the condition that it is determined to be in the first specific gaming state during a predetermined period of the special gaming state. ..
(2)
A storage means capable of storing a plurality of determination results of the first game state determination means and the second game state determination means, and
A display means capable of displaying the determination result in a specific display mode or a normal display mode, and
A display mode changing means for changing the specific display mode to the normal display mode, and
With
The display means can display the determination result in the specific display mode on condition that it is determined to be in the first specific gaming state.
The display mode changing means
If a predetermined number of determination results of the second game state determination means are stored, the specific display mode according to the determination result of the first game state determination means is changed to the normal display mode.
When the determination result newly stored in the storage means is more advantageous to the player than the determination result displayed in the specific display mode, the predetermined number of determination results of the second gaming state determination means are stored. The gaming machine according to (1), wherein the specific display mode is changed to the normal display mode according to a determination result of the first gaming state determining means.

The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A game board having a game area in which the game medium can be rolled, and
A first variable winning device provided in the game area and capable of varying into a first mode in which a game medium is easily accepted and a second mode in which it is difficult to accept the game medium.
A second variable winning device provided in the game area, which can be varied into a first mode in which the game medium is easily accepted and a second mode in which the game medium is difficult to accept, and which has a specific area inside through which the game medium can pass.
A first starting area provided in the game area and into which the game medium can enter, and
A first storage means capable of storing a plurality of first start memories including information for determining whether or not to set a specific gaming state advantageous to the player on condition that the game medium has entered the first start area. When,
Under the first condition that the first start memory is stored in the first storage means, it is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information based on the first start memory, and the first start. When the memory determines the specific gaming state, the first identification information display means capable of stopping and displaying the first identification information in a specific display mode, and the first identification information display means.
A second starting area provided in the game area and into which the game medium can enter, and
A second storage means capable of storing a plurality of second start memories including information for determining whether or not to enter the specific gaming state on condition that the game medium has entered the second start area.
Under the second condition that the second start memory is stored in the second storage means, it is possible to display the variation of the second identification information based on the second start memory, and the second start. A second identification information display means capable of stopping and displaying the second identification information in a specific display mode when the memory determines the specific game state.
When the stop display mode of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific display mode, the specific game state control means for controlling the specific game state and the specific game state control means.
In the specific game state, a first round game execution means capable of executing a first round game in which the first variable winning device is changed to the first mode and the second mode, and
In the specific game state, a second round game execution means capable of executing a second round game in which the second variable winning device is changed to the first mode and the second mode, and
The stop display mode of the first identification information or the second identification information is relative to the specific display mode after the end of the specific game state, provided that the game medium has passed through the specific area in the specific game state. Special game state control means that can control the special game state that is easy to become a target,
The stop display mode of the first identification information or the second identification information is relative to the specific display mode after the end of the specific game state, provided that the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the specific game state. A non-special game state control means that can control a non-special game state that is difficult to become a target,
A notification means capable of transmitting predetermined information and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The second condition has priority over the first condition.
The second round game executing means, as the second round game, is a round game in which the game medium is relatively easy to pass through the specific area and a pass difficulty in which the game medium is relatively difficult to pass through the specific area. It is possible to perform round games and
The specific gaming state is
The first specific game state in which at least the first round game and the difficult-to-pass round game are executed, and
The first round game and the second specific game state in which the easy-to-pass round game is executed at least are included.
In the first specific game state, as the first round game, the easy-to-win round game in which the first variable winning device easily accepts the game medium is executed the first number of times, while the second specific game state is the first. As a one-round game, the easy-to-win round game is executed a second time, which is less than the first time.
In the specific game state control means, the first identification information has a relatively higher probability when the first identification information has a specific display mode than when the second identification information has a specific display mode. It is possible to control to the specific gaming state and to control to the second specific gaming state with a relatively low probability.
In the special gaming state, the notification means stores the first start memory that determines the first specific gaming state in the first storage means, or the first storage means stores the first specific gaming state. It is characterized in that a predetermined notification can be performed on the condition that the first start memory for determining the above is not stored.

In such a configuration, in the special gaming state, for example, when the first start memory that determines the first specific gaming state is stored, that is, the transition from the special gaming state to the specific gaming state is confirmed. In the case of the first specific gaming state in which it is difficult to shift to the special gaming state again even after shifting to the specific gaming state, it is notified that the first start memory corresponding to that fact is stored. The player who receives the notification can quickly detect that it is difficult to shift to the special gaming state again. The player who senses such a situation, for example, plays the game so as to give priority to the variable display and the stop display of the second identification information based on the second start memory as much as possible, so that the special game state ends immediately. It is possible to avoid the problem. On the other hand, when it is notified that the first start memory that determines the first specific game state is not stored, it is not necessary to give priority to the variable display and the stop display of the second identification information. You can interrupt with confidence. In this way, since the method of proceeding with the game changes according to the content to be notified, the monotony of the game can be eliminated.

The gaming machine according to another aspect of the present invention is
A game board having a game area in which the game medium can be rolled, and
A variable winning device provided in the game area, which can be varied into a first mode in which the game medium is easily accepted and a second mode in which the game medium is difficult to accept, and has a specific area inside through which the game medium can pass.
A first starting area provided in the game area and into which the game medium can enter, and
A first storage means capable of storing a plurality of first start memories including information for determining whether or not to set a specific gaming state advantageous to the player on condition that the game medium has entered the first start area. When,
Under the first condition that the first start memory is stored in the first storage means, it is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information based on the first start memory, and the first start. When the memory determines the specific gaming state, the first identification information display means capable of stopping and displaying the first identification information in a specific display mode, and the first identification information display means.
A second starting area provided in the game area and into which the game medium can enter, and
A second storage means capable of storing a plurality of second start memories including information for determining whether or not to enter the specific gaming state on condition that the game medium has entered the second start area.
Under the second condition that the second start memory is stored in the second storage means, it is possible to display the variation of the second identification information based on the second start memory, and the second start. A second identification information display means capable of stopping and displaying the second identification information in a specific display mode when the memory determines the specific game state.
When the stop display mode of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific display mode, the specific game state control means for controlling the specific game state and the specific game state control means.
In the specific game state, a round game in which the game medium is relatively easy to pass through the specific area and a round game in which the game medium is relatively difficult to pass through the specific area can be executed. The means of execution and
The stop display mode of the first identification information or the second identification information is relative to the specific display mode after the end of the specific game state, provided that the game medium has passed through the specific area in the specific game state. Special game state control means that can control the special game state that is easy to become a target,
The stop display mode of the first identification information or the second identification information is relative to the specific display mode after the end of the specific game state, provided that the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the specific game state. A non-special game state control means that can control a non-special game state that is difficult to become a target,
A notification means capable of transmitting predetermined information and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The second condition has priority over the first condition.
The specific gaming state is
The first specific game state in which only the difficult-to-pass round game is executed, and
Including a second specific gaming state in which the easy-to-pass round game is executed at least once.
In the first specific game state, the easy-to-win round game in which the variable winning device easily accepts the game medium is executed the first time, while in the second specific game state, the easy-to-win round game is performed from the first number of times. Executed a few times less,
In the specific game state control means, the first identification information has a relatively higher probability when the first identification information has a specific display mode than when the second identification information has a specific display mode. It is possible to control to the specific gaming state and to control to the second specific gaming state with a relatively low probability.
In the special gaming state, the notification means stores the first start memory that determines the first specific gaming state in the first storage means, or the first storage means stores the first specific gaming state. It is characterized in that a predetermined notification can be performed on the condition that the first start memory for determining the above is not stored.

Even with such a configuration, in the special gaming state, for example, when the first start memory that determines the first specific gaming state is stored, that is, the transition from the special gaming state to the specific gaming state is confirmed. In the case of the first specific gaming state in which it is difficult to shift to the special gaming state again even after shifting to the specific gaming state, it is notified that the first start memory corresponding to that fact is stored. The player who receives the notification can quickly detect that it is difficult to shift to the special gaming state again. The player who senses such a situation, for example, plays the game so as to give priority to the variable display and the stop display of the second identification information based on the second start memory as much as possible, so that the special game state ends immediately. It is possible to avoid the problem. On the other hand, when it is notified that the first start memory that determines the first specific game state is not stored, it is not necessary to give priority to the variable display and the stop display of the second identification information. You can interrupt with confidence. In this way, since the method of proceeding with the game changes according to the content to be notified, the monotony of the game can be eliminated.

A preferred embodiment of the present invention is
The notification means is characterized in that it is possible to perform the predetermined notification when the number of second start storages stored in the second storage means is less than a predetermined number.
Further, the special gaming state ends when the number of fluctuations of the first identification information and the second identification information is executed a predetermined number of times.
The non-special gaming state is characterized in that it ends when the number of fluctuations of the first identification information and the second identification information is executed less than the predetermined number of times.

According to such a configuration, when the second start memory becomes less than a predetermined number, it is notified that, for example, the first start memory that determines the first specific gaming state is stored. In other words, when there are a predetermined number or more of the second start memories and the variation display and the stop display of the second identification information are preferentially performed, the first start memory that determines such a first specific game state is determined. Is not particularly notified whether or not is stored. This gives a sense of security that the special gaming state will not be interrupted for a while if the number of second start memories exists to some extent and there is no disadvantageous situation for the player even if the above notification is not given. You can proceed with the game while playing.

As another preferred embodiment of the present invention,
When the first storage means stores the first start memory that determines the first specific gaming state and has another first start memory that is stored after the first start memory. The present invention is characterized in that the predetermined notification can be performed on the condition that the other first start memory does not determine the second specific gaming state.

According to such a configuration, for example, the first start memory that determines the first specific gaming state is stored, and further, there is another first start memory that is stored after that, and the other first start is stored. If the memory does not determine the second specific gaming state, it is notified that the first starting memory is stored to the effect that it is difficult to shift to the special gaming state by determining the first specific gaming state. In other words, even if the first start memory that it is difficult to shift to the special gaming state is stored, the other second that determines the second specific gaming state that it is easy to shift to the special gaming state after that. When the 1 start memory is stored, the first start memory to be digested first is not particularly notified. That is, although it temporarily shifts to the non-special gaming state after the end of the specific gaming state, it then shifts to the second specific gaming state based on the other first start memory, and after the end of the second specific gaming state, it shifts to the special gaming state again. When it is confirmed that it is easy to shift to, the above notification is not performed, so that it is possible to prevent excessive useless notification and to appropriately provide useful information depending on the situation. It is possible to notify, and by extension, the game can proceed with peace of mind.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of eliminating the monotony of the special gaming state.

It is external perspective view of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the gaming board in the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the game board in the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the LED unit in the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a transition diagram which shows the gaming state and the effect mode of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the specifications of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 1-round opening and closing pattern of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the displacement member operation pattern of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the big winning opening opening / closing pattern and the interval time between rounds of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows the operation timing in the super big bonus of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows the operation timing in the challenge bonus of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows the operation timing in the addition bonus of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows the operation timing in the hit pattern 4 of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows the operation timing by the hit pattern 11 and the hit pattern 5 of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the challenge success / failure lottery table of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the one game combination lottery table of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the rock-paper-scissors pattern lottery table (1) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the rock-paper-scissors pattern lottery table (2) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 3rd challenge lottery table of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the success notification round lottery table of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the surprise pattern lottery table (non-success notification round) and the surprise pattern lottery table (success notification round) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the icon pattern lottery table (4R)-(8R) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the icon change lottery table (4R white icon) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the icon change lottery table (5R white icon), (5R blue icon), (5R green icon), (5R red icon) of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the icon change lottery table (6R white icon), (6R blue icon), (6R green icon), (6R red icon) of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the icon change lottery table (7R white icon), (7R blue icon), (7R green icon), (7R red icon) of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the icon change lottery table (8R white icon), (8R blue icon), (8R green icon), (8R red icon) of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the surprise success character band lottery table of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the surprise failure character band lottery table (surprise pattern No. 2), (surprise pattern No. 3) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the surprise failure character band lottery table (surprise pattern No. 4), (surprise pattern No. 5) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the surprise failure character band lottery table (surprise pattern No. 6) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the surprise Gase character band lottery table (white icon), (blue icon) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the surprise Gase character band lottery table (green icon), (red icon) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the surprise gasse subsequent character band lottery table of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus hold continuous lottery table of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the scenario group lottery table of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the scenario type lottery table (hit pattern 4), (hit pattern 5), (hit pattern 6), (hit pattern 7) of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the scenario type lottery table (hit pattern 8), (hit pattern 9), (hit pattern 10), (hit pattern 11) of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the scenario number lottery table (Aa) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the scenario number lottery table (Ab) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the scenario number lottery table (Ac) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the scenario number lottery table (Ba) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the scenario number lottery table (Bb) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the scenario number lottery table (Bc) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the scenario number lottery table (Ca) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the scenario number lottery table (Cb) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the scenario number lottery table (Da) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Aa) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Aa) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Aa) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Aa) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Aa) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Aa) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Aa) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Ab) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Ab) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Ab) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Ab) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Ac) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Ba) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Ba) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Ba) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Ba) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Ba) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Ba) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Ba) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Bb) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Bb) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Bb) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Bc) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Ca) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Ca) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Cb) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Da) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the combo RUSH lottery table of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the roulette lottery table of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the roulette pattern lottery table of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the title determination lottery table of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the chance up lottery table of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the character type lottery table (the effect type C or H) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the character type lottery table (the effect type D or J + the upper limit value reached) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the character type lottery table (the production type D or J + the production type F of the next round), (the production type D or J + other than the production type F of the next round) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. .. Character type lottery table of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention (addition value due to production type E or F or K or L + character appearance +50), (addition value due to production type E or F or K or L + character appearance) It is a figure which shows +100). Character type lottery table of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention (addition value due to production type E or F or K or L + character appearance +150), (addition value due to production type E or F or K or L + character appearance) It is a figure which shows +200). It is a figure which shows the cow character revival lottery table of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus end screen lottery table of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the title determination lottery table of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by the main control circuit of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by the main control circuit of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer update process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the switch input process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol related switch check process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st start port switch check process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd start port switch check process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st big prize opening switch check process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prize opening switch check process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory check process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol determination process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation time management process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol display time management process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit start interval management process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting time management process before reopening of the big winning opening of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during opening of the big winning opening of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end interval management process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol game end processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by the sub-control circuit of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interrupt processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the push-button operation determination process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer update process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer update process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special mode processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit effect pattern determination process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the challenge bonus determination process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the single game production decision processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 3 times challenge effect determination process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the surprise production determination process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the icon determination process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the character band effect determination process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the addition bonus determination processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the addition bonus hold continuous determination processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the addition bonus scenario type determination processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the addition bonus initial processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the addition bonus effect determination processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production lottery determination process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the addition bonus end screen determination process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit start effect processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball counter addition processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the V prize notification processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the inter-round effect processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the super big bonus round-to-round production processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production process between challenge bonus rounds of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production process between one game round of a gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production process between 3 times challenge round of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production process between surprise rounds of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process between the addition bonus rounds of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the inter-round processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during a round of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the super big bonus round production processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production process during the challenge bonus round of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production process in one game round of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production process in 3 times challenge round of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during a surprise round of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during the addition bonus round of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the V-challenge effect processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during a round of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end effect processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the super big bonus end effect processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the challenge bonus end effect processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the addition bonus end effect processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the V challenge end effect processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end effect processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect mode change process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving mode end processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the ST mode end processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge error notification processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example in a normal time of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the time saving mode of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example in the 1st R 2Rth of the challenge bonus of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of one game of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of one game of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of one game of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of one game of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of one game of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of one game of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the 3 times challenge of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the 3 times challenge of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the 3 times challenge of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the surprise of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the surprise of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the surprise of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the V challenge of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the V challenge of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the V challenge of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the effect pattern of the addition bonus of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the addition bonus of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the addition bonus of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the addition bonus of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the addition bonus of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the grand prize opening of the gaming machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the big winning opening opening / closing pattern of the gaming machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the displacement member operation pattern of the gaming machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control processing of the gaming machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the gaming board in the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the big winning opening opening / closing pattern of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for determining the hit symbol of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the hit pattern selection table of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the start storage area in the sub-control circuit of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol display time management process of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit pattern selection process of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit start interval management process of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting time management process before reopening of the big winning opening of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during opening of the big winning opening of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end interval management process of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol game end processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the switch input process of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the gate switch check process of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect mode number counter update process of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the start memory number update process of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the display mode change process of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit start effect processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process before opening the big prize opening of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the time of opening the big prize opening of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end effect processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect mode control process of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the V prize notification processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the game flow of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

1 and 2 are an external perspective view and a front view of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a front view of a gaming board used in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the game board. FIG. 5 is a front view of the LED unit provided on the game board. The gaming machine of the present embodiment is applied to a pachinko gaming machine as an example.

[Structure of gaming machine]
First, an overview of the pachinko gaming machine as a gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 5.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment has a main body frame base to which a game board 1 (see FIG. 3) having a game area in which a game ball can roll and flow is detachably provided. A main body frame 2 provided with a plate 2a (also referred to as a main body frame base) and a front frame base plate 3a (also referred to as a front frame base) provided with an opening 3h (hereinafter referred to as a front frame opening) in which the game board 1 can be visually recognized. A front frame 3 rotatably supported by the main body frame 2 in front of the main body frame 2 (on the player side), and a liquid crystal display device 4 for performing a predetermined effect display (see FIG. 3). Is provided with a detachable rear frame base plate (not shown), and a rear frame (not shown) rotatably supported by the main body frame 2 behind the main body frame 2 (on the anti-player side). I have.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is attached to an island facility (not shown) via an outer frame 6. The main body frame 2 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 6 via the main body frame hinge 2b. Note that FIG. 1 shows a state in which the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2 and the main body frame 2 is closed with respect to the outer frame 6. In such a state, the rear frame is , Because it is housed in the outer frame 6, it is not shown.

The table frame 3 has a table frame base plate 3a and various table frame constituent members provided in the table frame base plate 3a. The table frame constituent members include a protective glass 7, a dish unit 8, an operation unit 9, speakers 10a to 10b, various decorative members (top decoration 14, right side decorative member 15, left side decorative member 16) and the like. The table frame constituent members are not limited to these, and include all the members constituting the table frame 3. Further, in the plate unit 8, each cover member (upper plate upper cover 8a, lower plate cover 8b, etc.) is attached to the front frame base plate 3a via a locking structure described later.

In the table frame 3, a protective glass 7 having transparency is provided in the above-mentioned table frame opening 3h. The protective glass 7 is detachably attached to the front frame opening 3h (window portion) provided in the front frame base plate 3a provided in the front frame 3 from the back surface side (rear side) of the front frame base plate 3a. The table frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 2 so as to face the surface (front surface) side of the game board 1 and cover the surface (front surface) side thereof. In the upper part of the table frame 3, speakers 10a and 10b for producing a sound effect are provided on both upper sides of the table frame opening 3h.

Further, on the surface (front surface) of the front frame 3, a decorative member for improving the aesthetic appearance is provided so as to surround the front frame opening 3h. As an example of the decorative member, a top decoration 14 incorporating a patrol lamp accessory described later is provided on the upper side of the front frame opening 3h, and a light emitting display mode is provided on the left and right sides of the front frame opening 3h. A right side decorative member 15 (for example, an upper right lens 15a, a right middle lens 15b, a right panel cover 15c, etc.) and a left side decorative member 16 (for example, a left outer lens 16a, etc.) that can be changed are provided.

Inside the right side decorative member 15 and the left side decorative member 16, light emitting means (for example, a lamp, LED 27, etc.) controlled by a sub-control circuit 70 (see FIG. 6) described later is provided (see FIG. 6). .. The light emitted from the lamp / LED 27 passes through the right side decorative member 15 and the left side decorative member 16, and is perceived by the right side decorative member 15 and the left side decorative member 16 as synchrotron radiation or diffused light having an excellent appearance. As a result, it is possible to change the display mode by light, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, on the surface (front surface) of the table frame 3, a dish unit 8 is provided below the table frame opening 3h of the table frame base plate 3a. The plate unit 8 includes an upper plate 17 for storing rental balls and prize balls, and a lower plate 18 provided below the upper plate 17 and capable of storing, for example, game balls overflowing when the upper plate 17 is full. Is provided.

The lower plate 18 includes a lower plate main body 18p capable of storing game balls, and a lower plate cover 8b attached so as to cover the upper portion of the lower plate main body 18p. On the other hand, the upper plate 17 includes an upper plate main body 17p capable of storing game balls, and an upper plate upper cover 8a detachably attached to the front frame base plate 3a so as to cover the upper portion of the upper plate main body 17p. It is provided with an upper plate decorative member for improving the aesthetic appearance of the upper plate 17. As an example of the upper plate decorative member, the upper plate main body 17p is provided with an upper plate left decoration 17a, an upper plate front decoration 17c, and the like so as to surround the upper plate upper cover 8a. Has a shape bent from the left side of the upper plate upper cover 8a to the lower plate 18 from the middle toward the right side via the front side.

The front frame base plate 3a has a payout port 20 for paying out the game balls to the upper plate 17, and a discharge port for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 to the back side of the front plate base plate 3a (not shown). ) And a supply port 21 for supplying the game ball discharged from the discharge port to the lower plate 18. On the back side of the front frame base plate 3a, there is a ball passage for a game ball to be discharged from the payout device 83 (see FIG. 6), and a ball passage cover (illustrated) for forming a ball passage by communicating the discharge port and the supply port 21. (Omitted) is provided. When the game ball is paid out from the payout device 83, the game ball is sent to the upper plate 17 through the payout port 20, while the upper plate 17 is so large that the game ball stays in the vicinity of the payout port 20 although the game ball is paid out. When the ball removal button 22 provided on the upper plate upper cover 8a is pressed, the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 are moved from the discharge port through the ball passage and the supply port 21 to the lower plate. It is sent to 18.

In the present embodiment, the plating member is used for the decoration of the front surface of the gaming machine, and the plating member 17b is also used for the upper plate front decoration 17c that decorates the front surface portion of the upper plate 17. By using the plated member 17b, the decorative effect of the appearance design of the gaming machine is enhanced to improve the interest of the player.

On the upper plate cover 8a, a ball lending button 23 for receiving a ball lending, a return button 24 for returning a card from a card unit 84 (see FIG. 6) for lending a game ball (not shown), and the like, as well as predetermined An operation unit 9 is provided for changing the display mode of various effects by the player operating (pressing operation, rotating operation) during the game. The arrangement configuration (position, orientation) of the operation unit 9 is not particularly limited, but as an example in the drawing, the push operation button 9A is projected vertically from the upper plate upper cover 8a, and the outer circumference of the push operation button 9A is projected. The operation unit 9 configured to arrange the jog dial 9B is shown in.

Regarding the front frame 3, the portion of the surface (front surface) on the left side (that is, the side rotatably supported by the main body frame 2) from the player side is illegal, for example, a piano wire. It is possible to envision a situation in which a member is invaded and a fraudulent act is performed by the fraudulent member with respect to various configurations constructed on the back surface of the front frame 3 in the vicinity of the back side of the portion.

Therefore, in order to prevent such fraudulent activity, a cover member with a wiring holding function (not shown) is provided on the back surface of the front frame 3 at a portion where the above-mentioned fraudulent member invades. The cover member with a wiring holding function includes a wiring holding portion for holding wiring such as a harness, a substrate covering portion for covering a substrate (not shown) constructed on the back surface of the front frame 3, and an illegal member such as a piano wire. It is configured by integrating with the fraud prevention unit that prevents intrusion. According to this, since it is possible to realize a single cover member with a wiring holding function having three functions of wiring holding, substrate covering, and fraud prevention, it is necessary to separately prepare a member for each of these functions. The cost can be reduced accordingly.

The main body frame 2 has a main body frame base plate 2a and various main body frame constituent members provided in the main body frame base plate 2a. The main body frame constituent members include a launching device 26, a speaker 10c, various control boards / relay boards, and the like. The main body frame constituent members are not limited to these, and all the members constituting the main body frame 2 are included.

In the main body frame 2, a main body frame opening (not shown) having substantially the same shape as the front frame opening 3h is provided at a predetermined position of the main body frame base plate 2a facing the front frame opening 3h. At the same time, on the surface (front surface) of the main body frame base plate 2a, a launching device 26 for launching a game ball is provided on the lower right side of the main body frame opening.

The launching device 26 includes a panel body 26a for arranging the launching device 26 on the lower right side of the surface of the main body frame base plate 2a, a launching handle 26b arranged on the front side of the panel body 26a, and a panel body 26a. It is arranged on the lower right side of the surface of the main body frame base plate 2a facing the back side of the body frame, and is provided with a launch drive device (not shown) for launching a game ball.

A notch 3p for exposing the launching device 26 (panel body 26a, launching handle 26b) to the player side is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 3. When the table frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2, the launching device 26 (panel body 26a, launching handle 26b) is exposed through the notch 3p of the table frame 3 and is adjacent to the dish unit 8 described above. Positioned. Such a launching device 26 (panel body 26a, launching handle 26b) and the dish unit 8 exhibit an aesthetic appearance as if they were continuously integrated with each other.

The launch handle 26b is provided in a support portion (not shown), a handle gup 26d that is rotatably attached to the support portion and can rotate clockwise and counterclockwise, and a game. It is arranged so as to cover the launch stop switch (not shown) for stopping the launch of the ball, the launch stop button 26e (also referred to as an operation member) for turning the launch stop switch ON / OFF, and the opening of the handle grip 26d. It is equipped with a handle cap 26h.

When the handle grip 26d of the launch handle 26b is rotated in the clockwise direction, the driving force of the launching drive device is increased or decreased according to the amount of rotation (rotation angle), and the driving force at that time is stored in the upper plate 17. The game ball being played is launched toward the game area 1p (see FIG. 3) of the game board 1. At this time, when the launch stop button 26e is operated, the launch drive device is stopped and controlled, whereby the launch of the game ball can be stopped.

In the present embodiment, the payout / launch control circuit 82 (see FIG. 6) connected to the main control circuit 60 (see FIG. 6) controls the operation of the launch stop switch and the launch handle 26b. Inside the launching device 26, a spring member (not shown) for elastically urging the handle grip 26d in the counterclockwise direction is provided, and the player can make the spring member elastic. The game ball is launched by rotating the handle grip 26d in the clockwise direction.

When the player interrupts the game and releases the handle grip 26d, the handle grip 26d is returned to the starting position by the elasticity of the spring member. At this time, the launch of the game ball is stopped by pressing the launch stop button 26e by the protrusion (not shown) of the handle grip 26d.

Here, as a method of increasing or decreasing the firing intensity of the game ball, the resistance value of the firing volume (not shown) is changed according to the rotation amount (rotation angle) of the handle grip 26d of the firing handle 26b, and the firing solenoid (not shown). It is known that the firing intensity of the game ball is increased or decreased by changing the electric power supplied to (omitted). However, in the launching device 26 of the present embodiment, the rotation operation of the handle grip 26d of the launching handle 26b is performed. A firing spring (not shown) interlocking with the firing spring (not shown) and a gear mechanism (not shown) for winding (tightening) the firing spring are provided. In the launching device 26, the amount of rotation of the winding gear mechanism is adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle grip 26d of the launching handle 26b, and the degree of winding (tightening) of the launching spring is increased or decreased to increase or decrease the degree of winding (tightening) of the launching spring. The firing intensity of is changed to increase or decrease.

The speaker 10c is provided in the center of the lower part of the main body frame 2 so as to produce a sound effect. The sound emitted from the speaker 10c is emitted through the speaker cover 10k provided in the portion of the plate unit 8 of the front frame 3 (specifically, the portion between the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 18). It has become.

The game board 1 is arranged in front of the rear frame (not shown) so as to be located behind the protective glass 7, and has a game area 1p (see FIG. 3) in which the launched game ball can roll and flow down. doing. The game board 1 is made of a material having translucency (for example, polycarbonate or the like), but may be formed of a material having no translucency such as plywood or the like.

As shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, the game board 1 includes a guide rail 30, a stage 31, a first starting port 32, a second starting port 33, a blade member 34 for opening and closing the second starting port 33, and a passing gate 35. The first big winning opening 36, the second big winning opening 37, the first big winning opening shutter 36A that opens and closes the first big winning opening 36, the second big winning opening shutter 37A that opens and closes the second big winning opening 37, the second Specific area 38A and non-specific area 38B located on the lower side of the large winning opening 37, displacement member 39 for opening and closing the specific area 38A, a plurality of general winning openings 40, out opening 41, upper movable effect member 42A, lower movable effect It includes a member 42B, a cover member 43, a liquid crystal display device 4, and an LED unit 5. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first starting port 32, the second starting port 33, the passing gate 35, the first large winning opening 36, the second large winning opening 37, the specific area 38A, and the general winning opening 40 The winning area is formed by. Note that FIG. 3 shows a state in which the cover member 43 is removed.

The guide rail 30 is composed of an outer rail 30A and an inner rail 30B. The outer rail 30A is provided on the main body frame 2 and is arranged so as to surround the entire game area 1p. The inner rail 30B is for guiding the game ball to the upper part of the game board 1 together with the outer rail, and is arranged inside the outer rail on the left side of the game board 1. The game board 1 is attached to the main body frame 2 from the back side thereof.

The stage 31 distributes the flowing region of the game ball in the game region 1p, and is arranged along the lower edge portion of the liquid crystal display device 4.

The game ball launched by the launching device 26 flows down toward the lower side of the game board 1 while changing its traveling direction due to a collision with a game nail (not shown) driven into the game board 1 or a stage 31 or the like. In this process, the game ball is collected by winning any of the first starting opening 32, the second starting opening 33, the first big winning opening 36, the second big winning opening 37, and the general winning opening 40, and also If the prize is not won, or if the prize is not won after passing through the passing gate 35, the prize is collected by being discharged from the out port 41.

The winning means that the game ball passes through the winning area or enters the winning area. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the winning area or enters the winning area, a favorable situation for the player (for example, opening of the second starting port 33, a symbol lottery, a prize ball, etc., which will be described later) is given. Means to do. At this time, the passage of the winning area by the game ball means a mere passage, and the entry of the winning area by the game ball means that the game ball is collected separately from the out opening 41. Since the winning is detected when the game ball passes by the sensor switch, passing and entering the ball are substantially synonymous. Therefore, both passing the game ball to the winning area and winning the ball lead to winning, so in the following explanation, unless otherwise specified, "winning" is unified. Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area 38A, it may be referred to as "V winning".

When the rotation angle of the launch handle 26b is relatively small, the launching force applied to the game ball is generally small, so that the game ball mainly flows down the left side of the stage 31. Further, when the rotation angle of the launch handle 26b is relatively large, the launching force given to the game ball is generally large, so that the game ball mainly flows down the right side of the stage 31. In general, the method of hitting the game ball to the left side of the stage 31 is called "left-handed", and the method of hitting the game ball to the right side of the stage 31 is called "right-handed".

The first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33 give an opportunity for a lottery on the condition that the game ball wins (enters), and displays the result of the lottery in the display area 4A of the LED unit 5 or the liquid crystal display device 4. It gives an opportunity to make it happen. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33 realize the first starting area and the second starting area.

The first starting port 32 is provided at a substantially lower position in the center of the game board 1. When a game ball wins in the first starting port 32, a preset number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate 18 through the payout port 20 or the supply port 21. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 32 is detected by the first starting port switch 320 (see FIG. 6).

The second starting port 33 is provided directly below the first starting port 32. When a game ball wins in the second starting port 33, a preset number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate 18 via the payout port 20 or the supply port 21. The difficulty of winning the second starting port 33 is determined by the blade member 34 as an ordinary electric accessory. The winning of the game ball to the second starting port 33 is detected by the second starting port switch 330 (see FIG. 6).

The blade member 34 opens and closes so as to form a forward leaning posture and a backward posture in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and is in an open state that enables the game ball to win a prize in the second starting port 33 and a second. It is a so-called ordinary electric accessory that switches between a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to win a prize in the starting port 33. The blade member 34 is driven by the blade member solenoid 340 (see FIG. 6).

The ordinary electric accessory is not limited to the one that operates the blade member 34 so as to open and close in the front-rear direction. For example, a so-called electric tulip type that expands the starting port by rotating the game board 1 in the left-right direction. It may be a tongue-shaped member or a tongue-shaped member that opens and closes the starting port by horizontally moving in the front-rear direction of the game board 1.

The passage gate 35 provides an opportunity to open the second starting port 33. The winning of the game ball to the passing gate 35 is detected by the passing gate switch 350 (see FIG. 6). Even if a game ball wins a prize at the passing gate 35, no prize ball is generated.

The first big winning opening 36 and the second big winning opening 37 are opened in the hit game state (big hit game state, small hit game state) which is a game state advantageous to the player. The first large winning opening 36 is provided on the substantially right side of the first starting opening 32 and directly below the passing gate 35. The second large winning opening 37 is provided on the substantially right side of the second starting opening 33 and directly below the first large winning opening 36. The positions where the first prize opening 36 and the second prize opening 37 are arranged are not limited to the above-mentioned positions, and can be appropriately changed according to the specifications of the gaming machine and the like.

The first large winning opening 36 is formed in the game board 1 as an opening having a relatively large horizontal dimension so that a plurality of game balls can win at the same time. A first large winning opening shutter 36A for opening and closing the first large winning opening 36 is provided in the vicinity of the first large winning opening 36. The winning of the game ball into the first winning opening 36 is detected by the first winning opening count switch 360 (see FIG. 6).

The second large winning opening 37 is formed in a part of the upper end surface of the cover member 43 as an opening having a relatively small vertical and horizontal dimensions so that the game balls can be won one by one. A second large winning opening shutter 37A for opening and closing the second large winning opening 37 is provided in the vicinity of the second large winning opening 37. The winning of the game ball into the second winning opening 37 is detected by the second winning opening count switch 370 (see FIG. 6).

The first large winning opening shutter 36A switches the first large winning opening 36 to an open state or a closed state by opening and closing the game board 1 so as to form a forward leaning posture and a backward posture in the front-rear direction. It is arranged so as to cover the first large winning opening 36 in the closed state. That is, the first special winning opening shutter 36A changes into an open state in which the game ball can be won in the first large winning opening 36 and a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. It is driven by the large winning opening shutter solenoid 360A (see FIG. 6).

The second large winning opening shutter 37A switches the second large winning opening 37 to an open state or a closed state by horizontally moving in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and the second large winning opening 37 is moved in the closed state. It is arranged so as to cover it. That is, the second special winning opening shutter 37A changes into an open state in which the game ball can be won in the second special winning opening 37 and a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. It is driven by the large winning opening shutter solenoid 370A (see FIG. 6).

The specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B are areas through which the game ball winning the second large winning opening 37 can pass thereafter, and are covered with the cover member 43. The ball passage of the game ball from the second special winning opening 37 to the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B is formed by a partition wall (not shown) provided on the inner surface of the cover member 43. The game ball that has won the second large winning opening 37 passes through either the specific area 38A or the non-specific area 38B, and then is guided to the back of the game board 1 and collected. The second major winning opening count switch 370 is arranged at a position in the middle of the ball passage from the second winning opening 37 to the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B. A specific area switch 380A is arranged in the specific area 38A, and the V winning of the game ball in the specific area 38A is detected by the specific area switch 380A. A non-specific area switch 380B is arranged in the non-specific area 38B, and the passage of the game ball through the non-specific area 38B is detected by the non-specific area switch 380B. Further, a displacement member 39 for opening and closing the specific region 38A is provided in the vicinity of the specific region 38A.

The displacement member 39 switches the specific area 38A between the open state and the closed state by horizontally moving in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and is positioned so as to cover the specific area 38A in the closed state. That is, the displacement member 39 changes into an open state (first state) in which the V-winning of the game ball into the specific region 38A is easy, and a closed state (second state) in which V-winning is impossible or difficult. It is driven by the displacement member solenoid 390 (see FIG. 6). When the specific area 38A is in the closed state, the game ball for which V winning is impossible will pass through the non-specific area 38B.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first large winning opening 36, the first large winning opening shutter 36A, the first large winning opening shutter solenoid 360A, and the first large winning opening count switch 360 are the first variable winning devices. It has been realized. The second large winning opening 37, the second large winning opening shutter 37A, the second large winning opening shutter solenoid 370A, and the second large winning opening count switch 370 realize the second variable winning device.

One or more general winning openings 40 are provided at appropriate positions on the game board 1. When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 40, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out by the payout device 83 (see FIG. 6), although the lottery is not performed. The winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 40 is detected by the general winning opening switches 400A and 400B.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, as the normal gaming state controlled by the main control circuit 60 described later, the non-probability / non-time saving gaming state and the winning probability of the special symbol lottery are non-probability / non-probability. There are a probabilistic game state (special game state) in which the probability is higher than the non-time-saving game state and a time-saving game state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is higher than the non-probability / non-time-saving game state. If the lottery is won, the game shifts to the jackpot game state (specific game state).

In the time-saving game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is high, so that the support of the blade member 34 as a normal electric pitcher facilitates the winning of the second starting port 33. This state is a so-called "electric support" state, in which the reserved balls of the special symbol game described later can be easily accumulated, and the loss of the game balls can be suppressed by winning the second starting port 33. Specifically, the time-saving game state is a state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is relatively high (time-saving game state 1), and a state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol or the normal symbol is relatively short (time-saving game state 2). ), It means at least one of the states in which the opening time of the blade member 34 as an ordinary electric accessory is relatively long (time saving game state 3). For example, the time-saving game state includes a state in which the time-saving game state 1, the time-saving game state 2, and the time-saving game state 3 proceed simultaneously in any combination. In such a time-saving game state, the possibility of shifting to the big hit game state is improved.

After the end of the jackpot gaming state in which the V prize in the specific area 38A is successfully completed in the jackpot gaming state, the game always shifts to the probabilistic / time-saving gaming state (the probabilistic-changing gaming state and the normal gaming state which is the time-saving gaming state), and is not. It is designed not to shift to the probabilistic / non-time saving game state (the non-probability change game state and the non-time saving game state, which is the normal game state). On the other hand, if the jackpot gaming state ends with the non-V winning without succeeding in V winning in the specific area 38A, the normal gaming state which is the non-probability changing gaming state and the time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. It is supposed to move to.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the end of the jackpot game state, for example, 190 times of special symbol lottery (190 times of change display or stop display of special symbols) is performed in the probability change / time saving game state, and the game is not displayed. It is designed to shift to a probabilistic / non-time saving game state. Furthermore, after the end of the big hit game state, for example, 100 times or 4 times of special symbol lottery (100 times or 4 times of change display or stop display of special symbol) was performed in the non-probability change / time saving game state. , It is designed to shift to a non-probability / non-time saving game state. After the end of the big hit game state, the probability change / time saving game state may be maintained until the next big hit game state is entered. In the following description, the probabilistic gaming state that ends by performing a predetermined number of special symbol lottery as in the present embodiment is also described as an ST (Specia1 Time) gaming state.

The upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B are in a state of being retracted behind the game board 1 when not operating, and appear in front of the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 when performing a specific effect. It is located in. The upper movable effect member 42A appears in front of the central portion of the display area 4A when a specific effect is performed, and performs a rotational operation and light emission. The lower movable effect member 42B appears in front of the lower part of the display area 4A when a specific effect is performed, and emits light.

The cover member 43 is provided to form the second special winning opening 37, and is attached below the first large winning opening 36. The cover member 43 forms a second large winning opening 37 by opening a part of the upper end surface thereof. With the cover member 43 attached to the game board 1, the displacement member 39 is located in the opening corresponding to the second prize opening 37. Further, a guide piece 43a for guiding the game ball toward the second special winning opening 37 is provided on the front side edge portion of the upper end surface of the cover member 43. Inside the cover member 43, a ball passage is formed from the opening corresponding to the second special winning opening 37 to the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B via the second special winning opening count switch 370. Such a cover member 43 is arranged so as to cover the second special winning opening count switch 370, the specific area switch 380A, and the non-specific area switch 380B.

The LED unit 5 notifies the player of each game state and lottery result, and as shown in FIG. 5, the normal symbol display unit 51, the ordinary symbol hold display unit 52, the first special symbol display unit 53, and the first 2. It has a special symbol display unit 54, a first special symbol reservation display unit 55, a second special symbol reservation display unit 56, and a round display unit 59. Although not shown in particular, the lamps and LEDs 27 (see FIG. 6) arranged on the game board 1 and the like include those corresponding to the character appearance notification lamps, and the transition to the jackpot game state is confirmed. Lights (or blinks) when a special character (hereinafter, also referred to as "SP character") appears in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 during a part of the special symbol change in the game state or in the big hit game state. It has become like.

The ordinary symbol display unit 51 drives the blade member 34 as an ordinary electric accessory when the game ball wins a prize in the passing gate 35, and determines whether or not to open the second starting port 33. The lottery result for "game" is displayed. The normal symbol display unit 51 includes one LED lamp 511. The LED lamp 511 can be lit in red and blue, for example, and is lit in red when the LED lamp is won in the normal symbol game, while it is lit in blue when the LED lamp is lost in the normal symbol game. When the LED lamp 511 of the normal symbol display unit 51 is lit, for example, in red, the blade member 34 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern to allow the game ball to win the second starting port 33. It should be noted that the lighting mode according to the winning and losing of the normal symbol game may be another lighting mode. For example, in the case of winning, the lighting state or the blinking state is set, while in the case of losing, the lighting mode is turned off. You may do it.

In the normal symbol hold display unit 52, a new game ball wins a prize in the passing gate 35 while the normal symbol display unit 51 is performing variable display by turning on or off the four LED lamps 521, 522, 523, 524. If this is the case, the number of times that the variation display of the normal symbol that is reserved for the next and subsequent variation display by the normal symbol display unit 51 can be performed is displayed. The four LED lamps 521, 522, 523, 524 are located on the left side of the normal symbol display unit 51, and are arranged side by side in a row together with the LED lamps 511. In the hold display by the LED lamps 521, 522, 523, 524, for example, when the number of holds is "1", the LED lamp 521 is turned on and the LED lamps 522, 523, 524 are turned off. When the number of holds is "2", the LED lamps 521 and 522 are turned on and the LED lamps 523 and 524 are turned off. When the number of holds is "3", the LED lamps 521, 522, 523 are turned on and the LED lamp 524 is turned off. When the number of holdings is "4", all of the LED lamps 521, 522, 523, 524 are lit.

The first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 show the result of a winning lottery for the "special symbol game", and include, for example, a 7-segment LED. The first special symbol display unit 53 performs variable display of a symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “first special symbol”) that serves as identification information when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 32, and the first The result of the winning lottery based on the winning of the starting port 32 is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol related to the first special symbol. The second special symbol display unit 54 performs variable display of a symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “second special symbol”) that serves as identification information when the game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 33, and the second special symbol display unit 54. The result of the winning lottery based on the winning of the starting port 33 is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol related to the second special symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 realize the identification information display means.

The variation display of the symbol by the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is performed by, for example, using a 7-segment LED or the like and repeatedly turning on / off each segment individually. The result of the winning lottery is displayed by a segment pattern (symbol) formed by turning on / off each segment of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54. At this time, the plurality of hit symbols displayed by the first special symbol and the plurality of hit symbols displayed by the second special symbol have different modes. The winning symbol of the first special symbol is a symbol that triggers the transition to the jackpot gaming state, and is referred to as "probability variation 1" or "probability variation 2" indicating that the transition to the probabilistic gaming state can be achieved after the end of the jackpot gaming state. There are nominal jackpot symbols and nominal jackpot symbols such as "time reduction 1" and "time reduction 2" indicating that the game shifts to the non-probable and time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (see FIG. 8). The winning symbol of the second special symbol is a symbol that triggers the transition to the jackpot gaming state, and is referred to as "probability variation 1" to "probability variation 10" indicating that the transition to the probabilistic gaming state can be achieved after the end of the jackpot gaming state. There is a nominal big hit symbol and a nominal small hit symbol such as "small hit" that triggers the transition to the so-called small hit game state (see FIG. 8). That is, the hit symbol of the first special symbol does not have a small hit symbol that triggers the transition to the small hit game state, and the hit symbol of the second special symbol shifts to the time-saving gaming state after the end of the big hit game state. There is no jackpot symbol indicating. The first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 are not limited to the 7-segment LED and the like, and may be, for example, a combination of lighting and extinguishing of two or more LED lamps.

The first special symbol holding display unit 55 includes four LED lamps 551,552,553,554, and the first special symbol display unit 53 is turned on or off by turning on or off these LED lamps 551,552,553,554. Or, for the variation display of the first special symbol for the next and subsequent special symbol games when a new game ball is won in the first start port 32 while the second special symbol display unit 54 is displaying the variation of the symbol for the special symbol game. Displays the number of times (the number of holds) that the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 held in can be executed (the number of holds). The second special symbol holding display unit 56 includes four LED lamps 561, 562, 563, 564, and the first special symbol display unit 53 is turned on or off by turning on or off these LED lamps 561, 562, 563, 564. Alternatively, when the second special symbol display unit 54 wins a new game ball in the second starting port 33 during the variable display of the symbol for the special symbol game, it is reserved for the variable display of the symbol for the next and subsequent special symbol games. The number of times the variable display of the second special symbol display unit 54 can be executed (number of holds) is displayed. Each of the first special symbol reservation display unit 55 and the second special symbol reservation display unit 56 is arranged side by side in the vertical direction, and is located above the normal symbol reservation display unit 52. The display mode of the number of holds on the first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56 is the same as the display mode of the number of holds on the normal symbol hold display unit 52.

The first special symbol holding display unit 55 and the second special symbol holding display unit 56 move to the first starting port 32 when the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is variable-displaying. The game ball is detected by the first start port switch 320 (see FIG. 6) provided in the ball passage leading to the ball passage or the second start port switch 330 (see FIG. 6) provided in the ball passage leading to the second start port 33. If so, the execution (start) of the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is suspended. When the symbol displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display 54 is stopped and displayed, the reserved first special symbol display 53 or the second special symbol display 54 is displayed. The variable display of the symbol is started.

Here, an upper limit is set for the number of times that the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is suspended. In the present embodiment, the first start port 32 and the first start port 32 and the first are set. 2. The maximum number of pending variable displays of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 due to the winning of the game ball to the starting port 33 is four. When the first special symbol game for the first special symbol display unit 53 is held four times, the information of the first special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol display unit 53 is stored in the main RAM 63 (FIG. The information of the first special symbol game for four times stored and held as the start storage (start storage information) in the first special symbol start storage area (0) of 6) is the first special symbol start storage area (see 6). 1) -It is stored as a start memory in the first special symbol start storage area (4). Similarly, when the second special symbol game is held for four times, the information of the second special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63 (the second special symbol start storage area ( The information of the second special symbol game for four times stored and held as the start memory in 0) is stored as the start memory in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). Be remembered. Therefore, the total number of winnings reserved for both the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, that is, the first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33 is eight.

In addition, in place of the first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56, or in addition to the first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56, the liquid crystal display device 4 , The hold of winning a prize at the first starting port 32 and the holding of winning a prize at the second starting port 33 may be displayed.

The round display unit 59 lights up while the hit symbol is stopped, and indicates the number of rounds as the number of times related to the round game described later when the big hit game state is executed. The round display unit 59 includes three LED lamps 591,592,593, and indicates the number of rounds when the jackpot game state is executed by turning on or off these LED lamps 591,592,593. In the present embodiment, for example, when the number of rounds is 16 (hereinafter, may be referred to as "16R"), the LED lamp 591 is turned on and the LED lamps 592 and 593 are turned off. When the number of rounds is 12 (hereinafter, may be referred to as "12R"), the LED lamp 592 is turned on and the LED lamps 591 and 593 are turned off. When the number of rounds is 11 (hereinafter, may be referred to as "11R"), the LED lamp 593 is turned on and the LED lamps 591 and 592 are turned off. The number of rounds (number of times) may mean the entire number of times the round game (round game) is executed, or may mean the number of orders indicating the order in which the round games are sequentially executed. Regarding the number of rounds, when the former is meant, for example, "16 rounds" or "16R", "12 rounds" or "12R", etc., and when the latter is meant, for example, "16th round", "12Rth", etc. Etc. Further, in the following description, the "round game" may be simply referred to as a "round".

As shown in FIG. 3, the liquid crystal display device 4 is arranged behind the game board 1, and a display area 4A is arranged substantially in the center thereof so that the player can see it. In addition to the result of the winning lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the mouth 32 and the second starting port 33, various images related to the game, such as an identification symbol for production, a production image in the normal game state, and a production during the big hit game state. It displays an image, a production image for demo display, and the like. That is, the liquid crystal display device 4 is adapted to display the identification information in a variable manner on condition that the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 32 or the second starting port 33. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 4 constitutes a display means, and the liquid crystal display device 4, the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c, and the lamp / LED 27 form the effect executing means. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, these effect executing means are also used as notification means.

[Electrical configuration of gaming machines]
Next, the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 6, the “switch” is abbreviated as “SW” and the “solenoid” is abbreviated as “SOL”.

As shown in FIG. 6, the pachinko gaming machine includes a main control circuit 60 as a main control means for controlling the game and a sub-control circuit 70 as a sub-control means for controlling the effect according to the progress of the game. Have.

The main control circuit 60 includes a main CPU 61, a main ROM 62 as a read-only memory, a main RAM 63 as a read / write memory, an initial reset circuit 64, an I / O port 65, a command output port 66 as a command transmission means, and a backup capacitor 67. It has. The main control circuit 60 is connected to various devices (devices, switches, etc.) including the LED unit 5.

The main CPU 61 is connected to the main ROM 62 and the main RAM 63, and has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 62. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the main CPU 61 is a specific game state transition determination means (first specific game state transition determination means and second specific game state transition determination means), specific game state control means, special game state control means. , And round game execution means (first round game execution means and second round game execution means) are realized.

A first start port switch 320 arranged behind the first start port 32 is connected to the main control circuit 60. When the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 320, a winning lottery is performed.

A second start port switch 330 arranged behind the second start port 33 is connected to the main control circuit 60. When the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 330, a winning lottery is performed.

These first start port switch 320 and second start port switch 330 are regarded as winning when it is detected that a game ball has entered the first start port 32 and the second start port 33, and a predetermined detection signal is transmitted. It is supplied to the main control circuit 60.

A passing gate switch 350 arranged behind the passing gate 35 is connected to the main control circuit 60. When a game ball is detected by the passing gate switch 350, it is assumed that the game ball has won a prize in the passing gate 35, and a normal symbol lottery is performed. The result of this ordinary symbol lottery is displayed on the ordinary symbol display unit 51. When a specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the ordinary symbol display unit 51, an effect image for the player to grasp that the result of the ordinary symbol lottery is won is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. You may do so.

The passing gate switch 350 supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60, assuming that it has won a prize when it detects that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 35. As a result, the passing gate switch 350 provides an opportunity to open the second starting port 33.

The general winning opening left switch 400A and the general winning opening right switch 400B arranged behind the general winning opening 40 located on the left and right sides of the game board 1 are connected to the main control circuit 60. When a game ball is detected by the general winning opening left switch 400A and the general winning opening right switch 400B, a preset number of winning balls are performed by the payout device 83.

The first special winning opening count switch 360 arranged behind the first special winning opening 36 is connected to the main control circuit 60. The first large winning opening count switch 360 is for counting the number of winnings of the game ball to the first large winning opening 36. When the winning of the game ball is detected by the first large winning opening count switch 360, the payout device 83 uses a preset number of game balls as prize balls and passes through the payout port 20 or the supply port 21 to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate. Pay out to the plate 18.

The second major winning opening count switch 370 arranged behind the second winning opening 37 is connected to the main control circuit 60. The second major winning opening count switch 370 is for counting the number of winnings of the game ball to the second major winning opening 37. When the winning of the game ball is detected by the second large winning opening count switch 370, the payout device 83 uses a preset number of game balls as prize balls and passes through the payout port 20 or the supply port 21 to the upper plate 17. Alternatively, pay out to the lower plate 18.

These 1st big winning opening count switch 360 and 2nd big winning opening count switch 370 mainly control a predetermined detection signal when the game ball passes through the 1st big winning opening 36 and the 2nd big winning opening 37. Supply to circuit 60.

A specific area switch 380A and a non-specific area switch 380B arranged in the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B are connected to the main control circuit 60. The specific area switch 380A supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60, assuming that a V prize is won when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the specific area 38A in the big hit game state. The non-specific area switch 380B supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60 as a non-V prize when it detects that the game ball has passed through the non-specific area 38B in the big hit game state.

The main control circuit 60 includes a first large winning opening shutter solenoid 360A for driving the first large winning opening shutter 36A that opens and closes the first special winning opening 36, and a second large winning opening shutter that opens and closes the second special winning opening 37. It exclusively controls the second large winning opening shutter solenoid 370A that drives 37A. As a result, the first large winning opening shutter 36A is driven so as to change between an open state in which the game ball can be won in the first large winning opening 36 and a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. In the situation where the first prize opening 36 is at least closed, the second prize opening shutter 37A is in an open state in which the game ball can be won in the second prize opening 37, and the game ball is won. Is driven to change into an impossible or difficult closed state. The opening drive of the first special winning opening 36 and the second special winning opening 37 by the first special winning opening shutter 36A and the second special winning opening shutter 37A is the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display. This is performed when the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the part 54 and is shifted to the jackpot game state.

The main control circuit 60 controls the blade member solenoid 340 that opens and closes the blade member 34. As a result, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode on the normal symbol display unit 51, the blade member 34 is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, and the game ball is inserted into the second starting port 33. It will be easier.

For example, in the normal symbol game of the present embodiment, the hit probability of the normal symbol in the game state other than the time-saving game state (“non-probability variation / non-time-saving game state” in the present embodiment) is 0/257, and the blade member 34. Will not be released. On the other hand, the hit probability of the normal symbol in the high probability state (time saving game state) is, for example, 257/257, and when this is won, the blade member 34 is opened three times for 1.3 seconds. Further, in the normal symbol game, the number of normal symbols that are the winning symbols is one, and the number of winning counts that is the upper limit when the second starting port 33 is opened is 10 counts (10).

The main control circuit 60 controls a displacement member solenoid 390 that operates to open and close the displacement member 39 in the specific region 38A. As a result, when the round game described later is being executed in the jackpot game state, the displacement member 39 is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, and the game ball easily passes through the specific area 38A. On the other hand, when the displacement member 39 is closed even in the big hit game state, the game ball cannot or is difficult to pass through the specific area 38A, and the game ball easily passes through the non-specific area 38B.

The first special symbol holding display unit 55 is the first when a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 320 while the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is variable-displaying. 1 The first based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 32 until the first special symbol or the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54. The number of pending executions (starts) of the variable display of the special symbol, that is, the number of pending cases related to the first special symbol is displayed. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been variablely displayed is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol that has been held as the number of pending numbers related to the first special symbol is started.

The second special symbol holding display unit 56 is the second when a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 330 while the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is variable-displaying. 1 The second based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 33 until the first special symbol or the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54. The number of pending executions (starts) of the variable display of the special symbol, that is, the number of pending cases related to the second special symbol is displayed. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been variablely displayed is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol that has been held as the number of pending numbers related to the second special symbol is started.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the priority of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set so that the second special symbol has priority over the first special symbol. However, the corresponding first special symbol and the second special symbol may be variably displayed in the order of winning in the order of winning the first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33.

Further, as described above, an upper limit is set for the number of pending executions of the variable display of the special symbol, and in the present embodiment, the main CPU 61 is set in the first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33. When the game ball wins a prize and the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 320 and the second start port switch 330, the maximum number of hold numbers for the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is four, respectively. (That is, the number of detections is 4), and the 5th and subsequent ones are not stored as the number of pending items. At this time, when the number of holdings decreases due to the end of the variable display of the special symbol, the number of holdings is added again up to 4 pieces.

When the number of the first special symbol games held in the first special symbol display unit 53 is, for example, up to four, the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the fluctuating first special symbol display unit 53 is the information of the main RAM 63. 1 Special symbol start storage area (0) is stored as a start memory, and thereafter, the information of the special symbol game for which the number of reservations is 4 is stored in the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) of the main RAM 63. It is sequentially stored as a start memory.

Similarly, for the second special symbol game in the second special symbol display unit 54, when the number of reserved second special symbol games is, for example, up to four, the second special symbol display unit 54 corresponding to the changing second special symbol display unit 54. The information of the 2 special symbol game is stored as the start storage in the 2nd special symbol start storage area (0) of the main RAM 63, and thereafter, the information of the 2nd special symbol game for which the number of reservations is 4 is the second special symbol game of the main RAM 63. 2 The special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) are sequentially stored as start memory.

Therefore, the total number of game balls held for the special symbol game associated with winning the first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33 is a maximum of eight, and the first special symbol holding display unit 54 and the second special symbol are held. The number of hold displays by LEDs 551 to 554 and LEDs 561 to 564 of the hold display unit 55 is also four, respectively.

In the open state of the first large winning opening 36 by the first large winning opening shutter 36A, the count value (the number of winnings of the game ball) by the first large winning opening count switch 360 becomes a predetermined number (for example, the number of winnings is 10). It is maintained until either one of the conditions is satisfied, such as the elapse of a predetermined opening time described later. When the number of winnings of the game ball reaches a predetermined number, or when the opening time of the first large winning opening shutter 36A has elapsed, the first large winning opening shutter 36A is driven to close the first large winning opening 36. Will be done.

Similarly, in the open state of the second large winning opening 37 by the second large winning opening shutter 37A, the count value (the number of winnings of the game ball) by the second large winning opening count switch 370 is a predetermined number (for example, the number of winnings is 10). However, it is maintained until either of the conditions such as the elapse of a predetermined opening time described later is satisfied. When the number of winnings of the game ball reaches a predetermined number, or when the opening time of the second big winning opening shutter 37A has elapsed, the second big winning opening shutter 37A is driven to close the second big winning opening 37. Will be done.

In the big hit game state, the open state and the closed state of the first big prize opening 36 and the second big winning opening 37 are repeated based on the preset large winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) described later. In the big hit game state, each of the first big winning opening 36 and the second big winning opening 37 is opened and closed for a predetermined number of times including a plurality of times based on the big winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) described later. Is called a "round game". A round game (round game) may be simply called a round. After the first big winning opening 36 or the second big winning opening 37 is closed by one round game, the first big winning opening 36 or the second big winning opening 37 will be opened as the next round game. The state up to is also referred to as "inter-round game" or "inter-round interval" or simply "interval". In one round game, each of the first prize opening 36 and the second prize opening 37 may be opened and closed a plurality of times. Further, in one round game, the open / closed state of the first prize opening 36 and the second prize opening 37 is exclusively controlled. That is, in one round game, while one big winning opening is repeatedly opened a predetermined number of times, the other big winning opening is continuously closed.

The pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided with a so-called small hit gaming state as a gaming state having a property different from that of the big hit gaming state. Unlike the big hit game state, the small hit game state is not defined by the concept of a round game, and in the small hit game state of the present embodiment, the second big winning opening 37 is defined to be open only once. ing. Of course, in the small hit game state, the arbitrary or specific large winning opening may be controlled to be repeatedly opened a plurality of times. This small hit game state is a game state in which the small hit is won by a special symbol lottery. The gaming state basically does not change before and after the transition to the small hit gaming state. For example, when a small hit is won in a non-probable variable game state and the game shifts to the small hit game state, the game state after the end of the small hit game state remains the non-probable variable game state before the transition to the small hit game state. Therefore, it does not shift to the probabilistic gaming state. Similarly, when a small hit is won in the probabilistic game state and the game shifts to the small hit game state, the game state after the end of the small hit game state is the small hit game state as long as the number of games in the probabilistic game state remains. It remains in the probabilistic gaming state before shifting to, and does not shift to the non-probability changing gaming state.

Round games are counted as the number of rounds (number of times) such as 1 round and 2 rounds. For example, the first round game may be referred to as a first round, and the second round game may be referred to as a second round. In the following description (including drawings referred to in the description), the numbered "rounds" such as the first round or the first round are simply "R" such as 1R, 2R, 4R, 16R, etc. ] May be omitted. In addition, in one round game, the maximum number of winnings per round is reached before the first major winning opening 36 or the second major winning opening 37 is opened a predetermined number of times. When it reaches, the 1st prize opening 36 and the 2nd prize opening 37 will be closed, and the 1st prize opening 36 and the 2nd prize opening 37 will not be opened for the remaining number of times of opening. , The round game is terminated.

Further, in a specific round game in which the second big winning opening 37 is opened in the big hit game state, the displacement member 39 is controlled based on a preset operation pattern (displacement member operation pattern) described later. As a result, the specific area 38A is in the open state and the closed state in the specific round game in the jackpot game state. That is, in a specific round game, the game ball may pass through the specific area 38A and win a V prize, while in a round game other than the specific round game, the game ball tentatively wins in the second large winning opening 37. Even if this is done, the game ball cannot or is difficult to pass through the specific area 38A. That is, the types of the jackpot game state (specific game state) include the jackpot game state including the specific round game (first specific game state) and the jackpot game state not including the specific round game (second specific game state). There is.

In the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4, an effect image related to the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is displayed. For example, in the variable display of the special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 is composed of numbers except in a specific case. Designs (decorative symbols), for example, numbers such as "0", "1", "2" ... "7" are displayed in three columns.

On the other hand, when the special symbol that has been variablely displayed on the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

Further, in the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, when the changed or stopped special symbol has a specific stop display mode, the player is made to understand that it is a "big hit". The effect image is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

Specifically, in either the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54, the special symbol is displayed in a specific display mode corresponding to, for example, a "big hit" in which many balls can be obtained. When the display is stopped, the combination of decorative symbols for effect displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 is in a specific display mode (for example, a state in which all the same symbols are aligned in each of a plurality of symbol rows). In addition, the effect image for a big hit is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

The main CPU 61 included in such a main control circuit 60 is put into a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player on condition that the gaming medium has passed through the first starting area (first starting port 32). It functions as a first specific game state transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift. Further, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to shift to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, on condition that the gaming medium has passed through the second starting area (second starting port 33). It functions as a second specific game state transition determination means.

Further, the main CPU 61 is a specific game state control means for controlling the game state to the specific game state on condition that the determination result of shifting to the specific game state is obtained by the first or second specific game state transition determination means. Functions as.

Further, the main CPU 61 determines that, on condition that the game medium has passed through the specific area 38A in the specific game state, after the specific game state ends, the main CPU 61 shifts to the specific game state by the specific game state transition determination means. Functions as a special game state control means for controlling a special game state (probability variation game state) in which is relatively easy to obtain.

Further, the main CPU 61 is a round game (round game) in which the first variable winning device (first large winning opening shutter 36A) is changed to the first mode (open state) and the second mode (closed state) in the specific game state. Functions as a first round game execution means for executing the above a predetermined number of times. The main CPU 61, which functions as the first round game execution means, can control the first variable winning device to be changed to the first mode and the second mode a plurality of times during the execution of at least one round game. ..

Further, the main CPU 61 is a round game (round game) in which the second variable winning device (second large winning opening shutter 37A) is changed to the first mode (open state) and the second mode (closed state) in the specific game state. Functions as a second round game execution means for executing the above a predetermined number of times. The main CPU 61, which functions as the second round game execution means, is in the first round game mode in which the game medium is relatively easy to pass through the specific area 38A through the second variable winning device during the execution of at least one round game. It is possible to control the variation to the first aspect and the second aspect, and the passage of the game medium through the specific area 38A through the second variable winning device is relative to the second variable winning device during the execution of at least one other round game. It is possible to perform control to change to the first mode and the second mode in the second round game mode which is difficult.

In the jackpot game state, the first round game execution means executes the round game a predetermined number of times, and the second round game execution means executes the easy-to-pass round game according to the first round execution pattern, while the round game is predetermined. The first specific game state to be executed a number of times, the round game is executed a predetermined number of times by the first round game execution means, and the easy-to-pass round game is different from the first round execution pattern by the second round game execution means. A second specific game state in which a round game is executed a predetermined number of times while being executed according to a round execution pattern, a round game is executed a predetermined number of times by the first round game execution means, and a round that is easy to pass by the second round game execution means. A specific game state (winning distribution identification) including a third specific game state in which a round game is executed a predetermined number of times while the game is executed according to a third round execution pattern different from the first round execution pattern and the second round execution pattern. The game state) is realized.

A specific example of control of the main CPU 61 that realizes each of the above means will be described later.

The main ROM 62 stores programs and various tables for causing the main CPU 61 to execute various processes described later, including functions as the means of the main CPU 61 described above.

The main RAM 63 has a function of storing various data (flags, counters, timers, values of variables, etc.) as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 61. As the temporary storage area of the main CPU 61, another readable / writable storage medium may be used instead of the main RAM 63.

The initial reset circuit 64 generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, and is connected to the main CPU 61.

The I / O port 65 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 61 and output signals from the main CPU 61 to various devices.

The command output port 66 transmits various commands from the main CPU 61 to the sub-control circuit 70.

The backup capacitor 67 is for holding various data stored in the main RAM 63 by promptly supplying power to the main RAM 63 when the power is cut off.

Various devices connected to the main control circuit 60 include a first prize opening shutter solenoid 360A, a second prize opening shutter solenoid 370A, a blade member solenoid 340, a displacement member solenoid 390, and an external terminal plate 80. ..

The external terminal board 80 is located between a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk and displaying the number of big hits, or an external device such as a hall computer 100 that manages a plurality of pachinko gaming machines installed in the hall. It is for data communication with.

Various switches connected to the main control circuit 60 include a first starting port switch 320, a second starting port switch 330, a passing gate switch 350, a first winning opening count switch 360, and a second winning opening count switch 370. , Specified area switch 380A, non-specific area switch 380B, general winning opening left switch 400A, general winning opening right switch 400B, and backup clear switch 81.

The backup clear switch 81 clears the backup data of the main control circuit 60 and the payout / launch control circuit 82, which will be described later, in response to an operation by the hall manager.

Further, the launching device 26, the payout device 83, and the card unit 84 are connected to the main control circuit 60 via the payout / launch control circuit 82.

The main control circuit 60 transmits a prize ball control command to the payout / launch control circuit 82. The payout / launch control circuit 82 mainly controls the launch device 26 and the payout device 83, and the launch device 26, the payout device 83, and the card unit 84 are connected to each other. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the payout / launch control circuit 82 and the payout device 83 realize the game value-adding means.

The card unit 84 is connected to a ball lending operation panel 85 that outputs a signal requesting the lending of a game ball according to the operation of the player, and can transmit and receive a signal to and from the ball lending operation panel 85. ..

The payout / launch control circuit 82 receives the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 60 and the rental ball control signal supplied from the card unit 84, and transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 83. This causes the payout device 83 to pay out the game ball. The payout device 83 pays out three game balls as the number of prize balls per winning to the first starting port 32 or the second starting port 33, and pays out the general winning opening 40, the first large winning opening 36, or the second. Ten game balls are paid out as the number of prize balls for each prize in the large prize opening 37.

The payout / launch control circuit 82 is a launch solenoid (not shown) according to the amount of rotation when the launch handle 26b of the launch device 26 is gripped by the player and is rotated in the clockwise direction. Is supplied with electric power to control the game ball to be launched toward the game area 1p.

The main CPU 61 interrupts the main process and executes the timer interrupt process as the interrupt process even during the execution of the main process described later. The timer interrupt process is executed triggered by an interrupt condition that occurs every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms).

The sub control circuit 70 is connected to the main control circuit 60, and is configured so that commands are supplied from the main control circuit 60.

The sub control circuit 70 performs various controls in response to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 60, and is a sub CPU 71, a program ROM 72, a work RAM 73, a command input port 74, a backup capacitor 75, and display control. It has a circuit 76, a voice control circuit 77, a lamp control circuit 78, and a movable effect device control circuit 79. A liquid crystal display device 4 is connected to the display control circuit 76. Speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c are connected to the voice control circuit 77. A lamp / LED 27 is connected to the lamp control circuit 78. The movable effect device control circuit 79 is connected to a movable effect device 42 including a motor and a mechanism for driving the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B.

Further, in the sub-control circuit 70, a push-button switch 90A provided on the push-button 9A is connected, and a jog dial switch 90B provided on the jog dial 9B is connected to the sub-control circuit 70. The push-button switch 90A detects the operation of the push-button 9A, and the jog dial switch 90B identifies the rotation direction and rotation angle of the jog dial 9B. A push-button switch 90A supplies a push-button switch 90A to the sub-control circuit 70, and a rotation operation signal is supplied from the jog dial switch 90B.

The sub CPU 71 has a function of executing various processes according to the program stored in the program ROM 72. The liquid crystal display device 4 functions as a display means. In particular, the sub CPU 71 controls the entire sub control circuit 70 according to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 60. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the sub CPU 71 realizes a display control means, a prior notification means, a schedule grant quantity determination means, a notification quantity change means, and an effect pattern selection means. The program ROM 72 and the work RAM 73 realize the storage means.

The liquid crystal display device 4 displays at least a part of the number of executions of the round game executed by the first round game execution means and the second round game execution means in the winning distribution specific game state as a round number notification image (the number of rounds described later). It functions as a display means that can be displayed by the indicated icon). The sub CPU 71 and the program ROM 72 function as display control means for controlling the display means (liquid crystal display device 4).

The sub CPU 71 executes a prize distribution specific game state (a round game that changes the first special winning opening 36 into an open mode and a closed mode a plurality of times by the specific game state transition determination means, and opens the second big winning opening 37. Before the easy-to-pass round game is executed by the second round game executing means, on condition that it is decided to shift to the jackpot game state in which the round game changed to the mode and the closed mode is executed a plurality of times. , It functions as an advance notification means capable of executing advance notification to notify that the easy-to-pass round game is executed. The liquid crystal display device 4 functions as a display means capable of displaying a round number notification image based on the execution time of the advance notification by the advance notification means.

Further, the program ROM 72 changes the display mode (display color) of the number of rounds notification image (icon indicating the number of rounds to be described later) until the notification round game is executed for each number of rounds in which the notification round game is executed. It functions as a storage means for storing the image display mode change pattern information (icon change lottery table described later) indicating the change pattern).

The sub CPU 71 is the number of actual round games (round games that facilitate the winning of the first large winning opening 36) executed by the first round game executing means (main CPU 61) in the prize distribution specific game state, and the said number of times. The maximum number of game media accepted to the first variable winning device (first large winning opening 36) (maximum number of winnings) specified for one actual round game, and the game medium to the first variable winning device. Depending on the number of game values (game balls) granted by the game value-giving means (payout device 83) (number of prize balls) and the second round game execution means (main CPU 61). The number of real round games to be executed (a round game that makes it easy to win the second big winning opening 37) and the second variable winning device (second big) specified for the number of times of the real round game. The maximum number of game media accepted into the winning opening 37) (maximum number of winnings) and the number of game values granted by the game value-giving means for each number of game media accepted into the second variable winning device. It functions as a means for determining the planned grant quantity to determine the planned grant quantity of the game value based on the game value.

Further, the liquid crystal display device 4 functions as a notification means capable of notifying a part of the planned grant quantity determined by the scheduled grant quantity determining means, and the sub CPU 71 schedules the quantity notified by the notification means. It functions as a notification quantity changing means that can be changed within the range of the planned grant quantity determined by the grant quantity determining means.

The sub CPU 71 functions as an effect pattern selection means capable of selecting an effect pattern according to the type of the specific game state (big hit game state), and the liquid crystal display device 4, the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c, and the lamp / LED 27 produce the effect. Based on the effect pattern selected by the pattern selection means, it functions as an effect execution means capable of executing the effect in the specific game state.

A specific example of control of the sub CPU 71 that realizes each of the above means will be described later.

The program ROM 72 stores a program and various tables for the sub CPU 71 to mainly control various effects.

The work RAM 73 stores various data (flags, counters, timers, variable values, etc.) as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 71.

The command input port 74 receives various commands transmitted from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 and transmits them to the sub CPU 71.

The backup capacitor 75 is for holding various data stored in the work RAM 73 by promptly supplying power to the work RAM 73 at the time of power failure.

The display control circuit 76 is for performing display control in the liquid crystal display device 4 according to the data supplied from the sub CPU 71, for example, for generating various image data with an image data processor (VDP). It is composed of an image data ROM that stores data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D / A converter that converts image data as an image signal. The configuration of the display control circuit 76 is merely an example, and is not limited thereto.

The display control circuit 76 temporarily stores the image data to be displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the frame buffer in response to the image display command supplied from the sub CPU 71. The image data includes, for example, decorative pattern image data, background image data, various effect image data, various fraudulent notification image data, and the like.

Further, the display control circuit 76 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the image signal to the liquid crystal display device 4 at a predetermined timing. An image is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 based on the image signal from the D / A converter.

The voice control circuit 77 is for controlling the voice generated from the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c, for example, a sound source IC for controlling the voice, a voice data ROM for storing various voice data, and a voice signal. Includes an amplifier (AMP) for amplifying. The configuration of the voice control circuit 77 is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

The sound source IC controls the voice generated from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c, and one from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM in response to the voice generation command supplied from the sub CPU 71. Voice data can be selected.

Further, the sound source IC reads the selected voice data from the voice data ROM, converts the voice data into a predetermined voice signal, and supplies the voice signal to the amplifier. This amplifier amplifies the audio signal and generates audio from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c.

The lamp control circuit 78 is for controlling a lamp / LED 27 including a decorative lamp, a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, a decorative data ROM in which a plurality of types of lamp decoration patterns are stored, and the like. It is composed of. The configuration of the lamp control circuit 78 is also an example, and is not limited to this.

The movable effect device control circuit 79 operates (swings) the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B by operating the pressing operation button 9A or the like during the valid period of the operation on the operation unit 9, for example, in the big hit game state. Etc.) to control the production operation.

[Game state and production mode of the gaming machine]
Next, the gaming state and the effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 7. The gaming state is controlled by the main CPU 61, and the effect mode is controlled by the sub CPU 71.

As shown in FIG. 7, the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided with a normal mode, a special mode, a time saving mode, and an ST mode as the effect modes in the normal gaming state. The time saving mode has a relatively large number of short modes and a short mode that impresses that the time saving mode has a relatively small number of games (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, that is, the number of games of the special symbol game). There is a long mode that impresses the number of games. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, a super big bonus, a challenge bonus, an additional bonus, and a V challenge are implemented as production modes in the jackpot game state. Challenge bonuses include one game, three challenges, and a surprise.

The normal mode is a production mode in which the game is in a non-probable and non-time-saving game state. In the normal mode, when, for example, 10 special symbol games are digested in the special mode, the game shifts from the special mode, and an impression different from that of the special mode is produced. In this normal mode, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination mode of "3" or "7", the effect mode shifts to the super big bonus. Further, in the normal mode, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as any combination mode of "1", "2", "4" to "6", the effect mode shifts to the challenge bonus. In the normal mode, the combination mode in which the decorative symbols are "3" and "7" corresponds to the jackpot symbols corresponding to the "probability variation 1" of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and is stopped and displayed together with these jackpot symbols. To. Further, in the normal mode, the combination mode of the decorative symbols "1", "2", "4" to "6" is any of "probability variation 2", "time reduction 1", and "time reduction 2" of the first special symbol. Corresponding to the jackpot symbols corresponding to Kana, the stop display is displayed together with these jackpot symbols.

The special mode is internally the same as the normal mode, and is a non-probable and non-time-saving game state production mode. The special mode shifts to the normal mode after, for example, 10 times of special symbol games are digested. In the special mode, when the special symbol game of 4 or 100 times is digested in the time saving mode, for example, the game shifts from the time saving mode, and in the ST mode, for example, the special symbol game of 190 times is played. When is digested, the game shifts from the ST mode, and an impression different from that of the time saving mode or the ST mode is produced. Also in this special mode, as in the normal mode, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination mode of "3" or "7", the effect mode shifts to the super big bonus. Further, in the special mode, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as any combination mode of "1", "2", "4" to "6", the effect mode shifts to the challenge bonus. The relationship between the combination mode of the decorative symbols "1" to "7" in the special mode and the special symbol is the same as in the normal mode.

The time saving mode is a non-probable and time saving gaming state production mode. In the time saving mode, regardless of whether the normal gaming state is the time saving gaming state or the non-time saving gaming state, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the first special symbol "time saving 1" is stopped and displayed in the normal gaming state. , It is executed after the end of the jackpot game state corresponding to this "time saving 1" jackpot symbol, and is given as the number of games, for example, 100 times, so that it is basically continued until 100 special symbol games are digested. .. Further, in the time saving mode, when the jackpot symbol corresponding to the first special symbol "time saving 2" is stopped and displayed in the normal gaming state of the time saving gaming state, the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the jackpot symbol of this "time saving 2" is displayed. It is executed after the end, and is given 100 times as the number of games in the same manner as described above, so that it is basically continued until 100 special symbol games are digested. On the other hand, in the time saving mode, when the jackpot symbol corresponding to the first special symbol "time saving 2" is stopped and displayed in the normal gaming state of the non-time saving gaming state, the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol of this "time saving 2" is displayed. Although it is executed after the end of the state, the number of games is given only four times, and basically it is continued until the four special symbol games are digested. Such a time saving mode is executed after the end of the big hit game state when the non-V prize is finally obtained in the big hit game state. In addition, in FIG. 8, for convenience, it is shown that the challenge bonus in the big hit game state is shifted to the time saving mode on the condition of non-V winning, but the present embodiment is not limited to this, and in the present embodiment, other than the big hit game state. Even if it is a super big bonus, an additional bonus, or a V challenge, the mode is changed to the time saving mode if the conditions for non-V winning are satisfied.

In the time saving mode, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination mode of "3" or "7", the effect mode shifts to the super big bonus. Further, in the time saving mode, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as any combination mode of "1", "2", "4" to "6", the effect mode shifts to the additional bonus. Further, in the time saving mode, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a specific symbol different from "1" to "7", the effect mode shifts to V challenge. In the time saving mode, the combination mode of the decorative symbols "3" and "7" corresponds to the jackpot symbols corresponding to the "probability variation 1" of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and is stopped and displayed together with these jackpot symbols. To. Further, in the time saving mode, the combination mode of the decorative symbols "1", "2", "4" to "6" corresponds to any of "probability variation 2" to "probability variation 9" of the second special symbol. Corresponding to the symbols, the stop display is displayed together with these jackpot symbols. Further, in the time saving mode, the specific symbol as the decorative symbol corresponds to the big hit symbol corresponding to the "probability variation 10" of the second special symbol and the small hit symbol of the second special symbol, and stops together with these hit symbols. Is displayed. Such a time saving mode shifts to the special mode when the 4 or 100 special symbol games given as the number of games are digested without stopping and displaying the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol. Become.

The short mode of the time saving mode is executed as an effect mode that impresses when the number of games to be given is four, and even if the number of games is 100, up to the fourth time, which is the beginning of the game. Is to be executed. The long mode of the time saving mode is executed as an effect mode that impresses when the number of games to be given is 100 times. For example, when the number of games is the fourth or later from the start of the time saving mode, the short mode is executed. It may be executed with an effect mode that impresses the promotion from.

The ST mode is a production mode of a probabilistic and time-saving game state, and is executed in conjunction with the transition of the game state to the probabilistic game state (ST game state) after the end of the big hit game state that finally won the V prize. Is to be done. The ST mode is given as the number of games, for example, 190 times, and basically continues until 190 times of the special symbol game is exhausted.

When the decorative symbols "1" to "7" or the specific symbol is stopped and displayed in the ST mode, it is the same as in the time saving mode. That is, in the ST mode, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination mode of "3" or "7", the effect mode shifts to the super big bonus. Further, in the ST mode, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as any combination mode of "1", "2", "4" to "6", the effect mode shifts to the additional bonus. Further, in the ST mode, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a specific symbol, the effect mode shifts to the V challenge. The relationship between the decorative symbol and the special symbol in the ST mode is the same as in the time saving mode.

The super big bonus is an effect mode that is executed in conjunction with the so-called full-open jackpot game state of 16R, and is executed as an effect mode that impresses the jackpot game state. The 16R full-open jackpot gaming state is a gaming state in which the winning pattern 1 is controlled to occur as a winning opening opening / closing pattern described later (see FIGS. 8 and 11). In such a 16R full-open jackpot game state, if there is a V prize, the production mode shifts from the super big bonus to the ST mode. Although not particularly shown in FIG. 8, in the 16R full-open jackpot game state, there is a possibility that there is no V prize in the end. In such a case, the production mode is changed from the super big bonus to the time saving mode. It will be migrated.

The challenge bonus is an effect mode that is executed in conjunction with the jackpot game state of 12R and is executed as an effect mode that impresses the jackpot game state. As the types of challenge bonuses, one game, three challenges, and a surprise are prepared, and in the early round (1R to 2R in this embodiment) where the challenge bonus is executed, the player presses the operation. By operating the button 9A and the jog dial 9B, it is possible to select one of a single game, a three-time challenge, and a surprise. In one game, three challenges, and a surprise, predetermined production contents that are different from each other are executed. The big hit game state of 12R is a game state in which any of the hit patterns 2 and 3 is controlled as a big winning opening opening / closing pattern described later (see FIGS. 8 and 11). In such a 12R jackpot game state, if there is a V prize, the production mode shifts from the challenge bonus to the ST mode. On the other hand, in the 12R jackpot game state, if there is no V prize in the end, the production mode shifts from the challenge bonus to the time saving mode.

The additional bonus is an effect mode that is executed in conjunction with the jackpot game state of 11R or 16R and is executed as an effect mode that impresses the jackpot game state. The 11R or 16R jackpot gaming state is a gaming state controlled so that any of the hit patterns 4 to 11 occurs as the jackpot opening / closing pattern described later (see FIGS. 8 and 11). In such a big hit game state of 11R or 16R, when there is a V prize, the effect mode shifts from the additional bonus to the ST mode. Although not particularly shown in FIG. 8, in the big hit game state of 11R or 16R, there is a possibility that there is no V prize in the end. In such a case, the effect mode shifts from the additional bonus to the time saving mode. Will be done.

The V Challenge is a round that makes it easy to win V as a round that allows you to win the first prize opening 36 and the second prize opening 37 (a round game that makes it easy to win the second prize opening 37). Is an effect mode executed in conjunction with the 11R big hit game state (also referred to as “sudden V”) or the small hit game state in which only 1R is included. The big hit game state of the bump V is a game state in which the hit pattern 12 is controlled to occur as the big prize opening opening / closing pattern described later, and the small hit game state is the hit pattern 13 as the big winning opening opening / closing pattern described later. It is a gaming state controlled to occur (see FIGS. 8 and 11). If there is a V prize in such a big hit game state of sudden V, the production mode shifts from V challenge to ST mode. Although not particularly shown in FIG. 8, there is a case where there is no V prize in the end in the big hit game state of the sudden V, and in such a case, the production mode shifts from the V challenge to the time saving mode. .. Further, in the small hit game state, the V challenge is executed as the effect mode, while when the small hit game state ends regardless of the V winning, the effect mode is basically the effect before the V challenge is executed. It will shift to the mode.

In addition, when the second special symbol becomes a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol in the non-time saving game state and shifts to the big hit game state or the small hit game state accordingly, or in the time saving game state, the first special symbol becomes the big hit symbol. In response to this, when the game shifts to the big hit game state, the effect mode corresponding to those hit symbols is executed. Therefore, the normal mode or the special mode may shift to the additional bonus or the V challenge, and the ST mode may shift to the super big bonus or the challenge bonus.

[Game machine specifications]
Next, with reference to FIG. 8, specifications relating to the gaming characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 8, in the present embodiment, the hit probability of the special symbol including the small hit probability described later is 1 / 239.18 (274/65536) at the time of low probability (non-probability variation game state). At the time of high probability (probability change game state), it is 1 / 81.92 (800/65536). The small hit probability of being in the small hit game state is 0 in the first special symbol and 1 / 299.25 (219/65536) in the second special symbol. As for the digestion order of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the lottery by the second special symbol is prioritized for digestion. As the probability variation performance (specification of the probability variation game state), the ST game state in which the probability variation game state continues up to 190 times as the number of games (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol) is implemented.

The distribution of special symbols is as follows. That is, in the jackpot symbol "probability change 1" of the first special symbol and the jackpot symbol "probability variation 1" of the second special symbol, the jackpot opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) becomes the hit pattern 1, and the number of rounds of the round game is 16R ( Among them, the actual number of rounds that can be easily won is given to the big prize opening (16R), the super big bonus is executed as the production mode of the big hit game state, and the production content is "16R bonus". The probability of becoming "probability variation 1" as the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol (rush rate) is set to 5/100, and the probability of becoming "probability variation 1" as the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol (rush rate) is It is set to 10/100.

In the jackpot symbol "Probability 2" of the first special symbol, the hit pattern is 2, the number of rounds is 12R (of which the actual number of rounds is 10R), the challenge bonus is executed as the production mode, and the production content is "Challenge bonus 12R". "Success". The inrush rate of the jackpot symbol "probability variation 2" of the first special symbol is set to 25/100.

In the big hit symbols "time reduction 1" and "time reduction 2" of the first special symbol, the hit pattern is 3, the number of rounds is 12R (of which the actual number of rounds is 10R), the challenge bonus is executed as the production mode, and the production content is Is "Challenge Bonus 12R Failure". The rush rate of the jackpot symbol "time reduction 1" of the first special symbol is set to 25/100, and the rush rate of the jackpot symbol "time reduction 2" of the first special symbol is set to 45/100.

In the big hit symbols "probability variation 2" to "probability variation 9" of the second special symbol, the hit patterns are 4 to 11. Among them, in the jackpot symbols "Probability 2" to "Probability 4" of the second special symbol, the number of rounds is 16R (of which the actual number of rounds is 15R), an additional bonus is executed as the production mode, and the production contents are "Probability change 2" to "Probability change 4". "Additional bonus 15R", "Resurrection after additional bonus 4R → 15R", "Resurrection after additional bonus 8R → 15R". The inrush rates of the jackpot symbols "probability variation 2" to "probability variation 4" of the second special symbol are set to 8/100, 1/100, and 1/100, respectively.

In the second special symbol jackpot symbols "Probability 5" to "Probability 9", the number of rounds is 16R (of which the actual number of rounds is 12R), the number of rounds is 11R (of which the actual number of rounds is 10R), and the number of rounds is 11R (of which the actual number of rounds is 8R). ), The number of rounds is 11R (of which the actual number of rounds is 6R), and the number of rounds is 11R (of which the actual number of rounds is 4R). "Bonus 10R", "Additional bonus 8R", "Additional bonus 6R", "Additional bonus 4R". The inrush rates of the jackpot symbols "probability variation 5" to "probability variation 9" of the second special symbol are set to 4/100, 11/100, 30/100, 5/100, and 20/100, respectively.

In the big hit symbol "probability change 10" of the second special symbol, the hit pattern is 12, the number of rounds is 11R (of which the actual number of rounds is 1R), the V challenge is executed as the production mode, and the production content is "V challenge success". ". The inrush rate of the jackpot symbol "probability variation 10" of the second special symbol is set to 10/100.

In the small hit symbol of the second special symbol, the hit pattern is 13, the V challenge is executed as the effect mode, and the effect content is "V challenge failure". The inrush rate of the small hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 1/1. In the small hit game state, unlike the big hit game state, there is no concept of a round game, so the number of rounds is not specified.

The number of large winning openings is set so that the maximum number of winnings per round is 10 for both the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37. The time-saving performance (specification of the time-saving game state) is set so that the time-saving game state continues up to 100 times or 4 times during a high probability (while in the probability-changing game state) or in the non-probability-changing game state. .. The number of prize balls is 3 for each winning opening (1st starting opening 32 and 2nd starting opening 33), 10 for each winning entry to the general winning opening 40, and the large winning opening (1st). The number of prizes is set to 10 for each prize in the large prize opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37). The hit probability of a normal symbol is set to be 0/257 when the probability is low and 257/257 when the probability is high. The number of hit symbols of a normal symbol is set to one. The number of winning counts when the second starting port 33 is opened is set to count up to 10 as an upper limit.

[1 round opening / closing pattern]
Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the opening / closing pattern of the large winning opening in one round will be described.

As shown in FIG. 9, a plurality of opening / closing patterns A to I are defined as a one-round opening / closing pattern (one-round opening / closing pattern) for the first special winning opening 36 and the second special winning opening 37. The opening / closing patterns A to H are opening / closing patterns corresponding to the big hit gaming state, and the opening / closing pattern I is an opening / closing pattern corresponding to the small hit gaming state. The opening / closing pattern I in the small hit game state is not defined as one round, but is shown together with other opening / closing patterns A to H for convenience. The first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37 are simply referred to as the large winning opening unless it is necessary to distinguish them. The opening / closing patterns A to I shown in FIG. 9 are merely examples, and the specific time for defining the opening / closing pattern may be other than those shown in the figure.

The opening / closing pattern A is an opening / closing pattern in which the open state continues for 27.222 s. The opening / closing pattern A is defined as a round section from the first opening state to the final closing state. Similarly, in the other opening / closing patterns B to H, the round section is defined as the period from the first opening state to the final closing state. In the section where the open state is 27.222 s, the open state of the big winning opening is relatively long and long open. That is, in the opening / closing pattern A, the long opening occurs once, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern A is 27.222 s.

The opening / closing pattern B is an opening / closing pattern in which the open state is initially 0.102 s, the closed state is 2.898 s, and then the open state continues for 27.222 s again. In the section where the open state is 0.102 s, the open state of the big winning opening is relatively short, which is a short opening. That is, in the opening / closing pattern B, after the short opening occurs once, the long opening occurs once after passing through the closed state once, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern B is 27.324 s. In the open state where the short opening is made, it is extremely difficult to win the game ball into the large winning opening, while in the open state where the long opening is made, it is possible and easy to win the game ball into the large winning opening. ing. Such short opening is the same not only in the opening / closing pattern B but also in the opening / closing patterns C, E to H described later.

The opening / closing pattern C is an opening / closing pattern in which the open state is only for 0.102 s. That is, the opening / closing pattern B is such that the short opening occurs only once, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern C is 0.102 s.

In the opening / closing pattern D, a series of opening / closing cycles in which the open state is 2.202 s, the closed state is 1.002 s, and then the open state is 2.802 s and then the closed state is 1.002 s are repeated five times. It is an opening / closing pattern that occurs, and then finally the open state is 2.202 s. In the section where the open state is 2.202s or 2.802s, the opening time of the big winning opening is longer than the short opening and shorter than the long opening, and it is a middle opening different from both the short opening and the long opening. .. That is, in the opening / closing pattern D, the middle opening is repeatedly generated 11 times, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern D is 27.222s. In the open state where the middle is open, it is possible to win a game ball in the large winning opening. Such middle opening is the same not only in the opening / closing pattern D but also in the opening / closing pattern E described later.

The opening / closing pattern E repeatedly occurs 6 times with the open state and the closed state set to 0.102s and 1.200s, respectively, and then the same series of opening / closing cycles as described above occurs repeatedly 5 times, and then thereafter. Finally, it is an opening / closing pattern in which the open state is 2.202s. That is, in the opening / closing pattern E, the short opening is repeatedly generated 6 times and then the middle opening is repeatedly generated 11 times, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern E is 27.834 s.

The opening / closing pattern F is an opening / closing pattern in which the open state is initially 0.102 s, the closed state is 1.200 s, and then the open state is 0.102 s. That is, the opening / closing pattern F is such that the short opening is repeatedly generated twice, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern F is 0.204 s.

The opening / closing pattern G has an open state of 0.102 s for the first time, then a closed state of 1.200 s, then an open state of 0.102 s, a closed state of 1.200 s, and finally an open state. Is an opening / closing pattern in which is 0.102 s. That is, the opening / closing pattern G is such that the short opening is repeatedly generated three times, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern G is 0.306 s.

The opening / closing pattern H is defined as the same opening / closing pattern as the opening / closing pattern C. That is, the opening / closing pattern H is such that the short opening occurs only once, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern C is 0.102 s. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing pattern C and the opening / closing pattern H, which are the same as each other, are defined to be distinguished from each other, but one opening / closing pattern may be collectively defined without any particular distinction.

The opening / closing pattern I is an opening / closing pattern in which the open state is only 1.5 s. The section where the open state is 1.5 s is the middle open. That is, the opening / closing pattern I is such that the middle opening occurs only once, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern I is 1.5 s.

The actual round game in the jackpot game state is when the opening / closing control is performed based on the opening / closing patterns A, B, D, and E including the long opening or the middle opening in which the game ball can be won among the above-mentioned opening / closing patterns A to I. Round game is applicable. The round game when the opening / closing is controlled based on the remaining opening / closing patterns C, F to I is a non-real round game that does not correspond to the real round game.

[Displacement member operation pattern]
Next, the operation pattern of the displacement member 39 that opens and closes the specific region 38A will be described with reference to FIG.

The displacement member 39 basically operates in conjunction with the open / closed state of the second big winning opening 37 regardless of the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state. As shown in FIG. 10, as for the operation pattern of the displacement member 39 (displacement member operation pattern), as a general rule, the specific area 38A is closed after the operation period for opening the specific area 38A is 0.102 s for the first time. It is defined as an operation pattern in which the non-operation period is 2.898 s, and then the operation period continues for a maximum of 29.222 s. The total operating time of the displacement member operating pattern is 32.222s. During the operation period of 0.102s, the open state of the specific area 38A becomes relatively short, so that it becomes extremely difficult to win a V prize in the specific area 38A. On the other hand, during the operation period of 29.222 s at the longest, the open state of the specific region 38A is relatively long, so that it is relatively easy to win a V prize in the specific region 38A. Regarding the operation period of 29.222 s at the longest, in one round in which the second large winning opening 37 is opened and closed, for example, when the number of large winning opening counts reaches the upper limit winning number, the second large winning opening 37 is closed. When the state is reached and the predetermined monitoring processing time for the residual sphere, which will be described later, has passed, the displacement member 39 is inactive and the specific area 38A is closed even before the predetermined maximum 29.222 s has elapsed. May become.

[Large winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) and interval between rounds]
Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the big winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) and the interval between rounds in the big hit game state and the small hit game state will be described.

As shown in FIG. 11, a plurality of hit patterns 1 to 13 are defined as the large winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern). The winning pattern 1 is the number of rounds specified for the rounds that are generally open (hereinafter referred to as the "specified number of rounds") that occur at the time of the Super Big Bonus, and the long opening that allows you to win a prize in the big winning opening. The actual number of rounds specified only for the rounds including at least the middle opening is the hit pattern specified as 16R. In addition, the interval between rounds is a section in which the big winning opening is closed after the last big winning opening is closed in one round until the big winning opening is first opened in the next round. Correspondingly, as shown in the figure, as the inter-round interval pattern, an interval pattern a in which the closed state (closing time) is 1200 ms and an interval pattern b in which the closed state is 102 ms are defined. In the hit pattern 1, all the intervals between rounds are the interval pattern a, and the second big winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern B and the opening / closing pattern A in each of the 1st and 11th rounds, and the 2nd to 10th rounds and the 12R are It is stipulated that the first large winning opening 36 has the opening / closing pattern A in all the eyes to the 16th round. That is, the hit pattern 1 is 16 rounds in which the actual number of rounds is equal to the specified number of rounds, and both the 1st round and the 11th round are executed as rounds in which V winning in the specific area 38A is easy.

The hit pattern 2 occurs at the time of the challenge bonus, and is a hit pattern in which the specified number of rounds is 12R and the actual number of rounds is 10R. In the hit pattern 2, all the intervals between rounds are the interval pattern a, and the second big winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern H and the opening / closing pattern B at each of the 1st and 11th rounds, and the 2nd to 10th rounds and the 12th round are 12R. It is defined that the first big winning opening 36 has an opening / closing pattern A and an opening / closing pattern C. That is, the hit pattern 2 is 10 rounds in which the actual number of rounds is the 2nd to 11th rounds, and only the 11th round is executed as a round in which it is easy to win a V in the specific area 38A.

The hit pattern 3 occurs at the time of the challenge bonus, and is a hit pattern in which the specified number of rounds is 12R and the actual number of rounds is 10R. In the hit pattern 3, only the interval between the rounds between the 10th and 11th rounds is the interval pattern b, and the other intervals between the rounds are the interval pattern a, and the second big prize is won in both the 1st and 11th rounds. It is stipulated that the opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern H, and the first large winning opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern A in all of the 2nd, 10th, and 12th rounds. That is, the hit pattern 3 has 10 rounds in which the actual number of rounds is the 2nd, 10th, and 12th rounds, and both the 1st and 11th rounds are executed as rounds in which it is impossible or difficult to win a V in the specific area 38A. To.

The hit pattern 4 is a hit pattern that occurs at the time of the additional bonus, and the specified number of rounds is 16R, of which the actual number of rounds is 15R. In the hit pattern 4, only the interval between the rounds between the 10th and 11th rounds is the interval pattern b, and the other intervals between the rounds are the interval pattern a, and the second big winning opening is in each of the 1st and 11th rounds. 37 is defined to be the opening / closing pattern B and the opening / closing pattern H, and the first large winning opening 36 is defined to be the opening / closing pattern D in all of the 2nd to 10th R and the 12th to 16th R. That is, the hit pattern 4 has 15 rounds in which the actual number of rounds is the 1st to 10th rounds and the 12th to 16th rounds, and only the 1st round is executed as a round in which V winning in the specific area 38A is easy.

The hit pattern 5 is a hit pattern that occurs at the time of the additional bonus, and the specified number of rounds is 16R, of which the actual number of rounds is 15R. In the hit pattern 5, only the inter-round interval between the 10R and 11R is the interval pattern b, and the other inter-round intervals are the interval pattern a, and the second big winning opening is in each of the 1R and 11R. 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern B and the opening / closing pattern H, and the first big winning opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern E at the 5th R. It is stipulated that one big winning opening 36 has an opening / closing pattern D. That is, the hit pattern 5 has 15 rounds in which the actual number of rounds is the 1st to 10th rounds and the 12th to 16th rounds, and only the 1st round is executed as a round in which V winning in the specific area 38A is easy.

The hit pattern 6 occurs at the time of the additional bonus, and is a hit pattern in which the specified number of rounds is 16R and the actual number of rounds is 15R. In the hit pattern 6, only the inter-round interval between the 10R and 11R is the interval pattern b, and the other inter-round intervals are the interval pattern a, and the second big winning opening is in each of the 1R and 11R. 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern B and the opening / closing pattern H, and the first big prize opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern E at the 9th R. The mouth 36 is defined to have an opening / closing pattern D. That is, the hit pattern 6 has 15 rounds in which the actual number of rounds is the 1st to 10th rounds and the 12th to 16th rounds, and only the 1st round is executed as a round in which V winning in the specific area 38A is easy.

The hit pattern 7 is a hit pattern that occurs at the time of the additional bonus, and the specified number of rounds is 16R, of which the actual number of rounds is 12R. In the hit pattern 7, only the inter-round interval between the 10R and 11R is the interval pattern b, and the other inter-round intervals are the interval pattern a, and the second big winning opening is in each of the 1R and 11R. 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern B and the opening / closing pattern H, and the first big winning opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern F at the 14th to 16th Rs, and the first big winning at the 2Rs to 10Rs and the 12Rs to 13Rs. The mouth 36 is defined to have an opening / closing pattern D. That is, the hit pattern 7 has 12 rounds in which the actual number of rounds is the 1st to 10th rounds and the 12th to 13th rounds, and only the 1st round is executed as a round in which V winning in the specific area 38A is easy.

The hit pattern 8 is a hit pattern that occurs at the time of the additional bonus, and the specified number of rounds is 11R, of which the actual number of rounds is 10R. In the hit pattern 8, only the interval between rounds between the 10th and 11th rounds is the interval pattern b, and the other intervals between the rounds are the interval pattern a, and the second big winning opening is in each of the 1st and 11th rounds. It is defined that 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern B and the opening / closing pattern H, and the first large winning opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern D in the 2nd to 10th rounds. That is, the hit pattern 8 has 10 rounds in which the actual number of rounds is the 1st to 10th rounds, and is executed as a round in which it is easy to win a V prize in the specific area 38A only in the 1st round.

The hit pattern 9 occurs at the time of the additional bonus, and is a hit pattern in which the specified number of rounds is 11R and the actual number of rounds is 8R. In the hit pattern 9, only the inter-round interval between the 10R and 11R is the interval pattern b, the other inter-round intervals are the interval pattern a, and the second big winning opening is in each of the 1R and 11R. 37 is defined to be the opening / closing pattern B and the opening / closing pattern H, and the first large winning opening 36 is defined to be the opening / closing pattern D and the opening / closing pattern G at the 2nd to 8th R and the 9th to 10th R. That is, the hit pattern 9 is executed as a round in which the actual number of rounds is 8 rounds from the 1st round to the 8th round, and only the 1st round is easy to win a V in the specific area 38A.

The hit pattern 10 is a hit pattern that occurs at the time of the additional bonus, and the specified number of rounds is 11R, of which the actual number of rounds is 6R. In the hit pattern 10, only the inter-round interval between the 10R and 11R is the interval pattern b, the other inter-round intervals are the interval pattern a, and the second big winning opening is in each of the 1R and 11R. 37 becomes an opening / closing pattern B and an opening / closing pattern H, and at the 2nd to 6th R, 7R to 8R, and 9R to 10R, the first large winning opening 36 has an opening / closing pattern D, an opening / closing pattern F, and an opening / closing pattern. It is specified to be C. That is, the hit pattern 10 has 6 rounds in which the actual number of rounds is the 1st to 6th rounds, and only the 1st round is executed as a round in which it is easy to win a V in the specific area 38A.

The hit pattern 11 is a hit pattern that occurs at the time of the additional bonus, and the specified number of rounds is 11R, of which the actual number of rounds is defined as 4R. In the hit pattern 11, only the interval between the rounds between the 10th and 11th rounds is the interval pattern b, and the other intervals between the rounds are the interval pattern a, and the second big winning opening is in each of the 1st and 11th rounds. 37 is defined to be the opening / closing pattern B and the opening / closing pattern H, and the first large winning opening 36 is defined to be the opening / closing pattern D and the opening / closing pattern C at the 2nd to 4th R and the 5th to 10th R. That is, the hit pattern 11 is executed as a round in which the actual number of rounds is 4 rounds from the 1st round to the 4th round, and only the 1st round is easy to win a V in the specific area 38A.

The hit pattern 12 is a hit pattern that occurs at the time of a V challenge in a big hit game state, and the specified number of rounds is 11R, of which the actual number of rounds is 1R. In the hit pattern 12, only the interval between rounds between the 10th and 11th rounds is the interval pattern b, and the other intervals between the rounds are the interval pattern a, and the second big winning opening is in each of the 1st and 11th rounds. It is defined that 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern B and the opening / closing pattern H, and the first large winning opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern C in the 2nd to 10th rounds. That is, the hit pattern 12 is one round in which the actual number of rounds is only the first round, and is executed as a round in which it is easy to win a V prize in the specific area 38A only in the first round.

The hit pattern 13 is defined to occur at the time of V challenge in the small hit game state, and the second big winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern I only once. That is, in the hit pattern 13, there is a possibility that the game ball wins the second big winning opening 37, and there is a possibility that the specific area 38A is V-winned, but if there is a V-winning to the specific area 38A, it is assumed. Is also executed as if it cannot shift to the probabilistic game state.

[Operation timing in Super Big Bonus (hit pattern 1)]
Next, the operation timing in the super big bonus (hit pattern 1) will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown as an example in FIG. 12, in the 1st round of the super big bonus (hit pattern 1), the displacement member is based on the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. 10 with the start of the open state of the second large winning opening 37. When 39 is operated, the specific area 38A is opened and closed so as to be interlocked with the opening and closing of the second special winning opening 37. Specifically, in the 1st round, after the 2nd big winning opening 37 finishes the long opening (the section where the open state is 27.222s) and becomes closed, the 2nd big winning opening 37 to the 2nd big winning opening 37 When a predetermined monitoring processing time for monitoring the remaining balls remaining in the ball passage leading to the winning opening count switch 370 elapses, the displacement member 39 is forcibly controlled from the operating state to the non-operating state. The specific area 38A changes from the open state to the closed state. That is, the specific region 38A is closed after an open state of about 28.320 s, which is slightly shorter than 29.222 s defined as the longest operating period by the displacement member operating pattern shown in FIG. Further, in the 1st round, the V winning of the game ball to the specific area 38A may not be detected by the specific area switch 380A while the second large winning opening 37 is long open. In this case, the liquid crystal display device 4 does not particularly display a warning prompting V winning in the specific area 38A.

On the other hand, in the 11th round of the super big bonus (hit pattern 1), the displacement member 39 operates based on the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. 10 with the start of the open state of the second large winning opening 37. The specific area 38A is in the open state and the closed state so as to be interlocked with the opening and closing of the second large winning opening 37. However, even in the 11th round, when the second large winning opening 37 finishes the long opening (the section where the open state is 27.222s) and becomes the closed state, the displacement member 39 after the predetermined monitoring processing time described above has passed. Is forcibly controlled from the operating state to the non-operating state, so that the specific area 38A is changed from the open state to the closed state. That is, the specific region 38A is closed after an open state of about 25.320 s, which is shorter than 29.222 s defined as the longest operating period by the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. Further, in the 11th round, 10 s has passed since the second large winning opening 37 was opened for a long time, for example, 13 s, that is, 10 s has passed since the specific region 38A was opened according to the longest operating period of the displacement member operating pattern. However, if the specific area switch 380A does not detect the V winning of the game ball in the specific area 38A, the liquid crystal display device 4 executes a warning display prompting the V winning in the specific area 38A. If a V prize is detected by the specific area switch 380A during the execution of such a warning display, the execution of the warning display ends. Even if the second big winning opening 37 is closed and the 11th round is finished without detecting the V winning by the specific area switch 380A, the execution of the warning display is finished.

[Operation timing in challenge bonus (hit pattern 2)]
Next, the operation timing in the challenge bonus (hit pattern 2) will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown as an example in FIG. 13, in the 1st round of the challenge bonus (winning pattern 2), as in the case of the 1st round of the super big bonus (winning pattern 1) shown in FIG. 12, the second big winning opening 37 The specific area 38A is in the open state and the closed state so as to be interlocked with the opening and closing. In the 1st round of this challenge bonus (hit pattern 2), the specific area 38A is opened for 10 seconds after the second large winning opening 37 is opened for a long time, that is, according to the longest operating period of the displacement member operating pattern. If the specific area switch 380A does not detect the V winning of the game ball in the specific area 38A even after 10 seconds have passed, the liquid crystal display device 4 executes a warning display prompting the V winning in the specific area 38A. If a V prize is detected by the specific area switch 380A during the execution of such a warning display, the execution of the warning display ends. Even if the second special winning opening 37 is closed and the first round is completed without detecting the V winning by the specific area switch 380A, the execution of the warning display is finished.

On the other hand, in the 11th round of the challenge bonus (hit pattern 2), the second big winning opening 37 is only one short opening (the section where the open state is 0.102s), but this second big winning opening With the start of the open state of 37, the displacement member 39 operates based on the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. As a result, the specific area 38A is opened and closed so as to be interlocked with the opening and closing of the second prize opening 37. However, in the 11th round, when the second big winning opening 37 finishes the short opening and becomes a closed state, the 11th round ends. Therefore, at that time, control using the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. 10 is also possible. finish. Therefore, when the 11th round is completed, the displacement member 39 does not enter the operating state for the longest operating period, and is controlled to the non-operating state, so that the specific region 38A changes from the open state to the closed state. That is, the specific region 38A becomes a closed state only after an open state of about 0.102 s defined as a short operation period by the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. In the 11th R of such a challenge bonus (hit pattern 2), a warning display for prompting a V prize in the specific area 38A is not executed.

[Operation timing in the additional bonus (hit pattern 8)]
Next, the operation timing in the additional bonus (hit pattern 8) will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown as an example in FIG. 14, in the 1st round of the additional bonus (hit pattern 8), the second large winning opening 37 is only one short opening (the section where the opening state is 0.102s). With the start of the open state of the second prize opening 37, the displacement member 39 operates based on the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. As a result, the specific area 38A is opened and closed so as to be interlocked with the opening and closing of the second prize opening 37. However, in the 1st round, when the 2nd big winning opening 37 finishes the short opening and becomes a closed state, the 1st round ends. Therefore, at that time, the control using the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. 10 is also possible. finish. Therefore, when the first R is completed, the displacement member 39 does not enter the operating state for the longest operating period, and is controlled to the non-operating state, so that the specific region 38A changes from the open state to the closed state. That is, the specific region 38A becomes a closed state only after an open state of about 0.102 s defined as a short operation period by the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. In the 11th R of such a challenge bonus (hit pattern 2), a warning display for prompting a V prize in the specific area 38A is not executed.

On the other hand, in the 11th R of the additional bonus (hit pattern 8), as in the case of the 1st R of the challenge bonus (hit pattern 2) shown in FIG. 13, the specific area is linked to the opening and closing of the second large winning opening 37. 38A is in the open state and the closed state. In the 11th round of this additional bonus (hit pattern 8), the specific area 38A is opened for 10 seconds after the second large winning opening 37 is opened for a long time, that is, according to the longest operating period of the displacement member operating pattern. If the specific area switch 380A does not detect the V winning of the game ball in the specific area 38A even after 10 seconds have passed, the liquid crystal display device 4 executes a warning display prompting the V winning in the specific area 38A. Even with such a warning display, if the V prize is not detected by the specific area switch 380A, the second large winning opening 37 ends the long opening and becomes closed, and the 11th round ends, the warning display is executed. Will also end. Further, if a V prize is detected by the specific area switch 380A during the execution of the warning display, the execution of the warning display ends with this as an opportunity. The execution of the warning display may be terminated when the displacement member 39 becomes inactive.

[Operation timing in hit pattern 4 (from the end of 9R to the beginning of 12R)]
Next, the operation timing in the hit pattern 4 (from the end of the 9th R to the beginning of the 12R) will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown as an example in FIG. 15, when the 9th round ends according to the hit pattern 4, the round state shifts to the round state A as an interval between rounds after the 9th round ends.

When the round state A ends after a predetermined closing time (1.2 s of the interval pattern a), the process shifts to the round state B in which the 10th round is being executed. In the round state B, the first large winning opening 36 repeats the middle opening (opening state of 2.202s and 2.802) 11 times according to the opening / closing pattern D.

When the last middle opening of the 11 times is completed in the round state B, the round state B ends, and the round state shifts to the round state C as an interval between rounds after the end of the 10th round.

When the round state C ends after a predetermined closing time (0.102 s of the interval pattern b), the process shifts to the round state D in which the 11th R is being executed. In the round state D, the second big winning opening 37 is short-opened (open state of 0.102s) only once according to the opening / closing pattern H.

When one short opening is completed in the round state D, the round state D ends, and the round state shifts to the round state E as the interval between rounds after the end of the 11th round.

When the round state E ends after a predetermined closing time (1.2 s of the interval pattern a), the process shifts to the round state F in which the 12th R is being executed. In the round state F, the first large winning opening 36 repeats the middle opening according to the opening / closing pattern D again.

According to the operation according to the hit pattern 4, the open state of the second big winning opening 37 at the 11th R is simply one short opening, and the first big winning opening at the 10th and 12th Rs before and after. Since it is extremely shorter than the middle opening, which is the open state of 36, it is difficult to distinguish that the open / closed state of the first prize opening 36 and the second prize opening 37 has been switched, and it is difficult to tell whether or not each round has been executed. It is difficult to distinguish. This is also because the closing time of the inter-round interval (0.102s of the interval pattern b) before the execution of the 11th round is shorter than the closing time of the other inter-round intervals (1.2s of the interval pattern a). ..

Further, in the inter-round interval (round state C) and the 11Rth (round state D) before the 11th Rth execution, the effect at the end of the 10th Rth (round state B) is continuously executed. That is, even if the shift from the 10th R to the 11th R is performed, it is difficult to recognize that a new effect is being executed. The closing time of the gaming state E may be the same as the closing time of the gaming state C.

[Operation timing by hit pattern 11 and hit pattern 5]
Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the operation timing according to the hit pattern 11 (from the end of the 4Rth to the end of the 11th R) and the hit pattern 5 (from the end of the 4R to the end of the 5R) will be described.

As shown as an example in FIG. 16, in the case of the hit pattern 11, after the first big winning opening 36 finishes the last open state (middle opening of 2.202s) according to the opening / closing pattern D in the 4th round, 5R From the 1st to the 10th round, the first big winning opening 36 repeats the short opening of 0.102s 6 times according to the opening / closing pattern C. Then, after a predetermined closing time (0.102 s of the interval pattern b) has passed since the end of the 10th round, the second large winning opening 37 becomes a short opening of 0.102 s according to the opening / closing pattern H as the 11th round. ..

From the end of the 4th round to the end of the 11th round of the hit pattern 11, the liquid crystal display device 4 displays the following effect image. That is, in the hit pattern 11, the liquid crystal display device 4 displays an effect image indicating that the additional bonus is in progress from the end of the 4th round to the start of the 5th round. From the start of the 5th round to the end of the 11th round, the liquid crystal display device 4 displays an effect image showing the end display pattern. Then, when the 11th round is completed, the liquid crystal display device 4 displays an effect image showing a title pattern, which will be described later, for a predetermined time. When the display of the effect image showing the title pattern is finished, the liquid crystal display device 4 displays the effect image indicating that the ST mode is in progress.

Further, as shown as an example in FIG. 16, in the case of the hit pattern 5, the first large winning opening 36 ends the final open state (middle open of 2.202 s) according to the opening / closing pattern D at the 4th round. After a predetermined closing time (1.2 s of interval pattern a) has passed from this end, as the 5th round, the first big winning opening 36 repeats a short opening of 0.102 s 6 times in the early stage according to the opening / closing pattern E. After that, the middle opening (open state of 2.202s and 2.802s) is repeated 11 times.

From the end of the 4th round to the end of the 5th round of the hit pattern 5, the liquid crystal display device 4 displays the following effect image. That is, in the hit pattern 5, the liquid crystal display device 4 displays an effect image indicating that the additional bonus is in progress from the end of the 4th round to the start of the 5th round. The liquid crystal display device 4 displays an effect image showing the end display pattern while the first large winning opening 36 repeats the short opening six times after the fifth R is started. Then, when the first large winning opening 36 finishes the short opening and starts the middle opening, the liquid crystal display device 4 displays an effect image in which a special character (SP character) described later appears. When the display of the effect image that causes the special character to appear is finished, the liquid crystal display device 4 displays the effect image indicating that the addition bonus is in progress again.

According to the operation according to the hit pattern 11, the 5th to 11th Rths are executed during the display of the production image of the end display pattern, the production image of the title pattern is displayed after the end of the 11th Rth, and then the big hit. When the game state is finished, the effect image in the ST mode is displayed. On the other hand, according to the operation according to the hit pattern 5, since the production image of the end display pattern is in the early stage of the 5th round, after the early stage of the 5th round is completed (after repeating short opening 6 times). The effect image of the appearance of the special character is displayed in, and then the effect image in the additional bonus is displayed again. As a result, the so-called "reversal effect" is realized in the effect display at the time of executing the hit pattern 5.

Further, during the execution of the hit pattern 5, the effect image of the end display pattern, which is displayed in a pseudo manner, is displayed and controlled based on the display time according to the time length of the 5th to 11th R of the hit pattern 11. It has become. That is, the effect image of the end display pattern in the hit pattern 5 is the short opening time for 7 rounds, the inter-round interval time for 5 rounds (interval pattern a), and the inter-round interval time for 1 round (interval). The pattern b) is continuously displayed for 6.816 s in total. As a result, it is difficult to distinguish between the hit pattern 5 and the hit pattern 11 at the time when the effect image of the end display pattern is displayed.

In the present embodiment, in the operation according to the hit pattern 5, only the effect image of the end display pattern is displayed at the beginning of the 5th round, but the effect image of the title pattern is displayed together with the end display pattern. You may try to do it. Further, the effect image of the end display pattern has the same contents in both the hit pattern 5 and the hit pattern 11, but the effect image of the end display pattern corresponding to the hit pattern 5 corresponds to the hit pattern 11. The content may be different from that of the one, and may be content that suggests that the additional bonus will continue, for example. Further, by making the display timings of the effect image of the end display pattern corresponding to the hit pattern 5 and the effect image of the end display pattern corresponding to the hit pattern 11 different, it is suggested that the additional bonus is continued. Good.

[Various tables]
Next, various tables referred to by the sub CPU 71 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 89. The table defines lottery value (random number value) information for determining a predetermined item based on a lottery value (random number value) extracted (lottery) from a predetermined random number range. Value information is synonymous with the so-called lottery rate. The lottery value information (lottery rate) can be changed as appropriate. In the following description, the "random number value" may be simply referred to as a "random number".

<Challenge success / failure lottery table>
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a challenge success / failure lottery table. The challenge success / failure lottery table is a table referred to in the challenge success / failure lottery process (S450 of FIG. 120) of the sub CPU 71, which will be described later. The challenge success / failure lottery table has a challenge success / failure pattern No. which is a decision item. 1-3 (No. 1: Challenge failure → Last chance failure, No. 2: Challenge failure → Last chance success, and No. 3: Challenge success), reference items of "success" and "failure", and reference items The lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining the challenge success / failure pattern by the random number lottery is defined according to the above. As an example, the challenge success / failure pattern No. In 1, the lottery value information corresponding to "success" is 0 (lottery rate 0), and the lottery value information corresponding to "failure" is 32768 (lottery rate 32768/32768). Challenge success / failure pattern No. In No. 2, the lottery value information corresponding to "success" is 8192 (lottery rate 8192/32768), and the lottery value information corresponding to "failure" is 0 (lottery rate 0). Challenge success / failure pattern No. In No. 3, the lottery value information corresponding to "success" is 24576 (lottery rate 24576/32768), and the lottery value information corresponding to "failure" is 0 (lottery rate 0). In the challenge success / failure lottery table, when the hit effect pattern flag described later is "02H" (the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is "probability change 2" and the internal flag corresponding to the hit pattern 2), it corresponds to "success". When the lottery value information is referred to and the hit effect pattern flag is "03H" (the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is "time reduction 1" or "time reduction 2" and the internal flag corresponding to the hit pan 3), "failure". The lottery value information corresponding to "" is referred to. Challenge success / failure pattern No. by the challenge success / failure lottery table. When 1 to 3 are determined, challenge success / failure pattern flags "01H" to "03H" are set as internal flags corresponding to each.

According to such a challenge success / failure lottery table, the challenge success / failure pattern No. is based on the winning effect pattern described later. 1-3 are decided by lottery. For example, the challenge success / failure pattern No. When 3 (successful challenge) is determined, a production image that impresses the "success" of the round execution in which the V prize can be won is displayed in the 3rd to 8th rounds of the big hit game state. In addition, the challenge success / failure pattern No. When 2 (challenge failure → last chance success) is determined, a production image that impresses the “success” of the round execution that can win a V in the 10th round of the jackpot game state is displayed. Furthermore, the challenge success / failure pattern No. When 1 (Challenge failure → Last chance failure) is determined, a production image that impresses the “failure” of the round execution that can win a V in the 10th round of the jackpot game state is displayed.

The lottery value information corresponding to "success" in the challenge success / failure lottery table includes the challenge success / failure pattern No. The lottery rate of 2 is the challenge success / failure pattern No. It may be specified that the lottery rate is higher than the lottery rate of 3, or the lottery rate may be the same. In addition, as the lottery value information corresponding to "success", the challenge success / failure pattern No. The lottery rate may be specified to be larger than 0 for 1. That is, even when the effect image that impresses the "failure" of the V-winning round execution is displayed, the V-winning round may be executed.

<Table for one-game combination lottery>
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a one-game combination lottery table. The single-game combination lottery table is a table referred to in the single-game combination lottery process (S460 in FIG. 121) in the single-game combination production determination process of the sub CPU 71, which will be described later. The table for the one-game combination lottery is No. One game combination pattern of 1 to 45, reference items of challenge success / failure patterns "1: failure → failure", "2: failure → success", and "3: success", and one game according to the reference items It defines lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining a combination pattern by a random number lottery. In the one-game combination lottery table, when the challenge success / failure pattern flag is "01H", the lottery value information corresponding to "1: failure → failure" is referred to, and when the challenge success / failure pattern flag is "02H". , "1: Failure->success", the lottery value information is referred to, and when the challenge success / failure pattern flag is "03H", the lottery value information corresponding to "3: success" is referred to. The challenge success / failure pattern No. Nos. 1 to 3 are officially "challenge failure-> last chance failure", "challenge failure-> last chance success", and "challenge success", but for convenience, the challenge success / failure pattern No. 1-3 are abbreviated as "failure → failure", "failure → success", and "success". Also in the table described below, the challenge success / failure pattern No. There are cases where 1 to 3 are abbreviated.

According to such a one-game combination lottery table, based on the challenge success / failure pattern, for example, the one-game combination pattern No. of the production content with a rock-paper-scissors motif. 1 to 45 are decided by lottery. For example, the one-game combination pattern No. If 43 (Aiko count "100"-> dialogue "Settle!"-> Small button-> result win) is decided, draw 100 times in a row with rock-paper-scissors in the 3rd to 6th rounds of the jackpot game state. After the production image that becomes Later, a production image showing the win is displayed as a result of rock-paper-scissors.

It should be noted that the table for the one-game combination lottery is one depending on whether or not the hold information stored in the work RAM 73 includes information indicating the winning of the jackpot as the information corresponding to the start memory of the special symbol game. The lottery rate of the game combination pattern may be specified to be different. For example, if the hold information of the first special symbol includes information indicating the winning of the jackpot, and the information corresponds to the jackpot game state in which the round in which the V prize can be won is executed, one game is played. If the lottery rate of combination pattern No. 45 is specified to be relatively high and it corresponds to a big hit game state in which a round in which V winning is difficult is executed, one game combination pattern No. 44 is used. It may be specified to be relatively high. Further, the lottery rate of the one-game combination pattern may be different depending on whether or not the hold information of the second special symbol includes the information indicating the winning of the big hit.

<Rock-paper-scissors pattern lottery table>
19 and 20 are diagrams showing the rock-paper-scissors pattern lottery tables (1) and (2). Although the rock-paper-scissors pattern lottery tables (1) and (2) are one table, the rock-paper-scissors pattern lottery tables (1) and (2) are shown in two figures for convenience. The rock-paper-scissors pattern lottery tables (1) and (2) are tables referred to in the rock-paper-scissors pattern lottery process (S461 in FIG. 121) in the one-game effect determination process of the sub CPU 71, which will be described later. The rock-paper-scissors pattern lottery tables (1) and (2) are No. Rock-paper-scissors patterns 1 to 10 and one-game combination pattern No. Reference items 1 to 45 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining a rock-paper-scissors pattern according to the reference items by random number lottery are defined. In the rock-paper-scissors pattern lottery tables (1) and (2), the one-game combination pattern No. The lottery value information corresponding to 1 to 45 is referred to.

According to the rock-paper-scissors pattern lottery tables (1) and (2), the rock-paper-scissors pattern No. 1 indicating the contents of the first to third rock-paper-scissors patterns based on the one-game combination pattern. 1 to 10 are decided by lottery. For example, rock-paper-scissors pattern No. If 10 (1st par, 2nd par, 3rd par) is decided, the 1st par of the rock-paper-scissors game will be a par, the 2nd par will be a par, and the 3rd par will be a draw. The production image is displayed.

As for the rock-paper-scissors pattern lottery tables (1) and (2), whether or not the hold information stored in the work RAM 73 includes information indicating the winning of the jackpot as the information corresponding to the start memory of the special symbol game. The lottery rate of the rock-paper-scissors pattern may be different depending on the situation. For example, if the hold information of the first special symbol includes information indicating the winning of the jackpot, and the information corresponds to the jackpot game state in which the round in which the V prize can be won is executed, the rock-paper-scissors pattern No. It is stipulated that the lottery rate of .10 is relatively high, and if it corresponds to the big hit game state in which a round in which it is difficult to win a V is executed, the rock-paper-scissors pattern No. 9 is made relatively high. It may be specified. Further, the lottery rate of the rock-paper-scissors pattern may be different depending on whether or not the hold information of the second special symbol includes the information indicating the winning of the big hit.

<Table for 3 times challenge lottery>
FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a table for the three-time challenge lottery. The three-time challenge lottery table is a table referred to in the three-time challenge lottery process (S470 in FIG. 122) in the three-time challenge effect determination process of the sub CPU 71, which will be described later. The table for the 3rd challenge lottery is No. Displayed with the 3 times challenge pattern of 1-29, the reference items of "1: failure → failure", "2: failure → success", and "3: success" of the challenge success / failure pattern, and the production content of the 3 times challenge pattern. The display mode of the effect button to be displayed and the lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining the challenge pattern three times according to the reference item by the random number lottery are defined. In the 3rd challenge lottery table, when the challenge success / failure pattern flag is "01H", the lottery value information corresponding to "1: failure → failure" is referred to, and when the challenge success / failure pattern flag is "02H", The lottery value information corresponding to "2: failure → success" is referred to, and when the challenge success / failure pattern flag is "03H", the lottery value information corresponding to "3: success" is referred to.

According to such a three-time challenge lottery table, based on the challenge success / failure pattern, for example, the production content corresponding to the 4th, 6th, and 8th Rs of the big hit game state is basically 1 with the motif of the battle with the cow. ~ 3rd challenge pattern No. which shows the success or failure of the 3rd time. 1 to 29 are decided by lottery. For example, the three-time challenge pattern No. When 29 (Failure-Failure-Failure) is determined, a production that prompts the operation of a relatively large production button along with the production content that causes a failure (loss) in each of the 4th, 6th, and 8th Rs of the jackpot game state The image is displayed.

In addition, as a table for the three-time challenge lottery, after displaying success (winning), by displaying success or failure, a big hit is given to the hold information stored in the work RAM 73 as information corresponding to the start memory of the special symbol game. An effect pattern that suggests that information indicating winning may be included may be specified. For example, if the hold information of the first special symbol contains information indicating the winning of the jackpot, and the information corresponds to the jackpot game state in which the round in which the V prize can be won is executed, the success (winning) is achieved. ) Is displayed, and if it corresponds to a big hit game state in which a round in which it is difficult to win a V is executed, a production image containing failure (loss) is displayed. May be good. Further, the effect image corresponding to either "success" or "failure" may be displayed depending on whether or not the hold information of the second special symbol includes the information indicating the winning of the big hit.

<Success notification round lottery table>
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a success notification round lottery table. The success notification round lottery table is a table referred to in the success notification round lottery process (S480 in FIG. 123) in the surprise effect determination process of the sub CPU 71, which will be described later. The success notification round lottery table has a challenge success / failure pattern No. which is a reference item. Rounds 1 to 3 (No. 1: failure → failure, No. 2: failure → success, and No. 3: success) and rounds for notifying success, which is a decision item (hereinafter referred to as “success notification round”) (hereinafter referred to as “success notification round”) “None”, “3R to 8R”) and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining the success notification round by random number lottery according to the reference item are defined. In the success notification round lottery table, when the challenge success / failure pattern flag is "01H", the lottery value information corresponding to "No. 1: failure → failure" is referred to, and the challenge success / failure pattern flag is "02H". In this case, the lottery value information corresponding to "No. 2: Failure → Success" is referred to, and when the challenge success / failure pattern flag is "03H", the lottery value information corresponding to "No. 3: Success" is referred to. .. When the success notification round is determined to be any of 3R to 8R by the success notification round lottery table, the success notification round flags "03H" to "08H" are set as internal flags corresponding to each. However, when the success notification round is determined as "none", the success notification round flag "02H" is set as the corresponding internal flag, and the 3Rs to 8Rs are unsuccessful notification rounds. Of the 3Rs to 8Rs, each round up to the success notification round is also treated as a non-success notification round.

According to such a success notification round lottery table, based on the challenge success / failure pattern, a round that impresses the "success" of the V winning round execution and notifies that fact is determined by lottery as a success notification round. .. For example, when the challenge success / failure pattern is "No. 3: Success", any of the 3rd to 8th rounds in the jackpot game state is determined as the success notification round, and in the determined success notification round, V A production image that announces the execution of a winning round is displayed. However, if the challenge success / failure pattern is "No. 1: Failure → Failure" or "No. 2: Failure → Success", the success notification round is uniformly "None" and the non-success notification round is determined. In such a case, the execution of the round in which the V prize can be won is not announced in any of the 3rd to 8th rounds in the jackpot game state. Further, in the 3rd to 8th rounds, even in the rounds leading up to the success notification round, the execution of the round in which the V prize can be won as the non-success notification round is not announced.

The success notification round lottery table may be specified so that the success notification round can be determined as "none" even when the challenge success / failure pattern is "success". Further, the lottery rate (lottery value information) when the challenge success / failure pattern is "success" is not limited to that shown in FIG. Alternatively, the lottery rates for all rounds of the 3rd to 8th rounds may be specified to be the same.

<Surprise pattern lottery table>
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a surprise pattern lottery table (non-success notification round) and a surprise pattern lottery table (success notification round). The surprise pattern lottery table (non-success notification round) and the surprise pattern lottery table (success notification round) are tables referred to in the surprise pattern lottery process (S483 in FIG. 123) in the surprise effect determination process of the sub CPU 71, which will be described later. is there. The surprise pattern lottery table (unsuccessful notification round) is referred to, for example, for determining the surprise pattern in advance for each of the 3rd to 8th Rth unsuccessful notification rounds. The surprise pattern lottery table (success notification round) is referred to in advance to determine the surprise pattern corresponding to the success notification round. The surprise pattern lottery table (unsuccessful notification round) is the surprise pattern No. It defines 1 to 15, unsuccessful notification rounds (3R to 8R) as reference items, and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining a surprise pattern by random number lottery according to the reference item. .. The surprise pattern lottery table (success notification round) is the surprise pattern No. 1 to 15, success notification rounds (3R to 8R) as reference items, and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining a surprise pattern by random number lottery according to the reference item are defined. In the surprise pattern lottery table (non-success notification round) and the surprise pattern lottery table (success notification round), the lottery value information corresponding to the 3Rs to 8Rs of the non-success notification round and the success notification round is referred to.

According to the surprise pattern lottery table (non-success notification round), the corresponding surprise pattern Nos. 1 to 6 are decided by lottery. For example, the surprise pattern corresponding to the 3rd round of the unsuccessful notification round is No. If it is 2, the operation of a relatively small effect button is urged in the 3rd round of the big hit game state, and as a result of the operation, an effect image that impresses the "failure" of the round execution that can win a V is displayed. On the other hand, according to the surprise pattern lottery table (success notification round), the surprise pattern No. 1 is based on any of 3R to 8R, which is the success notification round. 7 to 15 are decided by lottery. For example, the success notification round is the 3rd round and the surprise pattern is No. In the case of 12, the operation of the relatively small effect button is urged in the 3rd round of the big hit game state, and as a result of the operation, an effect image that impresses the "success" of the round execution in which the V prize can be won is displayed. For example, when the success notification round is the 7th round, the surprise pattern corresponding to the 3rd to 6th rounds of the non-success notification round is determined, and the surprise pattern corresponding to the 7th round of the success notification round is determined. For the 8th round, which is the round after the success notification round, the corresponding surprise pattern is not determined.

As the surprise pattern lottery table, after displaying the effect image that impresses "success", the start memory of the special symbol game is displayed by displaying the effect image that impresses "success" or "failure". As the information corresponding to the above, the content suggesting that the hold information stored in the work RAM 73 includes the information indicating the winning of the big hit may be specified. For example, if the hold information of the first special symbol contains information indicating that the jackpot has been won, and the information corresponds to the jackpot game state in which the round in which the V prize can be won is executed, "success". If it corresponds to a big hit game state in which a round in which it is difficult to win a V is executed, an effect image that impresses "failure" may be displayed. .. In addition, depending on whether or not the hold information of the second special symbol includes information indicating the winning of the big hit, after displaying the effect image that impresses "success", "success" or "failure" is displayed. An impressive effect image may be displayed.

<Icon pattern lottery table>
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an icon pattern lottery table (4R to 8R). The icon pattern lottery tables (4R to 8R) are tables referred to in the icon pattern lottery process (S491 in FIG. 124) in the icon determination process of the sub CPU 71, which will be described later. The icon pattern lottery table (4R-8R) is referred to for each round of 4R-8R to determine the final display color of the corresponding icon. Here, the "final display color" means the display color that the icon indicating each round of 4R to 8R presents at the time of executing the round, and the display color after changing at the time of executing the round or without changing. The display color when maintained is applicable. The icon pattern lottery table (4R to 8R) has an icon pattern No. which is a decision item. 1 to 4 (white icon, blue icon, green icon, red icon) and the surprise pattern No. which is a reference item. 1 to 15 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining an icon pattern by a random number lottery according to a reference item are defined. The icon pattern lottery table (4R to 8R) is prepared for each round of 4R to 8R. In the icon pattern lottery table (4R to 8R), the lottery value information corresponding to the surprise pattern is referred to for each round of 4R to 8R.

According to the icon pattern lottery table (4R to 8R), the surprise pattern No. Based on 1 to 15, the icon pattern No. indicating the final display color of the icon displayed corresponding to each round of 4R to 8R. 1 to 4 are decided by lottery. For example, for the icon corresponding to the 8th round, the icon pattern lottery table (8R) is referred to in order to determine in advance the final display color at the time of executing the round of the 8th round. In this icon pattern lottery table (8R), the surprise pattern is No. If it is 15, there is a probability that the lottery rate will be 1600/32768 and the icon pattern No. 4 is decided. As a result, when the 8th round is executed, the display color of the icon indicating the 8th round becomes red. Similarly, for the 4th to 7th rounds, the icon pattern lottery table (4R to 8R) is referred to, so that each round of the 4th to 7th rounds displayed when each round of the 4th to 7th rounds is executed can be displayed. The display color of the corresponding icon is determined.

In the icon pattern lottery tables (4R to 8R) of the present embodiment, the same lottery rate is used for all the tables corresponding to 4R to 8R, but different lottery rates are defined for each round of 4R to 8R. You may try to do it. Further, in the present embodiment, the icon pattern lottery table corresponding to the 3Rs is not provided, but by providing the icon pattern lottery table corresponding to the 3Rs, the display color of the icon corresponding to the 3Rs is changed. You may. Furthermore, as the display color of the icon, a special color other than the above-mentioned color, for example, gold can be displayed, and the round in which such a special gold icon is displayed is always a success notification round. May be good.

<Icon change lottery table>
25 to 29 are diagrams showing the icon change lottery table. The icon change lottery table is a table referred to in the icon change lottery process (S494 in FIG. 124) in the icon determination process of the sub CPU 71, which will be described later. The icon change lottery table (4R white icon) in FIG. 25 is the 4th Rth icon for each of the 4R to 8R icons whose final display color is determined using the icon pattern lottery table (4R to 8R) described above. Referenced to determine how many colors to change from white at the time of round execution. Similarly, the icon change lottery table of FIG. 26 (5R white icon, 5R blue icon, 5R green icon, 5R red icon), the icon change lottery table of FIG. 27 (6R white icon, 6R blue icon, 6R green icon, 6R red icon), icon change lottery table in FIG. 28 (7R white icon, 7R blue icon, 7R green icon, 7R red icon), icon change lottery table in FIG. 29 (8R white icon, 8R blue icon, 8R green) The icon (8R red icon) is referred to for each of the 4R to 8R icons whose final display color has been determined, in order to determine how many colors to change at the time of each round of the 5th to 8th rounds. .. These icon change lottery tables have the changed icon pattern No., which is a decision item. The final display colors of the icons 1 to 4 (white icon, blue icon, green icon, red icon) and the icons corresponding to each round of the 4th to 8th R, which are the reference items, and after the change according to the reference item. It defines lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining an icon pattern by random lottery. In the icon change lottery table, the lottery value information corresponding to the display color at the time of executing each round of the 4th to 8th rounds is referred to for the icon whose final display color is determined.

For example, when it is determined that the display color of the icon indicating the 8th R is finally red when the 8R round is executed, in this case, the icon indicating the 8R is described as follows. The change mode of the 4th to 8th Rs is determined for the display color of. In this case, in the icon change lottery table (4R white icon) of FIG. 25, the item of "8R: red" is referred to, and the icon pattern No. 1 to 4 are determined. As a result, it is determined that the display color of the 8R icon that finally turns red can be changed to white, blue, green, or red with a probability of 1/4 when the 4R round is executed. .. At this time, as an example, the icon pattern No. It is assumed that 1 is determined and it is determined that the display color does not change and becomes white when the 4th round is executed.

Next, in this case, since the display color at the start of the 5R round execution following the 4R is white, the icon change lottery table (5R white icon) in FIG. 26 is referred to. In the icon change lottery table (5R white icon), the item "8R: red" is referred to, and there is a probability that the lottery rate will be 8192/32768, respectively, and the icon pattern No. 1 to 4 are determined. As a result, it is decided that the display color of the 8R icon, which will eventually turn red, can be changed from white to white, blue, green, or red with a 1/4 chance when the 5R round is executed. Will be done. At this time, as an example, the icon pattern No. It is assumed that 2 is determined and it is determined that the display color changes from white to blue when the 5th round is executed.

Next, in this case, since the display color at the start of the 6th round execution is blue, the icon change lottery table (6R blue icon) in FIG. 27 is referred to. In the icon change lottery table (6R blue icon), the item "8R: red" is referred to, and the icon pattern No. is probable that the lottery rate is 10922/32768. 1. Icon pattern No. with a probability that the lottery rate will be 0. 2. Icon pattern No. with a probability of a lottery rate of 10922/32768. 3. Icon pattern No. with a probability of a lottery rate of 10924/32768. 4 is decided. As a result, it is determined that the display color of the 8th R icon, which finally turns red, can be changed from blue to white, green, or red with a predetermined probability when the 6th round is executed. At this time, as an example, for example, the icon pattern No. It is assumed that 3 is determined and it is determined that the display color changes from blue to green when the 6th round is executed.

Next, in this case, since the display color at the start of the 7th round execution is green, the icon change lottery table (7R green icon) in FIG. 28 is referred to. In the icon change lottery table (7R green icon), the item "8R: red" is referred to, and the icon pattern No. has a probability that the lottery rate becomes 16384/32768, respectively. 1 or No. 4 is decided. As a result, it is determined that the display color of the 8th R icon, which finally turns red, is changed from green to white or red with a predetermined probability when the 7th round is executed. At this time, as an example, for example, the icon pattern No. It is assumed that 4 is determined and it is determined that the display color changes from green to red when the 7th round is executed.

Next, in this case, since the display color at the start of the 8th round execution is red, the icon change lottery table (8R red icon) in FIG. 28 is referred to. In the icon change lottery table (8R red icon), the item "8R: red" is referred to, and the icon pattern No. has a probability that the lottery rate becomes 32768/32768. 1 is determined. As a result, it is determined that the 8Rth icon, which finally turns red, is maintained in red without changing the display color during the execution of the 8th round.

<Surprise success character band lottery table>
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a surprise success character band lottery table. The surprise success character band lottery table is a table referred to in the surprise success character band lottery process (S502 in FIG. 125) in the character band effect determination process of the sub CPU 71, which will be described later. The surprise success character band lottery table has a character band pattern No. which is a decision item. Surprise pattern Nos. 1-31 and reference items. 7 to 15 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining a character band pattern by a random number lottery according to a reference item are defined. In the surprise success character band lottery table, the lottery value information corresponding to the surprise pattern is referred to in order to determine the character band pattern to be displayed in the success notification round.

According to the surprise success character band lottery table, the surprise pattern No. Based on 7 to 15, the character band pattern No. indicating the character message displayed in the success notification round. 1-31 are decided by lottery. For example, the surprise pattern is No. If it is 15, the character band pattern No. is set at a predetermined lottery rate. One of 12, 13, 16 to 21, 23 to 28 is determined. As a result, in the success notification round, a character message that is a sign of a round in which V can be won is displayed.

In the surprise success character band lottery table of the present embodiment, the character band pattern No. is displayed in the success notification round. Although 1 to 10 are not determined, these character band pattern Nos. 1 to 10 may be decidable.

<Surprise failure character band lottery table>
FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a surprise failure character band lottery table (surprise pattern No. 2) and (surprise pattern No. 3). FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a surprise failure character band lottery table (surprise pattern No. 4) and (surprise pattern No. 5). FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a surprise failure character band lottery table (surprise pattern No. 6). These surprise failure character band lottery tables are tables referred to in the surprise failure character band lottery process (S504 in FIG. 125) in the character band effect determination process of the sub CPU 71, which will be described later. The surprise failure character band lottery table has a character band pattern No. which is a decision item. 1-31, unsuccessful notification rounds (3R to 8R) to be reference items, and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining a character band pattern by random number lottery according to the reference item are defined. There is. In the surprise failure character band lottery table, in order to determine the character band pattern to be displayed in the non-success notification round (3R to 8R), the lottery value information corresponding to 3R to 8R is provided for each of the surprise pattern Nos. 1 to 6. Referenced.

According to the surprise failure character band lottery table (surprise pattern No. 2), the surprise pattern is No. If it is 2, the character band pattern No. indicating the character message displayed in the non-success notification round is based on the 3Rs to 8Rs of the non-success notification round. 12 to 21 are decided by lottery. For example, the surprise pattern is No. For the 3R unsuccessful notification round, which is 2, there is a probability that the lottery rate will be 10000/32768, and the character band pattern No. Twelve "??" are determined. Similarly, the surprise pattern No. Also in the case of 3 to 6, the character band pattern No. indicating the character message displayed in the 3R to 8R, which is the unsuccessful notification round. 12 to 21 are decided by lottery. As a result, in the unsuccessful notification round, a character message is displayed so as to expect the execution of the round in which the V prize can be won.

In the surprise failure character band lottery table of the present embodiment, the surprise pattern No. The table is divided into 2 to 6 and a character message is displayed for each table (surprise pattern). Although it is stipulated that 12 to 21 can be determined, the character band pattern can be determined from the surprise failure character band lottery table as one table based on the surprise pattern and the unsuccessful notification round. You may do so.

<Surprise Gase character band lottery table>
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a surprise Gase character band lottery table (white icon) and (blue icon). FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a surprise Gase character band lottery table (green icon) and (red icon). These surprise-gase character band lottery tables are tables referred to in the surprise-gase character band lottery process (S505 in FIG. 125) in the character band effect determination process of the sub CPU 71, which will be described later. The surprise Gase character band lottery table has a character band pattern No. which is a decision item. 1-31, unsuccessful notification rounds (3R to 8R) to be reference items, and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining a character band pattern by random number lottery according to the reference item are defined. There is. In the surprise Gase character band lottery table, the surprise pattern No. In order to determine the character band pattern to be displayed in the unsuccessful notification round (3R to 8R) determined as "None" in 1, 3R for each icon display color (white icon, blue icon, green icon, red icon). The lottery value information corresponding to ~ 8R is referred to.

According to the surprise Gase character band lottery table (white icon), the surprise pattern No. When the display color after the change of the icon displayed in the unsuccessful notification round 1 (the display color maintained if it does not change) is white, the non-successful notification round is based on the 3Rs to 8Rs of the non-successful notification round. Character band pattern No. indicating the character message displayed in the notification round. 1 to 14 are decided by lottery. For example, for the 3R unsuccessful notification round in which the corresponding icon is a white icon, there is a probability that the lottery rate will be 1200/32768 and the character band pattern No. Twelve "??" are determined. Similarly, for the unsuccessful notification rounds (3R to 8R) in which the corresponding icons are the blue icon, the green icon, and the red icon, the character band pattern No. indicating the displayed character message. 1 to 14 are decided by lottery. As a result, in the unsuccessful notification round in which the execution of the round in which the V prize can be won is not announced, a character message may be displayed, which may be a nuisance.

In the surprise Gase character band lottery table of the present embodiment, the table is divided according to the changed icon color, and the character band pattern of the character message to be used can be determined for each table (changed icon color). As stipulated in, the surprise gasse character band lottery table is used as one table, and the character band pattern can be determined from this one table based on the changed icon color corresponding to the unsuccessful notification round. May be good. Further, the character band pattern may be determined based on the icon color before the change.

<Surprise Gase subsequent character band lottery table>
FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a surprise gasse subsequent character band lottery table. This surprise-gase subsequent character band lottery table is a table referred to in the subsequent character band lottery process (S508 in FIG. 125) in the character band effect determination process of the sub CPU 71, which will be described later. In the surprise gasse subsequent character band lottery processing table, the character band pattern No. 1-31, unsuccessful notification rounds (3R to 8R) to be reference items, and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining a character band pattern by random number lottery according to the reference item are defined. There is. Surprise Gase Subsequent Character Band In the lottery table, when a predetermined character band pattern (No. 1 to 10) to be displayed in the unsuccessful notification round is determined, the subsequent characters to be displayed subsequently are determined. In order to determine the number of band patterns up to a predetermined number, the lottery value information corresponding to each of 3R to 8R is referred to.

According to the surprise Gase subsequent character band lottery table, based on the 3Rs to 8Rs of the unsuccessful notification rounds in which the predetermined character band patterns (No. 1 to 10) to be the Gase are determined, the Gase in the non-success notification round. Character band pattern No. indicating a subsequent character message to be displayed following. A predetermined number of 1 to 10 is determined by lottery. For example, for the 3R unsuccessful notification round, there is a probability that the lottery rate will be 3276/32768, and the character band pattern No. 1 "Don't miss a surprise chance!" Is decided. As a result, in the unsuccessful notification round in which the execution of the round in which the V prize can be won is not announced, a subsequent character message may be displayed after the character message that is disappointing.

In the surprise gasse subsequent character band lottery table of the present embodiment, for example, a character band pattern No. 6 indicating up to 6 subsequent character messages is used. It can be repeatedly referred to to determine 1 to 10, but it can also be used to determine 5 or less or 7 or more subsequent character band patterns.

<Additional bonus hold consecutive lottery table>
FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a table for additional bonus hold continuous lottery. This additional bonus hold continuous lottery table is a table referred to in the additional bonus hold continuous lottery process (S533 of FIG. 127) in the additional bonus hold continuous determination process of the sub CPU 71 described later. In the additional bonus hold continuous lottery table, when the hold information related to the second special symbol includes a predetermined jackpot symbol or a small hit symbol, a BGM different from the usual one is played during the jackpot game state. It is a table used to decide whether or not to execute a special effect such as. The table for the additional bonus hold continuous lottery is a decision item with the winning symbols related to the second special symbol (the big hit symbols "probability variation 1" to "probability variation 10", the small hit symbol "small hit"). Winning / non-winning information (No. 1: non-winning, No. 2: winning) and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining winning / non-winning by random number lottery according to the reference item. It stipulates. In the additional bonus hold continuous lottery table, the hold information related to the second special symbol stored in the work RAM 73 includes the information indicating the winning of the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol as the information corresponding to the start memory of the special symbol game. If so, the lottery value information is referred to according to the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol.

According to the additional bonus hold series lottery table, the additional bonus hold series is based on the "probability change 1" to "probability change 10" of the big hit symbol or the "small hit" of the small hit symbol included in the hold information together with the information indicating the hit. As a result of the lottery process, non-winning (No. 1) or winning (No. 2) is determined by lottery. For example, when the jackpot symbol of "Probability change 1" is included in the hold information related to the second special symbol, in the additional bonus hold continuous lottery process, there is a probability that the lottery rate will be 6554/32768 and the non-winning (No. 1) will be. Winning (No. 2) is determined with a probability that the lottery rate will be 26214/32768. As a result, when the winning (No. 2) is decided, in the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot symbol "probability change 1" of the second special symbol, a special effect different from the effect related to the normal addition bonus Is executed.

In the additional bonus hold continuous lottery table of the present embodiment, the winning (No. 2) is more likely to be determined as the game becomes a big hit game related to the second special symbol which is advantageous for the player. You may win even in the winning game state. If the reserved information related to the second special symbol does not exist, the lottery may be performed based on the reserved information related to the first special symbol. Further, the lottery may be performed based on all the reserved information without distinguishing the reserved information of the second special symbol and the first special symbol. Further, the BGM may be different depending on the type of the winning symbol, and when the holding information includes a plurality of winning symbols, a BGM different from the other BGM may be played. Further, the special effect is not limited to BGM, and the display mode of the image and the light emitting mode of the light emitting member such as the decorative lamp may be different.

<Scenario group lottery table>
FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a scenario group lottery table. This scenario group lottery table is a table referred to in the scenario group lottery process (S540 in FIG. 128) in the additional bonus scenario type determination process of the sub CPU 71, which will be described later. The scenario group lottery table is a table used to determine scenario groups A to D in which the scenarios of the production in the production mode of the additional bonus are roughly classified. The scenario group lottery table includes hit patterns 4 to 11 as reference items, scenario groups A to D as determination items, and lottery value information (random number range) for determining a scenario group by random number lottery according to the reference item. : 32768)). In the scenario group lottery table, the lottery value information is referred to according to the winning patterns 4 to 11 corresponding to the additional bonus.

In the scenario group lottery table, scenario groups A to D are determined by lottery based on the winning patterns 4 to 11. According to this scenario group lottery table, for example, in the case of a winning pattern 4, scenario group A (without combo) is determined with a probability that the lottery rate will be 7816/32768, and a scenario with a probability that the lottery rate will be 18400/32768. Group B (with combo) is determined, scenario group C ([A] -based SP character) is determined with a probability that the lottery rate will be 1952/32768, and scenario group D (with a probability that the lottery rate will be 4600/32768) ( [B] Base SP character) is determined. As a result, in the additional bonus, the effect is executed in a manner corresponding to the determined major classification scenario groups A to D.

In the scenario group lottery table of the present embodiment, all of the scenario groups A to D can be determined only for the hit pattern 4, but all of the scenario groups A to D are also determined for the hit patterns 5 to 11. Alternatively, some may be determined.

<Scenario type lottery table>
39 and 40 are diagrams showing a scenario type lottery table (hits patterns 4 to 11). These scenario type lottery tables are tables referred to in the scenario type lottery process (S541 in FIG. 128) in the additional bonus scenario type determination process of the sub CPU 71, which will be described later. In the scenario type lottery table, the scenario of the production in the production mode of the additional bonus is divided into the middle categories, and the scenario type No. It is a table used for determining 1-9. The scenario type lottery table is prepared for each of the winning patterns 4 to 11, and the scenario groups A to D which are reference items and the scenario type No. which is a decision item. 1 to 9 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining the scenario type by random number lottery according to the reference item are defined. In the scenario type lottery table, lottery value information is referred to for each of the winning patterns 4 to 11 according to the scenario groups A to D.

In the scenario type lottery table (winning patterns 4 to 11), the scenario type No. is assigned to each of the winning patterns 4 to 11 based on the scenario groups A to D. 1 to 9 are decided by lottery. For example, in the case of the winning pattern 4, the scenario type lottery table (winning pattern 4) is referred to. According to the scenario type lottery table (winning pattern 4), in the case of scenario group A (without combo), there is a probability that the lottery rate will be 22938/32768. 1 (Aa: no combo / no resurrection) is decided, and the scenario type No. is probable that the lottery rate will be 9830/32768. 2 (Ab: no combo / failure ⇒ resurrection) is decided. In the case of scenario group B (with combo), there is a probability that the lottery rate will be 22938/32768 and the scenario type No. 4 (Ba: with combo / without resurrection) is decided, and there is a probability that the lottery rate will be 9830/32768 and the scenario type No. 5 (Bb: with combo / failure ⇒ resurrection) is decided. In the case of scenario group C (SP character based on [A]), there is a probability that the lottery rate will be 22938/32768 and the scenario type No. 7 (Ca: [Aa] -based SP character) is determined, and the scenario type No. is probable that the lottery rate will be 9830/32768. 8 (Cb: [Ab] -based SP character) is determined. In the case of scenario group D (SP character based on [B]), there is a probability that the lottery rate will be 32768/32768 and the scenario type No. 9 (Da: [Ba] -based SP character) is determined. Similarly, for the other hit patterns 5 to 11, the corresponding scenario type lottery table is selected, and the scenario type No. One of 1 to 9 is determined. As a result, in the additional bonus, the scenario type No. of the middle classification. The effect is executed in a mode corresponding to any one of 1 to 9.

In the scenario type lottery table of the present embodiment, in the case of the winning pattern 4, the scenario type No. 3 (Ac: no combo / end ⇒ resurrection) and No. 6 (Bc: with combo / end ⇒ resurrection) is not determined, but in the case of hit patterns 5 to 11, for example, the scenario type No. All or part of 1 to 9 may be determined.

<Scenario number lottery table>
41 to 49 are diagrams showing scenario number lottery tables (Aa, Ab, Ac, Ba, Bb, Bc, Ca, Cb, Da). The scenario number lottery table is a table referred to in the scenario number lottery process (S542 in FIG. 128) in the additional bonus scenario type determination process of the sub CPU 71, which will be described later. The scenario number lottery table shows the scenario of the production in the production mode of the additional bonus as the scenario type No. It is a table used for determining the scenario number subdivided by 1 to 9 (Aa, Ab, Ac, Ba, Bb, Bc, Ca, Cb, Da). The scenario number lottery table is the scenario type No. It is prepared for each of 1 to 9 (Aa, Ab, Ac, Ba, Bb, Bc, Ca, Cb, Da), and the hit patterns 4 to 11 as reference items and the decision items determined for each scenario type. The scenario number and the lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining the scenario number according to the reference item by the random number lottery are defined. In the scenario number lottery table, the scenario type No. The lottery value information is referred to for each of 1 to 9 (Aa, Ab, Ac, Ba, Bb, Bc, Ca, Cb, Da) according to the winning patterns 4 to 11.

In the scenario number lottery table (Aa, Ab, Ac, Ba, Bb, Bc, Ca, Cb, Da), the scenario type No. A scenario number is determined by lottery for each of 1 to 9 (Aa, Ab, Ac, Ba, Bb, Bc, Ca, Cb, Da) based on the winning patterns 4 to 11. For example, scenario type No. If it is 1 (Aa), the scenario number lottery table (Aa) is referred to. According to the scenario number lottery table (Aa), in the case of the winning pattern 4, there is a probability that the lottery rate will be 32768/32768. 65 is determined. In the case of hit patterns 5 and 6, the scenario type No. Since 1 (Aa) cannot be determined, the scenario number cannot be determined either. In the case of the winning pattern 4, the scenario number No. has a probability that the lottery rate will be 32768/32768. 65 is determined. In the case of the winning pattern 7, the scenario number No. has a probability that the lottery rate will be 32768/32768. 64 is determined. In the case of the hit pattern 8, the scenario number No. has a predetermined probability. Any of 51 to 63 is determined, and in the case of the hit pattern 9, the scenario number No. is determined with a predetermined probability. Any of 24 to 50 is determined, and in the case of the hit pattern 10, the scenario number No. is determined with a predetermined probability. Any of 6 to 23 is determined, and in the case of the hit pattern 11, the scenario number No. is determined with a predetermined probability. One of 1 to 5 is determined. Other scenario type No. Similarly, for 2 to 9 (Ab, Ac, Ba, Bb, Bc, Ca, Cb, Da), the corresponding scenario number lottery table is selected, and the scenario number according to the scenario type is determined. As a result, in the additional bonus, the effect is executed based on the scenario number according to the scenario type for each hit pattern.

<Additional bonus scenario table>
FIGS. 50 to 76 are diagrams showing additional bonus scenario tables (Aa, Ab, Ac, Ba, Bb, Bc, Ca, Cb, Da). The additional bonus scenario table includes a push operation button operation determination process (FIG. 113) of the sub CPU 71, a combo RUSH lottery process in the additional bonus scenario type determination process (S544 in FIG. 128), and an additional bonus roulette lottery process in the additional bonus initial process. (S550 of FIG. 129), the effect lottery determination process (FIG. 131), and the additional bonus round-to-inter-effect effect process (FIG. 142). The additional bonus scenario table is a table used to determine the specific production content of the additional bonus. The additional bonus scenario table is prepared for each scenario type (Aa, Ab, Ac, Ba, Bb, Bc, Ca, Cb, Da), and the scenario number and the actual round according to the scenario type as the reference item are executed. The number of rounds to be played, the number of additional effects such as production types A to N, "character", "combo", and "RUSH" indicating the production content to be decided, the number of remaining prize balls (number of remaining prize balls), and the total prize balls (Total number of prize balls) and total number (total number) are specified. In the additional bonus scenario table, for each scenario type (Aa, Ab, Ac, Ba, Bb, Bc, Ca, Cb, Da), based on the scenario number and the number of actual rounds, the production types A to N, the number of additions, The number of remaining prize balls, the total number of prize balls, and the total number are determined.

The production types A to N are classifications of production contents such as production images. In the present embodiment, the effect type A corresponds to the effect content of "waiting for character revival", the effect type B corresponds to the effect content of "initial value determination", and the effect type C corresponds to "character appearance failure". Corresponding to the production content, the production type D corresponds to the production content of "character appearance success-no combo", the production type E corresponds to the production content of "character appearance success-combo available", and the production type F corresponds to the production type F. , "Successful character appearance-with combo-rush into RUSH", production type G corresponds to the production content "combo RUSH", and production type H corresponds to the production content "SP character appearance". However, the production type I corresponds to the production content of "character revival", the production type J corresponds to the production content of "Rinka revival-no combo", and the production type K corresponds to "Rinka revival-combo available". The production type L corresponds to the production content of "Rinka resurrection-combo available-RUSH rush", and the production type M corresponds to the production content of "end screen-reversal". Type N corresponds to the effect content of "no effect" (see FIG. 181).

In addition, the number of "characters" added is the number for effect display that is added when the main character appears, and the number of "combos" added is the number that is added when the character appears two or more rounds in a row. It is a number for display, and the additional number of "RUSH" is a number for effect display which is added by performing a predetermined button operation when the effect button is displayed. The total number is a number for calculation reference calculated by accumulating the maximum number of prize balls per round (100 in this embodiment) for all the actual number of rounds. This maximum number of prize balls corresponds to the number for the effect display that is additionally displayed as the upper limit per round on the display screen, and the number of prize balls corresponding to the actual maximum number of prizes per round is set. It doesn't mean anything. However, as a numerical value, the number of prize balls according to the actual maximum number of prizes per round (10 in this embodiment) and the maximum number of prize balls are the same value. The total number of prize balls is the number for the production display calculated by accumulating the number of additions for each actual round. The number of remaining prize balls is based on the maximum number of prize balls to be paid out obtained by accumulating the maximum number of prize balls per round for each actual round up to the actual round at the start of execution of the actual round. It corresponds to the number for calculation reference calculated by subtracting the number of payout prize balls from the total number of prize balls. The number of remaining prize balls is counted by a remaining prize ball counter, which will be described later.

By referring to such an additional bonus scenario table, in the additional bonus, the effect images corresponding to the effect types A to N are displayed for each actual round based on the scenario number according to the scenario type, and further, the schedule. The total number of prize balls and the total number of payouts (number of payout prize balls) for the production display are displayed until the total number (planned grant quantity) is reached. In the present embodiment, even if the actual total number of payouts is less than the maximum number of prize balls to be paid out or the actual number of prizes exceeds the maximum number of prizes (the actual number of prize balls is the maximum number of prize balls). Even if the number is exceeded), the number of payout prize balls corresponding to the maximum number of payout prize balls is displayed as the total number of payouts for the production display. The difference between the total number of prize balls for the production display and the total number of payouts (number of payout prize balls) corresponds to the number of remaining prize balls.

<Combo RUSH lottery table>
FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a combo RUSH lottery table. The combo RUSH lottery table is a table referred to in the combo RUSH lottery process (S544 of FIG. 128) in the additional bonus scenario type determination process of the sub CPU 71 described later. The combo RUSH lottery table is an operation that defines the timing for partially adding or displaying all the additions according to the button operation when the number of additions corresponding to the "combo RUSH" of the production type G is determined. Number of times pattern No. It is a table used for determining 1-44. In the combo RUSH lottery table, the number of additions corresponding to the reference item "combo RUSH" and the operation number pattern No. 1-44 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining the operation count pattern by random number lottery according to the reference item are defined. In the combo RUSH lottery table, the lottery value information is referred to according to the number of additions corresponding to the "combo RUSH".

In the combo RUSH lottery table, the number of operations pattern No. is based on the number of additions corresponding to the "combo RUSH" determined by using the addition bonus scenario table. 1-44 are decided by lottery. For example, when the number of additions corresponding to "Combo RUSH" is "+200", the lottery rate has a predetermined probability that the number of operations pattern No. One of 10 to 14 is determined. Number of operations Pattern No. In 10 to 14, the additional number to be finally added and displayed is "+200", and the number of additions is set to 4 and "+50" is added and displayed each time when the predetermined number of operations is reached. It is specified. More specifically, for example, the number of operations pattern No. In 14 (5 → 3 → 5 → 5), when the number of button operations (pressing operation for pressing operation button 9A) reaches 5 times, the additional number is additionally displayed as “+50”, and then the button operation is performed. When the number of operations of is reached 3 times, the additional number is additionally displayed as "+100", then when the number of button operations reaches 5 times, the additional number is additionally displayed as "+150", and finally the button is displayed. When the number of operations reaches 5, the number of additions is finally displayed as "+200".

In this embodiment, the number of additions is increased by "+50". For example, if the number of additions to be finally added and displayed is "+400", the number of additions is eight, and "+300". If there is, the number of additions is uniquely determined according to the number of additions so that the number of additions is 6, but even if the number of additions and the number of additions can be determined in multiple ways according to the number of additions. Good. For example, when the number of additions is "+400", the number of additions is set to 4 and "+100" is added and displayed, and when the number of additions is "+300", the number of additions is set to 30 and "+10" is added and displayed. You may. Further, the number to be added may be changed for each addition display. For example, when the number of additions is "+400", "+100", "+50", and "+250" may be added in sequence.

<Roulette lottery table>
FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a roulette lottery table. The roulette lottery table is a table referred to in the additional bonus roulette lottery process (S550 in FIG. 129) in the additional bonus initial process of the sub CPU 71, which will be described later. In the roulette lottery table, when the number of additions corresponding to the "initial value determination" of the effect type B is determined, the initial value pattern No. It is a table used for determining 1 to 6. In the roulette lottery table, the initial value of the number of additions as a reference item and the initial value pattern No. which is a decision item. 1 to 6 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining an initial value pattern by a random number lottery according to a reference item are defined. In the roulette lottery table, the lottery value information is referred to according to the initial value of the number of additions.

In the roulette lottery table, the initial value pattern No. is based on the number of additions (initial value) corresponding to the "initial value determination" of the effect type B determined by using the addition bonus scenario table. 1 to 6 (200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 1500) are decided by lottery. The initial values (200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 1500) correspond to the additional numbers that are additionally displayed in the 1st round of the actual round. In the roulette lottery table of the present embodiment, the lottery value information is defined so that one initial value pattern uniquely corresponding to the initial value of the number of additions is determined.

<Roulette pattern lottery table>
FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a roulette pattern lottery table. The roulette pattern lottery table is a table referred to in the additional bonus roulette pattern lottery process (S551 in FIG. 129) in the additional bonus initial process of the sub CPU 71, which will be described later. The roulette pattern lottery table has a roulette pattern No. 1 indicating the mode of the roulette or the stop button to be displayed according to the initial value pattern when the initial value pattern is determined using the roulette lottery table. It is a table used for determining 1-5. The roulette pattern lottery table has an initial value pattern (200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 1500) as a reference item and a roulette pattern No. 1 to 5 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining a roulette pattern by a random number lottery according to a reference item are defined. In the roulette pattern lottery table, the lottery value information is referred to according to the initial value pattern.

In the roulette pattern lottery table, the roulette pattern No. is determined based on the initial value patterns (200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 1500) determined by using the roulette lottery table. Any of 1 to 5 is decided by lottery. In the roulette pattern lottery table, for example, when the initial value pattern is 200, there is a probability that the lottery rate will be 27768 / 32768, and the roulette pattern No. Roulette pattern No. 1 is determined and the lottery rate is 5000/32768. 2 is decided. Roulette pattern No. In 2, the roulette with 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, and 1500 is displayed as the outcome, and the effect button is displayed with the display size as the middle button. For example, when the initial value pattern is 1500, roulette with 700 to 1400 rolls that cannot be determined as the initial value may be displayed. In this case, it is possible to notify the player that the initial value is determined as 1500 from a roulette display mode different from the usual one.

<Title decision lottery table>
FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a title determination lottery table. The title determination lottery table is a table referred to in the additional bonus title determination process (S552 in FIG. 129) in the additional bonus initial process of the sub CPU 71, which will be described later. The title determination lottery table has a title pattern No. that indicates a change in the display color of the title displayed at the time of the additional bonus. It is a table used to determine 1 to 14 based on hit patterns 4 to 11. The title determination lottery table includes hit patterns 4 to 11 as reference items and title pattern Nos. 1 to 14 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining a title pattern by a random number lottery according to a reference item are defined. In the title determination lottery table, lottery value information is referred to according to the winning patterns 4 to 11.

In the title determination lottery table, the title pattern No. is determined based on the winning patterns 4 to 11. One of 1 to 14 is decided by lottery. When the display image of the roulette is displayed, the pressing operation button 9A is operated in order to stop the variable display of the roulette. In the title determination lottery table, the title pattern No. is used to change the display color of the title before and after the operation of the pressing operation button 9A for stopping the variable display of the roulette wheel. 1 to 14 are determined. For example, the title pattern No. In 2 (blue → yellow), the display color of the title is blue before the operation of the pressing operation button 9A, and the display color of the title is yellow after the operation of the pressing operation button 9A. The display color of the title may not change at all before and after the button operation, or it may be set to change twice or more, and the color may be changed to the set color each time the button operation is performed. You may.

<Chance up lottery table>
FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a chance-up lottery table. The chance-up lottery table is a table referred to in the chance-up lottery process (S562 in FIG. 130) in the additional bonus effect determination process of the sub CPU 71, which will be described later. The chance-up lottery table has a chance-up pattern No. that indicates the aura color arranged on the background of the character and the display size of the effect button displayed before the number of additions is displayed as the effect of the addition bonus. 1 to 6 are the character production pattern Nos. 1 to 6 of the character type lottery table described later. It is a table used for determination based on 1 to 30. The chance-up lottery table has a character production pattern No. which is a reference item. 1 to 30 and the chance-up pattern No. which is a decision item. 1 to 6 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining a chance-up pattern according to a reference item by a random number lottery are defined. In the chance-up lottery table, the character production pattern No. The lottery value information is referred to according to 1 to 30.

At the chance-up lottery table, the character production pattern No. Chance up pattern No. 1 to 30 One of 1 to 6 is decided by lottery. For example, chance up pattern No. In 2 (blue effect large button), the character in which blue is arranged as the aura color is displayed, and the effect button is displayed with the display size as the large button before the additional number is displayed. In this embodiment, the chance-up pattern No. The number of additions varies depending on 1 to 6. Further, as the number of additions increases, the probability that the aura color is determined in the order of blue <green <red increases. When the large button is decided, the additional number is always added.

<Character type lottery table>
FIGS. 82 to 86 are diagrams showing a character type lottery table. The character type lottery table is a table referred to in the effect lottery determination process (FIG. 131) of the sub CPU 71, which will be described later. In the character type lottery table, the character effect pattern No. indicating the appearance mode of the character or object and the number of additions (hereinafter, referred to as “additional value”) accompanying the appearance. It is a table used for determining 1 to 30 based on an effect type and an addition value. In particular, FIG. 82 shows a character type lottery table corresponding to the effect type C or H. FIG. 83 shows a character type lottery table corresponding to the case where the total number of prize balls reaches the upper limit value (total number 1500) in the production type D or J. FIG. 84 shows a character type lottery table corresponding to the case where the effect type D or J is determined and the effect type F is determined in the next round, and the effect type D or J is produced in the next round. It shows the character type lottery table corresponding to the case where other than the type F is determined. FIG. 85 shows a character type lottery table corresponding to the case where the effect type is E, F, K, or L and the addition value due to the appearance of the character is determined to be “+50”, and the effect types E, F, K, Alternatively, it indicates a character type lottery table corresponding to the case where the value is L and the addition value due to the appearance of the character is determined to be “+100”. FIG. 86 shows a character type lottery table corresponding to the case where the effect type is E, F, K, or L and the addition value due to the appearance of the character is determined to be “+150”, and the effect types E, F, K, Alternatively, it indicates a character type lottery table corresponding to the case where the value is L and the addition value due to the appearance of the character is determined to be "+200".

In the character type lottery table (effect type C or H) shown in FIG. 82, the effect types C and H, which are reference items, and the character effect pattern No., which is a decision item, are shown. 1 to 30 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining a character effect pattern by a random number lottery according to a reference item are defined. In this character type lottery table (effect type C or H), lottery value information is referred to according to the effect types C and H. In the character type lottery table (effect type C or H), in the case of the effect type C, the character effect pattern No. When 1 (character appearance failure) is determined and the effect type is H, the character effect pattern No. 2 (SP character appearance addition value "MAX") is determined. The addition value "MAX" is an effect of performing addition display so that the total number of prize balls becomes "1500" due to the appearance of the SP character, as shown in the 5th round in the additional bonus scenario table (Ca) of FIG. 74, for example. It corresponds to. In this embodiment, the character production pattern No. is referred to by referring to the character type lottery table (effect type C or H). Although 1 and 2 are determined, the character production pattern is uniquely determined for the production types C and H, so the character production pattern should be determined without using a table or a lottery process using random numbers. You may.

In the character type lottery table (effect type D or J + upper limit reached) shown in FIG. 83, the added value (+50, +100, +150, +200) due to the appearance of the character as the reference item and the character production pattern No. 1 to 30 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining a character effect pattern by a random number lottery according to a reference item are defined. The character type lottery table (effect type D or J + upper limit reached) is, for example, the scenario number No. in the additional bonus scenario table (Bb) of FIG. 71. As shown in the 13th R of 21, it is a table referred to when the total number of prize balls reaches "1500" by the addition value "150" by the "character". In this character type lottery table (effect type D or J + upper limit value reached), lottery value information is referred to according to the added value (+50, +100, +150, +200) due to the appearance of the character. In the character type lottery table (effect type D or J + upper limit reached), when the addition value is "+50", the character production pattern No. 11 (Cow character bottom x 2 appearance addition value +50 (reaching 1500)) is determined, and when the addition value is "+100", the character production pattern No. 12 (Cow character bottom x 2 appearance addition value +100 (reaching 1500)) is determined, and when the addition value is "+150", the character production pattern No. 13 (Cow character bottom x 2 appearance addition value +150 (reaching 1500)) is determined, and when the addition value is "+200", the character production pattern No. 14 (Cow character bottom x 2 appearance addition value +200 (reaching 1500)) is determined. In this embodiment, the character production pattern No. is referred to by referring to the character type lottery table (effect type D or J + upper limit reached). 11 to 14 are determined, but since the determination items (character production pattern) are uniquely determined for the reference items, the character production pattern is determined without using a table or a lottery process using random numbers. You may do so. Further, a plurality of character effect patterns may be associated with each of the added values (+50, +100, +150, +200).

In the character type lottery table (effect type D or J + production type F of the next round) and the character type lottery table (other than the production type D or J + production type F of the next round) shown in FIG. 84, characters appear as reference items. (+50, +100, +150, +200) and the character production pattern No. 1 to 30 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining a character effect pattern by a random number lottery according to a reference item are defined. In these character type lottery tables (effect type D or J + production type F in the next round) and character type lottery tables (other than production type D or J + production type F in the next round), the added value (+50) due to the appearance of characters , +100, +150, +200), the lottery value information is referred to. In the character type lottery table (effect type D or J + production type F of the next round) on the upper side of FIG. 84, when the addition value is “+50”, the character production pattern No. 3 (appearance on cow character +50) or No. 7 (on the cow character x 2 appearance addition value +50) is determined, and when the addition value is "+100", the character production pattern No. 4 (appearance under cow character addition value +100) or No. 8 (addition value of x2 appearing on the cow character +100) is determined, and when the addition value is "+150", the character production pattern No. 5 (cow character right appearance addition value +150) or No. 9 (on the cow character x 2 appearance addition value +150) is determined, and when the addition value is "+200", the character production pattern No. 6 (cow character left appearance addition value +200) or No. 10 (on the cow character x 2 appearance addition value +200) is determined. In the character type lottery table at the lower side of FIG. 84 (other than the effect type D or J + the effect type F of the next round), when the addition value is "+50", the character effect pattern No. 3 (appearance on cow character addition value +50) is determined, and when the addition value is "+100", the character production pattern No. 4 (appearance under cow character addition value +100) is determined, and when the addition value is “+150”, the character production pattern No. 5 (cow character right appearance addition value +150) is determined, and when the addition value is “+200”, the character production pattern No. 6 (cow character left appearance addition value +200) is uniquely determined. In addition, in the character type lottery table (other than the production type D or J + the production type F of the next round) on the lower side of FIG. 84, the character production pattern No. Although 3 to 6 are uniquely determined, the character effect pattern may be determined without using a table or a lottery process using random numbers. Further, a plurality of character effect patterns may be associated with each of the added values (+50, +100, +150, +200).

The character type lottery table (effect type E or F or K or L + character appearance addition value +50) and the character type lottery table (effect type E or F or K or L + character appearance addition value +100) shown in FIG. 85 are , The added value (+50, +100, +150, +200) due to the appearance of the character as the reference item, and the character production pattern No. which is the determination item. 1 to 30 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining a character effect pattern by a random number lottery according to a reference item are defined. In these character type lottery tables (effect type E or F or K or L + added value due to character appearance +50) and character type lottery table (effect type E or F or K or L + added value due to character appearance +100), The lottery value information is referred to according to the added value (+50, +100, +150, +200) by the combo. In the character type lottery table on the upper side of FIG. 85 (effect type E or F or K or L + added value due to character appearance +50), when the added value is “+50”, the character effect pattern No. 15 (on the cow character + sun appearance addition value +50 combo addition value +50) is determined, and when the addition value is "+100", the character production pattern No. 16 (on the cow character + sun appearance addition value +50 combo addition value +100) is determined, and when the addition value is "+150", the character production pattern No. 17 (on the cow character + sun x 2 appearance addition value +50 combo addition value +150) is determined, and when the addition value is "+200", the character production pattern No. 18 (on the cow character + sun x 2 appearance addition value + 50 combo addition value + 200) is uniquely determined. In the character type lottery table at the lower side of FIG. 85 (effect type E or F or K or L + addition value due to character appearance +100), when the addition value is “+50”, the character production pattern No. 19 (on the cow character + month appearance addition value +100 combo addition value +50) is determined, and when the addition value is "+100", the character production pattern No. 20 (on the cow character + month appearance addition value +100 combo addition value +100) is determined, and when the addition value is "+150", the character production pattern No. 21 (on the cow character + month x 2 appearance addition value +100 combo addition value +150) is determined, and when the addition value is "+200", the character production pattern No. 22 (on the cow character + month x 2 appearance addition value +100 combo addition value +200) is uniquely determined. Although the character effect pattern is uniquely determined also in these character type lottery tables, the character effect pattern may be determined without using the table or the lottery process using random numbers. Further, a plurality of character effect patterns may be associated with each of the added values (+50, +100, +150, +200).

The character type lottery table (effect type E or F or K or L + character appearance addition value +150) and the character type lottery table (effect type E or F or K or L + character appearance addition value +200) also shown in FIG. , The added value (+50, +100, +150, +200) due to the appearance of the character as the reference item, and the character production pattern No. which is the determination item. 1 to 30 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining a character effect pattern by a random number lottery according to a reference item are defined. Also in these character type lottery tables (effect type E or F or K or L + added value due to character appearance +150) and character type lottery table (effect type E or F or K or L + added value due to character appearance +200). The lottery value information is referred to according to the added value (+50, +100, +150, +200) by the combo. In the character type lottery table on the upper side of FIG. 86 (effect type E or F or K or L + addition value due to character appearance +150), when the addition value is “+50”, the character production pattern No. 23 (on the cow character + youth character appearance addition value +150 combo addition value +50) is determined, and when the addition value is "+100", the character production pattern No. 24 (on the cow character + youth character appearance addition value +150 combo addition value +100) is determined, and when the addition value is "+150", the character production pattern No. 25 (on the cow character + youth character appearance addition value +150 combo addition value +150) is determined, and when the addition value is "+200", the character production pattern No. 26 (on the cow character + youth character appearance addition value +150 combo addition value +200) is uniquely determined. In the character type lottery table at the lower side of FIG. 86 (effect type E or F or K or L + addition value due to character appearance +200), when the addition value is “+50”, the character production pattern No. 27 (on the cow character + middle-aged character appearance addition value +200 combo addition value +50) is determined, and when the addition value is "+100", the character production pattern No. 28 (on the cow character + middle-aged character appearance addition value +200 combo addition value +100) is determined, and when the addition value is "+150", the character production pattern No. 29 (on the cow character + middle-aged character appearance addition value +200 combo addition value +150) is determined, and when the addition value is "+200", the character production pattern No. 30 (on the cow character + middle-aged character appearance addition value +200 combo addition value +200) is uniquely determined. Although the character effect pattern is uniquely determined also in these character type lottery tables, the character effect pattern may be determined without using the table or the lottery process using random numbers. Further, a plurality of character effect patterns may be associated with each of the added values (+50, +100, +150, +200).

<Cow character revival lottery table>
FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a cow character revival lottery table. The cow character revival lottery table is a table referred to in the process (S581 of FIG. 131) included in the effect lottery determination process of the sub CPU 71, which will be described later. The cow character revival lottery table has the aura color arranged on the background of the effect button, the display size of the effect button, and the cow character revival pattern No. which indicates failure or revival as a result according to the button operation, as the effect of the additional bonus. 1 to 7 is a table used for determining based on the effect types A and I. The cow character revival lottery table includes the production types A and I, which are reference items, and the cow character revival pattern No., which is a decision item. 1 to 7 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining the cow character revival pattern by random number lottery according to the reference item are defined. In the cow character revival lottery table, lottery value information is referred to according to the production types A and I.

In the cow character revival lottery table, the cow character revival pattern No. is based on the production types A and I. One of 1 to 7 is decided by lottery. For example, in the production type A, the cow character revival pattern No. One of 1 to 4 is determined, and in the production type I, the cow character revival pattern No. One of 5 to 7 is determined.

<Additional bonus end screen lottery table>
FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a table for the additional bonus end screen lottery. The additional bonus end screen lottery table is a table referred to in the additional bonus end screen lottery process (S590 in FIG. 132) in the additional bonus end screen determination process of the sub CPU 71 described later. Additional bonus end screen The lottery table shows the end display pattern No. that indicates the display message after the end of the last real round of the additional bonus. It is a table used to determine 1 to 3 based on hit patterns 4 to 11. In the additional bonus end screen lottery table, the hit patterns 4 to 11 which are reference items and the end display pattern No. which is a decision item are shown. 1 to 3 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining the end display pattern by random number lottery according to the reference item are defined. In the additional bonus end screen lottery table, the lottery value information is referred to according to the winning patterns 4 to 11.

In the additional bonus end screen lottery table, the end display pattern No. is based on the winning patterns 4 to 11. One of 1 to 3 is decided by lottery. In the present embodiment, the end display pattern No. is set according to the hit patterns 4 to 11. Any of 1 to 3 is uniquely determined. In the additional bonus end screen lottery table, the end display pattern is uniquely determined according to the winning pattern, but the end display pattern is determined without using the table or the lottery process using random numbers. You may. Further, a plurality of end display patterns may be associated with one hit pattern. Further, depending on the hit pattern, the end display pattern may not be determined. For example, in the case of hit patterns 9 to 11, the end display pattern may not be determined.

<Title determination lottery table>
FIG. 89 is a diagram showing a title determination lottery table. The title determination lottery table is a table referred to in the additional bonus title determination process (S591 in FIG. 132) in the additional bonus end screen determination process of the sub CPU 71, which will be described later. The title determination lottery table has a title pattern No. indicating the title displayed at the end of the additional bonus (after the display of the additional bonus end screen). It is a table used for determining 1 to 5 based on the value of the cumulative payout prize ball counter described later. In the title determination lottery table, the value of the cumulative payout prize ball counter, which is a reference item, and the title pattern No., which is a determination item, are displayed. 1 to 5 are specified. In the title determination lottery table, the title pattern No. is set according to the value of the cumulative payout prize ball counter. One of 1 to 5 is determined. The cumulative payout prize ball counter is the number of prize balls according to the actual round in the big hit game state (including the case of the consecutive villas described later) during the period from the start of the big hit game state to the transition to the non-probability change non-time saving game state. (Actual number of rounds x maximum number of prize balls per round is 100) is counted.

In the title determination lottery table, for example, when the value of the cumulative payout prize ball counter is 4999 or less, the title pattern No. 1 (beginner) is decided, and this title pattern No. The title "Beginner" is displayed at the end of the additional bonus according to 1. In the title determination lottery table, the title pattern No. is uniquely determined according to the value of the cumulative payout prize ball counter. Although 1 to 5 are determined, for example, different title patterns may be determined even if the values of the cumulative payout prize ball counters are the same.

[Control by main CPU]
Next, the processes executed by the main CPU 61 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 90 to 109.

[Main processing by main CPU]
90 and 91 are flowcharts showing the main processing executed by the main CPU 61. This main process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 90, in S10, the main CPU 61 performs the watchdog timer disable setting process. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S11.

In S11, the main CPU 61 performs input / output port setting processing. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S12.

In S12, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not it is in a power failure detection state. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the power failure detection signal is HIGH (high level). If the power failure detection signal is not HIGH, it is determined that it is in the power failure detection state and processing is transferred to S12. If the power failure detection signal is HIGH, it is determined that it is not in the power failure detection state and processing is performed in S13. Transfer.

In S13, the main CPU 61 performs the sub-control reception reception wait processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 waits until the sub-control circuit 70 receives a signal. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S14.

In S14, the main CPU 61 performs a process of permitting writing to the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S15.

In S15, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the backup clear switch 81 (see FIG. 6) is ON. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S30 (see FIG. 91) when it determines that the backup clear switch 81 is ON, and shifts to S16 when it determines that the backup clear switch 81 is not ON. Move the process.

In S16, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a power failure detection flag. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S17 when it determines that there is a power failure detection flag, and shifts the process to S30 (see FIG. 91) when it determines that there is no power failure detection flag. ..

In S17, the main CPU 61 performs a process of checking the damage in the work area and calculating the work damage check value. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S18.

In S18, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the work damage check value is a normal value. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S19 when it determines that the work damage check value is a normal value, and shifts the process to S30 when it determines that the work damage check value is not a normal value. ..

In S19, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting 7FFEH in the stack pointer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S20.

In S20, the main CPU 61 performs the initial setting process of the work area at the time of power recovery. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S21.

In S21, the main CPU 61 performs the probability change state display notification setting process at the time of power recovery. Specifically, the main CPU 61 displays that the jackpot winning probability is in the high probability state in the case of the probability variation game state. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S22. The display to be notified may be configured to end at the first fluctuation start or fluctuation end after the power is turned on.

In S22, the main CPU 61 performs a process of transmitting a command at the time of power recovery. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of transmitting a command for returning to the gaming state at the time of power failure to the sub control circuit 70. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S23.

In S23, the main CPU 61 performs initial settings of devices around the main CPU 61. When this processing is completed, the processing is transferred to S24, and the processing is returned to the address before the power failure, that is, the program address indicated by the program counter returned from the stack area.

As shown in FIG. 91, in S30, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the stack pointer to 8000H. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S31.

In S31, the main CPU 61 performs a process of acquiring the initial value of the random number related to the hit determination. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S32.

In S32, the main CPU 61 performs the entire work area clearing process. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S33.

In S33, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting an initial value of a random number related to hit determination. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S34.

In S34, the main CPU 61 performs the initial setting process of the work area at the time of the initialization of the RAM. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S35.

In S35, the main CPU 61 performs a process of transmitting a command at the time of initialization of the main RAM 63 to the sub-control circuit 70. Further, in the sub control circuit 70, the main CPU 61 is initialized based on the received command. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S36.

In S36, the main CPU 61 performs initial settings of devices around the main CPU 61. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S37.

In S37, the main CPU 61 performs an interrupt prohibition process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of prohibiting the interrupt process. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S38.

In S38, the main CPU 61 performs the initial value random number update process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the initial random number counter value. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S39.

In S39, the main CPU 61 performs an interrupt permission process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of permitting the interrupt process. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S40.

In S40, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the random number for selecting the effect condition. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the effect random number counter value. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S41.

In S41, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 refers to the system timer monitoring timer value stored in the main RAM 63, and if the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more, the process is transferred to S42 and the system timer monitoring timer value is 3. If it is not the above, the process is transferred to S37.

In S42, the main CPU 61 performs a process of subtracting 3 from the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S43.

In S43, the main CPU 61 performs a timer update process. In this process, the main CPU 61 measures the waiting time timer for synchronizing the main control circuit 60 and the sub control circuit 70, and the opening time of the big winning opening that opens when a big hit or a small hit occurs. Large winning opening opening time timer, security signal output timer for measuring the minimum output period of the security signal output from the main CPU 61 to the hall computer 100 via the external terminal plate 80 when it is detected that there is a fraudulent activity, etc. , Executes the process of updating various timers. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S44.

In S44, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol control process. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol control process. The main CPU 61 extracts a hit determination random value and a hit symbol determination random value according to the detection signals from the first start winning opening switch 320 and the second starting winning opening switch 330, and stores them in the main ROM 62. With reference to the big hit determination table (not shown), it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery (big hit and small hit lottery) has been won, and the determination result is stored in the main RAM 63. The special symbol control process of S44 will be described later with reference to FIG. 100. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S45.

In S45, the main CPU 61 normally performs a symbol control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts the normal symbol determination random value and the normal symbol determination random value according to the detection signal from the passing gate switch 350, and stores the extracted normal symbol determination random value and the main ROM 62. Based on the ordinary symbol winning table (not shown), it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol lottery has been won, and the result of this determination, the random value for determining the ordinary symbol, and the ordinary symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 62. Based on (not shown), it is determined whether the symbol is a lost symbol or a hit symbol, and a process of storing the result of the determination is performed. If the normal symbol lottery is won, the result of the determination indicating the winning symbol is stored, and if the non-winning symbol is won, the result of the determination indicating the lost symbol is stored. When the result of the determination indicating the winning symbol is stored, the blade member 34 is opened three times in 1.3 seconds, four times in 1.4 seconds, or six times in 1.8 seconds, for example. .. That is, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the blade member 34 is opened, and when the blade member 34 is in the open state, the game ball is likely to win a prize in the second starting port 33. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S46.

In S46, the main CPU 61 performs a symbol display device control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 transmits a control signal for driving the liquid crystal display device 4 according to the result of the special symbol control process stored in the main RAM 63 in S44 and S45 and the result of the normal symbol control process. Performs the process of storing in. The main CPU 61 transmits the control signal to the LED unit 5. Based on the received control signal, the LED unit 5 causes the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 to display the first special symbol or the second special symbol in a variable manner and a stop display. Further, the normal symbol display unit 51 of the LED unit 5 fluctuates and stops the normal symbol based on the received control signal. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S47.

In S47, the main CPU 61 performs game information data generation processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 generates data related to the game information signal to be transmitted to the stand computer or the hall computer 100, and performs a process of storing the data in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S48.

In S48, the main CPU 61 performs the symbol hold number data generation process. In this process, the main CPU 61 has the first start port switches 320 and the second, which are detected in the special symbol-related switch check process and the normal symbol-related switch check process (S91, S92 in FIG. 94) in the timer interrupt process described later. The first is based on the detection signal from the start port switch 330 and the passing gate switch 350, and the update result of the hold number data stored in the main RAM 63 which is updated according to the execution of the variation display of the special symbol and the normal symbol. A process of storing a control signal for driving the special symbol hold display unit 55, the second special symbol hold display unit 56, and the normal symbol hold display unit 52 in the main RAM 63 is performed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S49.

In S49, the main CPU 61 performs port output processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of outputting a control signal stored in the main RAM 63 from each port in the above steps or the like. Specifically, the main CPU 61 outputs a security signal to the hall computer 100 via the external terminal plate 80, an LED power supply (common signal) for lighting the LED, a first grand prize opening shutter 36A, and a second grand prize. It supplies solenoid power for driving a solenoid that opens and closes the mouth shutter 37A and opens and closes the blade member 34. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S50.

In S50, the main CPU 61 performs command control processing related to the winning opening. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of controlling a winning opening-related command. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S37.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the processing in S38 to S50 of the main processing by the main CPU 61 constitutes the gaming processing.

[Timer interrupt processing by the main CPU 61]
FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 61. This timer interrupt process is executed in the following step units. The main CPU 61 may interrupt the main process and execute the timer interrupt process even when the main process is being executed. This timer interrupt process is a process performed according to a clock pulse generated from a clock pulse generation circuit (not shown) at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms). In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the timer interrupt process by the main CPU 61 constitutes the interrupt process.

As shown in FIG. 92, in S60, the main CPU 61 performs a register save process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of saving the register. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S61.

In S61, the main CPU 61 performs a timer update process. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of increasing the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 63 by +1. The system timer monitoring timer is a monitoring timer for executing a predetermined process (special symbol control process, etc.) on condition that the timer interrupt process is started a predetermined number of times (three times). The timer update process of S61 will be described later with reference to FIG. 93. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S62.

In S62, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting clear data in the watchdog output data. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets clear data in the watchdog output data and transmits a control signal based on the watchdog output data to the initial reset circuit 64. The initial reset circuit 64 releases the voltage of the capacitor based on the received control signal. When a predetermined time (for example, 3100 ms) determined by the capacity of the capacitor connected to the initial reset circuit 64 elapses after the watchdog timer provided in the initial reset circuit 64 is cleared, the initial reset circuit 64 to the main CPU 61 A system reset signal is output to. The main CPU 61 enters the system reset state when a system reset signal is input from the initial reset circuit 64. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S63.

In S63, the main CPU 61 performs random number update processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating a random number. For example, the main CPU 61 updates random numbers such as a hit determination random number counter, a hit symbol determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination random number counter, and an effect condition determination random number counter. If the update timing of the counter value is undefined, the random number counter for hit judgment and the random number counter for hit symbol determination will lack fairness. Therefore, in order to guarantee this, the timing is fixed every 2 ms. I am trying to update with. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S64.

In S64, the main CPU 61 performs a switch input process. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not each switch corresponding to each winning area or the like has detected a winning. When, for example, the main CPU 61 detects a winning, the bit corresponding to the winning area determined to have won is set to "1 (ON)". The switch input process of S64 will be described later with reference to FIG. 94. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S65.

In S65, the main CPU 61 performs a payout control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 checks whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the first winning opening 36, the second winning opening 37, the first starting opening 32, the second starting opening 33, and the general winning opening 40. If there is a prize, the payout request command corresponding to each is transmitted to the payout / launch control circuit 82. That is, the main CPU 61 sets a command for paying out the prize ball corresponding to the winning area whose bit is "1 (ON)" with the winning of the game ball from the payout device 83, and also sets the set command. Is transmitted to the payout / launch control circuit 82. When this command is set, the bit corresponding to the winning area that triggered the command set is controlled to "0 (OFF)". When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S66.

In S66, the main CPU 61 performs command transmission control processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 transmits each set command to the command input port 74 of the sub-control circuit 70 through the command output port 66. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S67.

In S67, the main CPU 61 performs a register reset process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of returning the register to the address before the interrupt process. When this processing is completed, this timer interrupt processing routine is terminated.

[Timer update process]
FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing a timer update process executed by the main CPU 61. This timer update process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 93, in S70, the main CPU 61 adds 1 to the value of the system timer monitoring timer. The system timer monitoring timer is a timer for counting the number of times the timer interrupt process is executed (started). In the present embodiment, when the number of times the timer interrupt process is executed (started) reaches a predetermined condition (3 times), a predetermined process (special symbol control process, etc.) is executed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S71.

In S71, the main CPU 61 subtracts 1 from the value of the waiting time timer. The waiting time timer is a timer for timing various execution waiting times. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S72.

In S72, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is "0". The residual ball monitoring timer is a ball passage from the first large winning opening 36 to the first large winning opening count switch 360, or a ball passage from the second large winning opening 37 to the second large winning opening count switch 370. It is a timer for measuring the residual sphere monitoring processing time for monitoring the residual spheres remaining in. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is "0", it shifts the process to S77, and when it determines that the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S77. , S73. If the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is "0" and the game ball is detected by the large winning opening count switch when the round game is not in progress, an error may be notified.

In S73, the main CPU 61 subtracts 1 from the value of the residual ball monitoring timer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S74.

In S74, the main CPU 61 again performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is “0”. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is not "0", it shifts the process to S77, and when it determines that the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S77. , S75.

In S75, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the specific area 38A is open. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S77 when it determines that the specific area 38A is not open, and shifts the process to S76 when it determines that the specific area 38A is open.

In S76, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the specific area closure data. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets data for closing the specific area 38A, and drives the displacement member solenoid 390 based on the control signal based on this data. As a result, the displacement member 39 is driven so as to close the specific region 38A. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S77.

In S77, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the discharge monitoring timer is "0". The discharge monitoring timer is a timer for measuring the discharge ball monitoring processing time for monitoring the discharge balls discharged by winning a prize in the second large winning opening 37. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S80 when it determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is "0", and when it determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is not "0", it is S78. Move the process to. In the present embodiment, a smaller value (shorter time) is set in the residual ball monitoring timer than in the discharge monitoring timer, but they may be the same or a larger value (longer time).

In S78, the main CPU 61 subtracts 1 from the value of the discharge monitoring timer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S79.

In S79, the main CPU 61 again performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the discharge monitoring timer is “0”. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is not "0", it terminates this timer update processing routine, and when it determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is "0". Moves the process to S80.

In S80, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is "1" or "11". The large winning opening opening count counter is a counter used to identify the 1st or 11th R opening and closing of the second large winning opening 37. Therefore, the value of the large winning opening opening count counter does not count the number of times that the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37 are actually opened, but is added by 1 for each round. is there. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening counter is neither "1" nor "11", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S82, and the value of the large winning opening opening counter is set to S82. If it is determined to be "1" or "11", the process is transferred to S81.

In S81, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag, which will be described later, is a value (04H) indicating the process of opening the large winning opening. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the processing during opening of the large winning opening, the main CPU 61 terminates this timer update processing routine, and the control state flag indicates processing during opening of the large winning opening. If it is determined that the value is not (04H), the process is transferred to S82.

In S82, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second large winning opening winning counter is larger than the value of the ejection ball counter. The second large winning opening winning counter is a counter for counting the number of winnings to the second large winning opening 37 detected by the second large winning opening count switch 370. The discharge ball counter is a counter for counting the number of discharge balls of the game ball detected by the specific area switch 380A and the non-specific area switch 380B. Basically, the value of the second large winning opening winning counter and the value of the ejection ball counter are the same. In this process, if the value of the second special winning opening winning counter is not larger than the value of the ejection ball counter, the main CPU 61 terminates this timer update processing routine, and the value of the second winning opening winning counter becomes If it is larger than the value of the discharge ball counter, the process is transferred to S83. The value set in the discharge monitoring timer is longer than the time required from the time when the game ball is detected by the second large winning opening count switch 370 to the time when it is detected by the specific area switch 380A or the non-specific area switch 380B. Corresponds to time. Therefore, if it is determined in this process that the value of the 2nd big winning opening winning counter is larger than the value of the ejection ball counter, the ball is clogged inside the 2nd big winning opening 37 or the 2nd big due to so-called goto action. It is assumed that only the winning opening count switch 370 is detected.

In S83, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a discharge error command. The discharge error command corresponds to a command for notifying that the power has not been discharged normally. This discharge error command is transmitted in the command transmission control process in the timer interrupt process. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S84.

In S84, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the second large winning opening winning counter in the discharge ball counter. This prevents the discharge error command from being sent repeatedly. When this processing is completed, the timer update processing routine is terminated. The discharge error command may be repeatedly transmitted without performing the processing of S84.

[Switch input processing]
FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing a switch input process executed by the main CPU 61. This switch input process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 94, in S90, the main CPU 61 performs a fraud detection switch check process. In this process, the main CPU 61 confirms the detection state of a radio wave sensor (not shown) capable of detecting radio waves, a magnetic sensor capable of detecting magnetism, a vibration sensor capable of detecting vibration, and the like. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S91. If any of the above sensors is in the detected state, an error notification may be performed, and at that time, for example, even if the large winning opening count switch detects the winning of the game ball, the winning is invalidated. You may try to do so.

In S91, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol-related switch check process. This special symbol-related switch check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 95. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S92.

In S92, the main CPU 61 performs a normal symbol-related switch check process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not there is an input of the passing gate switch 350, in other words, whether or not a game ball is detected, and if it is determined that there is an input, the pending number is an upper limit (for example,). It is determined whether or not the number is 4), and if it is determined that the number is the upper limit, this process is terminated. When it is determined that it is not the upper limit, the hit judgment random number value is extracted from the hit judgment random number counter of the normal symbol game, and the hit symbol determination random number value is further extracted from the hit symbol determination random number counter. Performs the process of storing in the symbol storage area. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S93.

In S93, the main CPU 61 performs a prize ball-related switch check process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the general winning opening left switch 400A, the general winning opening right switch 400B, the first starting winning opening switch 320, and the second starting winning opening switch 330 have been input. When it is determined that the general winning opening left switch 400A or the general winning opening right switch 400B has been input, a process of adding 1 to the value of the general winning opening winning ball counter is performed, and the first starting winning opening switch 320 or the second winning opening switch 320 or the second. When it is determined that the start opening winning opening switch 330 has been input, a process of adding 1 to the value of the starting opening winning counter corresponding to each is performed. When this processing is completed, this switch input processing routine is terminated.

[Special symbol related switch check processing]
FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing a special symbol-related switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol-related switch check process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 95, in S100, the main CPU 61 performs the first start port switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 96. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S101.

In S101, the main CPU 61 performs the second start port switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 97. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S102.

In S102, the main CPU 61 performs the first large winning opening switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 98. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S103.

In S103, the main CPU 61 performs the second big winning opening switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 99. When this process is completed, this special symbol-related switch check process routine is terminated.

[1st start port switch check process]
FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing a first start port switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This first start port switch check process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 96, in S110, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 32 is detected based on the detection signal from the first starting port switch 320. Do. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the bit of the first start port winning detection counter corresponding to the detection signal from the first start port switch 320 is "1 (ON)", and determines whether or not the bit of the first start port winning detection counter is "1 (ON)". When the bit of the winning detection counter is "1 (ON)", the process is transferred to S111, and when the bit of the winning detection counter is not "1 (ON)", this first starting port is used. Terminates the switch check processing routine.

In S111, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of start memories of the first special symbol is 4 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the number of start memories of the first special symbol, that is, the number of holdings is 4 or more. If it is determined that the number of holdings is 4 or more, the first start port switch check processing routine is terminated, and if it is determined that the number of holdings is not 4 or more, the processing is transferred to S112.

In S112, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the number of start memories of the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the value of the number of reserved first special symbols stored in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S113.

In S113, the main CPU 61 performs various random number value acquisition processes. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts the hit determination random number value of the special symbol game from the hit determination random number counter by so-called special symbol lottery, and further extracts the hit symbol determination random number value from the hit symbol determination random number counter. , The process of extracting the random number value for determining the effect condition from the random number counter for determining the effect condition and storing it in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63 is performed.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol start storage area includes the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), and is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0). Judgment results based on the hit judgment random numbers are derived and displayed by the first special symbol, and various types acquired by winning a prize in the first starting port 32 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The random number values of are sequentially stored in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) as start storage. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S114.

In S114, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the first special symbol variation state data. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the first special symbol variation state data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S115.

In S115, the main CPU 61 performs a winning effect determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to perform the winning effect based on the random number lottery. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S116.

In S116, the main CPU 61 sets a start winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. This start winning command includes information indicating a random number for determining a hit and information indicating a random number for determining a winning symbol. The start winning command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes that the game ball has won a prize and whether or not the winning lottery result has been won. Will be. The data of the start winning command includes data for executing a winning effect, for example, an effect of changing the display mode of the reserved ball to be displayed, when it is determined in the process of S115 that the winning effect is to be produced. This enables a so-called "look-ahead effect" in which the effect is executed based on the start memory before the variable execution. When this process is completed, the first start port switch check process routine is terminated.

[2nd start port switch check process]
FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing a second start port switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This second start port switch check process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 97, in S120, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 33 is detected based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 330. Do. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the bit of the second start port winning detection counter corresponding to the detection signal from the second start port switch 330 is “1 (ON)”, and determines whether or not the bit is “1 (ON)”, and determines whether or not the bit is “1 (ON)”. If the bit of the winning detection counter is "1 (ON)", the process is transferred to S121, and if the bit of the winning detection counter is not "1 (ON)", this second starting port is used. Terminates the switch check processing routine.

In S121, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of start memories of the second special symbol is 4 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the number of start memories of the second special symbol, that is, the number of holdings is 4 or more. If it is determined that the number of holdings is 4 or more, the second start port switch check processing routine is terminated, and if it is determined that the number of holdings is not 4 or more, the processing is transferred to S122.

In S122, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the number of start memories of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the value of the number of reserved second special symbols stored in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S123.

In S123, the main CPU 61 performs various random number value acquisition processes. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts the hit determination random number value of the special symbol game from the hit determination random number counter by so-called special symbol lottery, and further extracts the hit symbol determination random number value from the hit symbol determination random number counter. , The process of extracting the random number value for determining the effect condition from the random number counter for determining the effect condition and storing it in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63 is performed.

In the present embodiment, the second special symbol start storage area includes the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0). Judgment results based on the hit judgment random numbers are derived and displayed by the second special symbol, and various types obtained by winning a prize in the second starting port 33 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The random number values of are sequentially stored in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) as start storage. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S124.

In S124, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the second special symbol variation state data. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the second special symbol variation state data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S125.

In S125, the main CPU 61 performs a winning effect determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to perform the winning effect based on the random number lottery. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S126.

In S126, the main CPU 61 sets a start winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The start winning command is as described above. When this process is completed, the second start port switch check process routine is terminated.

[1st prize opening switch check process]
FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing a first large winning opening switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This first prize opening switch check process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 98, in S130, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the winning of the game ball into the first winning opening 36 is detected based on the detection signal from the first winning opening count switch 360. Perform the processing to be performed. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the winning of the game ball to the first large winning opening 36 is detected, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S131 and detects the winning of the game ball to the first large winning opening 36. If it is determined that this is not the case, the first large winning opening switch check processing routine is terminated.

In S131, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the first large winning opening winning counter. The first large winning opening winning counter is a counter for determining whether or not the maximum number of winnings per round has been reached. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S132.

In S132, the main CPU 61 sets the first special winning opening winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The first grand prize opening winning command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 wins the game ball to the first grand winning opening 36. Become aware. As a result, for example, the total number of payouts (number of payout prize balls) displayed during the additional bonus is additionally displayed. When this process is completed, the first large winning opening switch check process routine is terminated.

[2nd prize opening switch check process]
FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing a second large winning opening switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This second big winning opening switch check process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 99, in S140, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the winning of the game ball into the second winning opening 37 is detected based on the detection signal from the second winning opening count switch 370. Perform the processing to be performed. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the winning of the game ball to the second major winning opening 37 is detected, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S141 and detects the winning of the game ball to the second major winning opening 37. If it is determined that the process is not performed, the process is transferred to S143.

In S141, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the second large winning opening winning counter. The second major winning opening winning counter is a counter for determining whether or not the maximum number of winnings per round has been reached. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S142.

In S142, the main CPU 61 sets the second special winning opening winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The second major winning opening winning command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 wins the game ball to the second major winning opening 37. Become aware. Also by this, for example, the total number of payouts (the number of payout prize balls) displayed during the additional bonus is additionally displayed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S143.

In S143, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the V winning of the game ball in the specific area 38A is detected based on the detection signal from the specific area switch 380A. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the V winning of the game ball in the specific area 38A is detected, it shifts the process to S144 and determines that the V winning of the game ball in the specific area 38A is not detected. In that case, the process is transferred to S152.

In S144, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the discharge ball counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S145.

In S145, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is "1" or "11". The large winning opening opening counter is as described above. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening counter is neither "1" nor "11", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S152, and the value of the large winning opening opening counter is set to S152. If it is determined to be "1" or "11", the process is transferred to S146.

In S146, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag described later is a value (04H) indicating a process during opening of the large winning opening. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the processing during opening of the large winning opening, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S149, and the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the processing during opening of the large winning opening. ), The process is transferred to S147.

In S147, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag described later is a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before restarting the large winning opening or a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process. I do. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is "05H" or "06H", it shifts the process to S148, and when it determines that the control state flag is neither "05H" nor "06H". Moves the process to S152.

In S148, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the discharge monitoring timer is larger than "0". The discharge monitoring timer is as described above. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is larger than "0", it shifts the process to S149 and determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is not larger than "0". The process is transferred to S152. In this process, if it is determined that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is not larger than "0", it is determined that an illegal winning has occurred, and an error command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 70 to notify the error. You may try to do it.

In S149, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the specific area passage flag is "01H". The specific area passage flag is an internal flag whose value is set as "01H" when the V winning of the game ball is detected by the specific area switch 380A. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the specific area pass flag is "01H", it shifts the process to S152, and when it determines that the value of the specific area pass flag is not "01H", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S152. , S150.

In S150, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting "01H" to the value of the specific area passage flag. The value "01H" of the specific area passage flag is also used as internal information indicating that the transition to the probabilistic gaming state is determined after the end of the jackpot gaming state.
When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S151.

In S151, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a specific area passage command. The specific area passing command is a command indicating that the game ball has passed (V winning) in the specific area 38A. The specific area passage command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the V prize in the specific area 38A. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S152.

In S152, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the passage of the game ball into the non-specific area 38B is detected based on the detection signal from the non-specific area switch 380B. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the passage of the game ball to the non-specific area 38B is detected, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S153 and determines that the passage of the game ball to the non-specific area 38B is not detected. In that case, the process is transferred to S154.

In S153, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the discharge ball counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S154.

In S154, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second large winning opening winning counter is smaller than the value of the ejection ball counter. That is, the game ball is not detected by the second special winning opening count switch 370, and the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the game ball is detected only by the specific area switch 380A or the non-specific area switch 380B. judge. In this process, if the value of the second large winning opening winning counter is not smaller than the value of the discharge ball counter, the main CPU 61 ends the second large winning opening switch check processing routine and ends the second large winning opening. If the value of the winning counter is smaller than the value of the ejection ball counter, the process is transferred to S155.

In S155, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a discharge error command. The discharge error command is as described above. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S156.

In S156, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the second large winning opening winning counter in the discharge ball counter. This prevents the discharge error command from being sent repeatedly. When this process is completed, the second large winning opening switch check process routine is terminated. The discharge error command may be repeatedly transmitted without performing the process of S156.

[Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol control process is executed in the following step units. In FIG. 100, the numerical values shown on the sides of S161 to S168 indicate the control state flags corresponding to those steps, and are stored in the storage area of the control state flags in the main RAM 63. The main CPU 61 executes one step corresponding to the numerical value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 63 according to the numerical value. As a result, the special symbol game will proceed.

As shown in FIG. 100, in the first S160, the main CPU 61 executes a process of loading the control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 61 reads the control state flag from the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S161.

In S161 to S168, which will be described later, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to execute various processes in each step based on the value of the control state flag. This control state flag indicates the state of the game of the special symbol game, and enables any of the processes in S161 to S168 to be executed. In addition, the main CPU 61 executes the processing in each step at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time timer or the like set for each step. Before reaching this predetermined timing, the main CPU 61 ends without executing the process in each step, and executes other subroutines. The main CPU 61 also executes timer interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle.

In S161, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol memory check process. The details of S161 will be described later with reference to FIG. 101. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S162.

In S162, the main CPU 61 executes the special symbol fluctuation time management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flag to a value (01H) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management, and when the fluctuation time elapses, sets the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management to the control state flag. Set and set the waiting time (for example, 600ms) after confirmation in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set to execute the process of S163 after the waiting time has elapsed after the confirmation. The details of S162 will be described later with reference to FIG. 103. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S163.

In S163, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol display time management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag is a big hit or a small hit when the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management and the waiting time elapses after the confirmation. When the main CPU 61 is a big hit or a small hit, the value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management is set in the control state flag, and the time corresponding to the hit start interval is set in the waiting time timer. That is, the process of S164 is set to be executed after the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed. On the other hand, the main CPU 61 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game when it is not a big hit or a small hit. That is, it is set to execute the process of S168. The details of S163 will be described later with reference to FIG. 104. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S164.

In S164, the main CPU 61 executes the hit start interval management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 has a control state flag having a value (03H) indicating hit start interval management, and when the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed, the second grand prize read from the main ROM 62 has passed. The data for opening the mouth shutter 37A and the data for opening the displacement member 39 are stored in the main RAM 63. Then, in the process of S49 of FIG. 91, the main CPU 61 reads out the data for opening the second special winning opening shutter 37A and the data for opening the displacement member 39 stored in the main RAM 63. A signal to open the second special winning opening shutter 37A and a signal to open the displacement member 39 are supplied to the second special winning opening shutter solenoid 370A and the displacement member solenoid 390. As a result, the main CPU 61 controls the opening and closing of the second special winning opening 37. That is, a predetermined advantageous game state (a game in which the second major winning opening 37 first changes into an open state in which it is easy to accept a game ball and a closed state in which it is difficult to accept the game ball as a period from the start of one round to the interval. The game state is executed when one round game in which the state) is provided is repeated a predetermined number of times. In this case, a small hit game state in which only the second large winning opening 37 is opened and closed only once may be executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the second prize opening 37 is always opened and closed first, but the first prize opening 36 may be opened and closed first, or the first first prize opening 36 may be opened and closed first. The large winning opening 36 or the second large winning opening 37 may be arbitrarily selected and opened / closed.

Further, the main CPU 61 sets a value (04H) indicating that the large winning opening is open in the control state flag, and sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 27.834s of the opening / closing pattern E per round) to the large winning opening opening time. Set in the timer. That is, it is set to execute the process of S166. The details of S164 will be described later with reference to FIG. 105. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S165.

In S165, the main CPU 61 executes the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening. In this process, the main CPU 61 has a control state flag having a value (05H) indicating waiting time management before reopening the large winning opening, and when the time corresponding to the inter-round interval (interval patterns a and b) has elapsed, The memory is updated so that the number of times the large winning opening opening counter is increased by "1". The main CPU 61 sets a value (04H) indicating that the large winning opening is open in the control state flag. The main CPU 61 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 27.834 s of the opening / closing pattern E per round) in the large winning opening opening time timer. That is, it is set to execute the process of S166. In this process, the main CPU 61 also performs a process for controlling the opening / closing of the displacement member 39. The details of S165 will be described later with reference to FIG. 106. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S166.

In S166, the main CPU 61 executes the process during the opening of the large winning opening. In this process, when the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating that the large winning opening is open, the main CPU 61 has elapsed the condition that the large winning opening winning counter is "10" or more, and the opening upper limit time has elapsed ( It is determined whether or not any of the conditions that the large winning opening opening time timer is "0") is satisfied. When any of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 61 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 63 in order to close the first special winning opening 36 or the second special winning opening 37. Then, it is determined whether or not the condition that the large winning opening opening number counter is equal to or more than the maximum value of the large winning opening opening number (the final round) is satisfied. The main CPU 61 sets a value (06H) indicating the winning end interval in the control state flag when it is the final round, and a value (05H) indicating waiting time management before reopening the large winning opening when it is not the final round. To the control status flag. The details of S166 will be described later with reference to FIG. 107. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S167.

In S167, the main CPU 61 executes the hit end interval management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flag to a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval, and when the time corresponding to the hit end interval elapses, the main CPU 61 controls the value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game. Set to flag. That is, it is set to execute the process of S168. The details of S167 will be described later with reference to FIG. 108. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S168.

In S168, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol game end process. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets a value (00H) indicating the special symbol memory check when the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game. That is, it is set to execute the process of S161. The details of S168 will be described later with reference to FIG. 109. When this process is completed, the special symbol control process routine is terminated.

As described above, by setting the control state flag, the special symbol game is executed. Specifically, when the main CPU 61 is not in the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flags (00H), (01H), (02H) when the result of the hit determination is lost. ) And (07H) in this order, the processes of S161, S162, S163, and S168 shown in FIG. 100 are executed at predetermined timings. Further, when the main CPU 61 is not in the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flags (00H), (01H), (02H) when the result of the hit determination is the big hit or the small hit. ), The processes of S161, S162, and S163 shown in FIG. 100 are executed at predetermined timings, and control to the big hit game state or the small hit game state is executed. Further, when the control to the big hit game state or the small hit game state is executed, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flags in the order of (03H), (04H), and (05H), so that FIG. 100 shows. The processes of S164, S166, and S165 shown above are executed at predetermined timings, and the big hit game state or the small hit game state is executed. When the end condition of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is satisfied, the processes of S165, S167 to S168 shown in FIG. 100 are performed by setting (04H), (06H), and (07H) in this order. It is executed at a predetermined timing, and the big hit game state or the small hit game state is ended.

[Special symbol memory check processing]
FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing a special symbol memory check process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol memory check process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 101, in S170, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag has a value (00H) indicating a special symbol memory check. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value indicating the special symbol memory check, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S171. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (00H) indicating the special symbol storage check, the main CPU 61 ends this special symbol storage check processing routine.

In S171, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining the presence / absence of start memory. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that there is no start memory of the special symbol game, that is, the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) or the second special symbol start storage. If no data is stored in the area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process is transferred to S172. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that there is a start memory, the process is transferred to S173.

In S172, the main CPU 61 performs a demo display process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a demo display permission value in the main RAM 63. Further, the state in which the start memory of the special symbol game (the first special symbol start storage area or the second special symbol start storage area in which the random value for hit determination is stored) becomes "0" is a predetermined time (for example, 30 s). If it is maintained, set the value that allows execution of the demo display as the demo display permission value. Then, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a demo display command when the demo display permission value is a predetermined value. The demo display command stored in this way is supplied as a demo display command from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. As a result, the demo display is executed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. When this processing is completed, the special symbol memory check processing routine is terminated.

In S173, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is "0". In this process, the main CPU 61 determines the presence / absence of data in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is "0". That is, when it is determined that no data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process is transferred to S174. When it is determined that the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is not "0", that is, data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), S175 Move the process to.

In S174, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (02H) indicating that the second special symbol is fluctuating as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S176.

In S175, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating that the first special symbol is fluctuating as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S176.

In S176, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating special symbol fluctuation time management as a control state flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S177.

In S177, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol storage transfer process. In this process, when the special symbol to be variablely displayed is the first special symbol, the main CPU 61 first displays the data of the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). When the special symbol that shifts (stores) from the special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (3) and is displayed in a variable manner is the second special symbol, the second special symbol start storage area A process of shifting (storing) each of the data from the second special symbol start storage area (4) from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (3) is executed. To do. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S178.

In S178, the main CPU 61 executes the jackpot determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 has one jackpot from a plurality of jackpot determination tables (not shown) in which the number of determination values (big hit determination values) to be jackpots differs depending on whether or not the game status flag indicates a probability variation gaming state. Select the judgment table. That is, when the game state flag is a value indicating the probability variation game state, the jackpot determination table for high probability with a large number of jackpot determination values is referred to, and when the game status flag is not a value indicating the probability variation game state, the jackpot determination value. The jackpot judgment table for the non-probability variable game state with few is referred to. In this way, when the game state flag is a value indicating the probability change game state, that is, when the game state is the probability change game state as a special game state in which it is easy to shift to the specific game state (big hit game state), the jackpot game state is set. The probability of transition is higher than that of the probabilistic gaming state as the special gaming state, as compared to the non-probability changing gaming state as the non-special gaming state in which it is difficult to shift to the specific gaming state.

The special gaming state is a probabilistic / short-time gaming state, and the non-special gaming state is basically a non-probable / non-short-time gaming state. It also includes the case where the game is in a short game state.

Then, the main CPU 61 is extracted at the time of winning the game ball, and is used for hit determination of the special symbol start storage area previously set in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the second special symbol start storage area (0). Refer to the random number value and the selected jackpot judgment table. Then, when the hit determination random number value and the jackpot determination value match, the main CPU 61 determines that the jackpot is a jackpot. That is, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to set the jackpot game state advantageous to the player.

The jackpot probability of winning a prize in the first starting port 32 in the normal gaming state may be larger or smaller than the jackpot probability of winning a prize in the second starting port 33. The jackpot probability of winning a prize in the first starting port 32 in the normal gaming state may be larger or smaller than the jackpot probability of winning a prize in the second starting port 33.

In this way, in the process of S178, either a big hit or a loss is determined as a result of the special symbol game. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S179.

In S179, the main CPU 61 executes the small hit determination process when it is determined in the big hit determination process of S178 that the big hit has not been won. In this process, the main CPU 61 selects a small hit determination table that defines a determination value (small hit determination value) that is a small hit regardless of the game state flag.

Then, the main CPU 61 sets the hit determination random value of the special symbol start storage area extracted at the time of winning the game ball and set in the second special symbol start storage area (0), and the selected small hit determination table. refer. Then, when the hit determination random number value and the small hit determination value match, the main CPU 61 determines that the hit is a small hit.

Since the small hit can be generated only in the second special symbol, the small hit determination process is performed only based on the hit determination random value stored in the second special symbol start storage area. 1 The small hit determination process may be performed based on the hit determination random value stored in the special symbol start storage area.

As described above, in the processing of S179, either a small hit or a loss is determined as a result of the special symbol game, and when neither the big hit determination processing of S178 nor the small hit determination processing of S179 is won, the special symbol is selected. Loss will be decided as the judgment result of the game. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S180.

In S180, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines the big hit symbol when the result of the big hit determination is the big hit, and determines the small hit symbol when the result of the small hit determination is the small hit, and for either the big hit or the small hit. In the case of loss, the process of determining the loss pattern is performed. The details of S180 will be described later with reference to FIG. 102. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S181.

In S181, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 is different based on the special symbol determined in the process of S180, the result of the big hit determination and the small hit determination determined in the processes of S178 and S179, and the value of the probability variation counter. Select the variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern. Then, the main CPU 61 determines the variation pattern based on the effect condition determination random number value extracted from the effect condition determination random number counter and the selected variation pattern determination table, and stores the variation pattern in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. Here, the ST gaming state and the normal gaming state have different fluctuation pattern determination tables. The main CPU 61 determines the variation display mode of the special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 based on the data indicated by such a variation pattern. This process is the same even during the ST gaming state.

The data indicating the variation pattern stored in this way is supplied to the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 of the LED unit 5. As a result, the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is subjected to variable display in the variable pattern determined by the special symbol. Further, the data indicating the fluctuation pattern stored in this way is supplied as a fluctuation pattern designation command from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 executes the effect display according to the received variation pattern designation command. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S182.

In S182, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol variation time setting process. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the special symbol in the waiting time timer, and executes the process of clearing the storage area used for the variation display this time. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S183.

Then, in S183, the main CPU 61 executes a process of clearing the value of the storage area (0) used for the fluctuation display this time. When this processing is completed, the special symbol memory check processing routine is terminated.

[Special symbol determination process]
FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing a special symbol determination process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol determination process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 102, in S190, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not it is a big hit. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit, the process is transferred to S191. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, it shifts the process to S196.

In S191, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the fluctuation state number of the jackpot determined in S190 is a value (01H) indicating that the fluctuation is the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S192 when the variation state number is a value (01H) indicating that the variation is the first special symbol. On the other hand, in the main CPU 61, when the fluctuation state number is not the value (01H) indicating that the fluctuation of the first special symbol is, that is, the value (02H) indicating that the fluctuation state number is the fluctuation of the second special symbol. In that case, the process is transferred to S194.

In S192, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining the big hit symbol of the first special symbol based on the random value for determining the hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 shows the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol (shown in the first special symbol jackpot symbol distribution of FIG. 8) based on the hit symbol determination random value and the jackpot determination table extracted from the jackpot symbol determination counter. The process of determining which of the probabilistic variation 1, the probabilistic variation 2, the time saving 1 and the time saving 2) is performed is performed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S193.

In S193, the main CPU 61 performs a data set of the determined jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and a command set of the jackpot symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the jackpot symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the first special symbol display unit 53. The first special symbol display unit 53 fluctuates the first special symbol and stops and displays it in a manner based on the data of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets a command of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies the command from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special symbol designation command. By the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the jackpot stop display mode. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S199.

In S194, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 shows the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol (shown in the second special symbol jackpot symbol distribution of FIG. 8) based on the hit symbol determination random value and the jackpot determination table extracted from the jackpot symbol determination counter. A process of determining which of the probabilistic variation 1 to the probabilistic variation 10) is performed is performed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S195.

In S195, the main CPU 61 performs a data set of the determined jackpot symbol of the second special symbol and a command set of the jackpot symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the jackpot symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the second special symbol display unit 54. The second special symbol display unit 54 fluctuates the second special symbol and stops and displays it in a manner based on the data of the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets a command of the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies the command from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special symbol designation command. By the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the jackpot stop display mode. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S199.

In S196, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the result determined by the small hit determination process (S179 in FIG. 101) is a small hit. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S197 when a small hit is won. On the other hand, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S201 when the small hit is not won.

In S197, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining a small hit symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 uses the small hit symbol of the second special symbol (the second special symbol small hit symbol of FIG. 8) based on the hit symbol determination random value and the small hit determination table extracted from the jackpot symbol determination counter. Performs a process of determining whether or not the pattern is a small hit shown in the distribution. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S198.

In S198, the main CPU 61 performs a data set of the determined small hit symbol of the second special symbol and a command set of the small hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the data of the small hit symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the second special symbol display unit 54. The second special symbol display unit 54 fluctuates the second special symbol and stops and displays it in a manner based on the data of the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets a command for the small hit symbol of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies the command from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special symbol designation command. By the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the small hit stop display mode. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S199.

In S199, the main CPU 61 performs a hit start interval display time data set process corresponding to the hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the hit start interval display time data corresponding to the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S200.

In S200, the main CPU 61 performs data set processing related to the number of times the large winning opening is opened. In this process, the main CPU 61 has data related to the number of times the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37 are opened, that is, probability variation 1, probability variation 2, time reduction 1, time reduction 1 by the first special symbol. 2. Or, the process of setting the data corresponding to the probability variation 1 to probability variation 10 by the second special symbol or the small hit symbol in the main RAM 63 is performed. When this process is completed, this special symbol determination process routine is terminated.

On the other hand, in S201, when it is determined that the main CPU 61 is neither a big hit in S190 nor a small hit in S196, that is, it is lost, it performs a data set of lost symbols and a command set of lost symbols. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the data of the lost symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54. The first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 fluctuates the special symbol and stops and displays it in a manner based on the data of the lost symbol of the special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets a command of the lost symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies the command of the lost symbol from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special symbol designation command. By the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the loss stop display mode. When this process is completed, this special symbol determination process routine is terminated.

[Special symbol fluctuation time management process]
FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing a special symbol fluctuation time management process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol fluctuation time management process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 103, in S210, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating special symbol fluctuation time management. When the main CPU 61 determines that the value (01H) indicates the special symbol fluctuation time management, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S211. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value (01H) does not indicate the special symbol fluctuation time management, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol fluctuation time management processing routine.

In S211 the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the waiting time timer is "0". When the main CPU 61 determines that the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S212. If it is determined that the waiting time timer is not "0", the special symbol fluctuation time management processing routine is terminated.

In S212, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management in the special symbol control state flag, and shifts the process to S213.

In S213, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a symbol stop command. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a symbol stop command in the main RAM 63. Then, the symbol stop command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a symbol stop command, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the symbol stop. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S214.

In S214, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the waiting time after determination in the area functioning as the waiting time timer in the main RAM 63. When this processing is completed, the special symbol fluctuation time management processing routine is terminated.

[Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing a special symbol fluctuation time management process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol fluctuation time management process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 104, in S220, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the process is transferred to S221. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol display time management process routine.

In S221, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is "0". When the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S222. On the other hand, when the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol display time management processing routine.

In S222, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit. When the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit, it shifts the process to S223. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, it shifts the process to S224.

In S223, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the game state flag. That is, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a normal game state (non-probability change / non-time reduction) in the game state flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S234.

In S224, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is "0". The time saving number counter is a counter for counting the remaining number of games (number of symbol fluctuations) in the time saving game state. When the value of the time reduction counter is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S228. On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter is not "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S225.

In S225, the main CPU 61 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time reduction counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S226.

In S226, the main CPU 61 again determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is "0". When the value of the time reduction counter is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S227. On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter is not "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S228.

In S227, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a time saving end command. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a time-saving end command indicating the end of the time-saving game state in the main RAM 63. Then, the time saving end command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a command indicating the game state, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the end of the time saving game state. Become. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S232.

In S228, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is "0". The probability variation count counter is a counter for counting the remaining number of games (symbol variation count) in the probability variation game state. When the value of the probability variation counter is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S233. On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation counter is not "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S229.

In S229, the main CPU 61 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the probability variation counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S230.

In S230, the main CPU 61 again determines whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is "0". When the value of the probability variation counter is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S231. On the other hand, when the value of the probability variation counter is not "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S233.

In S231, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a probability change end command. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a probability change end command indicating the end of the probability change game state in the main RAM 63. Then, the probability change end command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a command indicating the game state, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the end of the probability change game state. Become. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S232.

In S232, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the game state flag. That is, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a normal game state (non-probability change / non-time reduction) in the game state flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S233.

In S233, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a small hit. When the main CPU 61 determines that it is a small hit, it shifts the process to S234. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a small hit, it shifts the process to S238.

In S234, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S235. In the present embodiment, as an example, the hit start interval time corresponding to the first special symbol is 15498 ms when the jackpot symbol is “probability variation 1” and 11496 ms when the jackpot symbol is another jackpot symbol. The hit start interval time corresponding to the second special symbol is 11496 ms when the big hit symbol is "probability variation 1", 996 ms when the jackpot symbol is "probability variation 2" to "probability variation 10", and when it is a small hit symbol. Is 3996 ms. As another example, the hit start interval time corresponding to the second special symbol may be 3996 ms, which is the same when the jackpot symbol is "probability variation 10" and when it is a small hit symbol.

In S235, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a hit start display command corresponding to the special symbol. In this process, the hit start display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 starts the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Become aware. The hit start display command includes data indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state and showing a specific hit pattern. The sub CPU 71 determines the effect pattern in the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the data indicating the hit pattern included in the hit start display command. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S236.

In S236, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the value of the large winning opening opening number counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S237.

In S237, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (03H) indicating a hit start interval management process in the control state flag of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the special symbol display time management process routine is terminated.

In S238, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (07H) indicating the end process of the special symbol game as a control state flag of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the special symbol display time management process routine is terminated.

[Hit start interval management process]
FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing a hit start interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. This hit start interval management process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 105, in S240, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating a hit start interval management process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process, the process is transferred to S241. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process, the main CPU 61 ends the hit start interval management process routine.

In S241, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time is "0". When the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S242. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 ends the hit start interval management processing routine.

In S242, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit. When the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit, it shifts the process to S243. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, it shifts the process to S245.

In S243, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) the upper limit value of the large winning opening opening number counter in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and transfers the process to S244.

In S244, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the large winning opening opening number counter, and shifts the process to S245.

In S245, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) hit pattern data indicating a big winning opening opening / closing pattern according to the type of the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol in the predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The displacement member operation pattern data for opening and closing the specific area 38A is also set here. The main CPU 61 performs round control based on the pattern (hit pattern) shown in FIG. 11 corresponding to the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol determined in S245. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S246.

In S246, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a display command during opening of the large winning opening in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. In this case, the display command for opening the large winning opening is data indicating the start of the round game. The large winning opening opening display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S247.

In S247, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating a process during opening of the large winning opening to the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S248.

In S248, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the value of the large winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S249.

In S249, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the value of the discharge ball counter of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S250.

In S250, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the opening time of the large winning opening in the main RAM 63. The value of the waiting time timer is set as 27.222s, which is the time corresponding to the value (number of rounds) of the large winning opening opening count counter, for example, if the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is "probability variation 1". When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S251.

In S251, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the large winning opening opening data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. In this process, the main CPU 61 updates the variables positioned in the main RAM 63 based on the data read from the main ROM 62 in order to open the first special winning opening 36 or the second special winning opening 37. The variable stored in this way drives the first large winning opening shutter solenoid 360A or the second large winning opening shutter solenoid 370A to open the first large winning opening 36 or the second large winning opening 37. Become. When this process is completed, the hit start interval management process routine is terminated. In the present embodiment, in the case of the 1st round in the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the second big winning opening 37 is always opened, so the data for opening the second big winning opening 37 is set. To. Further, although the data for opening / closing the specific area 38A is also set here, the data for opening / closing the specific area 38A may be set in another process.

[Waiting time management process before reopening the big prize opening]
FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing a waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, which is executed by the main CPU 61. This waiting time management process before reopening the big winning opening is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 106, in S260, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, the process is transferred to S261. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, the main CPU 61 ends the waiting time management processing routine before reopening the large winning opening.

In S261, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the interval display time between rounds is "0". When the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S262. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 ends the waiting time management processing routine before reopening the large winning opening.

In S262, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the value of the large winning opening opening number counter of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S263.

In S263, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a display command during opening of the large winning opening in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. In this case, the display command for opening the large winning opening is data indicating the start of the round game. The large winning opening opening display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a large winning opening opening display command. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S264.

In S264, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating a process during opening of the large winning opening to the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S265.

In S265, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the value of the large winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S266.

In S266, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the value of the discharge ball counter of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S267.

In S267, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the opening time of the large winning opening in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S268.

In S268, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the large winning opening opening data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the waiting time management process routine before reopening the large winning opening is terminated.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening]
FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing a process during opening of the large winning opening executed by the main CPU 61. This process during opening of the winning opening is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 107, in S270, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the process of opening the large winning opening. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the processing during the opening of the large winning opening, the processing is transferred to S271. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (04H) indicating the processing during opening of the large winning opening, the main CPU 61 ends the processing routine during opening of the large winning opening.

In S271, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the large winning opening winning counter is "10" or more. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the large winning opening winning counter is "10" or more, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S274. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the large winning opening winning counter is not "10" or more, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S272.

In S272, the main CPU 61 executes the big winning opening opening / closing process according to the opening / closing pattern for each set round in the jackpot type and the current round, and transfers the processing to S273.

In S273, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the waiting time timer as the opening time of the big winning opening is "0". When the main CPU 61 determines that the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S274. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 ends the processing routine during the opening of the large winning opening.

In S274, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the large winning opening closing data. In this process, the main CPU 61 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 63 based on the data read from the main ROM 62 in order to close the big winning opening. The variable stored in this way closes the first winning opening shutter solenoid 360A or the second winning opening shutter solenoid 370A. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S275.

In S275, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the residual ball monitoring timer. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to, for example, 1098 ms is set as a predetermined value. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S276.

In S276, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the closed large winning opening is the second large winning opening 37. When the main CPU 61 determines that the closed large winning opening is the second large winning opening 37, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S277. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the closed large winning opening is not the second large winning opening 37, that is, the first large winning opening 36, the processing is transferred to S278.

In S277, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the discharge monitoring timer. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to, for example, 1998 ms is set as a predetermined value. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S278.

In S278, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a small hit. When the main CPU 61 determines that it is a small hit, it shifts the process to S283. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a small hit, it shifts the process to S279.

In S279, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the large winning opening opening number (number of rounds). In this process, the main CPU 61 compares the value of the large winning opening opening number counter stored in the main RAM 63 with the upper limit value of the large winning opening opening number (number of rounds), and the value of the large winning opening opening number counter. Is greater than or equal to the upper limit of the number of times the large winning opening is opened. Here, the upper limit of the number of times the large winning opening is opened is, for example, 16R if the second special symbol has "probability variation 1" to "probability variation 5". When the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the winning opening opening number, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S283. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 does not determine that the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the large winning opening opening number, the process shifts to S280.

In S280, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the interval display time between rounds in the main RAM 63. The interval display time between rounds is set to the time corresponding to the interval patterns a and b, but a time different from these may be set. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S281.

In S281, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (05H) indicating a waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S282.

In S282, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting an inter-round display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The inter-round display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. When this process is completed, the process routine during the opening of the large winning opening is terminated.

On the other hand, in S283, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S284. In the present embodiment, as an example, the hit end interval display time corresponding to the first special symbol is 7500 ms when the jackpot symbol is "probability variation 1" and "probability variation 2", "time reduction 1", and "time reduction 1". In the case of "time reduction 2", it is 12312 ms, and the hit end interval display time corresponding to the second special symbol is 7500 ms when the jackpot symbol is "probability variation 1", "probability variation 2" to "probability variation 4", In the case of "probability variation 6", it is 12312 ms, "probability variation 5", "probability variation 7" to "probability variation 10", and in the case of a small hit symbol, it is 4500 ms. As another example, the hit end interval display time corresponding to the second special symbol is set to 4500 ms or less for all the jackpot symbols, and the jackpot game state related to the second special symbol is more final than the first special symbol. The time from the end of the round to the end of the jackpot game state may be shortened.

In S284, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (06H) indicating a hit end interval management process in the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S285.

In S285, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a hit end display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The hit end display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a command indicating the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. When this process is completed, the process routine during the opening of the large winning opening is terminated.

[Hit end interval management process]
FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing a hit end interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. This hit end interval management process is executed in the following step units.

In S290, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 63 is a value (06H) indicating a hit end interval management process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process, the process is transferred to S291. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process, the main CPU 61 ends the hit end interval management process routine.

In S291, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time is "0". In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S292. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 ends the hit end interval management processing routine.

In S292, the main CPU 61 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game of the main RAM 63 in the special symbol control state flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S293.

In S293, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the specific area passage flag of the main RAM 63 is "01H". If it is determined that the specific area passage flag is "01H", the process is transferred to S294. If it is determined that the specific area passage flag is not "01H", the process is transferred to S297.

In S294, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the game state flag of the main RAM 63 to "02H". The game state flag "02H" indicates a probabilistic game state and a time-saving game state. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S295.

In S295, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting "190" as the number of STs in the value of the probability variation counter of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S296.

In S296, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting "00H" to the specific area passage flag of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S299.

In S297, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the game state flag of the main RAM 63 to "01H". The game state flag "01H" indicates a non-probability variation game state and a time-saving game state. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S298.

In S298, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting "4" or "100" as the number of time reductions in the value of the time reduction counter of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S299. When "4" is set as the number of time reductions, it is only when the jackpot symbol is "time reduction 1" in the non-probability variation game state and the non-time reduction game state, and when shifting to the time reduction game state in other situations. Is set to "100" as the number of time reductions.

In S299, the main CPU 61 sets the game state command and ends the hit end interval management processing routine. The game state command is a command that includes information indicating the game state controlled after the end of the big hit game state and the remaining number of times as the number of time reductions, as well as information indicating the type of the finished hit game state (big hit, small hit). is there. The remaining number of time reductions is also referred to as the remaining time reduction number as will be described later, and means the time reduction number of "4" or "100" set in the process of S298. That is, the remaining number of time reductions (remaining time reduction number) does not mean the number of time reductions remaining at any time in the time reduction mode, but merely indicates the number of time reductions remaining at the start of the time reduction mode. The game state command including information such as the remaining number of times is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70.

[Special symbol game end processing]
FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing a special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol game end process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 109, in S300, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 63 is a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end process, the process is transferred to S301. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol game end processing routine.

In S301, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a special symbol memory check in the main RAM 63 as a control state flag. When this process is completed, the special symbol game end process routine is terminated.

[Control by sub CPU]
Next, the processes executed by the sub CPU 71 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 110 to 162. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 receives various commands from the main control circuit 60 and performs various processes such as display control processing.

[Main processing by sub CPU]
FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the sub CPU 71. This main process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 110, in S310, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of initializing in response to a power-on. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S311.

In S311 the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating a random number value (a random number counter value for determining an effect, a random number counter value for determining a stop symbol, etc.) stored in the work RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S312.

In S312, the sub CPU 71 performs command analysis processing. The details of this process will be described later, but the sub CPU 71 performs a process of analyzing a command received from the main control circuit 60 and stored in the receive buffer of the work RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S313. The command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 116 and 117.

In S313, the sub CPU 71 performs display control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 transmits data for displaying in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 to the display control circuit 76. The display control circuit 76 including the VDP (Video Display Processor) outputs various image data such as identification symbol data, background image data, and effect image data based on the data for displaying the effect image from the sub CPU 71. It is read from the image data ROM, superimposed, and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S314.

In S314, the sub CPU 71 performs voice control processing for controlling the sounds generated from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c via the voice control circuit 77. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S315.

In S315, the sub CPU 71 executes a lamp control process for controlling light emission (lighting / blinking) of the lamp / LED 27 via the lamp control circuit 78. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S316.

In S316, the sub CPU 71 performs the movable effect device control process via the movable effect device control circuit 79. In this process, the sub CPU 71 executes a control process for controlling the movable effect device 42 that drives the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S311, and thereafter, the processes of S311 to S316 are repeated.

On the other hand, the sub CPU 71 may interrupt the main process and execute the command reception interrupt process or the timer interrupt process even when the main process is being executed. Hereinafter, the command reception interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 111, and the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 112.

[Command reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing a command reception interrupt process executed by the sub CPU 71. This command reception interrupt process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 111, in S320, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the running program stored in each register (storage area). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S321.

In S321, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of storing the input command in the receive buffer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of storing the input command in the receive buffer area of the work RAM 73. For example, the sub CPU 71 receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 60. In this process, the stored command is analyzed by the command analysis process of FIGS. 116 and 117. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S322.

In S322, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of restoring the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of returning the program saved in S320 to each register. When this processing is completed, the command reception interrupt processing routine is terminated.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the sub CPU 71. This timer interrupt process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 112, in S330, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the value used in the running program stored in each register (storage area). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S331.

In S331, the sub CPU 71 performs various timer update processes. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S332. The timer update process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 114 and 115.

In S332, the sub CPU 71 performs a pressing operation button operation determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of detecting the presence or absence of an operation of the pressing operation button 9A. This process is actually a determination process, but since it is an interrupt process, it will be described here as one routine. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S333. The pressing operation button operation determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 113.

In S333, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of restoring the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of returning the program saved in S330 to each register. When this processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing routine is terminated.

[Press operation button operation judgment process]
FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing a pressing operation button operation determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. This pressing operation button operation determination process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 113, in S340, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the validity period timer is “0”. The validity period timer is a timer for timing the validity period of a button operation. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the validity period timer is "0", the sub CPU 71 ends the pushbutton operation determination processing routine. If it is determined that the validity period timer is not "0", the process is transferred to S341.

In S341, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the pressing operation button 9A has been operated. When it is determined that the pressing operation button 9A has been operated, the process is transferred to S342. If it is determined that the press operation button 9A is not operated, the press operation button operation determination processing routine is terminated.

In S342, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the selected effect image is being displayed. The selected effect image is an image displayed when the hit effect pattern flag is "02H" or "03H" and the value of the round counter is "1" or "2". The hit effect pattern flag is an internal flag indicating the hit patterns 1 to 13, and the hit effect pattern flags "01H" to "0DH" are set corresponding to each of the hit patterns 1 to 13. "01H" corresponds to the super big bonus, "02H" and "03H" correspond to the challenge bonus, "04H" to "0BH" correspond to the additional bonus, and "0CH" and "0DH" correspond to the additional bonus. , Supports V challenge. The round counter is a counter that is incremented by 1 each time one round game is executed (every time a command indicating that the big winning opening is open is received), and the number of rounds currently being executed (executed round game). It is a counter for indicating (the number of times of), and basically the same value as the large winning opening opening number counter used for the main CPU 61 is counted. As a result, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is the 1st or 2nd R of the challenge bonus. If it is being displayed in the selected effect image and it is determined that it is the 1st or 2nd R of the challenge bonus, the process is transferred to S343. If it is determined that the challenge bonus is not the 1st or 2nd R while the selection effect image is not being displayed, the process is transferred to S344.

In S343, the sub CPU 71 executes the challenge bonus type flag change process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of changing the challenge bonus type flag indicating the type of the challenge bonus. The challenge bonus type flag is set to "01H" for a single challenge bonus, "02H" for a challenge bonus 3 times challenge, and "03H" for a challenge bonus surprise, in S343. , The sub CPU 71 changes the currently set value of the challenge bonus type flag to another value. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S344.

In S344, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the effect image of "Combo RUSH" is being displayed. In this process, whether or not the sub CPU 71 is displaying the effect image of "Combo RUSH" based on the value of the hit effect pattern flag, the value of the scenario number flag, the value of the round counter, and the additional bonus scenario table. To judge. The scenario number flag is an internal flag set corresponding to the scenario number. If it is determined that the effect image of "Combo RUSH" is being displayed, the process is transferred to S345. On the other hand, if it is determined that the effect image of "Combo RUSH" is not being displayed, the process is transferred to S350.

In S345, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the operation count counter. The operation count counter is a counter for counting the number of operations of the pressed operation button 9A. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S346.

In S346, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the operation count counter is "0". If it is determined that the value of the operation count counter is "0", the process is transferred to S347. If it is determined that the value of the operation count counter is not "0", the process is transferred to S351.

In S347, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the addition count counter. The addition count counter is a counter for counting the number of additions of the additional number in the combo RUSH until the upper limit is reached. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S348.

In S348, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the addition number counter is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the addition count counter is "0", the process is transferred to S350. If it is determined that the value of the addition count counter is not "0", the process is transferred to S349.

In S349, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the operation number counter. During the additional bonus, a predetermined value may be repeatedly set in the operation count counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S351. Here, the "predetermined value" set in the operation count counter is a value determined with reference to the combo RUSH lottery table of FIG. 77.

In S350, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "0" as the value of the validity period timer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S351.

In S351, the sub CPU 71 executes an effect control process for displaying the effect image after the button operation according to the effect data set in the process described later. In this process, the sub CPU 71 controls the effect according to the operation of the press operation button 9A in the effect mode such as the challenge bonus or the additional bonus. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S352.

In S352, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the addition effect is executed. The addition effect is an effect of displaying the value to be added as an additional number on the screen, and the effect executed in the previous process is added based on the effect types B, D, E, G, H, J, and K. If the effect is to display the addition value according to the number, it means that the addition effect has been executed. If the effect is based on the effect type F, it means that the addition effect is not executed. As a result, the number of additions shown in the "character" and "combo" of the effect type F in the additional bonus scenario table is added by executing the effect based on the effect type G in the next round (next actual round). The additional numbers shown in the "character" and "combo" of the effect type F may also be additionally displayed by the processing of S352. If it is determined that the addition effect has been executed, the process is transferred to S353. When it is determined that the addition effect is not executed, the pressing operation button operation determination processing routine is terminated.

In S353, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding a predetermined value to the total prize ball counter. The total prize ball counter is a counter for counting the total number of prize balls. In this process, the sub CPU 71 adds the number of additions shown in "character", "combo", and "RUSH" based on the effect type defined in the addition bonus scenario table to the total prize ball counter. When this process is completed, the press operation button operation determination process routine is terminated. The additional numbers shown in the "character" and "combo" of the effect type F are collectively added at that time because the next round will be the effect type G. Further, based on the total prize ball counter, the display content of the red meter display unit 910 (see FIG. 182, etc.), which will be described later, for displaying the total number of prize balls will be updated. The update timing of the display content of is not the timing when the additional number is added to the total prize ball counter, but the addition effect for the additional number is executed, and then the additional number is actually added to the total prize ball counter. After that.

[Timer update process]
114 and 115 are flowcharts showing a timer update process executed by the sub CPU 71. This timer update process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 114, in S360, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the warning notification timer is “0”. The warning notification timer is a timer for measuring the time for starting the warning display for prompting the V winning to the specific area 38A. If it is determined that the value of the warning notification timer is "0", the process is transferred to S364. If it is determined that the value of the warning notification timer is not "0", the process is transferred to S361.

In S361, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the warning notification timer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S362.

In S362, the sub CPU 71 again performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the warning notification timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the warning notification timer is "0", the process is transferred to S363. If it is determined that the value of the warning notification timer is not "0", the process is transferred to S364.

In S363, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "01H" as a warning flag. The warning flag is a flag indicating that a warning display for prompting V winning to the specific area 38A is started, and in the case of "01H", it indicates that fact. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S364.

In S364, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the discharge error notification timer is "0". The discharge error notification timer is a timer for measuring the time for notifying the discharge error. If it is determined that the value of the discharge error notification timer is "0", the process is transferred to S368. If it is determined that the value of the discharge error notification timer is not "0", the process is transferred to S365.

In S365, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the discharge error notification timer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S366.

In S366, the sub CPU 71 again performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the discharge error notification timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the discharge error notification timer is "0", the process is transferred to S367. If it is determined that the value of the discharge error notification timer is not "0", the process is transferred to S368.

In S367, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the discharge error notification flag to "00H". The discharge error notification flag is a flag indicating that the discharge error is notified. In the case of "00H", the discharge error is not notified (finished), and in the case of "01H", the discharge error is reported. It will be notified. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S368.

In S368, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the validity period timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the validity period timer is "0", the process is transferred to S372. If it is determined that the value of the validity period timer is not "0", the process is transferred to S369.

In S369, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the validity period timer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S370.

In S370, the sub CPU 71 again performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the validity period timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the validity period timer is "0", the process is transferred to S371. If it is determined that the value of the validity period timer is not "0", the process is transferred to S372.

In S371, the sub CPU 71 executes an effect control process for displaying the effect image after the button operation according to the effect data set in the process described later. In this process, the sub CPU 71 controls the effect according to the operation of the press operation button 9A in the effect mode such as the challenge bonus or the additional bonus. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S372.

In S372, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the validity period preparation timer is “0”. The validity period preparation timer is a timer for measuring the time until the operation of the push operation button 9A is valid and can be input. If it is determined that the value of the validity period preparation timer is "0", the process is transferred to S376 in FIG. 115. If it is determined that the value of the validity period preparation timer is not "0", the process is transferred to S373.

In S373, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the validity period preparation timer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S374.

In S374, the sub CPU 71 again performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the validity period preparation timer is “0”. When it is determined that the value of the validity period preparation timer is "0", the process is transferred to S375 in FIG. 115. If it is determined that the value of the validity period preparation timer is not "0", the process is transferred to S376 in FIG. 115.

In S375, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the validity period timer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets a predetermined value when the value of the valid period preparation timer set at the time of various effects becomes “0”. In the present embodiment, the validity period timer is set with a value corresponding to, for example, 5s, but the value to be set may be different depending on the effect pattern. By the way, for the validity period preparation timer, for example, a value corresponding to 3s is set at the time of roulette production, a value corresponding to 5s is set at the time of character appearance production, and a value corresponding to 6s is set at the time of cow character revival production. , The value corresponding to 4s is set at the time of surprise production.

As shown in FIG. 115, in S376, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the addition effect is executed. Similar to the process of S352 of FIG. 113, this process makes a determination based on whether or not the effect executed in the previous process (S371) is an additive effect. If it is determined that the addition effect has been executed, the process is transferred to S377. If it is determined that the addition effect is not executed, the process is transferred to S378.

In S377, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding a predetermined value to the total prize ball counter. In this process, the sub CPU 71 adds the number of additions shown in "character", "combo", and "RUSH" based on the effect type defined in the addition bonus scenario table to the total prize ball counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S378. In this process as well, the additional numbers shown in the "character" and "combo" of the effect type F are not added, but are collectively added at that time because the next round becomes the effect type G. It will be.

In S378, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the addition effect execution timer is “0”. The addition effect execution timer is a timer that is set when the effect corresponding to the effect type M is executed, and the value of the timer becomes "0" when the reverse effect based on the effect type M is executed. If it is determined that the value of the addition effect execution timer is "0", the process is transferred to S379. If it is determined that the value of the addition effect execution timer is not "0", the process is transferred to S382.

In S379, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the addition effect execution timer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S380.

In S380, the sub CPU 71 again performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the addition effect execution timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the addition effect execution timer is "0", the process is transferred to S381. If it is determined that the value of the addition effect execution timer is not "0", the process is transferred to S382.

In S381, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding a predetermined value to the total prize ball counter. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding so that the value of the total prize ball counter becomes "1500" based on the effect type M. As a result, according to the process of S381, the effect control process for displaying the image of the reverse effect according to the effect type M and additionally displaying the total number of prize balls so as to be "1500" depending on the number of additions is executed. To. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S382. Note that this process also updates the display content of the red meter display unit 910 (see FIG. 182, etc.), which will be described later, for displaying the total number of prize balls based on the total prize ball counter. The update timing of the display content of the red meter display unit 910 is not the timing at which the additional number is added to the total prize ball counter, but the addition effect for the additional number is executed, and then the additional number is further added to the total prize ball counter. Is actually added.

In S382, the sub CPU 71 performs other timer update processing. When this processing is completed, the timer update processing routine is terminated.

[Command analysis processing]
116 and 117 are flowcharts showing command analysis processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This command analysis process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 116, in S390, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not a command has been received. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the command has been received, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S391. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the command has not been received, the sub CPU 71 ends this command analysis processing routine.

In S391, the sub CPU 71 reads the data of the received command and performs processing according to the data of the command in the subsequent steps. When the reading of the data of the received command is completed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S392.

In S392, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the variation pattern designation command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S393. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the variation pattern designation command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S394.

In S393, the sub CPU 71 performs an effect pattern determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines the effect pattern including the variation display mode of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern designation command. When the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is determined, the sub CPU 71 sets the determined effect pattern data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S394, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the symbol designation command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol designation command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S395. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol designation command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S396.

In S395, the sub CPU 71 performs a stop symbol determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines the stop decoration symbol corresponding to the symbol designation command received from the main CPU 61. When the stop decoration symbol is determined, the sub CPU 71 sets the determined stop decoration symbol data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

The decorative symbols to be displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 include, for example, numbers "1" to "7", and the number of these decorative symbols (numbers) is a predetermined number (for example, three (3 (3)). When the digits)) are aligned with the same decorative pattern (number), the game basically shifts to the jackpot game state. Specifically, "probability change 1", "probability change 2", "time reduction 1", "time reduction 2" as the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol, and "probability variation 1" to "probability variation 1" as the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol. Regarding "10" and small hit symbols, the decorative symbols corresponding to "probability variation 1" are the alignment of the numbers "3" or "7", "probability variation 2" to "probability variation 9", "time reduction 1", and "time reduction". The decorative symbols corresponding to "2" are the alignment of the numbers "1", "2", "4" to "6", the "probability variation 10" and the decorative symbols corresponding to the small hit symbols are combinations of specific symbols. The decorative pattern corresponding to the specific number "135" and the loss is a different number other than the specific number.

In S396, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the symbol stop command has been received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol stop command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S397. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol stop command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S399.

In S397, the sub CPU 71 performs a decorative symbol stop process for stopping and displaying the decorative symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S398.

In S398, the sub CPU 71 executes a special mode process. This special mode processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 118. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S399, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the hit start display command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit start display command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S400. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit start display command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S402.

In S400, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit effect pattern determination process. The hit effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 119. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S400.

In S401, the sub CPU 71 executes the hit start effect processing. The hit start effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 133. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S402, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the large winning opening winning command has been received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the large winning opening winning command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S403. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the large winning opening winning command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S404.

In S403, the sub CPU 71 executes the prize ball counter addition process. This prize ball counter addition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 134. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S404, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a specific area passing command has been received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the command for passing through a specific area has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S405. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the command for passing through a specific area has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S406.

In S405, the sub CPU 71 executes the V winning notification process. This V winning notification process will be described later with reference to FIG. 135. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S406, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the inter-round display command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the inter-round display command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S407. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the inter-round display command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S408.

In S407, the sub CPU 71 executes the inter-round effect processing. This inter-round effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 136. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S408, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the large winning opening opening display command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that it has received the large winning opening opening display command as the read command, it shifts the process to S409. On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub CPU 71 has not received the large winning opening opening display command as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S410 of FIG. 117.

In S409, the sub CPU 71 executes the effect processing during the round. The effect processing during this round will be described later with reference to FIG. 144. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S410 of FIG. 117, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the hit end display command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit end display command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S411. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit end display command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S412.

In S411, the sub CPU 71 executes the hit end effect process. The hit end effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. 153. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S412, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the game state command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the game state command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S413. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the game state command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S414.

In S413, the sub CPU 71 executes the effect mode change process. This effect mode change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 159. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S414, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the time saving end command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the time saving end command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S415. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the time saving end command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S416.

In S415, the sub CPU 71 executes the time saving mode end processing. The time saving mode end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 160. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S416, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the probability change end command has been received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the probability change end command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S417. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the probability change end command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S418.

In S417, the sub CPU 71 executes the ST mode termination process. This ST mode termination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 161. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S418, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a discharge error command has been received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the discharge error command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S419. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the discharge error command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S420.

In S419, the sub CPU 71 executes the discharge error notification process. This discharge error notification process will be described later with reference to FIG. 162. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S420, the sub CPU 71 also executes processing corresponding to the received command. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

[Special mode processing]
FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing a special mode process executed by the sub CPU 71. This special mode process is a process for terminating the special mode as the effect mode, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 118, in S430, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the effect mode flag is “01H”. The effect mode flag is an internal flag indicating the type of effect mode. In the present embodiment, the effect mode flag has a value corresponding to the normal mode of "00H", a value corresponding to the special mode of "01H", a value corresponding to the short mode of "02H", and a value corresponding to the long mode. The value corresponding to "03H" and ST mode is "04H". The background image and the effect content are different depending on the value of the effect mode flag. When it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is "01H", the process is transferred to S431. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is not "01H", this special mode processing routine is terminated.

In S431, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the special mode counter. The special mode counter is a counter for counting the number of games (number of symbol fluctuations) in the special mode up to a set predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S432.

In S432, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the special mode counter is "0". If it is determined that the value of the special mode counter is "0", the process is transferred to S433. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special mode counter is not "0", this special mode processing routine is terminated.

In S433, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the effect mode flag to "00H" and ends this special mode processing routine. That is, by the process of S433, the effect mode shifts from the special mode to the normal mode.

[Hit effect pattern determination process]
FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing a hit effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. This hit effect pattern determination process is a process for determining a challenge bonus or an additional bonus as an effect mode in the big hit game state, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 119, in S440, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit effect pattern type determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets any of "01H" to "0DH" in the hit effect pattern flag according to the stop symbol designation information of the special symbol included in the received hit start display command. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S441.

In S441, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "02H" or "03H". That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is a challenge bonus based on the value of the hit effect pattern flag. When it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "02H" or "03H", the process is transferred to S442. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is neither "02H" nor "03H", the process is transferred to S443.

In S442, the sub CPU 71 executes the challenge bonus determination process. This challenge bonus determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 120. When this process is completed, the hit effect pattern determination process routine is terminated.

In S443, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is any of "04H" to "0BH". That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is an additional bonus based on the value of the hit effect pattern flag. When it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is any of "04H" to "0BH", the process is transferred to S444. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is neither "04H" to "0BH", the hit effect pattern determination processing routine is terminated.

In S444, the sub CPU 71 executes the additional bonus determination process. The additional bonus determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 126. When this process is completed, the hit effect pattern determination process routine is terminated.

[Challenge bonus determination process]
FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing a challenge bonus determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. This challenge bonus determination process is a process for determining the effect content of the challenge bonus, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 120, in S450, the sub CPU 71 executes the challenge success / failure lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the challenge success / failure lottery table, and based on the value of the winning effect pattern flag and the extracted random number, the challenge success / failure pattern No. Determine one of 1-3. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S451.

In S451, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value corresponding to the lottery result of S450 (challenge success / failure patterns Nos. 1 to 3) as the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag. That is, the challenge success / failure pattern No. When 1 to 3 are determined, challenge success / failure pattern flags "01H" to "03H" are set as internal flags corresponding to each. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S452.

In S452, the sub CPU 71 executes a single game effect determination process. This single game effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 121. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S453.

In S453, the sub CPU 71 executes the challenge effect determination process three times. The three-time challenge effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 122. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S454.

In S454, the sub CPU 71 executes a surprise effect determination process. This surprise effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 123. When this process is completed, the challenge bonus determination process routine is terminated.

[One-game production decision processing]
FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing a single game effect determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. This one-game effect determination process is a process for determining the effect content of the one-game game as the effect mode, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 121, in S460, the sub CPU 71 executes a one-game combination lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the one-game combination lottery table, and determines the one-game combination pattern as an effect pattern based on the challenge success / failure pattern (value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag) and the extracted random numbers. To do. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined single game combination pattern number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S461.

In S461, the sub CPU 71 executes the rock-paper-scissors pattern lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the rock-paper-scissors pattern lottery table, and determines the rock-paper-scissors pattern as the effect pattern based on the number of the one-game combination pattern stored in S460 and the extracted random number. .. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined rock-paper-scissors pattern number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. When this process is completed, the one-game effect determination processing routine is terminated.

[3 times challenge production decision processing]
FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing a three-time challenge effect determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. This three-time challenge effect determination process is a process for determining the effect content of the three-time challenge as the effect mode, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 122, in S470, the sub CPU 71 executes the challenge lottery process three times. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the three-time challenge lottery table, and determines the three-time challenge pattern as the effect pattern based on the challenge success / failure pattern (value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag) and the extracted random numbers. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined three-time challenge pattern number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. When this process is completed, the challenge effect determination process routine is terminated three times.

[Surprise production decision processing]
FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing a surprise effect determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. This surprise effect determination process is a process for determining the content of the surprise effect as the effect mode, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 123, in S480, the sub CPU 71 executes the success notification round lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the success notification round lottery table, and determines the success notification round based on the determined challenge success / failure pattern (value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag) and the extracted random numbers. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S481.

In S481, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value according to the lottery result of S480 as a success notification round flag. The success notification round flag is an internal flag indicating the determined challenge success round. The value of the success notification round flag corresponding to each of the 3rd to 8th rounds corresponding to the success notification round is "03H" to "08H", and if there is no success notification round, the value of the corresponding success notification round flag is "02H". Is set as. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S482.

In S482, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "3" as the value of the surprise effect counter. The surprise effect counter is a counter for counting the numbers corresponding to the 3Rth to 8th Rths in determining the 3Rth to 8th Rth effect pattern in the surprise as the effect mode. In this embodiment, "3" is set as the initial value of the surprise effect counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S483.

In S483, the sub CPU 71 executes a surprise pattern lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 draws a surprise pattern lottery according to whether or not the number of rounds corresponding to the value of the surprise effect counter corresponds to the success notification round (whether or not it matches the value of the success notification round flag). With reference to one of the tables, one of the surprise patterns is determined as the effect pattern based on the round in which the surprise pattern is executed and the extracted random numbers. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined surprise pattern number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73 in association with the round to be executed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S484.

In S484, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the surprise pattern of the success notification round has been determined. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the surprise effect counter matches the value of the success round flag. In the present embodiment, when the surprise pattern corresponding to the success notification round is determined, the lottery of the surprise pattern corresponding to the rounds after the success notification round is not performed, but after the success notification round. A surprise pattern lottery corresponding to the round may be performed. When it is determined that the surprise pattern of the success notification round has been determined, the process is transferred to S487. On the other hand, if it is determined that the surprise pattern of the success notification round is not determined, the process is transferred to S485.

In S485, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the surprise effect counter is “8”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the surprise pattern has been determined for all the rounds of the 3rd to 8th rounds. If it is determined that the value of the surprise effect counter is "8", the process is transferred to S487. If it is determined that the value of the surprise effect counter is not "8", the process is transferred to S486.

In S486, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the surprise effect counter. By repeating the process of S483 in this way, the surprise pattern in the 3rd to 8th rounds is determined. In addition, instead of determining the surprise pattern for each 1R, the surprise pattern may be determined collectively for the 3rd to 8th rounds according to the hit pattern. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S483.

In S487, the sub CPU 71 executes the icon determination process. This icon determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 124. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S488.

In S488, the sub CPU 71 executes the character band effect determination process. This character band effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 125. When this process is completed, the surprise effect determination process routine is terminated.

[Icon determination process]
FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing an icon determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. This icon determination process is a process for determining the content of the effect using the icon displayed on the screen, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 124, in S490, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the value of the surprise effect counter to “8”. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets the value of the surprise effect counter to "8" in order to draw a lottery as to whether or not to change the icon pattern from the icon indicating the 8th R. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S491.

In S491, the sub CPU 71 executes the icon pattern lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the icon pattern lottery table corresponding to the value of the surprise effect counter, and the determination result (surprise pattern number) stored based on the process of S483 in FIG. 123 and the extracted random number. Based on and, the icon pattern that finally changes is determined. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined icon pattern number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S492.

In S492, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not a color other than the white icon is determined as the icon color to be finally displayed in the process of S491. If it is determined that a color other than the white icon has been determined as the icon color to be finally displayed, the process is transferred to S493. On the other hand, when it is determined that only the white icon is determined as the icon color to be finally displayed, that is, the white icon is determined, the process is transferred to S497.

In S493, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "4" to the value of the icon counter. The icon counter is a counter for counting the number corresponding to the 4Rth to the xRth in determining the icon pattern from the 4th Rth to the xRth that is finally determined to display other than the white icon. In this process, the sub CPU 71 has an icon pattern (icon display color) from the 4th Rth to the xRth icon that is finally determined to display a non-white icon for the icon that finally changes to other than the white icon according to the lottery result of S491. ) Is set as an initial value in the value of the icon counter in order to determine the change mode. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S494.

In S494, the sub CPU 71 executes the icon change lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the icon change lottery table corresponding to the round according to the value of the icon counter, and is based on the finally changing icon pattern (for example, "red icon") and the extracted random number. To determine the icon pattern after the change. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined icon pattern number after the change in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73 in association with the changing round. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S495.

In S495, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the icon counter matches the value of the surprise effect counter. If it is determined that the value of the icon counter matches the value of the surprise effect counter, the process is transferred to S497. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the icon counter does not match the value of the surprise effect counter, the process is transferred to S496.

In S496, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the icon counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S494. As a result, it is possible to determine how the icon display color changes (icon pattern) until the corresponding icon disappears according to the execution of the round.

In S497, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the surprise effect counter is "4". In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the icon pattern corresponding to the 4th round has been determined. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the change mode of the icon pattern is determined for all the rounds in which the icon pattern may change. In this process, if it is determined that the value of the surprise effect counter is "4", the icon determination process routine is terminated. If it is determined that the value of the surprise effect counter is not "4", the process is transferred to S498.

In S498, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the surprise effect counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S491.

[Character band production determination process]
FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing a character band effect determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. This character band effect determination process is a process for determining the effect content using the character band displayed on the screen, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 125, in S500, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the value of the surprise effect counter to “3”. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets "3" to the value of the surprise effect counter in order to display the character band (character message) from the 3rd round. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S501.

In S501, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the round corresponding to the value of the surprise effect counter corresponds to the success notification round. If it is determined that the round corresponding to the value of the surprise effect counter corresponds to the success notification round, the process is transferred to S502. If it is determined that the round corresponding to the value of the surprise effect counter does not correspond to the success notification round, the process is transferred to S503.

In S502, the sub CPU 71 executes a surprise success character band lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the surprise success character band lottery table, and uses the determination result (surprise pattern number) stored in the surprise pattern lottery process of S483 and the extracted random number as an effect pattern. Determine the character band pattern of. The sub CPU 71 stores the number of the determined character band pattern in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73 in association with the round to be displayed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S503.

In S503, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the target round this time has a surprise pattern “none”, that is, the determination result (surprise pattern number) stored in the surprise pattern lottery process of S483 is “none” (FIG. A process of determining whether or not the surprise pattern No. 1) specified in the surprise pattern lottery table of 23 is applicable is performed. If it is determined that the surprise pattern is "none", the process is transferred to S505. If it is determined that the surprise pattern is not "none", the process is transferred to S504.

In S504, the sub CPU 71 executes a surprise failure character band lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 creates a surprise failure character band lottery table corresponding to the determination result (surprise pattern number) stored in the surprise pattern lottery process of S483 in association with the round corresponding to the value of the surprise effect counter. With reference to it, the character band pattern as the effect pattern is determined based on the value (round) of the surprise effect counter and the extracted random numbers. The sub CPU 71 stores the number of the determined character band pattern in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73 in association with the round to be displayed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S512.

In S505, the sub CPU 71 executes a surprise character band lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 corresponds to the next round of the round corresponding to the value of the surprise effect counter, and the determination result (icon pattern number) stored in the icon change lottery process of S494 is the icon display color. If it indicates a change, the surprise Gase character band lottery table corresponding to the changed icon color is referred to, and if it does not change, the surprise Gase character band lottery table related to the white icon is referred to. When determining the character band on the 8th R, the 9R is regarded as a white icon and the character band is determined. With reference to the corresponding surprise character band lottery table, the character band pattern as the effect pattern is determined based on the value (round) of the surprise effect counter and the extracted random numbers. The sub CPU 71 stores the number of the determined character band pattern in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73 in association with the round to be displayed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S506.

In S506, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the character band has been won. If the number of the character band pattern determined in the surprise character band lottery process of S505 is "No. 1 to 10", the character band is won. If it is determined that the character band has been won, the process is transferred to S507. If it is determined that the character band has not been won, the process is transferred to S512.

In S507, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "1" to the value of the subsequent character band counter. The subsequent character band counter is a counter for counting the number corresponding to the number of times the character band is displayed after the display of the Gase character band. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets "1" to the value of the subsequent character band counter in order to determine the first character band after displaying the Gase character band. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S508.

In S508, the sub CPU 71 executes the subsequent character band lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the surprise gasse subsequent character band lottery table, and determines the character band pattern as the effect pattern based on the value (round) of the surprise effect counter and the extracted random number. The sub CPU 71 stores the number of the determined character band pattern in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73 in association with the round to be displayed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S509.

In S509, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the character bands of the previous time and the current time are the same. That is, the sub CPU 71 has the same determination result (character band pattern number) stored corresponding to the target round this time and the determination result (character band pattern number) stored corresponding to the previous round. In some cases, it is determined that the previous and current character bands are the same. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the character band of the previous time and the character band of this time are the same, the sub CPU 71 discards the determination result stored corresponding to the target round this time and determines the character band pattern again. , S508, and the subsequent character band lottery process is executed again. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the character bands of the previous time and the character band of this time are not the same, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S510. Even if the character band of the previous time and the character band of this time are the same, the subsequent character band lottery process may not be executed again.

In S510, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the subsequent character band counter is "6". That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the six subsequent character bands have been determined. If it is determined that the value of the subsequent character band counter is "6", the process is transferred to S512. If it is determined that the value of the subsequent character band counter is not "6", the process is transferred to S511. As for the succeeding character band, 5 or less or 7 or more may be determined.

In S511, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the subsequent character band counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S508.

In S512, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the surprise effect counter is "8". That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the character band patterns of the 3rd to 8th Rs have been determined. When it is determined that the value of the surprise effect counter is "8", this character band effect determination processing routine is terminated. If it is determined that the value of the surprise effect counter is not "8", the process is transferred to S513.

In S513, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the surprise effect counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S501. Although the character band pattern corresponding to the rounds after the success notification round is not determined by such a series of processes, it may be determined. For example, if the hold information includes information indicating the winning of the jackpot, the rounds after the success notification round are also determined by associating the character band pattern, and the holding information includes the information indicating the winning of the jackpot. If not, the character band pattern may not be determined for the rounds after the success notification round.

[Additional bonus determination process]
FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing an additional bonus determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. This additional bonus determination process is a process for determining the effect content of the additional bonus as the effect mode, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 126, in S520, the sub CPU 71 executes the additional bonus hold continuous determination process. The additional bonus hold continuous determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 127. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S521.

In S521, the sub CPU 71 executes the additional bonus scenario type determination process. The additional bonus scenario type determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 128. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S522.

In S522, the sub CPU 71 executes the additional bonus initial processing. The initial processing of the additional bonus will be described later with reference to FIG. 129. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S523.

In S523, the sub CPU 71 executes the additional bonus effect determination process. The additional bonus effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 130. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S524.

In S524, the sub CPU 71 executes the additional bonus end screen determination process. The process of determining the end screen of the additional bonus will be described later with reference to FIG. 132. When this process is completed, the additional bonus determination process routine is terminated.

[Additional bonus hold consecutive decision processing]
FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing an additional bonus hold continuous determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. This additional bonus hold continuous determination process is for determining whether or not to perform an effect suggesting whether or not the hold information related to the second special symbol includes information indicating the winning of the jackpot during the additional bonus. It is a process and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 127, in S530, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the hold information counter. The hold information counter is a counter for indicating the area number corresponding to the storage area of the work RAM 73 in which the hold information of the second special symbol is stored. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S531. The hold information corresponds to the start storage stored in the main RAM 63, and up to four pieces are stored, and the value (area number) of the hold information counter increases according to the storage order of the hold information. In addition, each time a start winning command is received, information indicating a winning determination random number and information indicating a winning symbol determination random number included in the starting winning command are stored as hold information. The hold information corresponding to the first special symbol and the hold information corresponding to the second special symbol are individually stored in predetermined areas prepared in the work RAM 73, respectively. Each time such a hold information is received, the hold information is deleted from the storage area according to the type of the special symbol included in the change pattern specification command, but the hold information is deleted based on another command. It may be done.

In S531, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is hold information in the storage area corresponding to the value of the hold information counter. If it is determined that there is pending information in this process, the process is transferred to S532. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no pending information, the process is transferred to S535. In this process, when the value of the hold information counter is "5", it is determined that there is no hold information.

In S532, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the hold information includes information indicating winning of a hit (big hit or small hit). Specifically, in this process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the information indicating the winning determination random number included in the hold information is the information indicating the winning in the probabilistic gaming state. If it is determined that the information indicating the winning is included, the process is transferred to S532. If it is determined that the information indicating the winning is not included, the process is transferred to S530. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the information indicating the winning is included, the sub CPU 71 determines the type of the winning symbol based on the information indicating the random number for determining the winning symbol.

In S533, the sub CPU 71 executes the additional bonus hold continuous lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the additional bonus hold continuous lottery table, and determines either non-winning or winning based on the winning symbol and the extracted random number. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined non-winning or the number corresponding to the winning in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S534.

In S534, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the additional bonus hold continuous lottery process of S533 is winning. If it is determined that the result of the additional bonus hold continuous lottery process is winning, the process is transferred to S535. If it is determined that the result of the additional bonus hold continuous lottery process is not a win, the process is transferred to S530. In this process, if it is determined that the player has won, the sub CPU 71 sets the data corresponding to the special BGM so that the BGM output at the time of the additional bonus is different from the normal additional bonus. The timing at which this special BGM is output may be any timing as long as it is during the additional bonus. Further, even after it is determined that the winner is won in the process of S534, the process of S532 or later may be performed for the remaining reserved information. At this time, if the process of S534 is further won, data for outputting a BGM different from the special BGM may be set.

In S535, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the value of the hold information counter to "0". When this process is completed, the additional bonus hold continuous determination process routine is terminated.

[Additional bonus scenario type determination process]
FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing an additional bonus scenario type determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. This additional bonus scenario type determination process is a process for determining an additional bonus scenario, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 128, in S540, the sub CPU 71 executes the scenario group lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the scenario group lottery table, and determines the scenario groups A to D based on the hit pattern (the value of the hit effect pattern flag) and the extracted random numbers. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S541.

In S541, the sub CPU 71 executes the scenario type lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the scenario type lottery table according to the hit pattern (value of the hit effect pattern flag), and sets the scenario type based on the scenario group determined in S540 and the extracted random numbers. decide. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S542.

In S542, the sub CPU 71 executes the scenario number lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the scenario number lottery table according to the scenario type determined in S541, and determines the scenario number based on the scenario type and the extracted random number. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S543.

In S543, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value corresponding to the determined scenario number in the scenario number flag. Specifically, for example, when the determined scenario type and scenario number are "Aa" and "No. 1 to 65", the sub CPU 71 sets "01H" to "41H" in the scenario number flag. Similarly, in "Ab" and "No. 1 to 39", "42H" to "68H" are set, and in "Ac" and "No. 1 to 7", "69H" to "6FH" are set. , "Ba" and "No. 1 to 64" are set to "70H" to "AFH", and "Bb" and "No. 1 to 23" are set to "B0H" to "C7H". In "Bc" and "No. 1 to 4", "C8H" to "CBH" are set, and in "Ca" and "No. 1 to 11", "CCH" to "D6H" are set, and "Cb" is set. In "No. 1 to 4", "D7H" to "DAH" are set, and in "Da" and "No. 1 to 6", "DBH" to "E0H" are set. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S544.

In S544, the sub CPU 71 executes the combo RUSH lottery process. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 defines "combo RUSH" (effect type G) in the scenario corresponding to the value of the scenario number flag (effect content in the actual round of the additional bonus) in the additional bonus scenario table, The number of operations required to request a button operation during the production of the "combo RUSH" is determined by lottery. Specifically, the sub CPU 71 refers to the combo RUSH lottery table, and determines the operation number pattern based on the value (additional number) to be added according to the "combo RUSH" and the extracted random number. The sub CPU 71 stores the number of the operation count pattern as a determination result in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. When this process is completed, the additional bonus scenario type determination process routine is terminated.

[Additional bonus initial processing]
FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing an additional bonus initial process executed by the sub CPU 71. This additional bonus initial process is a process for determining the initial effect content of the additional bonus, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 129, in S550, the sub CPU 71 executes an additional bonus roulette lottery process. This additional bonus roulette lottery process is a process for determining the initial value of the additional number given to the first R of the additional bonus. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the roulette lottery table, and extracts the initial value to be added as the number of additions to the 1st round of the scenario (the content of the effect in the actual round of the addition bonus) corresponding to the value of the scenario number flag. The initial value pattern is determined based on the random numbers. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined initial value pattern number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S551. The initial value pattern may be determined without using a table or random numbers.

In S551, the sub CPU 71 executes the additional bonus roulette pattern lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the roulette pattern lottery table, and based on the initial value pattern number stored in the additional bonus roulette lottery process of S550 and the extracted random number, the roulette pattern as the effect pattern is generated. decide. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined roulette pattern number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S552.

In S552, the sub CPU 71 executes the additional bonus title determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the title determination lottery table, and determines the title pattern as the effect pattern based on the winning pattern (value of the winning effect pattern flag) and the extracted random numbers. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined title pattern number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. When this process is completed, the additional bonus initial process routine is terminated.

[Additional bonus production decision processing]
FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing an additional bonus effect determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. This additional bonus effect determination process is a process for determining the effect content of the additional bonus effect, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 130, in S560, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "1" to the value of the character type determination counter. The character type determination counter is a counter for counting up to a value corresponding to the upper limit number of the actual rounds corresponding to the jackpot game state executed when determining the character type. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S561.

In S561, the sub CPU 71 executes the effect lottery determination process. In this process, the character effect pattern for each round is determined. The effect lottery determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 131. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S562.

In S562, the sub CPU 71 executes the chance-up lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the chance-up lottery table, and based on the character effect pattern number determined in the effect lottery determination process of S561 and the extracted random number, the sub-CPU 71 determines the chance-up pattern as the effect pattern. decide. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined chance-up pattern number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73 in association with the actual round of the target this time. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S563. In the processing of S562, the chance-up pattern should not be determined for the character production patterns corresponding to the production types A, B, G, I, M, and N other than the production types C to F, H, and J to L. However, for the character effect patterns corresponding to these effect types, the chance-up pattern may be determined in the processing of S562.

In S563, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the character type determination counter is a value corresponding to a substantial upper limit round (a round corresponding to the upper limit of the actual round). That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the effect content in all the actual rounds in the additional bonus is determined. When it is determined that the value of the character type determination counter is a value corresponding to the substantially upper limit round, the additional bonus effect determination processing routine is terminated. If it is determined that the value of the character type determination counter does not correspond to the actual upper limit round, the process is transferred to S564.

In S564, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the character type determination counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S561.

[Direction lottery judgment process]
FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing an effect lottery determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. This effect lottery determination process is a process for determining a character effect pattern according to the effect type, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 131, in S570, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the effect type of the actual round targeted this time is “C” or “H”. The effect type is determined based on the value of the scenario number flag (scenario number), the additional bonus scenario table, and the value of the character type determination counter (the actual round targeted this time). Also in the following steps, the effect type is determined in the same manner. If it is determined that the effect type of the target real round is "C" or "H", the process is transferred to S571. If it is determined that the effect type of the target real round is not "C" or "H", the process is transferred to S572.

In S571, the sub CPU 71 refers to the character type lottery table (effect type C or H), and based on the effect type (C or H) and the extracted random number, the character effect corresponding to the actual round of the target this time. Determine the pattern. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined character effect pattern number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73 in association with the actual round of the target this time. When this process is completed, the effect lottery determination process routine is terminated.

In S572, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the effect type of the actual round targeted this time is "D" or "J". If it is determined that the effect type of the target real round is "D" or "J", the process is transferred to S573. If it is determined that the effect type of the target real round is not "D" or "J", the process is transferred to S578.

In S573, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the upper limit of the total number of prize balls (“1500” corresponding to the total number in the present embodiment) has been reached. This judgment is defined in the target real round this time based on the value of the scenario number flag (scenario number), the additional bonus scenario table, and the value of the character type determination counter (the real round targeted this time). This is done by determining whether or not the total number of prize balls is "1500". When it is determined that the upper limit of the total number of prize balls has been reached, the process is transferred to S574. If it is determined that the upper limit of the total number of prize balls has not been reached, the process is transferred to S575.

In S574, the sub CPU 71 refers to the character type lottery table (effect type D or J + upper limit value reached), and is the target this time based on the additional number (addition value) corresponding to the "character" and the extracted random number. Determine the character production pattern corresponding to the actual round of. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined character effect pattern number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73 in association with the actual round of the target this time. When this process is completed, the effect lottery determination process routine is terminated.

In S575, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the effect type of the actual round to be the next target is "F". When it is determined that the effect type of the next target real round is "F", the process is transferred to S576. If it is determined that the effect type of the target real round is not "F", the process is transferred to S577.

In S576, the sub CPU 71 refers to the character type lottery table (effect type D or J + effect type F of the next round), and is based on the additional number (addition value) corresponding to the "character" and the extracted random number. , Determine the character production pattern corresponding to the actual round of the target this time. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined character effect pattern number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73 in association with the actual round of the target this time. When this process is completed, the effect lottery determination process routine is terminated.

In S577, the sub CPU 71 refers to the character type lottery table (other than the effect type D or J + the effect type F of the next round), and is based on the additional number (addition value) corresponding to the "character" and the extracted random number. Then, the character production pattern corresponding to the actual round of the target is determined. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined character effect pattern number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73 in association with the actual round of the target this time. When this process is completed, the effect lottery determination process routine is terminated.

In S578, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the effect type of the actual round targeted this time is any of "E", "F", "K", and "L". If it is determined that the effect type of the target real round is any of "E", "F", "K", and "L", the process is transferred to S579. If it is determined that the effect type of the target real round is not any of "E", "F", "K", and "L", the process is transferred to S580.

In S579, the sub CPU 71 is based on the additional number (addition value) corresponding to the "character" in the actual round of the target this time, and the character type lottery table (effect type E or F or K or L + addition value due to the appearance of the character +50). With reference to any of ~ +200), the character production pattern of the actual round of the target this time is determined based on the additional number (addition value) corresponding to the "combo" and the extracted random number. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined character effect pattern number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73 in association with the actual round of the target this time. When this process is completed, the effect lottery determination process routine is terminated.

In S580, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the effect type of the actual round targeted this time is "A" or "I". If it is determined that the effect type of the target real round is "A" or "I", the process is transferred to S581. If it is determined that the effect type of the target real round is not "A" or "I", this effect lottery determination processing routine is terminated.

In S581, the sub CPU 71 refers to the cow character revival lottery table, and determines the cow character revival pattern in the actual round of the target this time based on the effect type (A or I) and the extracted random number. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined cow character revival pattern number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73 in association with the actual round of the target this time.

[Additional bonus end screen determination process]
FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing an additional bonus end screen determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. This additional bonus end screen determination process is a process for determining the content of the additional bonus end screen, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 132, in S590, the sub CPU 71 executes the additional bonus end screen lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines the end display pattern to be displayed at the end of the last substantial round in the additional bonus. The sub CPU 71 refers to the additional bonus end screen lottery table, and determines the end display pattern based on the hit pattern (value of the hit effect pattern flag) and the extracted random number. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined end display pattern number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S591. The end display pattern may be determined without using a table or random numbers. Further, in the present embodiment, the end display pattern is determined at the start of the jackpot game state regardless of the number of winning balls (number of prize balls) in the jackpot game state, but the end display pattern is determined at the end of the jackpot game state. The end display pattern may be determined according to the number of winning balls counted during the jackpot game state.

In S591, the sub CPU 71 executes the additional bonus title determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines the title pattern to be displayed at the hit end interval in the additional bonus. The sub CPU 71 refers to the title determination lottery table, and based on the value obtained by adding the value corresponding to the total number specified in the additional bonus scenario table to the value of the current cumulative payout prize ball counter. Determine the title pattern as the production pattern. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined title pattern number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. When this process is completed, the additional bonus end screen determination process routine is terminated. In the present embodiment, the title pattern is determined at the start of the jackpot game state regardless of the number of winning balls (number of prize balls) in the jackpot game state, but the jackpot is determined at the end of the jackpot game state. The title pattern may be determined according to the number of winning balls counted during the game state. Further, in the present embodiment, all the actual number of rounds executed in the jackpot game state × the maximum number of prizes per round (“10” in the present embodiment) × the number of prize balls per prize (in the present embodiment). The title pattern is determined based on "10"), and the content specified by the title pattern is displayed only at the end of the additional bonus. For example, the actual execution performed in the jackpot game state during the additional bonus. The title pattern may be determined based on the number of rounds × the maximum number of prizes per round × the number of prize balls per prize, and the content specified by the title pattern may be displayed at the end of the additional bonus. Further, the title pattern may be determined by adding the number of prizes in the small hit game state and the number of prizes in the rounds that do not correspond to the actual rounds.

[Hit start production process]
FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing a hit start effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This hit start effect process is a process for determining the effect content at the start stage of the big hit game state or the small hit game state, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 133, in S600, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “04H” to “0BH”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is the start of the additional bonus. If the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "04H" to "0BH" and it is determined that it is the start of the additional bonus, the process is transferred to S601. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not "04H" to "0BH" and it is not the start of the additional bonus, the process is transferred to S607.

In S601, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "0" as the value of the payout prize ball counter. The payout prize ball counter is a counter for counting the number of payout prize balls displayed on the blue meter display unit 900 (see FIG. 182 or the like) described later. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S602.

In S602, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "0" as the value of the total prize ball counter. The total prize ball counter is as described above, and is a counter for counting the total number of prize balls displayed on the red meter display unit 910 (see FIG. 182 and the like) described later. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S603.

In S603, the sub CPU 71 sets the effect data for displaying the title pattern corresponding to the number stored in the additional bonus title determination process (S552 in FIG. 129). Based on the effect data related to this title pattern, at the start of the additional bonus, the content defined by the title pattern of the title determination lottery table is displayed. When the display is made by the effect data related to the title pattern, the effect is also made by voice, a lamp, or the like. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S604.

In S604, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the validity period timer. In this embodiment, a value corresponding to, for example, 3 seconds is set. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S605. This value corresponds to a time shorter than the opening waiting time (3996 ms), which is the sum of the time of the hit start interval of the additional bonus (996 ms) and the time until the long opening start of the additional bonus (102 ms + 2898 ms). The value set in the validity period timer may correspond to a time longer than the open waiting time.

In S605, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the user has won in the additional bonus hold continuous lottery process of S533 of FIG. 127. Specifically, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the number corresponding to the "winning" is stored in the information stored in the work RAM 73 as a result of the additional bonus hold continuous lottery process. If it is determined that the winner has been won in the additional bonus hold continuous lottery process, the process is transferred to S606. If it is determined in the additional bonus hold continuous lottery process that the player has not won, the winning start effect processing routine is terminated.

In S606, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting data corresponding to the special BGM. As a result, at the start of the additional bonus, a special BGM different from the usual one is output. When this process is completed, the hit start effect processing routine is terminated. The timing at which the special BGM is output is not limited to the start of the additional bonus, and may be any timing as long as it is in the jackpot game state.

In S607, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the hit start effect data corresponding to the other hit start effects. That is, the sub CPU 71 sets the effect data for executing the effect until the first opening of the big winning opening in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. In this process, different production data are set according to the type of production mode such as super big bonus, challenge bonus, and V challenge. When this process is completed, the hit start effect processing routine is terminated.

[Prize ball counter addition processing]
FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing a prize ball counter addition process executed by the sub CPU 71. This prize ball counter addition process is a process for adding the values of various prize ball counters, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 134, in S610, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the residual prize ball counter is “0”. The remaining prize ball counter is a counter for counting the number of remaining prize balls for each round. The number of remaining prize balls is basically from the maximum number of prize balls per round (“100” in this embodiment) to the specified number of prize balls for each prize in the large winning opening (“10” in this embodiment). ) Is subtracted. If it is determined that the value of the remaining prize ball counter is "0", the prize ball counter addition processing routine is terminated. If it is determined that the value of the remaining prize ball counter is not "0", the process is transferred to S611.

In S611, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 10 from the value of the remaining prize ball counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S612.

In S612, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding 10 to the value of the cumulative payout prize ball counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S613.

In S613, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the additional bonus is in progress based on the value of the hit effect pattern flag. If it is determined that the additional bonus is in progress, the process is transferred to S614. If it is determined that the additional bonus is not in progress, the prize ball counter addition processing routine is terminated.

In S614, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding 10 to the value of the payout prize ball counter. When this processing is completed, the prize ball counter addition processing routine is terminated.

[V prize notification processing]
FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing a V winning notification process executed by the sub CPU 71. This V winning notification process is a process for notifying the V winning, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 135, in S620, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting V winning notification data. That is, when the sub CPU 71 detects a V prize when the game ball passes through the specific area 38A, the sub CPU 71 sets the V prize notification data for notifying that the game state shifts to the probabilistic game state after the end of the big hit game state. To do. As a result, the effect image corresponding to the V prize is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4, and a predetermined sound is generated or emitted by using the speakers 10a to 10c and the lamp / LED 27. .. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S621. When the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "0CH", that is, in the big hit game state of the sudden V, a special effect image, for example, an image showing a ball of "V" is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. After that, the production image corresponding to the V prize is displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, the effect image corresponding to the V prize is continuously displayed until the start of the hit end interval, but the display may be ended at a predetermined timing during the big hit game state. However, even if the jackpot game state ends, it may be displayed continuously.

In S621, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "01H" to the value of the V winning notification flag. The V prize notification flag is an internal flag indicating whether or not the V prize notification has been performed. When the V prize notification is performed, "01H" is set as the value of the V prize notification flag, and when the V prize notification is not performed, "00H" is set as the value of the V prize notification flag. To. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S622.

In S622, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the value of the warning notification timer to "0". The warning notification timer is a timer for measuring the time to start the warning notification for prompting the V prize. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S623.

In S623, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the warning flag is "01H". The warning flag is an internal flag indicating whether or not the warning of V winning is being notified. When the V-winning warning is being notified, the value of the warning flag is "01H", and when the V-winning warning is not being notified, the value of the warning flag is "00H". If it is determined that the value of the warning flag is "01H", the process is transferred to S624. If it is determined that the value of the warning flag is not "01H", this V winning notification processing routine is terminated.

In S624, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the value of the warning flag to "00H". As a result, the warning notification of the V prize is terminated. When this process is completed, the V winning notification processing routine is terminated.

[Inter-round production processing]
FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing an inter-round effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This inter-round effect processing is a process for determining the effect content between the target rounds, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 136, in S630, the sub CPU 71 executes the super big bonus round-to-round effect processing. The inter-round production process of the super big bonus will be described later with reference to FIG. 137. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S631.

In S631, the sub CPU 71 executes the challenge bonus round inter-effect processing. This challenge bonus round-to-round production process will be described later with reference to FIG. 138. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S632.

In S632, the sub CPU 71 executes the additional bonus round inter-effect processing. The additional bonus round-to-round effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 142. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S633.

In S633, the sub CPU 71 executes inter-round processing. This inter-round processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 143. When this process is completed, the inter-round effect processing routine is terminated.

[Super Big Bonus Round-to-round production processing]
FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing a super big bonus round-to-round effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This inter-round effect processing of the super big bonus is a process for determining the content of the effect between rounds in the super big bonus, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 137, in S640, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “01H”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the super big bonus is being executed. If the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "01H" and it is determined that the super big bonus is being executed, the process is transferred to S641. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not "01H" and the super big bonus is not being executed, the effect processing routine between the super big bonus rounds is terminated.

In S641, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting inter-round effect data related to the super big bonus according to the value of the round counter. When this process is completed, the super big bonus round-to-round effect processing routine is terminated.

[Challenge Bonus Round-to-round production processing]
FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing a challenge bonus round-to-round effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This challenge bonus inter-round effect process is a process for determining the inter-round effect content in the challenge bonus, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 138, in S650, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “02H” or “03H”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the challenge bonus is being executed. If the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "02H" or "03H" and it is determined that the challenge bonus is being executed, the process is transferred to S651. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not "02H" and "03H" and the challenge bonus is not being executed, the effect process routine between the challenge bonus rounds is terminated.

In S651, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the round counter is "2". That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the interval between rounds after the end of the second round is in progress. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is "2", the process is transferred to S652. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not "2", the process is transferred to S653.

In S652, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "0" to the value of the validity period timer. Here, by setting the value of the validity period timer to "0", the value of the challenge bonus type flag is fixed. When this process is completed, the challenge bonus round inter-effect processing routine is terminated.

In S653, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the challenge bonus type flag is "01H". That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not one game is being executed. If it is determined that the value of the challenge bonus type flag is "01H", the process is transferred to S654. If it is determined that the value of the challenge bonus type flag is not "01H", the process is transferred to S655.

In S654, the sub CPU 71 executes the effect processing between one game round. This one-game round-to-round effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 139. When this process is completed, the challenge bonus round inter-effect processing routine is terminated.

In S655, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the challenge bonus type flag is "02H". That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the challenge is being executed three times. If it is determined that the value of the challenge bonus type flag is "02H", the process is transferred to S656. If it is determined that the value of the challenge bonus type flag is not "02H", the process is transferred to S657.

In S656, the sub CPU 71 executes the effect processing between the challenge rounds three times. The production process between the three challenge rounds will be described later with reference to FIG. 140. When this process is completed, the challenge bonus round inter-effect processing routine is terminated.

In S657, the sub CPU 71 executes an inter-surprise round effect process. This surprise round effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 141. When this process is completed, the challenge bonus round inter-effect processing routine is terminated.

[Direction processing between one-game rounds]
FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing an inter-game round effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This one-game inter-round effect process is a process for determining the content of the inter-round effect in one game, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 139, in S660, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the round counter is “9”. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is "9", the process is transferred to S662. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not "9", the process is transferred to S661.

In S661, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the round counter is "10". If it is determined that the value of the round counter is "10", the process is transferred to S662. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not "10", this one-game inter-round effect processing routine is terminated.

In S662, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the validity period timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the validity period timer is "0", the process is transferred to S664. If it is determined that the value of the validity period timer is not "0", the process is transferred to S663.

In S663, the sub CPU 71 performs the effect control process after the button operation according to the set effect data. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs effect control for executing the effect after the button operation included in the content of the effect data, based on the effect data set for performing the effect during the round execution. This process is executed when the 9th or 10th Rth is completed before the valid period of the button operation becomes 0.

In S664, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the round counter is "11" or more. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is "11" or more, the process is transferred to S665. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is less than "11", the one-game inter-round effect processing routine is terminated.

In S665, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting inter-round effect data according to the value of the round counter. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets data for executing an effect indicating transition to ST mode or non-transition. When this process is completed, the one-game round-to-round production process routine is terminated. In the single game, between the rounds other than the 11th and 12th rounds, the production is performed based on the production data set in the production processing during the single game round of FIG. 147, which will be described later. Even between the rounds of one game, the production may be performed based on the production data set in the production processing during the one-game round, and even between the rounds other than the 11th and 12th rounds, between the one-game rounds. The effect may be executed based on the effect data set in the effect process.

[Production processing between 3 challenge rounds]
FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing an effect process between three challenge rounds executed by the sub CPU 71. This three-time challenge round-to-round effect process is a process for determining the effect content between rounds in the three-time challenge, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 140, in S670, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the round counter corresponds to any of "4", "6", "8", and "10". If it is determined that the value of the round counter corresponds to any of "4", "6", "8", and "10", the process is transferred to S671. If it is determined that the value of the round counter does not correspond to any of "4", "6", "8", and "10", the process is transferred to S673.

In S671, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the validity period timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the validity period timer is "0", the process is transferred to S672. If it is determined that the value of the validity period timer is not "0", the process is transferred to S673.

In S672, the sub CPU 71 performs the effect control process after the button operation according to the set effect data. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs effect control for executing the effect after the button operation included in the content of the effect data, based on the effect data set for performing the effect during the round execution. This process is executed when the 4th, 6th, 8th, or 10th Rths are completed before the valid period of the button operation becomes 0. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S673.

In S673, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting inter-round effect data according to the value of the round counter. In this process, for example, during the start interval until the next round of the 3rd, 5th, and 7th rounds, the effect data for displaying the dialogue is set. Further, in the three-time challenge, the inter-round effect is executed based on the effect data set in this process during the interval from the third round to the next round of the twelfth round. The inter-round effect may be executed based on the effect data set in the effect process during the challenge round. When this process is completed, the effect processing routine between the three challenge rounds is terminated.

[Surprise round production processing]
FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing an inter-surprise round effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This surprise round-to-round effect process is a process for determining the effect content between rounds in a surprise, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 141, in S680, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the validity period timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the validity period timer is "0", the process is transferred to S681. If it is determined that the value of the validity period timer is not "0", the process is transferred to S672.

In S681, the sub CPU 71 performs the effect control process after the button operation according to the set effect data. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs effect control for executing the effect after the button operation included in the content of the effect data, based on the effect data set for performing the effect during the round execution. This process is executed when the 3rd to 8th Rs or the 10th Rs are completed before the valid period of the button operation becomes 0. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S682.

In S682, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting inter-round effect data according to the value of the round counter. When this process is completed, the inter-surprise round effect processing routine is terminated.

[Additional bonus round-to-round production processing]
FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing an additional bonus round inter-effect processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This additional bonus round-to-round effect processing is a process for determining the effect content between rounds in the additional bonus, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 142, in S690, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “04H” to “0BH”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the additional bonus is being executed. If the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "04H" to "0BH" and it is determined that the additional bonus is being executed, the process is transferred to S691. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not "04H" to "0BH" and the additional bonus is not being executed, the effect processing routine between the additional bonus rounds is terminated.

In S691, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the validity period timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the validity period timer is "0", the process is transferred to S694. If it is determined that the value of the validity period timer is not "0", the process is transferred to S692.

In S692, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the round counter corresponds to the round in which the addition effect is executed. If it is determined that the value of the round counter corresponds to the round in which the addition effect is executed, the process is transferred to S693. If it is determined that the value of the round counter does not correspond to the round in which the addition effect is executed, the process is transferred to S694.

In S693, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "0" to the value of the validity period timer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S696.

In S694, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the addition effect execution timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the addition effect execution timer is "0", the process is transferred to S698. If it is determined that the value of the addition effect execution timer is not "0", the process is transferred to S695.

In S695, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "0" to the value of the addition effect execution timer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S696.

In S696, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding a predetermined value to the total prize ball counter. In this process, the sub CPU 71 adds the additional numbers shown in "character", "combo", and "RUSH" based on the effect type defined in the scenario table to the total prize ball counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S697.

In S697, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting addition effect data for adding a numerical value corresponding to the number of payout prize balls displayed on the blue meter display unit 900 (see FIG. 182 or the like) described later. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets additional effect data for displaying the numerical value of the number of payout prize balls in addition to the effect such as the appearance of a character. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to SS698. In this process, effect data for executing an effect or the like related to the appearance of a character scheduled to be executed may be set.

In S698, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the remaining prize ball counter is "0". If it is determined that the value of the remaining prize ball counter is "0", the process is transferred to S700. If it is determined that the value of the remaining prize ball counter is not "0", the process is transferred to S699.

In S699, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding the value of the remaining prize ball counter to the payout prize ball counter. That is, even if the maximum number of prizes in one round is not reached and the maximum number of prizes per round is not reached at the end of one round (substantial round), the number of prizes paid out is the number of remaining prizes. Is processed as the sum of the numbers. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S700.

In S700, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting inter-round effect data according to the value of the round counter. When this process is completed, the additional bonus round inter-effect processing routine is terminated.

[Inter-round processing]
FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the inter-round processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This inter-round processing is a process for determining the effect contents between other rounds, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 143, in S710, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the residual prize ball counter is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the remaining prize ball counter is "0", this inter-round processing routine is terminated. If it is determined that the value of the remaining prize ball counter is not "0", the process is transferred to S711.

In S711, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding the value of the remaining prize ball counter to the cumulative payout prize ball counter. That is, even if the maximum number of prize balls per round is not reached and the maximum number of prize balls per round is not reached at the end of one round (substantial round), the cumulative number of prize balls to be paid out is the remaining prize balls. It is processed as a number obtained by adding numbers. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S712.

In S712, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "0" to the value of the remaining prize ball counter. When this processing is completed, the inter-round processing routine is terminated.

[Direction processing during the round]
FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the effect processing during the round executed by the sub CPU 71. The effect processing during this round is a process for determining the effect content for each round, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 144, in S720, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the round counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S721.

In S721, the sub CPU 71 executes the effect processing during the super big bonus round. The effect processing during this super big bonus round will be described later with reference to FIG. 145. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S722.

In S722, the sub CPU 71 executes the effect processing during the challenge bonus round. The production process during this challenge bonus round will be described later with reference to FIG. 146. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S723.

In S723, the sub CPU 71 executes the effect processing during the additional bonus round. The effect processing during the additional bonus round will be described later with reference to FIG. 150. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S724.

In S724, the sub CPU 71 executes the effect processing during the V challenge. The effect processing during the V challenge will be described later with reference to FIG. 151. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S725.

In S725, the sub CPU 71 executes the processing during the round. The processing during this round will be described later with reference to FIG. 152. When this process is completed, the effect processing routine during the round is terminated.

[Production processing during the Super Big Bonus Round]
FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the effect processing during the super big bonus round executed by the sub CPU 71. This super big bonus in-round production process is a process for determining the content of the super big bonus in the round, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 145, in S730, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “01H”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the super big bonus is being executed. If the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "01H" and it is determined that the super big bonus is being executed, the process is transferred to S731. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not "01H" and the super big bonus is not being executed, the effect processing routine during the super big bonus round is terminated.

In S731, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the round counter is "11". That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the 11th round, which may be a V prize, is being executed by opening the second large winning opening 37. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is "11", the process is transferred to S732. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not "11", the process is transferred to S734. In the present embodiment, the warning display of the V prize is not displayed at the 1st R, but is possible only at the 11th R. Therefore, in the processing of S731, it is determined whether or not it is the 11th R. For example, the 11th Rth. Not only, when the warning display of V winning is displayed also in the 1st round, it may be determined whether or not the value of the round counter is "1" or "11".

In S732, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the V winning notification flag is “00H”. When it is determined that the value of the V winning notification flag is "00H", the process is transferred to S733. If it is determined that the value of the V prize notification flag is "01H" instead of "00H" and the V prize notification has already been performed, the process is transferred to S734.

In S733, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the warning notification timer. In the present embodiment, for example, a value corresponding to 13000 ms is set as a predetermined value. The value set in the warning notification timer is a value corresponding to 10 seconds after the start of the long opening of the specific region 38A (the longest operating period of the displacement member operating pattern). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S734. In the present embodiment, a predetermined value is set in the warning notification timer with the opening of the specific area 38A as the start reference, but the predetermined value is set with the opening of the second large winning opening 37 provided with the specific area 38A as the start reference. May be set. For example, the warning notification of the V prize may be given 10 seconds after the opening of the second large prize opening 37 is started.

In S734, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the effect data during the round according to the value of the round counter. When this process is completed, the additional bonus round inter-effect processing routine is terminated.

[Challenge bonus round production processing]
FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the effect processing during the challenge bonus round executed by the sub CPU 71. This challenge bonus round production process is a process for determining the content of the challenge bonus effect during the round, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 146, in S740, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “02H” or “03H”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the challenge bonus is being executed. If the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "02H" or "03H" and it is determined that the challenge bonus is being executed, the process is transferred to S741. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not "02H" and "03H" and the challenge bonus is not being executed, the effect processing routine during the challenge bonus round is terminated.

In S741, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the round counter is "1". If it is determined that the value of the round counter is "1", the process is transferred to S742. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not "1", the process is transferred to S745.

In S742, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the challenge bonus selection effect data. That is, from the 1st R to the 2nd R, since the selected image for selecting the type of the challenge bonus (one game, three times challenge, surprise) is displayed, the effect data corresponding to the selected image is set. With this effect data, the effect from the start of the 1st round to the end of the 2nd round is executed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S743.

In S743, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "01H" as an initial value to the value of the challenge bonus type flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S744.

In S744, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the validity period timer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets a value corresponding to, for example, 30s in the validity period timer. This value exceeds the duration of the 1st to 2nd rounds such as the opening time of the 1st round (0.102s) + the time of the interval between rounds after the end of the 1st round (1.200s) + the opening time of the 2nd round (27.222s). Since it becomes a value, the value of the validity period timer does not become "0" from the start of the 1st round to the end of the 2nd round. Therefore, it is possible to select by operating a button between the 1st and 2nd rounds. When this process is completed, the effect processing routine during the challenge bonus round is terminated. The predetermined value set in the validity period timer may be a value corresponding to a time less than the duration of the 1st to 2nd rounds. Further, the type of the challenge bonus may be automatically switched and displayed every time the predetermined time elapses, and the type of the displayed challenge bonus may be determined according to the button operation.

In S745, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the challenge bonus type flag is "01H". That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not there is a single game as the type of challenge bonus. If it is determined that the value of the challenge bonus type flag is "01H", the process is transferred to S746. If it is determined that the value of the challenge bonus type flag is not "01H", the process is transferred to S747.

In S746, the sub CPU 71 executes the effect processing during the one-game round. The effect processing during this one-game round will be described later with reference to FIG. 147. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S751.

In S747, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the challenge bonus type flag is “02H”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the challenge is a challenge three times as a type of challenge bonus. If it is determined that the value of the challenge bonus type flag is "02H", the process is transferred to S748. If it is determined that the value of the challenge bonus type flag is not "02H", the process is transferred to S749.

In S748, the sub CPU 71 executes the effect processing during the challenge round three times. The effect processing during the three-time challenge round will be described later with reference to FIG. 148. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S751.

In S749, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the challenge bonus type flag is "03H". That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the challenge bonus type is a surprise. If it is determined that the value of the challenge bonus type flag is "03H", the process is transferred to S750. If it is determined that the value of the challenge bonus type flag is not "03H", the process is transferred to S751.

In S750, the sub CPU 71 executes the effect processing during the surprise round. The effect processing during this surprise round will be described later with reference to FIG. 149. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S751.

In S751, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "02H". If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "02H", the process is transferred to S752. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not "02H", the effect processing routine during this challenge bonus round ends.

In S752, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the round counter is "11". If it is determined that the value of the round counter is "11", the process is transferred to S753. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not "11", the effect processing routine during the challenge bonus round is terminated.

In S753, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the warning notification timer. Also in this process, for example, a value corresponding to 13000 ms is set as a predetermined value. The value set in the warning notification timer is a value corresponding to 10 seconds after the start of the long opening of the specific region 38A (the longest operating period of the displacement member operating pattern). When this process is completed, the effect processing routine during the challenge bonus round is terminated.

[Direction processing during one game round]
FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the effect processing during the one-game round, which is executed by the sub CPU 71. This one-game round-time effect processing is a process for determining the content of the one-game game during the round, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 147, in S760, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the round counter is “3”. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is "3", the process is transferred to S770. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not "3", the process is transferred to S761.

In S761, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the round counter is "7". If it is determined that the value of the round counter is "7", the process is transferred to S770. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not "7", the process is transferred to S762.

In S762, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the round counter is "8". If it is determined that the value of the round counter is "8", the process is transferred to S763. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not "8", the process is transferred to S764.

In S763, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the validity period timer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets a value corresponding to, for example, 4s in the validity period timer in order to set the button validity period for displaying the rock-paper-scissors result. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S764.

In S764, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the round counter is "10". If it is determined that the value of the round counter is "10", the process is transferred to S765. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not "10", the process is transferred to S768.

In S765, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag is “03H”. As described above, the challenge success / failure pattern flag is the challenge success / failure pattern No. It is an internal flag set according to 1 to 3. If the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag is "03H", the success notification has already been made, and if it is not "03H", the success notification has not been completed. If it is determined that the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag is "03H", the process is transferred to S770. If it is determined that the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag is not "03H", the process is transferred to S766.

In S766, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the validity period timer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets a value corresponding to, for example, 5s in the validity period timer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S770.

In S767, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the operation number counter. In this process, the sub CPU 71 changes the value set in the operation count counter according to the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag. For example, "10" is set for "02H" and "300" is set for "01H". If it corresponds to a failure, a value corresponding to the number of times that cannot be achieved within the valid period is set. Of course, the value set in the operation count counter may be uniform, or the value corresponding to the failure may be set to a value corresponding to a smaller number of times. Further, when the value of the operation count counter becomes "0" in the person corresponding to the failure, the result indicating the failure may be displayed before the value of the validity period timer becomes "0". When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S770.

In S768, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the round counter is "11". If it is determined that the value of the round counter is "11", the process is transferred to S770. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not "11", the process is transferred to S769.

In S769, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the round counter is "12". If it is determined that the value of the round counter is "12", the process is transferred to S770. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not "12", the effect processing routine during this one-game round is terminated.

In S770, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the effect data during the round according to the value of the round counter. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets the effect data according to the determination result stored in the single game effect determination process of FIG. 121. For example, when the value of the round counter is "3", the effect data from the start of the 3rd round to immediately before the start of the 7th round is set. When the value of the round counter is "7", the effect data from the start of the 7th round to just before the start of the 8th round is set. When the value of the round counter is "8", the effect data from the start of the 8th round to just before the start of the 10th round is set. When the value of the round counter is "10", the effect data from the start of the 10th round to just before the start of the 11th round is set. When the value of the round counter is "11", the effect data during the 11th round execution is set. When the value of the round counter is "12", the effect data during the execution of the 12th round is set. When this processing is completed, the production processing routine during the one-game round is terminated.

[Direction processing during the 3rd challenge round]
FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the effect processing during the three challenge rounds executed by the sub CPU 71. This effect processing during the three-time challenge round is a process for determining the effect content during the round in the three-time challenge, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 148, in S780, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the round counter corresponds to any of "4", "6", and "8". If it is determined that the value of the round counter corresponds to any of "4", "6", and "8", the process is transferred to S781. If it is determined that the value of the round counter does not correspond to any of "4", "6", and "8", the process is transferred to S783.

In S781, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the success notification has been performed. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not "success" is notified before the execution of the round corresponding to the value of the round counter, based on the determination result stored in the three-time challenge effect determination process of FIG. 122. .. If it is determined that the success notification has been performed, the process is transferred to S787. If it is determined that the success notification has not been performed, the process is transferred to S782.

In S782, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the validity period timer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets a value corresponding to, for example, 5s in the validity period timer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S787.

In S783, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the round counter is "10". If it is determined that the value of the round counter is "10", the process is transferred to S784. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not "10", the process is transferred to S787.

In S784, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag is “03H”. If the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag is "03H", the success notification has already been made, and if it is not "03H", the success notification has not been completed. If it is determined that the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag is "03H", the process is transferred to S787. If it is determined that the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag is not "03H", the process is transferred to S785.

In S785, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the validity period timer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets a value corresponding to, for example, 5s in the validity period timer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S786.

In S786, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the operation number counter. In this process, the sub CPU 71 changes the value set in the operation count counter according to the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag. For example, "10" is set for "02H" and "300" is set for "01H". If it corresponds to a failure, a value corresponding to the number of times that cannot be achieved within the valid period is set. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S787.

In S787, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the effect data during the round according to the value of the round counter. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets the effect data according to the determination result stored in the three-time challenge effect determination process of FIG. 122. When this process is completed, the effect processing routine is terminated during the three challenge rounds.

[Direction processing during the surprise round]
FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the effect processing during the surprise round executed by the sub CPU 71. This surprise round effect process is a process for determining the content of the effect during the round in the surprise, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 149, in S790, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the round counter corresponds to any of "3" to "8". That is, it is determined whether or not the effect pattern corresponds to the determined round in the surprise effect determination process of FIG. 123. If it is determined that the value of the round counter corresponds to any of "3" to "8", the process is transferred to S791. If it is determined that the value of the round counter does not correspond to any of "3" to "8", the process is transferred to S793.

In S791, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not it corresponds to a round with button operation. In this process, the sub CPU 71 stores a number (No. 2 to 4, 12 to 14) corresponding to the surprise pattern in which the valid period of the button operation is set as the determination result of the surprise effect determination process of FIG. 123. Judge whether or not. If it is determined that the round with button operation is applicable, the process is transferred to S792. If it is determined that the round with button operation does not apply, the process is transferred to S797.

In S792, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the validity period preparation timer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets a value corresponding to, for example, 4s in the validity period preparation timer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S797.

In S793, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the round counter is "10". If it is determined that the value of the round counter is "10", the process is transferred to S794. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not "10", the process is transferred to S797.

In S794, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag is “03H”. If the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag is "03H", the success notification has already been made, and if it is not "03H", the success notification has not been completed. If it is determined that the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag is "03H", the process is transferred to S797. If it is determined that the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag is not "03H", the process is transferred to S795.

In S795, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the validity period timer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets a value corresponding to, for example, 5s in the validity period timer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S796.

In S796, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the operation number counter. In this process, the sub CPU 71 changes the value set in the operation count counter according to the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag. For example, "10" is set for "02H" and "300" is set for "01H". If it corresponds to a failure, a value corresponding to the number of times that cannot be achieved within the valid period is set. Of course, the value set in the operation count counter may be uniform, or the value corresponding to the failure may be set to a value corresponding to a smaller number of times. Further, when the value of the operation count counter becomes "0" in the person corresponding to the failure, the result indicating the failure may be displayed before the value of the validity period timer becomes "0". When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S797.

In S797, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the effect data during the round according to the value of the round counter. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets the effect data according to the determination result stored in the surprise effect determination process of FIG. 123. Specifically, as the effect data to be executed in the round corresponding to the value of the round counter, (1) the effect data related to the surprise pattern determined in the surprise pattern lottery process of S483 in FIG. 123, and (2) FIG. 124. There are effect data related to the icon display pattern determined in the icon determination process of FIG. 125, and effect data related to the character band pattern determined in the character band effect determination process of FIG. 125 (3). When this process is completed, the effect processing routine during the surprise round is terminated.

[Additional bonus round production processing]
FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the effect processing during the additional bonus round executed by the sub CPU 71. This additional bonus round effect processing is a process for determining the effect content during the round in the additional bonus, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 150, in S800, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “04H” to “0BH”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is an additional bonus. When it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "04H" to "0BH", the process is transferred to S801. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not "04H" to "0BH", the effect processing routine during the additional bonus round is terminated.

In S801, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the effect data during the round according to the value of the round counter. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets the effect data for executing the effect during the round based on the effect content determined in the additional bonus determination process of FIG. 126. For example, when the value of the round counter is "1", the effect data (initial value pattern, data corresponding to the roulette pattern) corresponding to the determination result stored in the additional bonus initial processing of FIG. 129 is set. When the value of the round counter corresponds to another value, if the decision result is stored in association with the actual round, the effect data corresponding to the stored decision result is set. The value of the round counter referred to in this process is a value corresponding to the actual round from "1" to "10", but the value of the round counter is "12" to "16". It will correspond to the 11th to 15th rounds of the round. For example, if the value of the round counter is "1" to "10", the effect type, character, etc. corresponding to the 1st to 10th R of the actual round specified in the additional bonus scenario table of FIGS. 50 to 76 are referred to. However, when the value of the round counter is "11", none of the additional bonus scenario tables is referred to, and when the value of the round counter is "12" to "16", the additional bonus scenario table is displayed. Refer to the effect type, character, etc. corresponding to the 11th to 15th rounds of the specified real round. In addition, when the determination result is not stored in association with the actual round (when the effect type is G, M, or N), if the value of the round counter is a value corresponding to the actual round, the scenario number flag Based on the value of, the additional bonus scenario table, and the value of the round counter, the effect type to be executed is specified, and the effect data corresponding to the specified effect type is set. If the value of the round counter does not correspond to the actual round, the current round is the 11th round (the value of the round counter is "11") and the next 12th round (the value of the round counter is "12") is the actual round. If there is, the effect data for continuing the effect executed in the previous round (the round in which the value of the round counter was "10") is set, but in other cases it is not a real round, that is, the current When the actual round is not executed from the round, the effect data for displaying the end display pattern is set based on the determination result stored in the additional bonus end screen lottery process of S590 in FIG. 132. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S802.

In S802, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not it corresponds to a round with a combo RUSH. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the effect type of this round is "G" corresponding to "Combo RUSH". If it is determined that the round has a combo RUSH, the process is transferred to S803. If it is determined that the round with combo RUSH does not apply, the process is transferred to S807.

In S803, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting data corresponding to the operation number pattern corresponding to the determination result stored in the combo RUSH lottery process of S544 of FIG. 128. For example, if the determination result stored in the combo RUSH lottery process corresponds to the operation number pattern No. 14, the data corresponding to "5 → 3 → 5 → 5" is set as the operation number pattern. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S804.

In S804, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value based on the data set in the process of S803 in the addition number counter. For example, when the data corresponding to "5 → 3 → 5 → 5" of the operation number pattern No. 14 is set, the addition number is 4 times, and "4" is set in the addition number counter. The value to be added is +50 per "1" of the value set in the addition number counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S805.

In S805, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value based on the data set in the process of S803 in the operation number counter. For example, when the data corresponding to "5 → 3 → 5 → 5" of the operation number pattern No. 14 is set, the number of times required for the first operation is 5 times, so "5" is set in the operation number counter. Is set. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S806.

In S806, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the validity period timer. In this embodiment, a value corresponding to, for example, 8 seconds is set. When this process is completed, the effect processing routine during the additional bonus round is terminated.

In S807, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not it corresponds to a round with button operation. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not this round corresponds to a production other than "combo RUSH" and a button operation is required (roulette effect, character appearance effect, cow character revival effect). Is determined. If it is determined that the round with button operation is applicable, the process is transferred to S808. If it is determined that the round with button operation does not apply, the process is transferred to S809.

In S808, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the validity period preparation timer. For example, a value corresponding to 3s is set during the roulette effect, a value corresponding to 5s is set during the character appearance effect, and a value corresponding to 6s is set during the cow character revival effect. In addition, you may set the value corresponding to the time other than these. When this process is completed, the effect processing routine during the additional bonus round is terminated.

In S809, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not it corresponds to an effect corresponding to the effect type M, that is, a round for executing a reverse effect at the end of the additional bonus. If it is determined that the round corresponds to the effect corresponding to the effect type M, the process is transferred to S810. If it is determined that the round does not correspond to the round in which the effect corresponding to the effect type M is executed, the effect processing routine during this additional bonus round is terminated.

In S810, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the addition effect execution timer. When this process is completed, the effect processing routine during the additional bonus round is terminated. For example, a value corresponding to 7s is set in the addition effect execution timer. As a result, after the end display pattern (6.814s) is displayed, the SP character can be made to appear in a pseudo manner, and the number of additions can be added when the SP character appears.

[Direction processing during V challenge]
FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the effect processing during V challenge executed by the sub CPU 71. This effect processing during the V challenge is a process for determining the content of the effect in the V challenge, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 151, in S820, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “0CH”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is a bump V. When it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "0CH", the process is transferred to S821. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not "0CH", the effect processing routine during the V challenge is terminated.

In S821, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the effect data during the round according to the value of the round counter. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets the effect data for executing the effect at the bump V according to the number of rounds. With this effect data, the effect from the start of the 1st R to the end of the 11th R in the sudden V is executed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S822.

In S822, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the round counter is "1", that is, whether or not it corresponds to the open round of the second large winning opening 37. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is "1", the process is transferred to S823. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not "1", the effect processing routine during the V challenge is terminated.

In S823, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the warning notification timer. In the present embodiment, for example, a value corresponding to 13000 ms is set as a predetermined value. The value set in the warning notification timer is a value corresponding to 10 seconds after the start of the long opening of the specific region 38A (the longest operating period of the displacement member operating pattern). When this process is completed, the effect processing routine during the V challenge is terminated. In this process as well, a predetermined value is set in the warning notification timer with the opening of the specific area 38A as the start reference, but the predetermined value is set with the opening of the second large winning opening 37 provided with the specific area 38A as the start reference. May be set. For example, the warning notification of the V prize may be given 10 seconds after the opening of the second large prize opening 37 is started.

In S824, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "0 DH". That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is a small hit. When it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "0 DH", the process is transferred to S825. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not "0 DH", the effect process routine during the additional V challenge is terminated.

In S825, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the small hit medium effect data. The production during the small hit will be described later. When this process is completed, the effect processing routine during the V challenge is terminated.

[Processing during round]
FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the processing during the round executed by the sub CPU 71. This process during the round is a process for determining the content of the effect during the other rounds, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 152, in S830, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the round counter corresponds to a substantial round. In this process, the sub CPU 71 identifies the type of hit based on the value of the hit effect pattern flag, and determines whether or not the value of the round counter corresponds to the actual round. When it is determined that the value of the round counter corresponds to the actual round, the process is transferred to S831. If it is determined that the value of the round counter does not correspond to the actual round, the processing routine during this round is terminated. The round in which the open patterns A, B, D, and E are executed is determined as a substantial round.

In S831, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "100" as the value of the remaining prize ball counter. When this processing is completed, the processing routine during the round is terminated.

[Hit end production process]
FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing a hit end effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This hit end effect process is a process for determining the effect content in the hit end interval at the end of the big hit or the small hit, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 153, in S840, the sub CPU 71 executes the super big bonus end effect processing. This super big bonus end effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 154. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S841.

In S841, the sub CPU 71 executes the challenge bonus end effect processing. This challenge bonus end effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 155. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S842.

In S842, the sub CPU 71 executes the additional bonus end effect processing. The additional bonus end effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 156. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S843.

In S843, the sub CPU 71 executes the V challenge end effect processing. The V-challenge end effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 157. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S844.

In S844, the sub CPU 71 executes other hit end processing. This hit end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 158. When this process is completed, the hit end effect processing routine is terminated.

[Super Big Bonus End Production Process]
FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing a super big bonus end effect processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This super big bonus end effect process is a process for determining the effect content in the hit end interval of the super big bonus, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 154, in S850, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “01H”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is a super big bonus. If the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "01H" and it is determined that it is a super big bonus, the process is transferred to S851. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not "01H" and it is not a super big bonus, the super big bonus end effect processing routine is terminated.

In S851, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the effect data at the end of the super big bonus. When this process is completed, the super big bonus end effect processing routine is terminated.

[Challenge bonus end production process]
FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the challenge bonus end effect processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This challenge bonus end effect process is a process for determining the effect content in the challenge end hit end interval, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 155, in S860, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “02H” or “03H”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is a challenge bonus. If the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "02H" or "03H" and it is determined that it is a challenge bonus, the process is transferred to S861. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not "02H" and "03H" and it is not a challenge bonus, the challenge bonus end effect processing routine is terminated.

In S861, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the effect data at the end of the challenge bonus according to the value of the challenge bonus type flag. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets different effect data according to the value of the challenge bonus type flag in order to execute the end effect having different contents according to the type of the executed challenge bonus. In addition, regardless of the value of the challenge bonus type flag, the end effect having the same content may be used, or the end effect having the same content may be applied only to the two challenge bonus types. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S862.

In S862, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the challenge bonus type flag is “03H”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the challenge bonus type is a surprise. If it is determined that the value of the challenge bonus type flag is "03H", the process is transferred to S863. If it is determined that the value of the challenge bonus type flag is not "03H", the process is transferred to S864.

In S863, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "00H" as the initial value of the success notification round flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S864.

In S864, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "00H" as the initial value of the challenge bonus type flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S865.

In S865, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "00H" as the initial value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag. When this process is completed, the challenge bonus end effect processing routine is terminated.

[Additional bonus end production processing]
FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing an additional bonus end effect processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This additional bonus end effect processing is a process for determining the effect content in the hit end interval of the additional bonus, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 156, in S870, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “04H” to “0BH”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is an additional bonus. If the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "04H" to "0BH" and it is determined that it is an additional bonus, the process is transferred to S871. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not "04H" to "0BH" and it is not an additional bonus, the additional bonus end effect processing routine is terminated.

In S871, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the effect data at the end of the additional bonus. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets the effect data for displaying the title pattern based on the determination result stored in the additional bonus title determination process of S591 in FIG. 132. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S872.

In S872, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the remaining prize ball counter is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the remaining prize ball counter is "0", the process is transferred to S873. If it is determined that the value of the remaining prize ball counter is not "0", the process is transferred to S874.

In S873, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding the value of the remaining prize ball counter to the value of the payout prize ball counter. That is, in the final real round of the additional bonus, even if the maximum number of prizes in the actual round is not reached and the maximum number of prizes per round is not reached, the number of remaining prizes is added to the number of payout prizes. It is processed as a number. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S874.

In S874, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "00H" as the initial value of the scenario number flag. When this process is completed, the additional bonus end effect processing routine is terminated.

[V challenge end production process]
FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing a V-challenge end effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This V-challenge end effect process is a process for determining the effect content in the hit end interval of the V challenge, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 157, in S880, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “0CH”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is a bump V. When it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "0CH", the process is transferred to S881. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not "0CH", this V-challenge end effect processing routine is terminated.

In S881, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the V winning notification flag is "01H". When it is determined that the value of the V winning notification flag is "01H", the process is transferred to S882. If it is determined that the value of the V winning notification flag is "00H" instead of "01H" and the V winning notification is not performed, the V challenge end effect processing routine is terminated.

In S882, the sub CPU 71 sets the effect data to notify the continuation of the ST mode. When this process is completed, the V-challenge end effect processing routine is terminated.

[Hit end production process]
FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing a hit end effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This hit end effect process is a process for determining the effect content in other hit end intervals, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 158, in S890, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "00H" to the value of the hit effect pattern flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S891.

In S891, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "0" to the value of the round counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S892.

In S892, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the remaining prize ball counter is "0". If it is determined that the value of the remaining prize ball counter is "0", the process is transferred to S895. If it is determined that the value of the remaining prize ball counter is not "0", the process is transferred to S893.

In S893, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding the value of the remaining prize ball counter to the cumulative payout prize ball counter. That is, even if the maximum number of prize balls per round is not reached and the maximum number of prize balls per round is not reached at the end of the last round (substantial round) of the winning game state, the cumulative number of prize balls to be paid out is reached. The number is processed as a number obtained by adding the number of remaining prize balls. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S894.

In S894, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "0" to the value of the remaining prize ball counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S895.

In S895, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the V winning notification flag is "01H". When it is determined that the value of the V winning notification flag is "01H", the process is transferred to S896. If it is determined that the value of the V winning notification flag is "00H" instead of "01H" and the V winning notification is not performed, the hit end effect processing routine is terminated.

In S896, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "00H" to the value of the V winning notification flag. When this process is completed, the hit end effect processing routine is terminated.

[Production mode change process]
FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing an effect mode change process executed by the sub CPU 71. This effect mode change process is a process for changing the effect mode, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 159, in S900, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the type of winning game ended based on the received game state command is a small hit. The game state command may include information on the finished hit game state, and the sub CPU 71 can determine the type of the finished hit game based on the information included in the game state command. If it is determined that the type of hit game that has ended is a small hit, the effect mode change processing routine is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the type of hit game that has ended is not a small hit, the process is transferred to S901.

In S901, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the received game state command is a command indicating a probabilistic game state and a time-saving game state. If it is determined that the game state command is a command indicating a probabilistic game state and a time-saving game state, the process is transferred to S902. If it is determined that the game state command is not a command indicating a probabilistic game state and a time-saving game state, the process is transferred to S903.

In S902, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "04H" to the value of the effect mode flag. As a result, the effect mode becomes the ST mode. When this process is completed, the effect mode change process routine is terminated.

In S903, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the received game state command is a command indicating a probabilistic game state and a non-time saving game state. If it is determined that the game state command is a command indicating a probabilistic game state and a non-time saving game state, the process is transferred to S904. If it is determined that the game state command is not a command indicating a probabilistic game state and a non-time saving game state, that is, a command indicating a non-probability change game state and a non-time saving game state, this effect mode change processing routine is terminated.

In S904, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the remaining number of time reductions included as information in the game state command (hereinafter, referred to as "remaining time reduction number") is four. If it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is 4, the process is transferred to S905. If it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is not 4, the process is transferred to S906.

In S905, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "02H" to the value of the effect mode flag. As a result, the production mode becomes the short mode of the time saving mode. When this process is completed, the effect mode change process routine is terminated.

In S906, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "03H" to the value of the effect mode flag. As a result, the production mode becomes the long mode of the time saving mode. When this process is completed, the effect mode change process routine is terminated.

[Time saving mode end processing]
FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing a time saving mode end process executed by the sub CPU 71. This time saving mode end process is a process for ending the time saving mode as the effect mode, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 160, in S910, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "01H" to the value of the effect mode flag. As a result, the production mode becomes a special mode. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S911.

In S911, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "10" to the value of the special mode counter. As a result, the special mode is executed up to a maximum of 10 games. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S912.

In S912, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "0" to the value of the cumulative payout prize ball counter. That is, in this process, the value of the cumulative payout prize ball counter is cleared because the so-called "renso" is completed. This "renso" shifts from the non-probable variable gaming state and the non-time saving state to the big hit gaming state, and then returns to the big hit gaming state until the transition to the non-probable variable gaming state and the non-time saving state again. Means to migrate. It should be noted that the value of the cumulative payout prize ball counter may not be cleared according to the button operation or the like. In addition, the value of the cumulative payout prize ball counter is stored until the special mode ends, and when the special mode ends and the mode shifts to the normal mode, "0" is set to the value of the cumulative payout prize ball counter. You may do so. When this processing is completed, the time saving mode end processing routine is terminated.

[ST mode end processing]
FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing the ST mode termination process executed by the sub CPU 71. This ST mode end process is a process for terminating the ST mode as the effect mode, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 161 in S920, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "01H" to the value of the effect mode flag. As a result, the production mode becomes a special mode. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S921.

In S921, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "10" to the value of the special mode counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S922.

In S922, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "0" to the value of the cumulative payout prize ball counter. The value of the cumulative payout prize ball counter is stored until the special mode ends, and when the special mode ends and the mode shifts to the normal mode, "0" is set to the value of the cumulative payout prize ball counter. You may do so. When this processing is completed, the ST mode termination processing routine is terminated.

[Discharge error notification processing]
FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing the discharge error notification process executed by the sub CPU 71. This discharge error notification process is a process for notifying a discharge error, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 162, in S930, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the discharge error notification timer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets a value corresponding to, for example, 30 seconds. The number of seconds may be other than that, or the discharge error may be notified until the power is turned off without applying the discharge error notification timer.

In S931, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the discharge error notification timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the discharge error notification timer is "0", the process is transferred to S932. If it is determined that the value of the discharge error notification timer is not "0", this discharge error notification process is terminated.

In S932, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the discharge error notification flag to "01H". As a result, the discharge error is notified. When this process is completed, the discharge error notification process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 163 to 184, the effect contents of each effect mode will be described mainly by using a screen display example.

[Example of screen display during normal operation]
FIG. 163 is a diagram showing an example of screen display in a normal state. The normal time referred to here means the time when an effect mode such as a normal mode, a special mode, a time saving mode, or an ST mode is executed. As shown in the figure, basically, a plurality of decorative symbols 700, a first reserved number information 701 corresponding to the start memory of the first special symbol, and a second special symbol are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A in the normal state. The second reserved quantity information 702 corresponding to the start storage of the symbol is displayed.

The plurality of decorative symbols 700 form, for example, three columns, and the numerical symbols "1" to "7" are displayed so as to be in a variable display mode or a stop display mode in each column. The plurality of decorative symbols 700 are displayed in a variable manner and stopped in conjunction with the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol. When the plurality of decorative symbols 700 shift from the normal gaming state to the jackpot gaming state, the stop display mode is basically changed from the variable display mode to the same numerical symbols. However, when the plurality of decorative symbols 700 shift to the big hit game state or the small hit game state in which the sudden V is formed, the stop display mode is set in the order of the numerical symbols such as "135". The stop display mode of the decorative symbol 700 other than these is a loss.

The first reserved quantity information 701 and the second reserved quantity information 702 are displayed by the reserved marks corresponding to the reserved quantity corresponding to the start memory of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. Up to four hold marks indicating the first hold number information 701 and the second hold number information 702 are additionally displayed according to the winning of the game balls to the first start port 32 and the second start port 33, respectively. The hold mark indicating the first hold quantity information 701 and the second hold quantity information 702 is used when the decorative symbol starts to change and display together with the special symbol based on the start memory of the corresponding first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. It is hidden from the right end side and erased. When the hold marks of both the first hold quantity information 701 and the second hold quantity information 702 are displayed, the start memory of the second special symbol has priority over the start memory of the first special symbol. 2. The hold mark of the hold quantity information 702 is erased in preference to the hold mark of the first hold quantity information 701.

Although not particularly shown, different display images, background images, and the like are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A in various production modes depending on the production content. Of course, the same display image, background image, or the like may be displayed even in different production modes.

[Example of screen display in time saving mode]
FIG. 164 is a diagram showing an example of screen display in the time saving mode. First, as shown in FIG. 164 (A), when shifting to the short mode of the time saving mode immediately after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the stop when shifting to the jackpot gaming state is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. It is assumed that a plurality of decorative symbols 700 are stopped and displayed in the display mode, and a plurality of hold marks indicating the first hold quantity information 701 and the second hold quantity information 702 are displayed.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 164 (B), on the screen of the display area 4A, the variable display of the plurality of decorative symbols 700 is started, and the hold mark of the second hold quantity information 702 is changed to the first hold quantity information accordingly. It is erased in preference to the hold mark of 701.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164 (C), on the screen of the display area 4A, the plurality of decorative symbols 700 being displayed in a variable manner are displaced to the corners, and the six symbol images 700A to 700F are on the left in the central portion. It is scrolled so as to move in the direction (in FIG. 164 (C), one symbol image 700F (see FIG. 164 (D) and the like) is not shown).

The symbol image 700A is displayed as "long" as an image for notifying the transition from the short mode to the long mode. The symbol image 700B is displayed as "chance" as an image suggesting that the "long" symbol image 700A may be stopped and displayed during the variable display of the next decorative symbol 700. The symbol image 700C is displayed as "development" as an image showing that it develops into an effect indicating whether or not to shift to the winning game state. The symbol image 700D is displayed as "sorry" as an image indicating that the short mode does not shift to the long mode even if the short mode ends four times. The symbol image 700E is displayed as "big hit" on condition that the decorative symbol 700 currently being variablely displayed is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit. The symbol image 700F is displayed as a blank as an image indicating that, provided that the decorative symbol 700 currently being variablely displayed is stopped and displayed in a lost manner (see FIG. 164 (D) and the like).

In these symbol images 700A to 700F, the symbol image located at the leftmost end when the scroll display is stopped indicates the game result and the transition of the effect mode. In the present embodiment, when the scroll display of the symbol images 700A to 700F is stopped, a plurality of decorative symbols 700 are stopped and displayed thereafter. It should be noted that the scroll display of the symbol image may be stopped after the stop display of the decorative symbol. Such scroll display and stop display of the symbol images 700A to 700F are changed only in the short mode, that is, after the time saving mode is started after the end of the big hit game state, the number of changes of the decorative symbol 700 is up to 4 times. It may be performed in conjunction with the display.

For example, as shown in FIG. 164 (D), the symbol image 700C may be stopped and displayed at the leftmost end on the screen of the display area 4A. In this case, the player can raise the expectation that the effect indicating whether or not to shift to the winning game state is performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 164 (E), the symbol image 700A may be stopped and displayed at the leftmost end on the screen of the display area 4A. In such a state of the stop display of the symbol image 700A, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (decorative symbol) may occur up to four times after the end of the jackpot game state. Similarly, for the other symbol images 700B to 700F, the number of fluctuations can be stopped and displayed at the leftmost end by 4 times. In the present embodiment, regardless of whether the effect mode flag is "02H" or "03H", the mode always shifts to the short mode on the screen, and particularly when the effect mode flag is "03H", the number of fluctuations of the decorative symbol 700 changes. By the time the number of times (4 games) is reached, the "long" symbol image 700A is stopped and displayed at the leftmost end of the display area 4A. The timing at which the "long" symbol image 700A is stopped and displayed may be determined by, for example, a lottery. When the effect mode flag is "02H", the mode may always shift to the short mode on the screen, and when the effect mode flag is "03H", the mode may shift to the long mode instead of the short mode on the screen. Further, if the V prize is not won even though the winning symbol can be shifted to the probabilistic gaming state, the mode may be shifted to the long mode instead of the short mode. Further, even when the time saving mode ends without shifting to the long mode, the "long" symbol image may be stopped and displayed at the left end. Further, even when shifting to the long mode, the symbol image of "sorry" may be stopped and displayed at the left end. It is preferable that such an effect contrary to the flow of the actual time saving mode is generated on condition that the decorative symbol 700 currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode.

As shown in FIG. 164 (F), for example, when the mode is changed to the long mode after digesting four times as the number of time reductions, the effect display using the symbol images 700A to 700F is not performed on the screen of the display area 4A. , The decorative symbol 700 will be displayed in the original central part. At this time, the background image is switched from the content corresponding to the short mode to the content corresponding to the long mode.

Immediately after the end of the big hit game state, the specifications may be such that it is possible to shift to either the short mode or the long mode. In such a specification, when the number of time reductions is 4 times, it is preferable to shift from the long mode to the short mode within 4 times the number of fluctuations of the special symbol.

[Screen display example in the 1st to 2nd R of the challenge bonus]
FIG. 165 is a diagram showing an example of screen display in the 1st to 2nd R of the challenge bonus. As shown in FIGS. 165 (A) to 165 (C), in the 1st to 2nd rounds of the challenge bonus, on the screen of the display area 4A, a plurality of icons 800 indicating the number of rounds and the type of the challenge bonus are given to the player. A selection effect image for selection is displayed. As the plurality of icons 800, those corresponding to the 1st to 10th rounds are displayed, and those corresponding to the 11th to 12th rounds are not displayed. The icon 800 corresponding to the current round is highlighted by blinking or the degree of color development until the start of the next round, and when the next round starts, the icon corresponding to the previous round is erased and hidden. .. In FIG. 165, for convenience, the erased icon 800 is indicated by a broken line, and the highlighted icon 800 is indicated by a thick line.

The selection effect images include title images 810A to 810C showing the types of challenge bonuses "one game", "three times challenge", and "surprise", and character images showing characters associated with each type of challenge bonus. 811A to 811C and message images 812A to 812C showing success conditions in the production are included. The selected effect image can be switched according to the operation of the effect button.

For example, as shown in FIG. 165 (A), as the first selection effect image, the title image 810A showing "one game", the character image 811A showing "Don-chan", and "Win the rock-paper-scissors showdown! A message image 812A indicating the success condition of the "one-sided game" such as "Success!" Is displayed. Then, when the effect button is operated, as shown in FIG. 165 (B), as the next selection effect image, a title image 810B indicating "three times challenge", a character image 811B indicating "cow character", and "playing the opponent" are performed. A message image 812B showing the success conditions of the "three times challenge" such as "fly! If you can fly, succeed!" Is displayed. Further, when the effect button is operated, as shown in FIG. 165 (C), as the next selection effect image, the title image 810C indicating "surprise", the character image 811C indicating "Rinka", and "Don't miss the surprise chance". A message image 812C showing the success condition of the "surprise" such as "Success if the character is completed !!" is displayed. After the display of these selected effect images, when the second round ends and the valid period of the button operation becomes 0, the type of challenge bonus corresponding to the selected effect image being displayed is determined.

[Example of screen display for a single game]
FIGS. 166 to 171 are diagrams showing a screen display example of a single game. In the one-game match, the production is performed according to the flow explained below.

First, as shown in FIG. 166 (A), the icon 800 corresponding to the 3Rs is highlighted at the start of the 3Rs on the screen of the display area 4A. Then, on the screen of the display area 4A, the character image 811A and the character image 811D showing the opponent are displayed, and the moving image 820A showing how the draw (Aiko) continues three times with rock-paper-scissors is displayed. This moving image 820 is based on the rock-paper-scissors pattern determined by using the rock-paper-scissors pattern lottery table of FIGS. 19 and 20.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (B), when the 4th round is started, the icon 800 corresponding to the 4th round is highlighted on the screen of the display area 4A. Then, on the screen of the display area 4A, a moving image 820B is displayed, which further shows how the draws are continuous with rock-paper-scissors and shows the number of consecutive draws as an aiko count. This moving image 820B is based on the one-game combination pattern determined by using the one-game combination lottery table of FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (C), the icon 800 corresponding to the 6th R is highlighted on the screen of the display area 4A, for example, when the 6th R is started. Then, on the screen of the display area 4A, a moving image 820C showing the last number of times of the Aiko count and the character image 811A is displayed. This moving image 820C is based on the one-game combination pattern determined by using the one-game combination lottery table of FIG. Such a series of moving images 820A, 820B, and 820C are displayed on the 3rd to 6th Rths.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167 (D), when the 7th Rth is started, the icon 800 corresponding to the 7th Rth is highlighted on the screen of the display area 4A. Then, on the screen of the display area 4A, a moving image 820D showing a large line at which the last rock-paper-scissors starts is displayed. This moving image 820D is based on the one-game combination pattern determined by using the one-game combination lottery table of FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167 (E), the icon 800 corresponding to the 8th R eye is highlighted when the 8th R eye is started on the screen of the display area 4A. Then, on the screen of the display area 4A, a moving image 820E showing the message "Press!" Is displayed together with the effect button and the meter showing the valid period. This moving image 820E is based on the one-game combination pattern determined by using the one-game combination lottery table of FIG. After the display of such a moving image 820E, when the pressing operation button 9A is operated within the valid period or the valid period elapses without any operation of the pressing operation button 9A, the screen of the display area 4A is displayed as follows. Image is displayed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 168 (F), the character images 811A and 811D are displayed again on the screen of the display area 4A, and the moving image 820F showing the winning state of rock-paper-scissors is displayed. This moving image 820F is based on the one-game combination pattern determined by using the one-game combination lottery table of FIG. 18, and the one-game combination pattern includes the information "result win". It is based on.

Next, as shown in FIG. 168 (G), when the 9th Rth is started, the icon 800 corresponding to the 9th Rth is highlighted on the screen of the display area 4A. Then, on the screen of the display area 4A, a message image 820G such as "ST mode CHANGE" is displayed together with the character image 811A. As a result, it is notified that the round game in which the V prize in the specific area 38A is easy to be executed is executed. Such a message image 820G is continuously displayed even at the 10th R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 169 (H), when the 11th round is started, a message image 820G such as "ST mode CHANGE" is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A, and a prize is entered in the second large winning opening 37. A notification image 820H for notifying that a round in which it is easy to win a V in the specific area 38A is being executed is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 169 (I), if the state in which the V winning to the specific area 38A is not detected continues even after a predetermined time (approximately 13s) elapses after the start of the 11th R, the display area 4A is displayed on the screen. Displays a warning image 820I showing a warning message such as "Aim for V winning!" In order to encourage V winning in the specific area 38A.

Then, as shown in FIG. 169 (J), when the V prize for the specific area 38A is actually detected in the 11th round, the “V” indicating that the V prize is detected is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. A message image 820J such as "Winning!" Is displayed. That is, it is notified that the transition to the probabilistic gaming state has been confirmed. The message image 820J of "V winning!" Showing that the transition to the probabilistic gaming state has been confirmed is continuously displayed until the jackpot gaming state ends.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 170 (F'), on the screen of the display area 4A, the character images 811A and 811D are redisplayed at the 8th round, and the moving image 820F'showing the state of losing in rock-paper-scissors is displayed. In some cases. In this case, the moving image 820F'is based on the one-game combination pattern determined by using the one-game combination lottery table of FIG. 18, and the information that "result is lost" is added to the one-game combination pattern. It is based on being included. Such a moving image 820F'is also displayed at the 9th to 10th Rths.

In such a case, as shown in FIG. 170 (G'), the icon 800 corresponding to the 10th R is highlighted on the screen of the display area 4A, and the effect button and the meter indicating the validity period are "continuously hit". The video 820G'of the last challenge showing the message "!" Is displayed. The video 820G'of this last challenge shows the challenge success / failure pattern No. determined using the challenge success / failure lottery table shown in FIG. 1 (Challenge failure → Last chance failure) or Challenge success / failure pattern No. It is based on 2 (Challenge failure → Last chance success).

Next, as shown in FIG. 171 (H'), the screen of the display area 4A includes a message "ST mode CHANCE repeated hits!" Along with an effect button and a meter indicating the validity period, and further character images 811A and 811D. Is gradually disappeared due to the closing of the door, and the video 820H'of the last challenge showing that the result of rock-paper-scissors is unknown is displayed. The video 820H'of this last challenge also has the challenge success / failure pattern No. determined using the challenge success / failure lottery table shown in FIG. 1 (Challenge failure → Last chance failure) or Challenge success / failure pattern No. It is based on 2 (Challenge failure → Last chance success). After displaying such a moving image 820H', the pressing operation button 9A is repeatedly hit within the valid period to reach a predetermined number of operations, or the pressing operation button 9A is operated without reaching the predetermined number of operations. If the valid period elapses without the expiration date, the following image is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 171 (I'), the character images 811A and 811D are displayed again on the screen of the display area 4A, and for example, the moving image 820I'showing the state of losing in rock-paper-scissors is displayed. Will be done. This moving image 820I'is based on the one-game combination pattern determined by using the one-game combination lottery table of FIG. 18, and the challenge success / failure pattern No. It is based on the fact that the information "result loss" is included in the one-game combination pattern corresponding to 1 (challenge failure → last chance failure). Although not shown in particular, the challenge success / failure pattern No. is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. A video based on 2 (Challenge failure → Last chance success) may be displayed. In this case, for example, the door is fully closed, and the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B appear in front of the screen in the display area 4A (see FIG. 176 (F)). ).

After displaying the moving image 820I', as shown in FIG. 171 (J'), an image 820J' such as "Last challenge failed!" Is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. As a result, it is notified that a round in which it is easy to win a V in the specific area 38A is not executed. The image 820J'of such "last challenge failure!" Is continuously displayed until the jackpot game state ends. Although not shown in particular, the challenge success / failure pattern No. When a video based on 2 (Challenge failure → Last chance success) is displayed, an image such as “Last challenge success!” May be displayed on the screen of the display area 4A (see FIG. 174 (H)). As a result, it is notified that a round in which it is easy to win a V in the specific area 38A is executed.

[Screen display example of 3 times challenge]
FIGS. 172 to 174 are diagrams showing an example of screen display of the three-time challenge. In the 3rd challenge, the production will be performed according to the flow explained below.

First, as shown in FIG. 172 (A), the icon 800 corresponding to the 3Rs is highlighted at the start of the 3Rs on the screen of the display area 4A. Then, at the interval between rounds after the end of the 3Rs, a message image 830A such as "READY camon!" Is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. As a result, it is foretold that an effect requesting some operation will be performed in the next 4R.

Further, as shown in FIG. 172 (B), the icon 800 corresponding to the 5th round is highlighted at the start of the 5th round on the screen of the display area 4A. Then, at the interval between rounds after the end of the 5th round, a message image 830B such as "READY is still going on!" Is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. As a result, it is foretold that an effect requesting some operation will be performed on the next 6R.

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 172 (C), the icon 800 corresponding to the 7th R is highlighted on the screen of the display area 4A at the start of the 7th R. Then, at the interval between rounds after the end of the 7th round, a message image 830C such as "READY last is decided!" Is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. As a result, it is foretold that an effect requesting some operation will be performed on the next 8R. In such a notice effect, for example, by making it possible to display the content and order of the characters to be displayed together with "READY" in different patterns, it is suggested that a round in which it is easy to win a V in a specific area is executed. You may.

After that, for example, in the case of the 4th R, as shown in FIG. 173 (D), the icon 800 corresponding to the 4R is highlighted on the screen of the display area 4A, and "Don-chan" and the "cow character" confront each other. Along with showing the state of the operation, a moving image 830D showing the message "Press!" Is displayed together with the effect button and the meter indicating the validity period. After the display of such a moving image 830D, when the pressing operation button 9A is operated within the valid period or the valid period elapses without any operation of the pressing operation button 9A, the screen of the display area 4A is displayed as follows. Image is displayed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 173 (E), on the screen of the display area 4A, a moving image 830E showing a state in which "Don-chan" is pushed by a "cow character" and an effect result such as "success!" May be displayed. Such a moving image 820E is based on the three-time challenge pattern determined by using the three-time challenge lottery table shown in FIG. 21, and the information "success" is included in the three-time challenge pattern. It is based on. This "success!" Movie 830E may be displayed at the 6th or 8th R based on the determined 3 times challenge pattern. After displaying such a "success!" Movie 830E, a movie similar to that shown in FIGS. 168 (G) and 169 (H) to 169 (J) is displayed. When the moving image 830E of "Success!" Is displayed, the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B may be displayed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 173 (E'), on the screen of the display area 4A, the moving image 830E showing how "Don-chan" avoided the "cow character" and showing the production result such as "failure!" 'May be displayed. Such a moving image 820E'is based on a three-time challenge pattern determined using the three-time challenge lottery table shown in FIG. 21, and the three-time challenge pattern includes information of "failure". It is based on. The video 830E'of this "failure!" May be displayed at the 6th or 8th R based on the determined 3 times challenge pattern.

For example, when the video 830E'of "Failure!" Is displayed on the 8th R, "Don-chan" is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A in the next 9R as shown in FIG. 174 (F'). A moving image 830F'showing a state in which the "cow character" is turned upside down while avoiding the "cow character" and an effect result such as "failure!" Is displayed. Such a moving image 830F'is based on the three-time challenge pattern determined by using the three-time challenge lottery table shown in FIG. 21, and all the three-time challenge patterns have information of "failure-failure-failure". It is based on being included.

After that, as shown in FIG. 174 (G'), the screen of the display area 4A includes a message "ST mode CHANCE repeated hits!" Along with an effect button and a meter indicating the validity period, and the character further closes the door. The video 830G'of the last challenge showing that the result of the three challenges is unknown is displayed. The video 830G'of this last challenge shows the challenge success / failure pattern No. determined using the challenge success / failure lottery table shown in FIG. 1 (Challenge failure → Last chance failure) or Challenge success / failure pattern No. It is based on 2 (Challenge failure → Last chance success). After displaying such a moving image 830G', the pressing operation button 9A is repeatedly hit within the valid period to reach a predetermined number of operations, or the pressing operation button 9A is operated without reaching the predetermined number of operations. If the validity period elapses without, the challenge success / failure pattern No. When 2 is determined, as shown in FIG. 174 (H'), the image 830H'of "Last challenge success!" Is displayed. In this case, although not particularly shown, before the image 830H'of "Last Challenge Success!" Is displayed, for example, the door is fully closed, and the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower side are in front of the screen of the display area 4A. An effect is performed such that the side movable effect member 42B appears. On the other hand, although not particularly shown, the challenge success / failure pattern No. When 1 is determined, the image of "Last challenge failed!" Is displayed as in the screen example shown in FIG. 171 (J') described above.

[Surprise screen display example]
FIGS. 175 to 177 are diagrams showing an example of a surprise screen display. In the surprise, the production is performed according to the flow explained below.

First, as shown in FIG. 175 (A), the icon 800 corresponding to the 1st to 10th R eyes is displayed as a star mark on the screen of the display area 4A. In the 2nd round, the icon 800 corresponding to the 2nd round is highlighted. Further, a title image 810C and a character image 811C indicating "surprise" are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (B), when the 3rd round is started, the icon 800 corresponding to the 3rd round is highlighted on the screen of the display area 4A, while the 3rd to 8th rounds are highlighted. The icon 800 corresponding to is switched to the round mark and displayed. At this time, all the icons 800 corresponding to the 3rd to 8th Rs are displayed as white icons. Further, on the screen of the display area 4A, the effect video 840A dedicated to the surprise is displayed, and the character band image 840B showing the message dedicated to the surprise is displayed. The character band image 840B is based on the character band pattern determined by using the surprise character band lottery table of FIGS. 30 to 35.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (C), when the 4th round is started, the icon 800 corresponding to the 4th round is highlighted on the screen of the display area 4A, while the icon 800 corresponding to the 5th round is highlighted. The icon 800 may be displayed as a green icon, and the icon 800 corresponding to the 6th round may be displayed as a blue icon. Such a change in the display color of the icon 800 is based on the icon pattern determined by using the icon pattern lottery table of FIG. 24 and the icon change lottery table of FIGS. It can also occur at the start of the 5th to 8th rounds. Further, on the screen of the display area 4A, an effect moving image 840A and a character band image 840B different from those of the 3Rs are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (D), when the 5th round is started, the icon 800 corresponding to the 5th round is highlighted on the screen of the display area 4A, and the icon corresponding to the 5th round is highlighted. 800 may be displayed as a red icon. That is, in the 4th to 8th rounds, the display color of the icon 800 changes so as to suggest that a round (11th round) in which it is easy to win a V in the specific area 38A is executed according to the color. Further, on the screen of the display area 4A, an effect moving image 840A and a character band image 840B different from those of the 3Rs are displayed. Such a change in the message shown in the character band image 840B also suggests that a round (11th R) in which it is easy to win a V in the specific area 38A is executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 176 (E), in the 5th round, a moving image 840C showing an effect button and a meter showing an effective period is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. Such a moving image 840C is based on a surprise pattern determined by using the surprise pattern lottery table of FIG. 23.

Then, after the moving image 840C is displayed, when the pressing operation button 9A is operated within the valid period, or when the valid period elapses without any operation of the pressing operation button 9A, the display area is as shown in FIG. 176 (F). An upper movable effect member 42A and a lower movable effect member 42B appear in front of the screen of 4A. That is, with the appearance of such an effect member, it is notified that a round in which V winning in the specific area 38A is easy is executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 177 (G), a message image 840D such as "ST mode CHANGE" is displayed together with the character image 811C on the screen of the display area 4A. As a result, it is notified that a round (11th R) in which it is easy to win a V in the specific area 38A is executed. Such a message image 840D is continuously displayed up to the 10th R. In addition, even in the 3rd to 8th rounds of the surprise, there is a case where the notification that the round in which the V prize is easy is executed is not performed, and in such a case, the video of the last challenge as described above is displayed. , The image of "Last challenge success!" Or "Last challenge failure!" May be displayed based on the challenge success / failure pattern (see FIGS. 171 (J') and 174 (H')). Further, in the present embodiment, the display color of the icon may change even after notifying that a round in which V winning is easy is executed, but the display color may not be changed after the notification. Further, after such notification, the character band is not displayed, but it may be displayed.

[V challenge screen display example]
FIGS. 178 to 180 are diagrams showing a screen display example of the V challenge. In the V challenge, the production is performed according to the flow described below.

As shown in FIG. 178 (A), for example, when the V challenge is started by the transition from the ST mode, the lottery machine for lucky draw and the condition for continuing the ST mode by the effect display are shown on the screen of the display area 4A. The moving image 850A is displayed. If the transition from the ST mode to the V challenge is not performed, the conditions for entering the ST mode may be shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (B), on the screen of the display area 4A, a moving image 850B showing how the lottery machine starts rotating is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (C), on the screen of the display area 4A, after the opening of the second big winning opening 37 by the small hit starts, or after the opening of the second big winning opening 37 by the sudden V starts, or the second big winning opening 37 by the sudden V. After the first short opening starts, a moving image 850C prompting the second big winning opening 37 to aim right-handed is displayed. At this time, in the case of a sudden V, the moving image 350C continues to be displayed until the V winning in the specific area 38A is detected, but the V winning cannot be detected for a predetermined time after the second large winning opening 37 is opened. In this case, a warning image showing a warning message such as "If you do not win the lower prize opening early, you will not shift to ST mode!" Is displayed in order to encourage V winning in the specific area 38A. Then, when the V prize is detected in the sudden V, the display as shown in FIGS. 179 (D) and 179 (E) is performed. On the other hand, in the case of a small hit, the display as shown in FIGS. 180 (D') and 180 (E') is performed at the timing after the opening of the second large winning opening 37 is completed. As a warning to prompt the V prize in the sudden V, for example, the warning notification may be given only by voice. Further, the warning notification pattern is not limited to the one described above, and may be, for example, a pattern that combines the output of voice and the operation of the movable effect member, and further, the opening time of the second major winning opening elapses. As a result, a means for giving a warning may be added.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179 (D), when a V prize is detected in the sudden V, a moving image 850D showing a state in which a ball of the V mark is ejected from the lottery machine is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. To.

After that, as shown in FIG. 179 (E), an image 850E indicating "ST mode continues!" Is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. As a result, it is notified that the ST mode continues after the sudden V. After displaying such an image 850E, the screen of the display area 4A returns to the screen for performing the effect display in the ST mode.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 180 (D'), for example, in the case of a small hit, a moving image 850D'showing a ball without a V mark is displayed from the lottery machine on the screen of the display area 4A. To. It should be noted that such a moving image 850D'is also displayed when all round games are completed without detecting V winning in the specific area 38A in the sudden V.

After that, as shown in FIG. 180 (E'), the screen of the display area 4A returns to the screen for performing the effect display in the ST mode. That is, the screen returns to the display screen in the game state before the transition to the hit game state. If the V prize is not detected in the sudden V, the time saving mode (short mode) is always changed regardless of the game state before the sudden V, and the effect screen corresponding to the time saving mode is displayed. .. If the game state when the small hit is won is the final game in the time saving mode (the final game in the time saving game state) or the final game in the ST mode (the final game in the probability variation game state), the small hit game state. After the end of, the game shifts to the special mode (non-probability changing game state and non-time saving game state), and the effect screen corresponding to the special mode is displayed. That is, when the player shifts from the non-probability variable game state and the non-time-saving game state to the big hit game state or the small hit game state of the sudden V, and shifts from the normal mode or the special mode to the V challenge, for example, it is specified by the 1st round of the sudden V. When the V prize in the area 38A is detected, the mode shifts to the ST mode after the jackpot game state of the collision V ends, but if the V prize in the specific area 38A is not detected in the 1st round of the collision V, the time saving mode is set. It will be migrated. On the other hand, in the case of the small hit game state, in principle, the mode returns to the production mode at the time of the small hit winning after the end of the small hit game state regardless of whether or not the V prize is won.

[Additional bonus production pattern]
FIG. 181 is a diagram showing an effect pattern of the additional bonus. In the additional bonus, various effects are performed based on the effect types A to N showing the effect patterns determined by using the additional bonus scenario table of FIGS. 50 to 76. As shown in FIG. 181, in the effect type A, an effect movie of "waiting for character revival" is displayed, which shows a state in which a cow character may appear in a partially visible state. In the effect type B, an effect movie of "initial value determination" showing how the initial value of the number of additions is determined using roulette is displayed. In the production type C, a production video of "character appearance failure" showing a state in which the opponent does not appear although the production is performed by tug of war is displayed. In the production type D, a production video of "character appearance success-no combo" is displayed, which shows how the opponent's character appears but no other object appears. In the production type E, an opponent character appears, and for example, a production video of "character appearance success-with combo" showing how an object indicating the sun appears is displayed. In the production type F, the character of the opponent appears, for example, an object showing the sun appears, and a production video of "Character appearance success-combo available-RUSH rush" including an image prompting repeated hits of the production button is displayed. To. In the production type G, the production video of "Combo RUSH" that only prompts the continuous hitting of the production buttons is displayed. In the effect type H, an effect movie of "SP character appearance" showing how the SP character appears is displayed. In the production type I, a production video of "character revival" showing how the cow character appears again is displayed. In the production type J, prior to displaying the production video based on the production type D, the production video of "Rinka revival-no combo" showing how the character of "Rinka" appears is displayed. In the production type K, prior to displaying the production video based on the production type E, the production video of "Rinka Revival-with combo" showing how the character of "Rinka" appears is displayed. In the production type L, before the production video based on the production type F is displayed, the production video of "Rinka Revival-Combo Yes-RUSH Rush" showing how the character of "Rinka" appears is displayed. .. The production videos themselves based on the production types J to L are the same, but the production videos after display are based on the production types D to F and are different. Therefore, different symbols and symbols are used for convenience. It has a name. In the effect type M, after the end screen of the additional bonus is displayed, an effect movie of "end screen-reverse" showing how the character is turned upside down is displayed. In the effect type N, an effect screen of "no effect" is displayed, which does not show the state of the effect. The opponent characters are not limited to those described above, and as shown in the character type lottery table of FIG. 82, adolescent characters and middle-aged characters may appear. In addition, the opponent's character may appear in a vertically inverted or horizontally inverted posture, or a plurality of characters may appear. Further, the object is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and for example, an object indicating the moon may appear or a plurality of objects may appear.

The additional bonus production rules in this embodiment are as follows. Basically, the production types D to F showing how the character of "Don-chan" won the battle by tug of war with the cow character until the production video of "Character appearance failure" corresponding to the production type C is displayed. , J to L, the production video of "character appearance success" is displayed for each round, and the number of additions displayed at that time is added. Characters and objects related to the "combo" of the production types E, F, K, and L win the tug-of-war battle twice or more in a row, that is, the production of "character appearance success" corresponding to the production types D and J. It may appear when the video is displayed continuously for two or more rounds. When the production video of "character appearance success" corresponding to the production types D and J is displayed continuously for 4 rounds or more, the character or object related to the "combo" of the production types E, F, K, L is always displayed. Appears. When the production video of "character appearance success" corresponding to the production types D and J is continuously displayed for three or more rounds, the number of additions equal to or more than the number displayed in the immediately preceding round is displayed. The production video of "Rinka Revival" corresponding to the production types J to L was displayed before the production video of "Character Appearance Success", and was displayed immediately before the production video of "Character Appearance Failure" corresponding to the production type C. It is displayed so that the continuous number of "character appearance success" is continued. On the other hand, the production video of "character revival" corresponding to the production type I is displayed after the production video of "character appearance failure" corresponding to the production type C is displayed, but the "character appearance success" displayed immediately before that is displayed. Is displayed after resetting the number of consecutive times. After the production videos of "Rinka Revival" and "Character Revival" are displayed, the number of additions corresponding to at least four rounds of the actual round (400 prize balls) is determined. In the production video of "Combo RUSH" corresponding to the production type G, the number of additions corresponding to "Combo" is further added and displayed according to the button operation.

[Example of screen display of additional bonus]
FIGS. 182 to 185 are diagrams showing an example of screen display of the additional bonus. In the additional bonus, the production is performed according to the flow explained below. As an example, FIGS. 182 to 184 show the scenario number No. 1 in the additional bonus scenario table (Bb) of FIG. 71. An example of screen display corresponding to 21 is shown. FIG. 185 (A) shows, as an example, the scenario number No. in the additional bonus scenario table (Ab) of FIG. 58. A screen display example corresponding to 16 (substantially the 4th R) is shown. FIG. 185 (B) shows, as an example, the scenario number No. 1 in the additional bonus scenario table (Ca) of FIG. 73. An example of screen display corresponding to 1 (substantially the 4th R) is shown. As an example, FIGS. 185 (C) to 185 (F) show scenario numbers No. 1 in the additional bonus scenario table (Ac) of FIG. 61. An example of screen display corresponding to 1 (substantially 4th to 5th R) is shown. In the following description of the additional bonus, unless otherwise specified, the number of rounds in which the actual round is executed is simply referred to as "1Rth", "2Rth", or the like.

First, as shown in FIG. 182 (A), at the start of the 1st round, the title image 860 "additional bonus" is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. The title image 860 is displayed with a color based on the title pattern determined by referring to the title determination lottery table of FIG. 80 as a display color. The display color of such a title image 860 may be changed by operating the effect button. For convenience, the actual number of rounds (the number of executions of the actual rounds) is shown in the upper left of the screen in the figure, but it is not actually displayed. Similarly, in the drawings described below, the actual number of rounds is shown in the upper left of the screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182 (B), when the 1st round is started, the effect moving image 861 of "initial value determination" using the roulette is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. In this production video 861, "200", "300", "400", "500", "600", and "1500" are shown to fluctuate as the outcome of the roulette, and the operation of the roulette is stopped. As an effect, an effect button and a meter indicating the validity period are displayed. At this time, for example, if the pressing operation button 9A is pressed while the position where the roulette roll is "200" within the valid period is being moved and displayed (highly highlighted in the figure), the roulette operation is performed. Is stopped, but the outcome is not "200", but the outcome corresponding to the number of additions (initial value) of the effect type B specified in the addition bonus scenario table is stopped and displayed. If the pressing operation button 9A is not operated within the valid period, the roulette operation is automatically stopped after the valid period has elapsed, and the roll corresponding to the additional number (initial value) of the effect type B is stopped and displayed. .. Further, on the right end side of the display area 4A on the screen, the blue meter display unit 900 and the red meter display unit 910 are displayed so as to be adjacent to each other on the left and right, together with an image prompting "right-handed". The blue meter display unit 900 displays the number of payout prize balls counted by using the payout prize ball counter in a vertical bar-shaped graph, and displays the number of payout prize balls in the lower column. The red meter display unit 910 displays the total number of prize balls counted by using the total prize ball counter in a vertical bar graph, and displays the total number of prize balls in the lower column. At this point, the red meter display unit 910 is presented with the total number of prize balls being "0". On the other hand, during the execution of the actual round including the 1st round, the value of the payout prize ball counter (number of payout prize balls) is 10 each time the game ball wins in the first prize opening 36 or the second prize opening 37. Increase. As a result, the blue meter display unit 900 additionally displays 10 payout prize balls for each prize in the first prize opening 36 or the second prize opening 37. FIG. 182 (B) shows a state in which “20” is displayed as the number of prize balls to be paid out in the first round on the blue meter display unit 900.

After that, if the pressing operation button 9A is pressed within the valid period, or if the pressing operation button 9A is not operated at all and the valid period elapses, the operation of the roulette is stopped. At this time, for example, when the roulette roll stops at "600", as shown in FIG. 182 (C), an image showing an additional number "+600" determined as an initial value is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. 862 is displayed. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, after 2 s), the additional number "+600" is additionally displayed on the red meter display unit 910, so that "600" is presented as the total number of prize balls. Further, in FIG. 182 (C), for convenience, "600" is additionally displayed on the red meter display unit 910 while the additional number "+600" is displayed on the screen. After the additional number is displayed on the screen, the additional number is additionally displayed on the red meter display unit 910 as the additional number is switched to non-display. On the other hand, the blue meter display unit 900 displays, for example, "40" as the number of payout prize balls as a result of adding and displaying 10 payout prize balls for each prize by the end of the actual round. If the actual number of prizes is less than the maximum number of prizes per round at the end of the actual round, the blue meter display unit 900 once displays a value of less than 100 as the number of prize balls to be paid out. Even in this case, by adding the value of the remaining prize ball counter to the payout prize ball counter, a value corresponding to the upper limit payout prize ball number (100) is added to the payout prize ball counter. As a result, "100" is presented to the blue meter display unit 900 as the number of prize balls to be paid out in the first round. In addition, when the actual number of prizes exceeds the maximum number of prizes per round, the value of the remaining prize ball counter becomes "0", and the number exceeding the maximum number of payout prize balls is added to the payout prize ball counter. There is no such thing. Therefore, even in such a case, "100" is presented as the number of prize balls to be paid out in the 1st round on the blue meter display unit 900 at the end of the 1st round, which is a substantial round. In the following description, the illustration of the fact that the blue meter display unit 900 adds and displays the number of prize balls paid out by "10" and the number of prize balls paid out increases with each actual round is omitted as appropriate. , Mainly the addition display of the total number of prize balls displayed on the red meter display unit 910 will be described.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182 (E), at the time of execution of the second R, the production video 864 of "character appearance success-no combo" corresponding to the production type D is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. To. In this production video 864, it is shown that it is not known whether or not the character of the opponent appears in the tug of war (see FIG. 182 (E)). At this time, an aura of a predetermined color is displayed on the background of the character of "Don-chan", and an effect button and a meter of the validity period are displayed. The size of the effect button and the color of the aura are determined by lottery using the chance-up lottery table shown in FIG. 81. Depending on the size of such an effect button and the color of the aura, a larger number of additions can be expected. Although the illustration will be omitted below, when the tug-of-war production video is displayed, the aura and the production button determined by using the chance-up lottery table are displayed. After that, when the pressing operation button 9A is pressed within the valid period, or when the valid period elapses without any operation of the pressing operation button 9A, as shown in FIG. 182 (F), the production moving image 865 showing the result is displayed. Is displayed. In this production video 865, a state in which a cow character appears downward based on the production type D is shown, and an additional number (addition value) "+100" corresponding to the character appearance specified in the additional bonus scenario table is presented. To. Such production videos 864 and 865 are character production pattern numbers determined by using the character type lottery table (other than production type D or J + production type F in the next round) of FIG. 84 based on the production type and the number of additions. No. It is based on 4.

After such an effect video 864, 865 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 182 (G), the additional number “+100” presented in the previous effect video 865 is shown on the screen of the display area 4A. Image 866 is displayed. After that, the red meter display unit 910 additionally displays the additional number "+100", so that "700" is presented as the total number of prize balls.

After that, as shown in FIG. 182 (H), similarly, when the 3rd R is finished and the 4th R is executed, the aura and the effect button are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A, and the effect type D is supported. The production video 867 of "Character Appearance Success-No Combo" is displayed. In this production video 867, an additional number (addition value) "+50" corresponding to the appearance of the character specified in the additional bonus scenario table is also presented. In such an effect video 867, the character effect pattern number No. determined by using the character type lottery table (other than the effect type D or J + the effect type F of the next round) of FIG. 84 based on the effect type and the number of additions. .. It is based on 3. Although not particularly shown, after the production video 867 is displayed, an image showing the additional number "+50" is displayed on the red meter display unit 910, and then the additional number is additionally displayed to display the total prize ball. "800" will be presented as the number.

Next, as shown in FIG. 183 (I), when the 5th R is executed, the aura and the effect button are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A, and then the "character appearance success-combo" corresponding to the effect type E is displayed. The production video 868 of "Yes" is displayed. In this production video 868, an additional number (additional value) “+50” corresponding to the appearance of the character defined in the additional bonus scenario table and an additional number (additional value) “+100” corresponding to the combo are presented. Such an effect video 868 is a character effect pattern determined by using the character type lottery table (effect type E or F or K or L + added value due to character appearance +50) of FIG. 85 based on the effect type and the number of additions. Number No. It is based on 16.

After displaying such an effect video 868, as shown in FIG. 183 (J), the additional numbers "+100" and "+50" presented in the previous effect video 868 are shown on the screen of the display area 4A. Image 869 is displayed. After that, the red meter display unit 910 additionally displays the additional numbers "+100" and "+50", so that "950" is presented as the total number of prize balls. Further, the blue meter display unit 900 is presented with "480" as the number of prize balls to be paid out during the execution of the 5th round as an example.

Next, as shown in FIG. 183 (K), when the 6th R is executed, the aura and the effect button are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A, and then the “character appearance success-combo available” corresponding to the effect type F. The production video 870 of "-RUSH rush" is displayed. In this production video 870, the additional number (additional value) "+50" corresponding to the character appearance specified in the additional bonus scenario table and the additional number (additional value) "+100" corresponding to the combo are presented, and the following An effect button suggesting that the effect of "Combo RUSH" is executed in the round of is displayed. Such an effect video 870 is a character effect pattern determined by using the character type lottery table (effect type E or F or K or L + added value due to character appearance +50) of FIG. 85 based on the effect type and the number of additions. Number No. Although it is based on 16, as will be described below, the timing and contents of adding the number to be added to the red meter display unit 910 are different from those described above.

That is, as shown in FIG. 183 (L), when the predetermined time elapses in the 6th round, the additional numbers "+100" and "+50" presented in the previous production video 870 are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. While the image 871 shown is displayed and the effect button suggesting "combo RUSH" in the next round is continuously displayed, the red meter display unit 910 displays these additional numbers "+100" and "+50". "Is not added and displayed, and the same" 950 "as the previous time (at the end of the 5th round) is presented as the total number of prize balls. Further, the blue meter display unit 900 is presented with "580" as the number of prize balls to be paid out during the execution of the 6th round as an example.

Next, as shown in FIG. 183 (M), at the time of execution of the 7th R, the production moving image 872 of the “combo RUSH” corresponding to the production type G is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. In this production video 872, the effect button and the valid period are used to further add the additional number "+100" corresponding to the combo among the additional numbers "+100" and "+50" in the previous image 871. The message "Continuous hit!" Is displayed along with the meter indicating. When the pressing operation button 9A is operated within the valid period after displaying such an effect video 872, the number of additions (addition value) corresponding to RUSH specified in the addition bonus scenario table is within the range of "+100". Based on the operation number pattern determined using the combo RUSH lottery table of FIG. 77, the additional number "+100" corresponding to the combo is called "+150" → "+200" every time the pressing operation button 9A is operated a predetermined number of times. Is displayed as an addition. FIG. 183 (M) shows a state in which the number of additions corresponding to the combo is additionally displayed from “+100” to “+150”. After that, when the pressing operation button 9A is operated a predetermined number of times based on the operation number pattern within the valid period, the following image is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A.

For example, as shown in FIG. 183 (N), at the time of execution of the 7th R, on the screen of the display area 4A, in addition to the additional number "+50" corresponding to the character appearance presented in the previous production video 872, Image 873 showing the additional number "+200" corresponding to the combo added by the combo RUSH is displayed. This additional number "+200" corresponds to the additional number "+100" corresponding to the combo presented before the production of "Combo RUSH", and the remaining "+100" is due to the production of "Combo RUSH". It corresponds to the added amount. After that, all of these additional numbers "+200" and "+50" are additionally displayed on the red meter display unit 910, so that "1200" is presented as the total number of prize balls. Even if the predetermined number of operations is not reached within the valid period or the pressing operation button 9A is not operated at all, the additional number corresponding to the "combo" and the "combo RUSH" is additionally displayed. In addition, on the screen, the number of additions corresponding to the appearance of the character and the number of additions corresponding to the combo presented before the production of "Combo RUSH" are left as they are, and the number of additions added by the production of "Combo RUSH" is displayed. It may be displayed separately.

After that, as shown in FIG. 183 (O), when the 8th R is executed, the aura and the effect button are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A, and then the effect of "character appearance failure" corresponding to the effect type C is produced. Video 874 is displayed. At this time, the value to be added as the number of additions to the corresponding 8R is not specified in the addition bonus scenario table. As a result, as shown in FIG. 183 (P), at the end of the 8th round, the red meter display unit 910 does not display an image showing the effect of the addition display on the screen of the display area 4A. However, the additional number is not displayed additionally.

After that, as shown in FIG. 184 (Q), when the 10th R is started, an effect moving image 875 showing a cow character may be displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. An aura of a predetermined color is displayed on the background of the cow character. The color of this aura is determined by lottery using the cow character revival lottery table of FIG. 87. In the screen display example shown in FIG. 184 (Q), only the blue or green aura is displayed on the background of the cow character, and the cow character revival pattern No. determined based on the effect type A is displayed. 1 or No. It corresponds to 2.

After that, when a predetermined time (for example, 6 s) elapses, as shown in FIG. 184 (R), at the time of execution of the 10th R, on the screen of the display area 4A, "waiting for character revival" corresponding to the effect type A is displayed. The production video 876 is displayed. Such a production moving image 876 is based on the cow character revival pattern (No. 1 to 4) determined by using the cow character revival lottery table. Even when such an effect moving image 876 is displayed, although not particularly shown, the red meter display unit 910 does not display an image showing the effect of the addition display on the screen of the display area 4A. The number of additions is not displayed additionally.

Next, as shown in FIG. 184 (S), when the 11th Rth is started, an effect video 877 showing a cow character, an effect button, and a meter of the validity period is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. May occur. In this production moving image 877, a cow character with an aura of a predetermined color attached to the background is displayed. The color of the aura and the size of the effect button are determined by lottery using the cow character revival lottery table shown in FIG. 87. In the screen display example shown in FIG. 184 (S), a red aura is displayed on the background of the cow character, and an effect button consisting of either large, medium, or small size is displayed, which is based on the effect type I. No. of the cow character revival pattern determined in It corresponds to any of 5 to 7.

After that, when the pressing operation button 9A is pressed within the valid period, or when the valid period elapses without any operation of the pressing operation button 9A, as shown in FIG. 184 (T), the display area 4A is displayed on the screen. Displays a production video 878 of "character revival" corresponding to the production type I. That is, when the effect button is displayed by the effect movie 877, the next effect movie 878 can be promptly displayed by pressing the press operation button 9A within the valid period. This production video 878 is based on the cow character revival pattern (No. 5 to 7) determined by using the cow character revival lottery table. After that, although not particularly shown, at the time of execution of the 12th R and 13th R, the production moving images corresponding to the production type D as shown in FIGS. 182 (E) to 182 (G) were displayed, and were displayed in the respective production videos. A predetermined number of additional balls is additionally displayed on the red meter display unit 910, and finally, "1500" is presented on the red meter display unit 910 as the total number of prize balls that matches the total number specified in the additional bonus scenario table. It will be. After that, even at the time of executing the 14th and 15th rounds, "1500" is presented as the total number of prize balls on the red meter display unit 910.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 185 (A), for example, when the 4th R is executed, the production video 879 of "Rinka resurrection-no combo" corresponding to the production type J is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. In some cases. FIG. 185 (A) shows a state in which only the character “Rinka” is displayed first. According to the production video 879 based on the production type J, after the character of "Rinka" is displayed, the production video as shown in FIGS. 182 (E) to 182 (G) is displayed, which is defined in the additional bonus scenario table. The additional number (addition value) "+100" corresponding to the appearance of the character "Rinka" will be additionally displayed on the red meter display unit 910. In such an effect video 879, the character effect pattern number No. determined by using the character type lottery table (other than the effect type D or J + the effect type F of the next round) of FIG. 84 based on the effect type and the number of additions. .. It is based on 4. Although not particularly shown, after that, the additional number "+100" is additionally displayed on the red meter display unit 910, so that "500" is presented as the total number of prize balls.

Further, as shown in FIG. 185 (B), for example, when the 4th R is executed, the production video 880 of "SP character appearance" corresponding to the production type H may be displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. .. In this production video 880, an additional number (addition value) "+1100" corresponding to the appearance of the character specified in the additional bonus scenario table is presented. In such an effect moving image 880, the character effect pattern number No. determined by using the character type lottery table (effect type C or H) of FIG. 82 based on the effect type and the number of additions. It is based on 2. Although not particularly shown, after that, the additional number "+1100" is additionally displayed on the red meter display unit 910, so that "1500" which has reached the upper limit as the total number of prize balls is presented.

Further, as shown in FIG. 185 (C), for example, when the 4th R is executed, the production video 881 of "character appearance failure" corresponding to the production type C may be displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. .. In this production moving image 881, the character production pattern number No. determined by using the character type lottery table (effect type C or H) of FIG. 82 is used. It is based on 1. After that, at the time of execution of the 5th R, as shown in FIG. 185 (D), an effect image 882 showing a message of the end screen such as "Additional bonus is finished!" Is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. At this time, the displays of the blue meter display unit 900 and the red meter display unit 910 are temporarily erased on the screen of the display area 4A. Such an effect image 882 is displayed in the early stage when the short opening of the hit pattern 5 at the 5th round is repeatedly executed a plurality of times. Further, the effect image 882 is the No. 1 of the end display pattern determined by using the additional bonus end screen lottery table of FIG. 88. Although the display content is the same as that of 3, the effect image 882 is displayed as the first half of the effect movie of "end screen-reverse" corresponding to the effect type M. By displaying such an effect image 882, although the additional bonus has not ended internally, the player has an impression that the additional bonus has ended.

After that, as shown in FIG. 185 (E), in the latter half of the 5th round (immediately before the first middle opening), on the screen of the display area 4A, the "end screen-reverse" corresponding to the effect type M is displayed. As the effect moving image, the effect movie 883 showing how the character is turned upside down is displayed. In this production video 883, "+1100", which reaches the upper limit value, is presented as an additional number (addition value) corresponding to the appearance of the character specified in the additional bonus scenario table.

After that, as shown in FIG. 185 (F), an image 884 showing the additional number "+1100" presented in the previous production moving image 883 is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. Then, the additional number "+1100" is additionally displayed on the red meter display unit 910, so that "1500" which has reached the upper limit as the total number of prize balls is presented.

[Effect of the gaming machine of the first embodiment]
According to the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

According to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, in the big hit game state, the first big winning opening 36 is controlled so as to fluctuate into an open state and a closed state a plurality of times in at least one round game, while the second. The big winning opening 37 is controlled so that the V winning to the specific area 38A is easily long open in at least one round game, and the second big winning opening 37 is specified in at least one other round game. It is controlled so that the short opening is difficult to win a V in the area 38A. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the number of times the round game is executed while performing the round game in the big hit game state a plurality of times using the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37, and the second. By opening the large winning opening 37 for a long time, it is possible to facilitate the transition to the probabilistic gaming state.

Further, as a big hit game state, a big prize opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern 2) in which a round game with a short opening precedes a round game with a long opening for the second big winning opening 37 can be executed. On the contrary, the large winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit patterns 4 to 11) in which the round game having a long opening precedes the round game having a short opening for the second large winning opening 37 can be executed. That is, since the timing (number of rounds) in which the long open round game that facilitates the transition to the probabilistic game state is executed can be different as the 1st or 11th round, the number of rounds and the jackpot game state can be changed. It can enhance the interest.

Further, the above-mentioned large winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern 2) or large winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit patterns 4 to 11) can be executed according to the first starting opening 32 or the second starting opening 33 in which the game ball has won a prize. Therefore, the execution timing (number of rounds) of the long-open round game that facilitates the transition to the probabilistic game state can be different as the 1st or 11th round, so that the player can set the number of long-open rounds. By confirming, it is easy to determine which of the first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33 is in the state in which the corresponding large winning opening opening / closing pattern is executed based on the winning of the game ball. Can be recognized.

Further, when the V winning of the game ball to the specific area 38A is not detected for a predetermined time (approximately 13s) after the second large winning opening 37 starts to open, a warning notification prompting the V winning is performed, so that the game is played. The person can clearly recognize the round game in which the second big winning opening 37 is long open, which makes it easy to shift to the probabilistic game state even in a situation where it is difficult to recognize the number of rounds. That is, the player can surely avoid the disadvantage that the game ball is not V-winned in the specific area 38A without knowing it, and the game ball is not shifted to the probabilistic game state after the end of the big hit game state.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, in the big hit game state, the number of rounds is displayed by the icon 800 as the number of rounds notification image, and the round game in which the V prize is easy is executed in advance. When the advance notification for notifying the fact is executed by using the icon 800, the display color of the icon 800 is changed according to the execution time of the advance notification. Therefore, such an icon 800 The effect of the effect will be enhanced by the timing when the display color of the game changes, and the player's interest in the transition to the probabilistic gaming state due to the V prize will be increased along with the expectation for the round game where the V prize is easy, and the interest of the game will be improved. Can be made to.

It should be noted that even in a gaming machine in which only one large winning opening is provided and a specific area in which a V winning is possible is provided inside the large winning opening, the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided. By doing so, the same effect can be obtained. In addition, even in a gaming machine that determines the transition to a probabilistic gaming state according to the type of winning symbol without using a specific area where V winning is possible, when a round game in which a winning is easy is executed, a notification to that effect is given. The display color of the icon can be changed depending on whether or not it corresponds to the number of rounds to be performed, and in such a case, the same effect as that of the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment can be obtained.

Further, in the jackpot game state, the display color of the icon 800 is changed each time the round game is executed, so that the effect of the effect can be gradually increased according to the number of rounds.

Further, since the display color of the icon 800 is associated with the number of rounds and the display color of the icon 800 is determined according to whether or not the number of rounds corresponds to the execution time of the advance notification, the execution time of the advance notification is determined. The icon pattern can be determined so as to change the display color of the icon 800, and the player can gradually increase the expectation for the round game in which the V prize is easy to be obtained each time the round game is executed.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the game ball wins a V prize in the specific area 38A during the big hit game state, the game shifts to the probabilistic game state after the end of the big hit game state, and the big hit game state is changed. In each round game, the total number of prize balls is displayed on the red meter display unit 910, and after the round game (1R in the present embodiment) in which V winning is easy is executed, the total prize is displayed within the range of the total number. The number of balls is changed. As a result, in the jackpot gaming state, the transition to the probabilistic gaming state is conscious, and unless the total number of prize balls displayed on the red meter display unit 910 reaches the total number planned for the jackpot gaming state. Since it becomes difficult to understand how long the jackpot game state will continue, it is possible to enjoy the game property of winning a V and the game property of making it difficult to understand the continuation of the jackpot game state, which can enhance the interest of the game. It should be noted that even in a gaming machine in which only one large winning opening is provided and a specific area in which a V winning is possible is provided inside the large winning opening, the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided. By doing so, the same effect can be obtained.

In addition, during the execution of the actual round game, the number of prize balls paid out or planned to be paid out each time the game balls are won in the first prize opening 36 or the second prize opening 37 is displayed on a blue meter. Although it is possible to display in the section 900, the number of prize balls corresponding to the amount exceeding the upper limit winning number is not displayed as the number of payout prize balls, so the total number of prize balls finally displayed on the red meter display unit 910. It is possible to prevent a contradiction between the number of prize balls displayed on the blue meter display unit 900 and the number of prize balls to be paid out.

In addition, even if the game ball does not win the first prize opening 36 or the second prize opening 37 until the maximum number of prizes is exceeded during the execution of the actual round game, the quantity corresponding to the maximum number of prizes. Is displayed as the number of payout prize balls, so even in such a place, there is a contradiction between the total number of prize balls finally displayed on the red meter display unit 910 and the number of payout prize balls displayed on the blue meter display unit 900. Can be prevented from occurring.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, as a jackpot game state in which a round game is executed a plurality of times, a round game having a possibility of winning a V is executed twice, and only the first round game is V. The first jackpot game state (corresponding to hit patterns 4 to 12) in which a round is easy to win, and the second jackpot game state (corresponding to hit pattern 2) in which only the last round game is a round game in which V is easy to win. ) And a third big hit game state (corresponding to the hit pattern 1) in which all of these two round games are round games in which V prizes are easy to win. That is, in the first to third big hit game states, since the pattern of the number of rounds in which the round game in which the V prize is easy is executed is different, it is possible to enhance the game playability in which the round game in which the V prize is easy is difficult to understand. As a result, the monotonousness of the big hit game state can be eliminated. It should be noted that even in a gaming machine in which only one large winning opening is provided and a specific area in which a V winning is possible is provided inside the large winning opening, the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided. By doing so, the same effect can be obtained.

Specifically, in the first big hit game state, a round game in which V winning is easy is executed only in the 1st round based on the hit patterns 4 to 12, and in the second big hit game state, the hit pattern 2 is executed. Based on this, the round game in which the V prize is easily won is executed only in the 11th round, and in the third big hit game state, the round game in which the V prize is easy is executed in both the 1st and 11th rounds. That is, in the third big hit game state, even if the game ball cannot be V-winned in the specific area 38A in the 1st round, the game ball is V-winned in the specific area 38A in the 11th round to shift to the probabilistic gaming state. Can be made to. As a result, in the third jackpot gaming state, the round game can be executed more favorably for the player than in the first and second jackpot gaming states, and the player can execute such a third jackpot gaming state. You can proceed with the game while expecting.

Further, since the player can recognize the number of rounds of the round game that is easy to win V according to various production patterns, it is not necessary to clearly notify that the round game that is easy to win V is executed. V It is possible to recognize the number of rounds in which a round game that is easy to win is executed.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, as described above, the warning notification for urging the V prize can be performed, so that it is possible to avoid the disadvantage of not being transferred to the probabilistic gaming state without knowing it. , The following effects can also be obtained. That is, when the round game in which V winning is easy is performed in the 1st and 11th rounds (in the case of the hit pattern 1), even if the V winning in the specific area 38A is not detected in the first 1R, the last 11R Since the warning notification for prompting the V prize to the specific area 38A is performed by the eyes, it is possible to execute such a warning notification at an appropriate timing without unnecessarily performing such a warning notification.

Further, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 38A between the time when the displacement member 39 is opened and the time (10s) elapses during the execution of the round game in which the V prize is easy to win, the specific area 38A is reached. Since the warning notification for prompting the passage of the game ball (V winning) is performed, such a warning notification is appropriately performed without giving the warning notification when the displacement member 39 is closed and the game ball cannot pass through the specific area 38A. It can be executed at the timing of.

Further, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 38A between the start of the period in which the displacement member 39 is opened and the V winning in the specific area 38A becomes easy and the predetermined time (10s) elapses. , A warning notification is performed to encourage the passage of the game ball to the specific area 38A (V prize). Therefore, such a warning notification is executed at an appropriate timing at which the V prize to the specific area 38A becomes easier. be able to.

[Examples of other embodiments]
Next, examples of other embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 186 to 233.

FIG. 186 is a perspective view showing a large winning opening of a gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. The same or similar components as those according to the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in FIG. 186 is provided with only one large winning opening.

As shown in FIG. 186, a large winning opening 37 is provided in a part of the game board. Inside the grand prize opening 37, a ball passage 37B for guiding the game ball downward is formed. At the lower end of the ball passage 37B, a specific area 38A and a non-specific area 38B are provided so as to be adjacent to the left and right. A large winning opening count switch 370 is arranged at a position where the large winning opening 37 enters the ball passage. A specific area switch 380A is arranged in the specific area 38A, and the V winning of the game ball in the specific area 38A is detected by the specific area switch 380A. A non-specific area switch 380B is arranged in the non-specific area 38B, and the passage of the game ball through the non-specific area 38B is detected by the non-specific area switch 380B. A displacement member 39'that can be displaced to the left or right is provided in the vicinity of the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B inside the ball passage 37B. The position where the displacement member 39'is shown by a solid line in FIG. 186 is the position after the displacement, and the position where the displacement member 39'is shown by a virtual line in FIG. 186 is the initial position.

The displacement member 39'switches the specific region 38A into an open state or a closed state. As shown by the solid line in FIG. 186, when the displacement member 39'is in the fixed position on the left side farthest from the specific area 38A, the specific area 38A is opened and the V prize of the game ball to the specific area 38A is given. Make it easy. At this time, the displacement member 39'forms a gap between the displacement member 39'and the right wall of the ball passage 37B through which the game ball can sufficiently pass. As a result, the game ball guided from above the ball passage 37B is guided downward through between the right side wall of the ball passage 37B and the displacement member 39', and can pass through the specific area 38A. is there. Further, when the displacement member 39'is in a fixed position on the left side, a gap through which the game ball can pass is formed between the left wall of the ball passage 37B and the displacement member 39'. As a result, the game ball guided from above the ball passage 37B may pass between the left side wall of the ball passage 37B and the displacement member 39'and pass through the non-specific region 38B.

When the specific area is opened, the displacement member may be moved to a position where the game ball cannot pass through the non-specific area. Further, when the specific area is opened, the first position of the displacement member such that the game ball can pass through the non-specific area and the first position of the displacement member such that the game ball cannot pass through the non-specific area. The displacement member may be placed at any of the two positions, and the displacement member may be controlled to move to the first position or the second position according to the game mode or the like. For example, when the displacement member is placed in the second position, the game ball always passes through the specific area if a prize is won in the large winning opening, which is more advantageous for the player than the one according to the first embodiment described above. Game mode can be provided.

On the other hand, as shown by a virtual line in FIG. 186, when the displacement member 39'is in the fixed position on the right side closest to the specific area 38A, the specific area 38A is closed and the game ball to the specific area 38A. V prize is made impossible. At this time, the displacement member 39'forms a gap through which the game ball can pass between the displacement member 39'and the left wall of the ball passage 37B. As a result, the game ball guided from above the ball passage 37B is guided downward through between the left wall of the ball passage 37B and the displacement member 39', and always passes through the non-specific area 38B. Become.

Even in a pachinko gaming machine using such a displacement member 39', it is possible to shift to a probabilistic gaming state or the like after the end of the jackpot gaming state in which the V prize in the specific area 38A is successfully completed in the jackpot gaming state.

FIG. 187 is a diagram showing a large winning opening opening / closing pattern (modification example) of the gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 188 is a diagram showing a displacement member operation pattern corresponding to the large winning opening opening / closing pattern of FIG. 187. The large winning opening opening / closing pattern and the displacement member operating pattern shown in FIGS. 187 and 188 are applied to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in FIG. 186.

As shown in FIG. 187, the modified example of the large winning opening opening / closing pattern is basically the same as the large winning opening opening / closing pattern shown in FIG. 11, and is applied to one large winning opening provided with a specific area. It is a possible big winning opening opening and closing pattern. In such a large winning opening opening / closing pattern, as shown in FIG. 188, the displacement member 39'that opens and closes the specific area 38A is set to the operating state only at the 1st and 11th rounds as an example, and is located at the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 186. It becomes a certain state. On the other hand, at the 2nd to 10th rounds and the 12th to 16th rounds, the displacement member 39'is in an inactive state and is in a state shown by a virtual line in FIG. 186. Even in a pachinko gaming machine in which such a large winning opening opening / closing pattern is applied to one large winning opening, the same effect as that of the first embodiment described above can be realized.

FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process of the gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. This special symbol control process is a pachinko gaming machine in which the main CPU determines whether or not to shift to a probabilistic gaming state according to the type of jackpot symbol without providing a specific area while providing only one big winning opening. It is applied to.

As shown in FIG. 189, first, in S1000, the main CPU performs a process of determining the presence / absence of start storage. In this process, when the main CPU determines that there is no start memory of the special symbol game, that is, when data is not stored in the special symbol start storage area (0) to the special symbol start storage area (4), the data is stored. This process is repeated until it is stored. On the other hand, when the main CPU determines that there is a start memory, it shifts the process to S1001.

In S1001, the main CPU executes the jackpot determination process. In this process, the main CPU uses a jackpot determination table for high probability with a large number of jackpot determination values or a low probability determination table with a small number of jackpot determination values, depending on whether or not the game status flag indicates a probability variation gaming state. Refer to the jackpot judgment table of. Further, the main CPU refers to the hit determination random value in the special symbol start storage area and the selected jackpot determination table, which is extracted when the game ball wins a prize. Then, when the hit determination random value and the jackpot determination value match, the main CPU determines that the jackpot is a jackpot. That is, the main CPU determines whether or not the jackpot game state is favorable to the player. That is, as a result of the special symbol game, either a big hit or a loss is determined. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1002.

In S1002, the main CPU determines whether or not the determination result of S1001 is a big hit. In this process, when the main CPU determines that it is a big hit, it shifts the process to S1003. On the other hand, when the main CPU determines that it is not a big hit, that is, when it determines that it is not a big hit, the main CPU shifts the processing to S1000.

In S1003, the main CPU controls the jackpot game state. That is, the main CPU executes a large winning opening opening display command, a large winning opening opening data set, and the like. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1004.

In S1004, the main CPU performs a process of determining whether or not the control of the jackpot gaming state executed in S1003 is based on the special symbol of the probability variation jackpot. If it is determined that it is based on the special symbol of the probabilistic jackpot, the process is transferred to S1006. If it is determined that it is not based on the special symbol of the probabilistic jackpot, the process is transferred to S1005.

In S1005, the main CPU controls the non-probability changing gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state that started the control in S1003. That is, in the jackpot game state based on a special symbol other than the probability variation jackpot, the state shifts to the non-probability variation game state after the end. When the game shifts to such a non-probability game state, the main CPU shifts the process to S1000 again.

In S1006, the main CPU controls the probabilistic gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state that started the control in S1003. That is, in the big hit game state based on the special symbol of the probabilistic big hit, the state always shifts to the probabilistic game state after the end. When the state shifts to such a probabilistic gaming state, the main CPU again shifts the process to S1000.

In a pachinko gaming machine to which such a special symbol control process is applied, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in a round in which it is easy to win a prize in the large winning opening by providing an effect mode similar to that of the first embodiment described above. it can.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 190 to 233, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, which has substantially the same configuration as that of the first embodiment described above but has additionally realized different game performance and specifications. It will be described in detail. The same or similar components as those according to the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

[Game board]
FIG. 190 is a front view of the game board according to the second embodiment of the present invention. As shown in the figure, a first passage gate 35A and a second passage gate 35B are provided on the left side and the right side of the stage 31 so that the stage 31 can be shot separately on the left and right sides. Although not particularly shown, a first pass gate switch is provided behind the first pass gate 35A, and a second pass gate switch is provided behind the second pass gate 35B. Basically, when a left-handed hit is made, the game ball flows down the left side of the stage 31 so that it can easily pass through the first passing gate 35A, and the passing of the game ball at the first passing gate 35A is the first passing gate switch. When detected by, a predetermined detection signal corresponding to the detection signal is supplied to the main control circuit 60. On the other hand, when a right-handed hit is made, the game ball flows down on the right side of the stage 31 so that it can easily pass through the second passing gate 35B, and the passing of the game ball at the second passing gate 35B is detected by the second passing gate switch. Then, a predetermined detection signal corresponding to the detection signal is supplied to the main control circuit 60. Such a first passing gate 35A and a second passing gate 35B are basically provided as those related to a normal symbol lottery, but in the present embodiment, they function as a mechanism for starting control of a round game. In addition, it is also used as a mechanism for the player to select a large winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern), which will be described later. Further, in the present embodiment, the first starting port 32 and the first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33 can be won by the game ball regardless of whether the ball is hit right or left. Both of the second starting ports 33 are lower than the second winning opening 37 and are located at the positions where the game balls flow down from both the left and right directions. As an example, the first starting opening 32 is on the left side of the second starting opening 33. It is provided so as to be located. According to such an arrangement of the first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33, for example, by performing a right-handed hit in the jackpot game state, the cover member 43 does not enter the second winning opening 37 and is placed on the upper end surface of the cover member 43. The game ball that has flowed down along the line may win a starting prize in either the first starting port 32 or the second starting port 33. That is, in the jackpot game state, both the start memory related to the first special symbol and the start memory related to the second special symbol may increase. The same applies to game states other than the jackpot game state.

[Large winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern)]
FIG. 191 is a diagram showing a large winning opening opening / closing pattern of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. As shown in the figure, as the large winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern), a hit pattern 14 is newly defined in addition to the same hit patterns 1 to 13 as those according to the first embodiment described above. This hit pattern 14 occurs at the time of the probability variation bonus described later, and is a hit pattern in which the specified number of rounds is 12R and the actual number of rounds is 2R. The hit pattern 14 is defined so that the second big winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern A at the 1st and 11th rounds, and the first big winning opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern H at the 2nd to 10th R and the 12th R. ing. That is, in the hit pattern 14, only the 1st and 11th rounds correspond to the actual round game, and the V winning to the specific area 38A is executed as a round in both the 1st and 11th rounds, so that the probability variation game is played. It is executed as an opening / closing pattern that facilitates the transition to the state.

[Table for determining winning symbols]
FIG. 192 is a diagram showing a winning symbol determination table of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. This hit symbol determination table is stored in the main ROM 62 and is referred to in the special symbol determination process (see FIG. 102) of the main CPU 61. As shown in the figure, the hit symbol determination table includes a jackpot symbol determination table (first special symbol) related to the first special symbol and a jackpot symbol determination table (second special symbol) related to the second special symbol. ) And a table for determining a small hit symbol (second special symbol) related to the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, when the main CPU 61 determines that the jackpot has been won in the jackpot determination process (see S178 in FIG. 101), the jackpot symbol determination table (first special symbol). Alternatively, when the big hit symbol is determined using the big hit symbol determination table (second special symbol) and the small hit determination process (see S179 in FIG. 101) determines that the small hit is won by the main CPU 61, the small hit symbol is determined. The small hit symbol is determined using the table (second special symbol). The big hit determination process and the small hit determination process are executed, for example, by a random number lottery that extracts a predetermined random number from a random number range of 0 to 65535. For example, in the non-probability variation game state, the jackpot probability is relatively low 1 / 239.18 (274/65536), and when any random number from 0 to 273 defined as the jackpot determination value is extracted, the jackpot is determined. You will be elected. On the other hand, in the probabilistic game state, the jackpot probability is relatively high 1 / 81.92 (800/65536), and when any random number from 0 to 799 defined as the jackpot determination value is extracted, the jackpot is won. It becomes. If the big hit is not won in either the probabilistic game state or the non-probability change game state, the small hit probability is 1 / 299.25 (219/65536), and any of 800 to 1018 defined as the small hit determination value. When that random number is extracted, a small hit is won. If random numbers other than these are extracted, it will be a loss that is neither a big hit nor a small hit.

The jackpot symbol determination table (first special symbol) can be assigned according to the jackpot symbols 1 to 3 and the jackpot symbols 1 to 3 which can be determined when the result of the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol is a jackpot winning. The number of time reductions (100 times or 30 times) and lottery value information (selection rate) for determining the jackpot symbols 1 to 3 by random number lottery are defined. The lottery value information is actually defined as a predetermined value in a predetermined random number range (0 to 99), but for convenience, the selection rate is shown in FIG. 192. That is, in the special symbol determination process using the jackpot symbol determination table (first special symbol), the jackpot symbol 1 is determined as the first special symbol with a probability that the selection rate becomes 5/100, and the number of time reductions is 100 times. Is given, the jackpot symbol 2 is determined as the first special symbol with the probability that the selection rate becomes 45/100, and 30 times is given as the number of time reductions, and the first special symbol has the probability that the selection rate becomes 50/100. As the jackpot symbol 3 is determined, 30 times are given as the number of time reductions. In addition, the number of time reductions is given on condition that the jackpot is won in the non-time saving game state, and after the end of the jackpot game state according to the condition, the non-probability change without shifting to the probability change game state (ST game state). It is stipulated that it will be granted only when shifting to the gaming state.

The jackpot symbol determination table (second special symbol) corresponds to the jackpot symbols 1, 2, 4 and the jackpot symbols 1, 2, 4 that can be determined when the result of the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol is a jackpot winning. The number of time reductions (100 times or 30 times) that can be given and the lottery value information (selection rate) for determining the jackpot symbols 1 to 3 by random number lottery are defined. Also in this jackpot symbol determination table (second special symbol), the lottery value information is actually defined as a predetermined value within a predetermined random number range (0 to 99), but for convenience, the figure is shown. 192 shows the selectivity. That is, in the special symbol determination process using the jackpot symbol determination table (second special symbol), the jackpot symbol 1 is determined as the second special symbol with a probability that the selection rate becomes 8/100, and the number of time reductions is 100 times. Is given, the jackpot symbol 2 is determined as the second special symbol with the probability that the selection rate becomes 2/100, and 30 times is given as the number of time reductions, and the second special symbol has the probability that the selection rate becomes 90/100. As the jackpot symbol 4 is determined, 100 times are given as the number of time reductions. The number of time reductions given using the big hit symbol determination table (second special symbol) is also given on condition that the big hit is won in the non-time reduction game state, and the end of the big hit game state according to the condition. After that, it is stipulated that the grant is given only when the player shifts to the non-probable changing gaming state without shifting to the probabilistic gaming state (ST gaming state).

The small hit symbol determination table (second special symbol) is used to determine the small hit symbol that can be determined when the result of the small hit determination related to the second special symbol is a small hit and the small hit symbol is determined by a random number lottery. The lottery value information (selection rate) is specified. Also in this small hit symbol determination table (second special symbol), the lottery value information is actually defined as a predetermined value in a predetermined random number range (0 to 99), but for convenience, it is defined as a predetermined value. FIG. 192 shows the selectivity. That is, in the special symbol determination process using the small hit symbol determination table (second special symbol), the small hit symbol is determined as the second special symbol with a probability that the selection rate becomes 100/100. Since the game state basically does not change before and after the transition to the small hit game state triggered by the small hit winning, the number of time reductions corresponding to the small hit symbol is not specified.

By having such a big hit symbol determination table, in this embodiment, the specifications regarding the time-saving gaming state are different from those in the first embodiment described above. That is, in the present embodiment, when the game shifts to the probabilistic game state (ST game state) after the end of the jackpot game state, the number of games (the number of changes in the special symbol) is 190 times as in the first embodiment described above. The probabilistic game state continues until, and in conjunction with this probabilistic game state, the time-saving game state also continues until the number of games is 190 times. On the other hand, when a big hit is won in the non-time saving game state and the big hit game state is changed accordingly, and after the end of the big hit game state, the probability change game state cannot be changed and the non-probability change game state is changed. Is a time-saving game state in which the number of time reductions is up to 100 times or 30 times according to the jackpot symbol defined in the jackpot symbol determination table. However, if a big hit is won in the time-saving game state and the big hit game state is changed accordingly, and if the game state cannot be changed to the probable change game state after the end of the big hit game state and the game is changed to the non-probable change game state, the game is changed to the non-probable change game state. Without relying on the jackpot symbol determination table, the time saving game state is always up to 100 times.

The jackpot symbol 1 specified in the jackpot symbol determination table corresponds to a combination of "3" or "7" decorative symbols, and the jackpot symbol 2 has a decorative symbol "1" or "5". The jackpot symbol 3 corresponds to a combination of "2", "4", or "6", and the jackpot symbol 4 has a decorative symbol of "2", "4", or "6". 8 ”corresponds to the combination mode.

[Table for selecting hit patterns]
FIG. 193 is a diagram showing a hit pattern selection table for a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. This hit pattern selection table is stored in the main ROM 62 and is referred to in the hit pattern determination process (see S1302 in FIG. 197) of the hit pattern selection process of the main CPU 61, which will be described later. As shown in the figure, the hit pattern selection table includes a hit pattern selection table related to the jackpot symbol 1 (big hit symbol 1), a hit pattern selection table related to the jackpot symbol 2 (big hit symbol 2), and a jackpot symbol. A hit pattern selection table (big hit symbol 3) related to the symbol 3 and a hit pattern selection table (big hit symbol 4) related to the jackpot symbol 4 are provided. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is determined by the main CPU 61 in the special symbol determination process, the hit pattern selection table corresponding to the determined jackpot symbol is referred to.

In the hit pattern selection table (big hit symbol 1), the values of the gate passage flags (“01H” and “02H”) described later, the hit pattern 1 that can be determined based on the jackpot symbol 1, and the hit pattern 1 are randomly selected. It stipulates the lottery value information (selection rate) to be determined by. The lottery value information is actually defined as a predetermined value in a predetermined random number range (0 to 99), but for convenience, the selection rate is shown in FIG. 193. The other tables shown in the figure also show the selectivity. The gate passage flag is set as "01H" when the first passage gate switch detects the passage of the game ball first after the jackpot symbol is determined, while the second passage gate switch first detects the passage of the game ball. This is an internal flag whose value is set as "02H" when the passage of a game ball is detected. In the hit pattern determination process using the hit pattern selection table (big hit symbol 1), when the jackpot symbol 1 is determined and the gate passage flag is either "01H" or "02H", The hit pattern 1 is determined with a probability that the selection rate becomes 100/100.

The hit pattern selection table (big hit symbol 2) includes the values of the gate passage flags (“01H” and “02H”) described later, the hit patterns 1 to 3 and 14 that can be determined based on the jackpot symbol 2, and the hit pattern. The lottery value information (selection rate) for determining 1 to 3 and 14 by random number lottery is defined. In the hit pattern determination process using the hit pattern selection table (big hit symbol 2), when the jackpot symbol 2 is determined and the gate passage flag is "01H", the selection rate is 5 /. The hit pattern 1 is determined with a probability of 100, and the hit pattern 14 is determined with a probability of a selectivity of 95/100. Further, in the hit pattern determination process using the hit pattern selection table (big hit symbol 2), when the jackpot symbol 2 is determined and the gate passage flag is "02H", the selection rate is 2. The hit pattern 1 is determined with a probability of / 100, the hit pattern 3 is determined with a probability of a selection rate of 3/100, and the hit pattern 3 is determined with a probability of a selection rate of 95/100. That is, when the big hit game state is started based on the big hit symbol 2, if the game ball preferentially passes through the first passing gate 35A on the left side, there is a high possibility that it will be a probability variation bonus of the hit pattern 14, and it is a real round. Although the number is small, it is highly probable that the jackpot game state will be easily shifted to the probabilistic game state due to the possibility of V winning in the specific area 38A. On the other hand, if the game ball preferentially passes through the second passage gate 35B on the right side, there is a high possibility that it will be a challenge bonus of the hit pattern 3, and although it is difficult to shift to the probabilistic game state, the actual number of rounds is generally large. The probability of being in a game state increases.

In the hit pattern selection table (big hit symbol 3), the values of the gate passage flags (“01H” and “02H”) described later, the hit pattern 3 that can be determined based on the jackpot symbol 3, and the hit pattern 3 are randomly selected. It stipulates the lottery value information (selection rate) to be determined by. In the hit pattern determination process using the hit pattern selection table (big hit symbol 3), when the jackpot symbol 3 is determined and the gate passage flag is either "01H" or "02H". , The hit pattern 3 is determined with a probability that the selectivity becomes 100/100.

The hit pattern selection table (big hit symbol 4) includes the values of the gate passage flags (“01H” and “02H”) described later, hit patterns 1, 4 to 12 that can be determined based on the jackpot symbol 4, and hit patterns. It defines lottery value information (selection rate) for determining 1, 4 to 12 by random number lottery. In the hit pattern determination process using the hit pattern selection table (big hit symbol 4), when the jackpot symbol 4 is determined and the gate passage flag is either "01H" or "02H". , The hit pattern 1 is determined with the probability that the selection rate is 10/100, the hit pattern 4 is determined with the probability that the selection rate is 8/100, and the hit pattern 5 is determined with the probability that the selection rate is 1/100. The hit pattern 6 is determined with the probability that the selection rate is 1/100, the hit pattern 7 is determined with the probability that the selection rate is 4/100, and the hit pattern 8 is determined with the probability that the selection rate is 11/100. The hit pattern 9 is determined with the probability that the selection rate is 30/100, the hit pattern 10 is determined with the probability that the selection rate is 5/100, and the hit pattern 11 is determined with the probability that the selection rate is 20/100. Is determined, and the hit pattern 12 is determined with a probability that the selectivity becomes 10/100.

Also in this embodiment, when the round game in the big hit game state is executed according to the hit pattern, the same effect mode as in the first embodiment described above is executed, but the first embodiment described above is also executed. The production mode different from the above may be executed.

[Starting storage area in the sub-control circuit]
FIG. 194 is a diagram for explaining a start storage area in the sub-control circuit of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. As shown in the figure, the work RAM 73 of the sub-control circuit 70 has a start storage area for storing the hold information related to the special symbol game as the start memory, similarly to the main RAM 63 of the main control circuit 60. .. The start memory related to the first special symbol is stored in the first start storage area 731, and the start memory related to the second special symbol is stored in the second start storage area 732. The first start storage area 731 has an 8-bit start storage area (1-1) and a start storage area (1-2), respectively, and the second start storage area 732 also has an 8-bit start storage area (2). It has -1) and a start storage area (2-2).

As shown in FIG. 194, the start memory itself is composed of 4 bits. In the present embodiment, based on the information indicating the hit determination random number and the information indicating the hit symbol determination random number included in the start winning command, the jackpot, small hit, or loss at the time of probabilistic change or non-probability change is shown and the jackpot symbol is shown. The starting memory is represented by a 4-bit binary code to indicate the type of. The start winning command also includes information indicating which of the first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33 is the starting winning command. For example, as the expression contents of the start memory related to the first special symbol, "0001" is a loss, "0010" is a "big hit symbol 1" jackpot at the time of probability change, and "0011" is a "big hit symbol" at the time of probability change or non-probability change. 1 "big hit," 0100 "is" big hit symbol 2 "big hit at the time of probability change," 0101 "is" big hit symbol 2 "big hit at the time of probability change or non-probability change," 0111 "is" big hit symbol 3 "big hit at the time of probability change, "1000" corresponds to the "big hit symbol 3" big hit at the time of probability change or non-probability change. As the expression contents of the start memory related to the second special symbol, "0001" is a loss, "0010" is a "big hit symbol 1" at the time of probability change, and "0011" is "big hit symbol 1" at the time of probability change or non-probability change. Big hit, "0100" is "Big hit symbol 2" big hit at the time of probability change, "0101" is "Big hit symbol 2" big hit at the time of probability change or non-probability change, "0111" is "Big hit symbol 4" big hit at the time of probability change, "1000" "" Corresponds to the "big hit symbol 4" big hit at the time of probable change or non-probable change, and "1001" corresponds to the small hit. The free area is "0000".

Such start storage is written, for example, in order from the smallest start storage number allocated to the first start storage area 731, and in order from the free area of the upper 4 bits. In the first start storage area 731, the start memory is read from the upper 4 bits of the start storage area (1-1), and the start memory to be read subsequently is from the start storage area (1-2) to the start storage area (1). -1) is further shifted from the lower 4 bits to the upper 4 bits. The same applies to the start memory in the second start storage area 732. That is, in the first start storage area 731 and the second start storage area 732, the start memory is read out in order from the oldest one by the FIFO method. However, when the start memory coexists in both the first start storage area 731 and the second start storage area 732, the start memory is preferentially read from the second start storage area 732.

For example, as shown in FIG. 194, in the first start storage area 731, the upper 4 bits of the start storage area (1-1), the lower 4 bits of the start storage area (1-1), and the start storage area (1-). In the order of the upper 4 bits of 2) and the lower 4 bits of the start storage area (1-2), "0001" (loss), "0001" (loss), "0001" (loss), "1000" (at the time of probability change or The "big hit symbol 3" big hit) at the time of non-probability change is stored. Further, in the second start storage area 732, the upper 4 bits of the start storage area (2-1), the lower 4 bits of the start storage area (2-1), and the upper 4 bits of the start storage area (2-2), "0001" (loss), "0010" ("big hit symbol 1" big hit at the time of probability change), "0000" (free area), "0000" (free) in the order of the lower 4 bits of the start storage area (2-2). Area) is stored. In this case, assuming that no further start memory is generated, the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the "big hit symbol 1" is set based on the start memory "0010" of the second start storage area 732, and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is general. Specifically, it shifts to the probabilistic gaming state, and in this probabilistic gaming state, it shifts to the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the “big hit symbol 3” based on the start storage “1000” of the first start storage area 731. In the big hit game state corresponding to the "big hit symbol 3", since the round game is executed based on the hit pattern 3, the information indicating the hit determination result that is difficult to shift to the probabilistic game state is stored as the start memory. It will have been done. When such a start memory is stored in the first start storage area 731, that fact is notified in the present embodiment. This will be described later.

[Control by main CPU and sub CPU]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 195 to 215, the processing executed by the main CPU 61 and the sub CPU 71 of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described below. Note that FIGS. 195 to 204 show processing by the main CPU 61, and FIGS. 205 to 215 show processing by the sub CPU 71. Regarding the same or similar processing as the processing according to the first embodiment described above, the description thereof will be simplified or omitted as appropriate.

[Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process executed by the main CPU 61. The special symbol control process of FIG. 195 is composed of substantially the same steps as the special symbol control process of FIG. 100, but the following points are significantly different. That is, the main CPU 61 executes the hit pattern selection process of S1104 after finishing the special symbol display time management process of S1103, and when the process of S1104 is finished, it shifts to the hit start interval management process of S1105. Since the hit pattern selection process of S1104 is added, the value of the control state flag (03H) is assigned to the step of S1104, and the value of the control state flag corresponding to each step after S1105. Is moved up one by one from the one shown in FIG. 100. That is, the main CPU 61 determines the hit pattern when the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the hit pattern selection, and then sets the value (04H) indicating the hit start interval management in the control state flag. In such a hit pattern selection process, a hit pattern corresponding to the current big hit game state is determined. Each process of S1103 to S1109 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 196 to 202.

[Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing a special symbol fluctuation time management process executed by the main CPU 61. The special symbol fluctuation time management process of FIG. 196 is composed of substantially the same steps as the special symbol control process of FIG. 104, but the following points are significantly different.

As shown in FIG. 196, the main CPU 61 executes the processes of S1200 to S1203 in the same manner as in S220 to S223 of FIG. 104, and after completing the process of S1203, hits the game state flag and executes the pattern selection process in S1204. The process of setting the value (03H) for setting is performed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1217.

Further, the main CPU 61 executes the processes of S120 to S1214 in the same manner as in S224 to S233 of FIG. 104, and when it is determined in S1214 that it is a small hit, it hits the game state flag and indicates a value indicating the start interval management process ( 04H) is set (S1215). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1216.

Then, the main CPU 61 executes the processes of S1216 to S1218 as in S234 to S236 of FIG. 104, or sets a value (08H) indicating the end process of the special symbol game of S1219 as in S238 of FIG. 104 as the control state flag. Execute the process to be set in. When these processes are completed, the special symbol display time management process routine is terminated.

That is, in S1204, after the value (03H) indicating the hit pattern selection process is set in the control state flag, the waiting time timer is not set and the value of the next control state flag (04H) is determined until the hit pattern is determined. ) Is not set. If the waiting time timer is configured to be set after the processing of S1204 and the hit pattern is not determined when the set waiting time timer becomes 0, one of the hit patterns is forcibly set. You may choose.

Further, in S1214, when it is determined that the hit is a small hit, the hit pattern 13 is uniquely determined. Therefore, in S1215, the value (04H) indicating the hit start interval management process is set in the control state flag. To. It should be noted that a plurality of hit patterns corresponding to each of the plurality of types of small hits are provided, and by executing the hit pattern selection process even for the small hits, one of the hit patterns corresponding to the plurality of types of small hits is executed. May be decided.

[Hit pattern selection process]
FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing a hit pattern selection process executed by the main CPU 61. This hit pattern selection process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 197, in S1300, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating a hit pattern selection process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the hit pattern selection process, the process is transferred to S1301. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (03H) indicating the hit pattern selection process, the main CPU 61 ends the hit pattern selection process routine.

In S1301, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the gate passage flag is "00H". The gate passage flag is an internal flag indicating which of the first passage gate 35A and the second passage gate 35B is the one in which the passage of the game ball is detected first. When the gate passage flag is "00H", it indicates that the passage of the game ball is not detected in either the first passage gate 35A or the second passage gate 35B. Further, when the gate passage flag is "01H", it indicates that the passage of the game ball is detected first for the first passage gate 35A, and when the gate passage flag is "02H", it indicates that the passage of the second passage gate 35B is the first. It indicates that the passage of the game ball was detected first. When the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the gate passage flag is "00H", the main CPU 61 ends the hit pattern selection processing routine, and when it determines that the value is not "00H", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S1302.

In S1302, the main CPU 61 extracts a random number for determining a hit pattern and executes a hit pattern determination process based on this random number. In this process, the main CPU 61 selects a hit pattern selection table according to the big hit symbol as the special symbol determined in the special symbol determination process (see FIG. 102), determines the value of the gate passage flag and the extracted hit pattern. The hit pattern is determined based on the random number. Here, in the case of the jackpot symbols 1, 3 and 4, the type of the hit pattern that can be determined regardless of whether the value of the gate passage flag is "01H" or "02H" is not changed, but in the case of the jackpot symbol 2. If the value of the gate passing flag is "01H", one of the hit patterns 1 and 14 is determined, while if the value of the gate passing flag is "02H", any of the hit patterns 1 to 3 is determined. Will be determined, and the type of hit pattern will be changed according to the value of the gate passage flag. As a result, when the player starts the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot symbol 2, if he / she desires a person who is more likely to shift to the probability variation game state, the player first plays the game with respect to the first passage gate 35A. You can hit left to let the ball pass, while if you want to get more balls, hit right to let the game ball pass first to the second passing gate 35B. Just do. When the process of S1302 is completed, the process is transferred to S1303.

In S1303, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting data indicating the determined hit pattern. Displacement member operation pattern data for opening and closing the specific area 38A is also set here. The main CPU 61 performs round control based on the data indicating the hit pattern and the displacement member operation pattern data. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1304.

In S1304, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a hit pattern determination command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. This hit pattern determination command is data indicating the start of the round game. The hit pattern determination command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1305.

In S1305, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer (for example, 5 seconds) as the hit start interval time corresponding to the determined hit pattern in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1306.

In S1306, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating a hit start interval management process in the control state flag of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1307.

In S1307, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the gate passage flag to "00H". When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1308.

In S1308, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the hit pattern determination random number used in the hit pattern determination process, and ends the hit pattern selection process routine.

[Hit start interval management process]
FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing a hit start interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. The hit start interval management process of FIG. 198 is composed of substantially the same steps as the hit start interval management process of FIG. 105. Specifically, the processes of S1400 and S1407 shown in FIG. 198 are merely applied by raising the value of the control state flag, and all the processes of S1400 to S1411 are the processes of S240 to S251 shown in FIG. 105. Is substantially the same as.

[Waiting time management process before reopening the big prize opening]
FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing a waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, which is executed by the main CPU 61. The waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening in FIG. 199 also comprises substantially the same steps as the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening in FIG. 106. Specifically, the processes of S1500 and S1504 shown in FIG. 199 are merely applied by raising the value of the control state flag, and all the processes of S1500 to S1508 are the processes of S260 to S268 shown in FIG. 106. Is substantially the same as.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening]
FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing a process during opening of the large winning opening executed by the main CPU 61. The process during opening of the large winning opening in FIG. 200 is also composed of substantially the same steps as the processing during opening of the large winning opening in FIG. 107. Specifically, the processes of S1600, S1611, and S1614 shown in FIG. 200 are merely applied by raising the value of the control state flag, and all the processes of S1600 to S1615 are S270 to S270 to FIG. 107. It is substantially the same as the processing of S285.

[Hit end interval management process]
FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing a hit end interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. The hit end interval management process of FIG. 201 is composed of substantially the same steps as the hit end interval management process of FIG. 108. Specifically, the processing of S1700 and S1702 shown in FIG. 201 merely applies the value of the control state flag by moving it up. Further, in S1708, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting "30" or "100" as the number of time reductions according to the jackpot symbol in the value of the time reduction counter of the main RAM 63. As a result, all the processes of S1700 to S1709 are substantially the same as the processes of S290 to S299 shown in FIG. 108. As the number of time reductions, three or more types of times may be provided, or simply one type of number of times may be provided.

[Special symbol game end processing]
FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing a special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 61. The special symbol game end process of FIG. 202 is configured by substantially the same steps as the special symbol game end process of FIG. 109. Specifically, the processing of S1800 shown in FIG. 202 merely applies the value of the control state flag by moving it up, and all the processing of S1800 and S1801 is substantially the same as the processing of S300 and S301 shown in FIG. Are the same.

[Switch input processing]
FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing a switch input process executed by the main CPU 61. The switch input process of FIG. 203 is composed of substantially the same steps as the switch input process of FIG. 94, and is also composed of newly added steps. Specifically, the processing of S1900 to S1903 shown in FIG. 203 is the same as the processing of S90 to S93 shown in FIG. 94, and after the processing of S1903, the main CPU 61 performs the gate switch check processing of S1904. It is configured. This gate switch check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 204. When this processing is completed, this switch input processing routine is terminated.

[Gate switch check process]
FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing a gate switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This gate switch check process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 204, in S2000, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating a hit pattern selection process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the hit pattern selection process, the process is transferred to S2001. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (03H) indicating the hit pattern selection process, the main CPU 61 ends the gate switch check process routine.

In S2001, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the gate passage flag is "00H". When the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the gate passage flag is "00H", that is, even when the hit pattern selection process is executed, the game ball passes through both the first pass gate 35A and the second pass gate 35B. If is not yet detected, the process is transferred to S2002. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the gate passage flag is not "00H", the main CPU 61 ends the gate switch check processing routine.

In S2002, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the passage of the game ball at the first passage gate 35A is detected based on the detection signal from the first passage gate switch. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the passage of the game ball at the first passage gate 35A is detected, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S2003 and determines that the passage of the game ball at the first passage gate 35A is not detected. In that case, the process is transferred to S2005.

In S2003, the main CPU 61 acquires a hit pattern determination random number and performs a process of storing the hit pattern determination random number in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 63. After the processing is completed, the processing is transferred to S2004.

In S2004, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the gate passage flag to "01H". As a result, the main CPU 61 recognizes that the game ball has passed the first passing gate 35A first. When this processing is completed, the gate switch check processing routine is terminated.

In S2005, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the passage of the game ball at the second passage gate 35B is detected based on the detection signal from the second passage gate switch. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the passage of the game ball at the second passage gate 35B is detected, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S2006 and determines that the passage of the game ball at the second passage gate 35B is not detected. If so, the gate switch check processing routine is terminated.

In S2006, the main CPU 61 acquires a hit pattern determination random number and performs a process of storing the hit pattern determination random number in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 63. After the processing is completed, the processing is transferred to S2007.

In S2007, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the gate passage flag to "02H". As a result, the main CPU 61 recognizes that the game ball has passed the second passage gate 35B first. When this processing is completed, the gate switch check processing routine is terminated.

[Command analysis processing]
205 and 206 are flowcharts showing command analysis processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This command analysis process is composed of substantially the same process as the command analysis process shown in FIGS. 116 and 117, but differs in the following points. In the following description, although there are some overlaps with the description of the command analysis process shown in FIGS. 116 and 117 described above, all the processes shown in FIGS. 205 and 206 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 205, in S2100, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not a command has been received. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the command has been received, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S2101. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the command has not been received, the sub CPU 71 ends this command analysis processing routine.

In S2101, the sub CPU 71 reads the data of the received command and performs processing according to the data of the command in the subsequent steps. When the reading of the data of the received command is completed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S2102.

In S2102, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command is received as the command read in S2101. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the variation pattern designation command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S2103. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the variation pattern designation command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S2105.

In S2103, the sub CPU 71 performs an effect pattern determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines the effect pattern including the variation display mode of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern designation command. When the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is determined, the sub CPU 71 sets the determined effect pattern data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S2104.

In S2104, the sub CPU 71 performs a start storage number update process. This start storage number update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 208. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S2105, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the symbol designation command is received as the command read in S2101. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol designation command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S2106. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol designation command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S2107.

In S2106, the sub CPU 71 performs a stop symbol determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines the stop decoration symbol corresponding to the symbol designation command received from the main CPU 61. When the stop decoration symbol is determined, the sub CPU 71 sets the determined stop decoration symbol data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In the present embodiment, the decorative symbols to be displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 include, for example, numbers "1" to "7", and these decorative symbols (numbers) are a predetermined number (for example). When three (three digits)) are aligned with the same decorative pattern (number), the game basically shifts to the jackpot game state. However, the round game is not started until the game ball passes through the first passing gate 35A or the second passing gate 35B. Specifically, regarding the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol 1 corresponds to the number string which is the alignment of "333" or "777", and the decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol 2 is "111". Or, the decorative symbol corresponding to the number string which is the uniform of "555" and corresponds to the jackpot symbol 3 corresponds to the number string which is the grid of "222", "444", or "666" and corresponds to the jackpot symbol. The decorative symbol corresponding to 4 corresponds to the number string that is the uniform of "888", and the decorative symbol corresponding to the small hit symbol corresponds to the number string that is the specific number of "135" and corresponds to the loss. The decorative pattern to be used is a number string that is different from the specific number.

In S2107, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the symbol stop command has been received as the command read in S2101. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol stop command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S2108. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol stop command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S2110.

In S2108, the sub CPU 71 performs a decorative symbol stop process for stopping and displaying the decorative symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S2109.

In S2109, the sub CPU 71 executes the effect mode number counter update process. The effect mode number counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 207. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S2110, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the start winning command is received as the command read in S2101. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the start winning command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S2111. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the start winning command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S2112.

In S2111, the sub CPU 71 performs a start storage number update process. This start storage number update process is the same as the process of S2104, and will be described later with reference to FIG. 208. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S2112, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the hit start display command is received as the command read in S2101. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit start display command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S2113. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit start display command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S2114.

In S2113, the sub CPU 71 executes the hit start effect processing. The hit start effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 210. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S2114, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the hit pattern determination command is received as the command read in S2101. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit pattern determination command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S2115. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit pattern determination command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S2116.

In S2115, the sub CPU 71 executes the pre-opening effect processing of the large winning opening. The effect processing before opening the large winning opening will be described later with reference to FIG. 211. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S2116, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the large winning opening opening display command is received as the command read in S2101. When the sub CPU 71 determines that it has received the large winning opening opening display command as the read command, it shifts the process to S2117. On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub CPU 71 has not received the large winning opening opening display command as the read command, the process shifts to S2200 in FIG. 206.

In S2117, the sub CPU 71 executes the processing when the large winning opening is opened. The processing when the large winning opening is opened will be described later with reference to FIG. 212. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S2200 of FIG. 206, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the hit end display command is received as the command read in S2101. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit end display command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S2201. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit end display command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S2202.

In S2201, the sub CPU 71 executes the hit end effect process. The hit end effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. 213. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S2202, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the game state command is received as the command read in S2101. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the game state command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S2203. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the game state command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S2204.

In S2203, the sub CPU 71 executes the effect mode control process. This effect mode control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 214. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S2204, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a specific area passing command has been received as the command read in S2101. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the command for passing through a specific area has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S2205. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the command for passing through a specific area has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S2206.

In S2205, the sub CPU 71 executes the V winning notification process. This V winning notification process will be described later with reference to FIG. 215. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S2206, the sub CPU 71 also executes processing corresponding to the received command. This process includes, for example, the discharge error notification process described in the first embodiment described above. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

[Production mode count counter update process]
FIG. 207 is a flowchart showing an effect mode number counter update process executed by the sub CPU 71. This effect mode count counter update process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 207, in S2300, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the effect mode flag is “02H”. In the present embodiment, the effect mode flag has a value of "01H" corresponding to the effect mode (hereinafter referred to as "normal mode") corresponding to the non-probability change and the non-time saving game state, and the effect according to the non-probability change and the time saving game state. The value corresponding to the mode (hereinafter referred to as "time saving mode") is "02H", and the value corresponding to the effect mode (hereinafter referred to as "ST mode") corresponding to the probability variation and the time saving gaming state is "03H". The background image and the effect content are different depending on the value of the effect mode flag. If it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is "02H", the process is transferred to S2301. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is not "02H", the process is transferred to S2302.

In S2301, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time saving mode number counter. The time saving mode number counter is a counter controlled by the sub CPU 71, and is for counting the number of games in the time saving mode (number of symbol fluctuations) up to a set predetermined number of times (100 times or 30 times in this embodiment). is there. When this process is completed, the effect mode count counter update process routine is terminated.

In S2302, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the effect mode flag is "03H". If it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is "03H", the process is transferred to S2303. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is not "03H", the effect mode count counter update processing routine is terminated.

In S2303, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the ST mode count counter. The ST mode count counter is a counter controlled by the sub CPU 71, and is for counting the number of games in the ST mode (number of symbol fluctuations) up to a set predetermined number (190 in the present embodiment). When this process is completed, the effect mode count counter update process routine is terminated.

[Starting memory update process]
FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing a start storage number update process executed by the sub CPU 71. This start storage number update process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 208, in S2400, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the command read in S2101 of FIG. 205 is a start winning command. If it is determined that the read command is a start winning command, the process is transferred to S2401. On the other hand, if it is determined that the read command is not the start winning command, the process is transferred to S2404.

In S2401, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the start winning command corresponds to the start winning of the first starting port 32, based on the information included in the read start winning command. When it is determined that the start winning command corresponds to the starting winning of the first starting port 32, the process is transferred to S2402. On the other hand, if it is determined that the start winning command does not correspond to the start winning of the first starting port 32, that is, if it corresponds to the starting winning of the second starting port 33, the process is transferred to S2403.

In S2402, the sub CPU 71 executes the first start memory addition process. In this first start memory addition process, the jackpot winning and the jackpot symbol related to the first special symbol are shown based on the information indicating the hit determination random number and the information indicating the hit symbol determination random number included in the start winning command. The start storage including the information is written in the free area of the first start storage area 731. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S2407.

In S2403, the sub CPU 71 executes the second start memory addition process. Also in this second start memory addition process, based on the information indicating the hit determination random number and the information indicating the hit symbol determination random number included in the start winning command, the jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol related to the second special symbol is displayed. A start memory containing the indicated information is written to the free area of the second start storage area 732. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S2407.

In S2404, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the command read in S2101 of FIG. 205 is a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the first special symbol. If it is determined that the read command is a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the first special symbol, the process is transferred to S2405. On the other hand, if it is determined that the read command is not the variation pattern specification command corresponding to the first special symbol, that is, if it is the variation pattern specification command corresponding to the second special symbol, the process is transferred to S2406.

In S2405, the sub CPU 71 executes the first start memory subtraction process. In this first start storage subtraction process, the oldest start stored in the start storage area (1-1) of the first start storage area 731 is triggered by receiving the variation pattern designation command corresponding to the first special symbol. The memory is read. At that time, in the first start storage area 731, the remaining start storage is shifted by 4 bits. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S2407.

In S2406, the sub CPU 71 executes the second start memory subtraction process. Also in this second start storage subtraction process, the oldest stored in the start storage area (2-1) of the second start storage area 732 is triggered by receiving the variation pattern designation command corresponding to the second special symbol. The start memory is read. At that time, in the second start storage area 732, the remaining start storage is shifted by 4 bits. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S2407.

In S2406, the sub CPU 71 executes the display mode change process. This display mode change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 209. When this process is completed, the start storage number update process routine is terminated.

[Display mode change process]
FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing a display mode change process executed by the sub CPU 71. This display mode change process is executed in the following step units. The display mode change process is executed every time a start winning command or a variation pattern designation command is received, but may be executed every predetermined period (for example, every 2000 ms).

As shown in FIG. 209, in S2500, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the first start storage storage content notification flag is “01H”. This first start memory storage content notification flag indicates that when the start memory indicating a predetermined jackpot winning (determined that the jackpot has been won in the jackpot determination process) is stored in the first start storage area, that effect is stored. It is an internal flag for notifying, and "01H" is set when notifying, and "00H" is set when not notifying. When it is determined that the value of the first start storage storage content notification flag is "01H", the display mode change processing routine is terminated. When it is determined that the value of the first start storage storage content notification flag is not "01H", the process is transferred to S2501.

In S2501, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the effect mode flag is "03H". If it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is "03H", the process is transferred to S2502. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is not "03H", the process is transferred to S2507.

In S2502, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ST mode count counter is 10 or less. In this process, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of times in the ST mode is as small as 10 times or less as an example. A value corresponding to a number of times other than 10 may be applied as a threshold value. If it is determined that the value of the ST mode count counter is 10 or less, the process is transferred to S2503. If it is determined that the value of the ST mode count counter is not 10 or less, the process is transferred to S2505.

In S2503, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a start memory corresponding to the jackpot winning in the first start storage area 731. When it is determined that the start memory corresponding to the jackpot winning exists in the first start storage area 731, the process is transferred to S2504. If it is determined that there is no start memory corresponding to the jackpot winning in the first start storage area 731, the display mode change processing routine is terminated.

In S2504, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the value of the first start storage storage content notification flag to "01H". As a result, the sub CPU 71 will notify the information indicating the jackpot winning (big hit symbol) related to the first special symbol. When this process is completed, the display mode change process routine is terminated. It should be noted that only the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot gaming state that easily shifts to the probabilistic gaming state may be notified, or only the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot gaming state that is difficult to shift to the probabilistic gaming state may be notified. .. Further, it may be decided by lottery whether or not to notify, and the notification may be made based on the determination result.

In S2505, the sub CPU 71 executes the first start storage area and the second start storage area determination process. In this process, it is determined whether or not the start memory stored in the first start storage area 731 and the second start storage area 732 satisfies the condition (change determination condition) for changing the display mode of the start memory. To. As the change determination conditions, a first change determination condition having a high priority and a second change determination condition having a low priority are defined. The first change determination condition is that, in the first start storage area 731, there is a start memory including information indicating the jackpot winning by the jackpot symbol 3 in the probabilistic game state, and the start memory written after the start memory is also included. If it exists and the latter start memory contains information indicating the jackpot symbol 1 or 2 in the non-probability change game state, the former start regardless of the number of start memories in the second start storage area 732. It is a condition that the display mode related to memory is maintained as a normal mode. Further, as the second change determination condition, in the first start storage area 731, the start memory including the information indicating the jackpot winning by the jackpot symbol 3 exists, and the number of start memories in the second start storage area 732 is 1 or less. In this case, it is a condition that a notification message such as "DANGER" is displayed and the display mode related to the former start memory is changed from the normal mode to a predetermined mode. In addition, after making a judgment based on the first change judgment condition or the second change judgment condition, it may be decided by lottery whether or not to further change the display mode. Further, for example, the process of displaying the notification message of "DANGER" and changing the display mode of the start memory may be performed when the start memory corresponding to the first special symbol indicating the jackpot symbol 3 is not stored. Good. Further, in response to the start memory stored in the second start storage area, the notification message of "DANGER" is displayed and the display mode of the start memory is changed to correspond to the second special symbol. It may be notified that the start memory contains information indicating a jackpot winning. When the first start storage area and the second start storage area determination process are completed, the process is transferred to S2506. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 223 to 225 described later, a look-ahead effect performed in the probabilistic game state (a look-ahead effect performed when the second change determination condition is satisfied) is shown in FIGS. 226 to 228. As described above, there is a look-ahead effect (a look-ahead effect performed when the first change determination condition is satisfied) that is performed when shifting from the probabilistic game state to the time-saving game state, and whether or not to perform these look-ahead effects. The process of S2505 is executed to determine whether or not.

In S2506, the sub CPU 71 executes a display control process according to the determination result of the process of S2505. According to this display control process, the display mode of the start memory corresponding to the first special symbol is changed or maintained according to the determination result. When this process is completed, the display mode change process routine is terminated.

In S2507, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the effect mode flag is "02H". If it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is "02H", the process is transferred to S2508. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is not "02H", the display mode change processing routine is terminated.

In S2508, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the time saving mode number counter is 15 or less. In this process, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of times in the time saving mode is 15 times or less as an example. A value corresponding to a number of times other than 15 may be applied as a threshold value. Further, it may be smaller than the threshold value for determining the remaining number of times in the ST mode, or may be the same value. When it is determined that the value of the time saving mode number counter is 15 or less, the process is transferred to S2509. If it is determined that the value of the ST mode count counter is not 15 or less, the display mode change processing routine is terminated.

In S2509, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a start memory corresponding to the jackpot winning in the first start storage area 731. When it is determined that the start memory corresponding to the jackpot winning exists in the first start storage area 731, the process is transferred to S2510. If it is determined that there is no start memory corresponding to the jackpot winning in the first start storage area 731, the display mode change processing routine is terminated.

In S2510, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the value of the first start storage storage content notification flag to "01H". As a result, the sub CPU 71 will notify the information indicating the jackpot winning (big hit symbol) related to the first special symbol. When this process is completed, the display mode change process routine is terminated.

[Hit start production process]
FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing a hit start effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This hit start effect process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 210, in S2600, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the starting hit game state is a small hit. If it is determined that it is a small hit, the process is transferred to S2601. If it is determined that it is not a small hit, the process is transferred to S2602.

In S2601, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting effect data for small hits. As a result, an effect image or the like corresponding to the small hit game state is displayed. When this process is completed, the hit start effect processing routine is terminated.

In S2602, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "0" to the value of the round counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S2603.

In S2603, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting effect data according to the jackpot symbol. As a result, for example, in the case of the jackpot symbol 2, as described in the first embodiment described above, a selection image for selecting the type of challenge bonus (one game, three times challenge, surprise) is displayed, and other If it is a big hit pattern of, an effect image that encourages right-handed hitting is displayed. When this process is completed, the hit start effect processing routine is terminated.

[Direction processing before opening the big prize opening]
FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing the effect processing before opening the large winning opening executed by the sub CPU 71. This pre-opening production process for the big prize opening is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 211, in S2700, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value corresponding to the hit pattern in the hit pattern flag. The hit pattern flag is an internal flag indicating a hit pattern. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S2701.

In S2701, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the effect data corresponding to the value of the hit pattern flag. As a result, for example, an effect image corresponding to a super big bonus or the like is displayed, and other notifications indicating that a big hit is being made are performed according to the hit pattern to be executed. When this process is completed, the pre-opening effect processing routine for the big winning opening is terminated.

[Processing when the big prize opening is open]
FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing the processing at the time of opening the large winning opening executed by the sub CPU 71. This processing at the time of opening the large winning opening is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 212, in S2800, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the round counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S2801.

In S2801, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the round counter corresponds to a substantial round. In this process, the sub CPU 71 identifies the type of hit based on the value of the hit pattern flag, and determines whether or not the value of the round counter corresponds to a real round. When it is determined that the value of the round counter corresponds to the actual round, the process is transferred to S2802. If it is determined that the value of the round counter does not correspond to the actual round, the process is transferred to S2809.

In S2802, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the V winning notification flag is "01H". When it is determined that the value of the V winning notification flag is "01H", the process is transferred to S2803. If it is determined that the value of the V winning notification flag is "00H" instead of "01H" and the V winning notification is not performed, the process is transferred to S2809. In addition, the processing after S2802 may be performed at a time other than the execution of the actual round (including the execution of the processing other than the processing at the time of opening the large winning opening).

In S2803, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the jackpot middle end notification flag is "01H". The jackpot middle end notification flag is based on whether or not the start memory exists in the first start storage area 731 in the jackpot game state and the start memory includes information indicating the jackpot winning by the jackpot symbol 3. It is an internal flag indicating whether or not to perform a notification such as changing the display mode according to the above from a normal mode to a predetermined mode and displaying a notification message of "DANGER". The end notification flag during such a big hit is set to "01H" when the notification is performed, and is set to "00H" when the notification is not performed. If it is determined that the value of the jackpot end notification flag is "01H", the process is transferred to S2803. If it is determined that the value of the jackpot end notification flag is not "01H", the process is transferred to S2804.

In S2804, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of start memories existing in the second start storage area 372 is 1 or less. When it is determined that the number of start storages existing in the second start storage area 372 is 1 or less, the process is transferred to S2805. When it is determined that the number of start storages existing in the second start storage area 372 is not 1 or less, the process is transferred to S2809. As a determination criterion in this case, a number of 2 or more may be applied as a threshold value. Further, after determining the number of start memories existing in the second start storage area 372, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to proceed to the next step, and the next step may be proceeded based on the determination result.

In S2805, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a start memory including information indicating the jackpot winning by the jackpot symbol 3 in the first start storage area 731. When it is determined that the start memory including the information indicating the jackpot winning by the jackpot symbol 3 exists, the process is transferred to S2806. When it is determined that the start memory including the information indicating the jackpot winning by the jackpot symbol 3 does not exist, the process is transferred to S2809.

In S2806, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "01H" to the value of the jackpot middle end notification flag. As a result, during the execution of the round game in the jackpot game state, the start memory exists in the first start storage area 731, and the start memory includes information indicating the jackpot winning by the jackpot symbol 3. , The display mode related to the start memory is changed from the normal mode to a predetermined mode, and the notification message of "DANGER" is displayed to indicate that it is difficult to shift to the probabilistic gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Will be done. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S2809.

In S2807, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of start memories existing in the second start storage area 372 is 2 or more. When it is determined that the number of start storages existing in the second start storage area 372 is 2 or more, the process is transferred to S2808. When it is determined that the number of start storages existing in the second start storage area 372 is not 2 or more, the process is transferred to S2809. As the judgment standard in this case, for example, a number of 3 or more may be applied as a threshold value in consideration of the judgment standard of S2804. Further, after determining the number of start memories existing in the second start storage area, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to proceed to the next step, and the next step may be proceeded based on the determination result.

In S2808, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "00H" to the value of the jackpot middle end notification flag. As a result, when the number of start memories existing in the second start storage area 372 becomes 2 or more, the display mode related to the start memory of the first start storage area 731 described above is changed, or the notification message of "DANGER" is displayed. No notification is given. Even after such notification is once performed, the value of the jackpot end notification flag is maintained at "01H", and the above notification is performed if the round game is being executed in the jackpot game state. You may. Further, even if the start memory existing in the first start storage area does not include the information indicating the jackpot winning by the jackpot symbol 3, for example, the information indicating the jackpot winning by the jackpot symbol 1 is included. The value of the jackpot end notification flag may be maintained at "01H" to perform the above notification. In this case, even though the number of start memories existing in the second start storage area is 2 or more, the player can feel a sense of discomfort by performing the above notification.

In S2809, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the corresponding effect data during the execution of the round game according to the value of the hit pattern flag. As a result, an effect image corresponding to the execution of the round game is displayed, and at that time, a notification such as changing the display mode related to the start storage of the first start storage area 731 or displaying a notification message of "DANGER" is displayed. Is done. When this processing is completed, the processing routine at the time of opening the large winning opening is terminated.

[Hit end production process]
FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing a hit end effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This hit end effect process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 213, in S2900, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the corresponding effect data at the end of the hit according to the value of the hit pattern flag. As a result, the effect image corresponding to the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is displayed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S2901.

In S2901, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "00H" to the value of the V winning notification flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S2902.

In S2902, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "00H" to the value of the jackpot middle end notification flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S2903.

In S2903, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "00H" to the value of the hit pattern flag. When this process is completed, the hit end effect processing routine is terminated.

[Production mode control processing]
FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing the effect mode control process executed by the sub CPU 71. This effect mode control process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 214, in S3000, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the information included in the game state command indicates a probability change based on the received game state command. If it is determined that the information included in the game state command indicates a probability change, the process is transferred to S3001. On the other hand, if it is determined that the information included in the game state command does not indicate a probability change, the process is transferred to S3003.

In S3001, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "03H" to the value of the effect mode flag. As a result, the ST mode is executed as the effect mode according to the probability change and the time saving game state. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S3002.

In S3002, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the number of probabilistic gaming states included in the game state command in the ST mode number counter. That is, in the present embodiment, the value corresponding to "190" is set in the ST mode count counter. When this process is completed, the effect mode control process routine is terminated.

In S3003, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the information included in the game state command indicates a time reduction based on the received game state command. If it is determined that the information included in the game state command indicates a time reduction, the process is transferred to S3004. On the other hand, if it is determined that the information included in the game state command does not indicate the time reduction, the process is transferred to S3006.

In S3004, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "02H" to the value of the effect mode flag. As a result, the time saving mode is executed as the effect mode according to the non-probability change and the time saving game state. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S3005.

In S3005, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the number of times of the time saving game state included in the game state command to the time saving mode number counter. That is, in the present embodiment, the value corresponding to "100" or "30" is set in the time saving mode number counter. When this process is completed, the effect mode control process routine is terminated.

In S3006, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "01H" to the value of the effect mode flag. As a result, the normal mode is executed as the effect mode according to the non-probability change and the non-time saving game state. After that, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the value of the first start storage storage content notification flag to "00H", and when this process is completed, the effect mode control process routine is terminated.

[V prize notification processing]
FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing the V winning notification process executed by the sub CPU 71. This V winning notification process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 215, in S3100, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting V winning notification data. That is, when the sub CPU 71 detects a V prize when the game ball passes through the specific area 38A, the sub CPU 71 sets the V prize notification data for notifying that the game state shifts to the probabilistic game state after the end of the big hit game state. To do. As a result, the effect image corresponding to the V prize is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4, and a predetermined sound is generated or emitted by using the speakers 10a to 10c and the lamp / LED 27. .. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S3101.

In S3101, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "01H" to the value of the V winning notification flag. When this process is completed, the V winning notification processing routine is terminated.

As is clear from the above description, in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the first passage gate 35A and the second passage gate 35B realize the first passage region and the second passage region through which the game medium can pass. ing. When the determination result of shifting to the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) is obtained by the specific gaming state transition determining means, the main CPU 61 plays at least one of the first passing area and the second passing area. The first variable winning device (first large winning opening 36) and the second variable winning device (second large winning opening 37) are individually changed to the first mode and the second mode on condition that the medium has passed. A round game pattern determining means capable of determining a round game pattern (hit pattern) for executing the round game to be performed a plurality of times is realized. Further, the main CPU 61 realizes the round game execution means for executing the round game a plurality of times based on the round game pattern determined by the round game pattern determining means in the specific game state.

Further, the main CPU 61 functioning as a round game pattern determining means includes a round game in which the first variable winning device changes to the first mode and the second mode on condition that the game medium has passed through the first passing region. , The first round game pattern (hit pattern 14) including the easy-to-pass round game that varies in the first and second aspects so that the second variable winning device facilitates the passage of the game medium into the specific area can be determined. The first variable winning device includes a round game in which the first variable winning device changes to the first aspect and the second aspect on condition that the game medium has passed through the second passing area, and the second variable winning device moves to the specific area. It is possible to determine a second round game pattern (hit pattern 3) including a difficult-to-pass round game that varies in the first and second aspects so as to make it difficult to pass through the game medium. The first round game pattern and the second round game pattern correspond to the second round game pattern rather than the total time in which the first variable winning device and the second variable winning device are in the first mode according to the first round game pattern. Therefore, the total time for the first variable winning device and the second variable winning device to be in the first aspect is specified to be long.

Further, the sub CPU 71 realizes an effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect.

Further, in the jackpot game state as the specific game state, the ratio of the round game pattern determined by the round game pattern determining means is the ratio of the first pass area and the second pass area according to the pass area through which the game medium has passed. It is determined by the round game pattern determining means regardless of the different first specific game state (big hit game state based on the big hit symbol 2) and the passing area through which the game medium has passed among the first passing area and the second passing area. It includes a second specific game state (a big hit game state based on a symbol other than the big hit symbol 2) in which the ratio of the round game patterns is the same. The sub CPU 71, which functions as an effect executing means, sets the effect modes from the transition to the specific game state to the passage of the game medium through the first pass area or the second pass area in the first specific game state and the second specific game state. It can be implemented as a different production mode.

Further, the first start storage area of the main RAM 63 and the first start storage area 731 of the work RAM 73 are shifted to the specific game state on condition that the game medium has entered the first start area (first start port 32). A first storage means capable of storing a plurality of first start storages including information for determining whether or not to use the first start storage means is realized, and the second start storage area of the main RAM 63 and the second start storage area 732 of the work RAM 73 are second. A second storage means capable of storing a plurality of second start memories including information for determining whether or not to shift to a specific gaming state on condition that the game medium has entered the start area (second start port 33). Has been realized. The first special symbol display unit 53 can perform variable display of the first identification information based on the first start memory, provided that the first start memory is stored in the first storage means. In addition, when the first start memory determines the transition to the specific gaming state, the first identification information display means capable of stopping and displaying the first identification information in a specific display mode is realized. 2 The special symbol display unit 54 can perform variable display of the second identification information based on the second start memory, provided that the second start memory is stored in the second storage means. At the same time, when the second start memory determines the transition to the specific gaming state, the second identification information display means capable of stopping and displaying the second identification information in a specific display mode is realized. Further, the second condition is defined to take precedence over the first condition, and the specific gaming state includes a special specific gaming state in which only the second round gaming pattern is determined, and the sub CPU 71 and the liquid crystal display. The display device 4 realizes a notification means that gives a predetermined notification when the first storage means stores the first start storage that determines the transition to the special specific gaming state in the special game state.

Further, the main CPU 61 includes a first round game execution means capable of executing a first round game in which the first variable winning device is changed to the first mode and the second mode in the specific game state, and a second round game execution means in the specific game state. A second round game execution means capable of executing a second round game in which the variable winning device is changed to the first mode and the second mode is realized. Further, on the condition that the game medium has passed through the specific area in the specific game state, the main CPU 61 has a specific display mode in which the stop display mode of the first identification information or the second identification information is after the end of the specific game state. After the end of the specific game state, provided that the special game state control means that can be controlled to the special game state (probability change game state) that tends to be relatively close to the game and the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the specific game state. , A non-special gaming state control means capable of controlling a non-special gaming state (non-probability variable gaming state) in which the stop display mode of the first identification information or the second identification information is unlikely to be relatively relative to a specific display mode. ing. Further, in the main CPU 61 that functions as the second round game execution means, as the second round game, the easy-to-pass round game in which the game medium relatively easily passes through the specific area and the game medium relatively pass through the specific area. It is possible to perform difficult-to-pass round games. The specific game state includes a first specific game state in which the first round game and the difficult-to-pass round game are executed at least, and a second specific game state in which the first round game and the easy-to-pass round game are at least executed. Including. In the main CPU 61 that functions as the specific game state control means, the case where the first identification information has a specific display mode has a relatively higher probability than the case where the second identification information has a specific display mode. While controlling to one specific gaming state, it is possible to control to the second specific gaming state with a relatively low probability. In the special gaming state, the sub CPU 71 and the liquid crystal display device 4 that function as the notification means store the first start memory that determines the first specific gaming state in the first storage means, or the first storage means stores the first start memory. 1 It is possible to perform a predetermined notification on the condition that the first start memory that determines the specific game state is not stored.

Further, the sub CPU 71 and the liquid crystal display device 4 that function as the notification means can perform a predetermined notification when the number of the second start storages stored in the second storage means is less than a predetermined number. Further, the sub CPU 71 and the liquid crystal display device 4 that function as the notification means store the first start memory that determines the first specific game state in the first storage means, and are stored after the first start memory. If there is a first start memory of the above, it is possible to perform a predetermined notification on the condition that the other first start memory does not determine the second specific gaming state.

Further, the main CPU 61 realizes the specific game state control means for controlling the specific game state when the stop display mode of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes the specific display mode, and the specific game state ends. After that, the special game state control means capable of controlling the stop display mode of the first identification information or the second identification information to the special game state in which the stop display mode tends to be relatively relative to the specific display mode is realized. The main CPU 61, which functions as a special game state control means, reaches a predetermined number of times of variation display of the first identification information and the second identification information (190 games in the probabilistic game state (ST mode)) after the end of the specific game state. On condition that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed, it is possible to control the non-special gaming state in which the stop display mode is unlikely to be relative to the specific display mode. The sub CPU 71 and the liquid crystal display device 4 that function as the notification means have a special number of times (probability variation game state (ST mode)) in which the number of fluctuations of the first identification information and the second identification information is less than a predetermined number after the end of the specific game state. It is possible to perform a predetermined notification on condition that the number of remaining games reaches 10) and the first storage means stores the first start memory that determines the specific game state.

Further, in the sub CPU 71 and the liquid crystal display device 4 that function as the notification means, the number of fluctuations of the first identification information and the second identification information reaches a special number after the end of the specific gaming state, and the special gaming state is stored in the first storage means. On the condition that the first start memory that determines the specific gaming state (first specific gaming state) is stored in the above, the predetermined notification is performed. Further, the blade member 34 realizes a variable member that can be changed into an open mode in which the game medium can easily enter the second starting region and a closed mode in which the game medium is difficult to enter into the second starting region. The main CPU 61 realizes a special game state control means capable of controlling a special game state (time saving game state) in which the variable member easily changes to an open mode after the end of the specific game state. When the main CPU 61 functioning as the special game state control means is controlled to the special game state after the end of the specific game state, the number of fluctuation display times of the first identification information and the second identification information is a specific number of times (a game in a time-saving game state). The variable member can be controlled to a non-special gaming state (non-time saving gaming state) in which the variable member is unlikely to change to the open mode on condition that the number of times has reached several hundred times or 30 times). Further, the main CPU 61 is controlled to the specific gaming state by the specific gaming state control means, and is controlled to the special gaming state after the end of the specific gaming state, and the first specific number of times (30) is set as the specific number of times. A specific number of times determination means for determining one from a plurality of types including the first specific number of times and the second specific number of times (100 times), which is larger than the first specific number of times, is realized. The main CPU 61, which functions as the specific number of times determining means, determines the second specific number of times in the special gaming state than in the non-special gaming state as the gaming state before being controlled to the specific gaming state by the specific gaming state controlling means. The probability is relatively high. The sub CPU 71 and the liquid crystal display device 4 that function as the notification means stage have a special number of times (the number of remaining games in the time-saving game state) in which the number of fluctuations of the first identification information and the second identification information is less than the specific number of times after the end of the specific game state. The predetermined notification is performed on the condition that the number of times (15 times) is reached and the first start memory that determines the specific game state is stored in the first start memory.

[Screen display example]
Next, a screen display example will be described with reference to FIGS. 216 to 233.

FIGS. 216 and 217 are diagrams showing a screen transition from the normal mode to the ST mode or the time saving mode through the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol 2 as a screen display example according to the second embodiment.

First, as shown in FIG. 216 (A), a plurality of decorative symbols 700 corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A as in the first embodiment described above. At the same time, the first reserved quantity information 701 corresponding to the start memory of the first special symbol and the second reserved quantity information 702 corresponding to the start memory of the second special symbol (see FIG. 220 and the like) are displayed. An information display area 710 indicating the type of effect mode and the like is displayed. In FIG. 216 (A), the "normal mode" is displayed in the information display area 710. As a result, it is recognized that the gaming state is a non-probability variation and a non-time saving gaming state corresponding to the normal mode. Further, in FIG. 216 (A), four first reserved number information 701s are displayed, and three decorative symbols 700 are stopped and displayed as lost symbols. Further, none of the second reserved quantity information 702 is displayed. As a result, it is recognized that, as the next display state, the variable display of the decorative symbol 700 will be started together with the variable display of the special symbol using the start memory related to the first special symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 216 (B), on the screen of the display area 4A, three pieces are displayed by erasing one piece of the first reserved number information 701, and three decorative symbols 700 are displayed in a variable manner. To be started. At this time, if the start memory corresponding to the erased first reserved quantity information 701 includes the information indicating the jackpot winning corresponding to the jackpot symbol 2, as shown in FIG. 216 (C), the display area 4A On the screen, the two decorative symbols 700 on the left and right are stopped and displayed at, for example, "1", which are the same symbols, and the variable display of the decorative symbol 700 in the middle is continued.

After that, as shown in FIG. 216 (D), on the screen of the display area 4A, the decorative symbol 700 in the middle is stopped and displayed, and the three decorative symbols 700 correspond to the jackpot symbol 2, for example, the alignment of "111". Is displayed as. In addition, in FIG. 216 (D), since one start memory is added according to the start winning to the first start port 32, one first hold quantity information 701 is also added and four are displayed again. It is in a state of being.

In this way, when the three decorative symbols 700 are stopped and displayed at the alignment of "111", the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot symbol 2 is started, and as shown in FIG. 216 (E), on the screen of the display area 4A. Displays a message image 720 such as "big hit" indicating the start of the big hit game state. At this time, in the big hit game state corresponding to the big hit symbol 2, if one of the first passing gate 35A and the second passing gate 35B is selected and the game ball is passed preferentially, the desired hit pattern is obtained. Round games are easier to perform. Therefore, the following screen is displayed in the display area 4A.

As shown in FIG. 217 (F), if left-handed selection is selected and the first passage gate 35A is preferentially passed on the screen of the display area 4A, so-called consecutive villas are likely to occur. If you select the selection instruction image 721 of "← Renso" showing that it will be, and select right-handed and aim to pass the second passage gate 35B preferentially, it will be easy to obtain a large number of prize balls as a whole. A selection instruction image 722 of "→ blow" and a message image 723 such as "Aim at any gate!" Are displayed. Such selection instruction images 721 and 722 and message image 723 continue to be displayed as long as the game ball does not pass through at least one of the first passage gate 35A and the second passage gate 35B. To. That is, even if the big hit game state corresponding to the big hit symbol 2 is started, the first big winning opening 36 and the second big winning opening 37 open and close while the screen as shown in FIG. 217 (F) is displayed. Round game is not started.

After the screen as shown in FIG. 217 (F) is displayed, when the game ball passes through the first passing gate 35A first, as shown in FIG. 217 (G), the screen of the display area 4A is displayed. In order to clarify the state, only the selection instruction image 721 of "← Renso" is displayed. After that, when a predetermined time elapses, as shown in FIG. 217 (H), the display of the selection instruction image 721 is erased on the screen of the display area 4A, and the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening are erased. An image 730 such as "→ right-handed" prompting 37 to aim right-handed is displayed. As a result, the round game is executed based on the hit pattern determined by the hit pattern determination process (see S1302 in FIG. 8). In this case, since it corresponds to the case where the game ball passes first through the first passing gate 35A in the big hit game state corresponding to the big hit symbol 2, the round game is easily executed based on the hit pattern 14. (See the hit pattern selection table in FIG. 193 (big hit symbol 2)). In this case, the hit pattern 1 may be determined although the probability is low. When the round game is executed based on the hit pattern 1, a screen as shown in FIG. 218 (N) described later is displayed.

In the round game based on the hit pattern 14, only the 1st and 11th rounds correspond to the actual rounds. As a result, in the round game based on the hit pattern 14, although the number of prize balls is generally reduced, V winning in the specific area 38A is basically detected in the 1st R or 11th R. Therefore, when the V prize is actually detected, as shown in FIG. 217 (I), an image 740 such as "V" indicating that the V prize has been detected is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. .. As a result, it is notified that the transition to the probabilistic gaming state has been confirmed. The “V” image 740 showing that the transition to the probabilistic gaming state has been confirmed is continuously displayed until the jackpot gaming state ends. When displaying the screen as shown in FIG. 217 (I), the screen as shown in FIG. 221 or FIG. 222, which will be described later, may be displayed, which will be described later.

Then, when the jackpot game state ends, as shown in FIG. 217 (J), a message image 741 such as "ST mode entry" is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. At this time, 190 times are given as the number of games in the ST mode. However, if the V prize is not detected, even if the jackpot game state ends, the time saving mode is set without shifting to the ST mode, so a screen as shown in FIG. 217 (J') described later is displayed. It will be.

When the ST mode starts, as shown in FIG. 217 (K), the decorative symbol 700 is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A in the stop display mode at the time when the big hit game state starts, and the first reserved number information 701 is displayed. Etc. are displayed, and the information display area 710 indicates that the mode is “ST mode”. In addition, an image 730 such as "→ right-handed" that prompts right-handed is also displayed.

On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the second passage gate 35B first after the screen as shown in FIG. 217 (F) is displayed, the screen of the display area 4A is displayed as shown in FIG. 217 (G'). Above, only the selection instruction image 722 of "→ blow" is displayed in order to clarify the state. After that, when a predetermined time elapses, as shown in FIG. 217 (H'), the display of the selection instruction image 722 is erased on the screen of the display area 4A, and the first prize opening 36 and the second prize are won. An image 730 such as "→ right-handed" prompting the mouth 37 to be right-handed is displayed. As a result, the round game is executed based on the hit pattern determined by the hit pattern determination process (see S1302 in FIG. 8). In this case, since it corresponds to the case where the game ball passes first to the second passing gate 35B in the big hit game state corresponding to the big hit symbol 2, the round game is easily executed based on the hit pattern 3. (See the hit pattern selection table in FIG. 193 (big hit symbol 2)). Even in this case, the hit pattern 1 or the hit pattern 2 may be determined, although the probability is low. For example, when a round game is executed based on the hit pattern 1, a screen as shown in FIG. 218 (N), which will be described later, is displayed. Further, when the round game is executed based on the hit pattern 2, for example, a screen indicating the transition to the challenge bonus may be displayed, although not shown in particular.

In the round game based on the hit pattern 3, the 1st and 11th rounds are not real rounds, and the 2nd to 10th rounds and 12th rounds, which are the remaining number of rounds, correspond to real rounds. As a result, in the round game based on the hit pattern 3, although it is difficult to detect the V prize in the specific area 38A, a large number of prize balls can be obtained as a whole. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 217 (I'), it is extremely unlikely that an image such as "V" indicating that a V prize has been detected is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. That is, in most cases, it is notified that the state cannot be changed to the probabilistic gaming state.

Then, when the jackpot game state ends, as shown in FIG. 217 (J'), a message image 742 such as "time saving mode entry" is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. At this time, if the jackpot symbol 2 is determined in the normal mode (non-time saving game state), 30 times are given as the number of games in the time saving mode. On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol 2 is determined in the ST mode or the time saving mode (time saving game state), 100 times are given as the number of games in the time saving mode.

When the time saving mode starts, as shown in FIG. 217 (K'), the decorative symbol 700 is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A in the stop display mode at the time when the big hit game state starts, and the first reserved number information. In addition to displaying 701 and the like, the information display area 710 indicates that the mode is "time saving mode". In addition, an image 730 such as "→ right-handed" that prompts right-handed is also displayed.

FIG. 218 is a diagram showing a screen transition from the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol 1 in the normal mode to the transition to the ST mode as a screen display example according to the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 218 (L), after the variable display of the decorative symbol 700 is started in the normal mode, three decorative symbols 700 correspond to the jackpot symbol 1, for example, "777" on the screen of the display area 4A. It may be displayed as a set of.

In this way, when the three decorative symbols 700 are stopped and displayed at the alignment of "777", the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the jackpot symbol 1 is started, and although not particularly shown, the "big hit" is shown in FIG. 216 (E). After the message image indicating the above is displayed, as shown in FIG. 218 (M), the image 730 of “→ right-handed” is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A so as to encourage right-handed. At the start of the big hit game state corresponding to the big hit symbol 1, whichever the first passing gate 35A or the second passing gate 35B the game ball passes through, it merely serves as an opportunity to determine the hit pattern. , It cannot be a factor related to the decision result. Therefore, for example, an image that encourages a left-handed strike may be displayed, or an image indicating that either the first passing gate 35A or the second passing gate 35B may be aimed at may be displayed. The displayed image 730 continues to be displayed as long as the game ball does not pass through at least one of the first passing gate 35A and the second passing gate 35B. That is, even if the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot symbol 1 is started, the first jackpot 36 and the second jackpot 37 open and close while the screen as shown in FIG. 218 (M) is displayed. Round game is not started.

After the screen as shown in FIG. 218 (M) is displayed, when the game ball passes through the first passing gate 35A or the second passing gate 35B, as shown in FIG. 218 (N), on the screen of the display area 4A. Displays an image 731 indicating the transition to the super big bonus.

After that, when a predetermined time elapses, as shown in FIG. 218 (O), the display of the image 731 is erased on the screen of the display area 4A, and the first special winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37 are closed. An image 730 such as "→ right-handed" prompting to aim with right-handed is displayed. After the image 730 is displayed, a round game is executed based on the hit pattern determined by the hit pattern determination process (see S1302 in FIG. 8). In this case, since it corresponds to the case where the game ball passes through the first passing gate 35A or the second passing gate 35B in the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot symbol 1, the round game is executed based on the hit pattern 1. (See the hit pattern selection table in FIG. 193 (big hit symbol 1)).

In the round game based on the hit pattern 1, the 1st and 11th rounds are real rounds, and the 2nd to 10th rounds and the 12th to 16th rounds, which are the remaining number of rounds, also correspond to the real rounds. As a result, in the round game based on the hit pattern 1, a large number of prize balls can be obtained as a whole, and basically, V winning in the specific area 38A is detected in the 1st or 11th round. Therefore, when the V prize is actually detected, as shown in FIG. 218 (P), an image 740 such as "V" indicating that the V prize has been detected is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. .. As a result, it is notified that the transition to the probabilistic gaming state has been confirmed. The “V” image 740 showing that the transition to the probabilistic gaming state has been confirmed is continuously displayed until the jackpot gaming state ends. When displaying the screen as shown in FIG. 218 (P), the screen as shown in FIG. 221 or FIG. 222, which will be described later, may be displayed, which will be described later.

Then, when the jackpot game state ends, as shown in FIG. 218 (Q), a message image 741 such as "ST mode entry" is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. However, if the V prize is not detected, even if the jackpot game state ends, the time saving mode is set without shifting to the ST mode, so the screen as shown in FIG. 217 (J') described above is displayed. In some cases. When the ST mode is started, a screen similar to that shown in FIG. 217 (K) is displayed, although not particularly shown. On the other hand, in the time saving mode, a screen similar to that shown in FIG. 217 (K') is displayed.

FIG. 219 is a diagram showing a screen transition from the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol 3 in the normal mode to the transition to the time saving mode as a screen display example according to the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 219 (A), after the variable display of the decorative symbol 700 is started in the normal mode, three decorative symbols 700 correspond to the jackpot symbol 3, for example, "222" on the screen of the display area 4A. It may be displayed as a set of.

In this way, when the three decorative symbols 700 are stopped and displayed at the alignment of "222", the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the jackpot symbol 3 is started, and although not particularly shown, the "big hit" is shown in FIG. 216 (E). After the message image indicating the above is displayed, as shown in FIG. 219 (B), the image 730 of “→ right-handed” is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A so as to encourage right-handed. Even at the start of the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot symbol 3, whichever the game ball passes through the first pass gate 35A or the second pass gate 35B, it is an opportunity to simply determine the hit pattern. However, it cannot be a factor related to the decision result. Therefore, for example, an image that encourages a left-handed strike may be displayed, or an image indicating that either the first passing gate 35A or the second passing gate 35B may be aimed at may be displayed.

Even if the game ball passes through the first passage gate 35A or the second passage gate 35B after the image 730 as shown in FIG. 219 (B) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 219 (C), the display area 4A On the screen of, the state in which the image 730 is displayed continues. That is, when the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the jackpot symbol 3 is started, the first passing gate 35A or the second passing gate 35B is played without notifying the type of the jackpot gaming state as shown in FIG. 218 (N). If the ball passes, the round game based on the hit pattern 3 will be started.

In the round game based on the hit pattern 3, the 1st and 11th rounds are not real rounds, and the 2nd to 10th rounds and 12th rounds, which are the remaining number of rounds, correspond to real rounds. As a result, in the round game based on the hit pattern 3, although it is difficult to detect the V prize in the specific area 38A, a large number of prize balls can be obtained as a whole. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 219 (C), on the screen of the display area 4A during the execution of the round game, the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37 are urged to aim with a right-handed "→ right". Only the image 730 such as "hit" is displayed, and the image such as "V" indicating that the V prize has been detected is rarely displayed. That is, in most cases, it is notified that the state cannot be changed to the probabilistic gaming state.

Then, when the jackpot game state ends, as shown in FIG. 219 (D), a message image 742 such as "time saving mode entry" is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. At this time, if the jackpot symbol 3 is determined in the normal mode (non-time saving game state), 30 times are given as the number of games in the time saving mode. On the other hand, if the jackpot symbol 2 is determined in the ST mode or the time saving mode (time saving game state) immediately before the transition to the normal mode, 100 times are given as the number of games in the time saving mode. When the time saving mode is started, a screen similar to that shown in FIG. 217 (K') is displayed, although not particularly shown.

FIG. 220 is a diagram showing a screen transition from the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol 4 in the ST mode to the transition to the ST mode again as a screen display example according to the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 220 (A), after the variable display of the decorative symbol 700 is started in the ST mode, three decorative symbols 700 correspond to the jackpot symbol 4, for example, "888" on the screen of the display area 4A. It may be displayed as a set of. Since the ST mode is an effect mode corresponding to the time-saving gaming state, the second hold quantity information 702 tends to be displayed together with the first hold quantity information 701. In addition, an image 730 for urging a right-handed strike is displayed in order to urge the start winning to the second starting port 33.

In this way, when the three decorative symbols 700 are stopped and displayed at the alignment of "888", the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the jackpot symbol 4 is started, and although not particularly shown, the "big hit" is shown in FIG. 216 (E). After the message image indicating the above is displayed, as shown in FIG. 220 (B), the image 730 of “→ right-handed” is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A so as to encourage right-handed. Even at the start of the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot symbol 4, whichever the game ball passes through the first pass gate 35A or the second pass gate 35B, it is an opportunity to simply determine the hit pattern. However, it cannot be a factor related to the decision result. Therefore, for example, an image that encourages a left-handed strike may be displayed, or an image indicating that either the first passing gate 35A or the second passing gate 35B may be aimed at may be displayed.

Even if the game ball passes through the first passage gate 35A or the second passage gate 35B after the image 730 as shown in FIG. 220 (B) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 220 (C), the display area 4A On the screen of, the state in which the image 730 is displayed continues. That is, when the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the jackpot symbol 4 is started, the first passing gate 35A or the second passing gate 35B is played without notifying the type of the jackpot gaming state as shown in FIG. 218 (N). When the ball passes, a round game based on any of the hit patterns 1, 4 to 12 determined according to the jackpot symbol 4 is started.

In the round game based on the hit patterns 1, 4 to 12, at least the 1st round is a real round, and the round game includes a real round other than the 11th round. As a result, in the round game based on the hit patterns 1, 4 to 12, a certain number of prize balls can be obtained, and V winning in the specific region 38A can be easily detected at least in the 1st round. Therefore, when the V prize is actually detected, as shown in FIG. 220 (C), an image 740 such as "V" indicating that the V prize has been detected is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. .. As a result, it is notified that the transition to the probabilistic gaming state has been confirmed. The “V” image 740 showing that the transition to the probabilistic gaming state has been confirmed is continuously displayed until the jackpot gaming state ends. When displaying the screen as shown in FIG. 220 (C), the screen as shown in FIG. 221 or FIG. 222, which will be described later, may be displayed, which will be described later.

Then, when the jackpot game state ends, as shown in FIG. 220 (D), a message image 741 such as "ST mode entry" is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. However, if the V prize is not detected, even if the jackpot game state ends, the time saving mode is set without shifting to the ST mode, so the screen as shown in FIG. 217 (J') described above is displayed. In some cases. When the ST mode is started, a screen similar to that shown in FIG. 217 (K) is displayed, although not particularly shown. On the other hand, in the time saving mode, a screen similar to that shown in FIG. 217 (K') is displayed.

FIGS. 221 and 222 are diagrams showing screen transitions during a jackpot as a screen display example according to the second embodiment.

For example, as shown in FIG. 221 (A), an image 730 prompting a right-handed hit is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A during the execution of the round game, and "V" indicating that a V prize has been detected is displayed. Image 740 may be displayed.

At this time, assuming that, for example, four start memories of the first special symbol exist, but none of the start memories of the second special symbol exist, as shown in FIG. 221 (B), the screen of the display area 4A. Four first reserved quantity information 701s are displayed above according to the start memory of the first special symbol, and none of the second reserved quantity information 702 is displayed according to the start memory of the second special symbol.

Then, when the start memory of the first special symbol includes information indicating the jackpot symbol 3, as shown in FIG. 221 (C), the message image 750 of "DANGER" is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. Is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 221 (D), on the screen of the display area 4A, instead of displaying the message image 750 of "DANGER", the information indicating the jackpot symbol 3 in the first reserved quantity information 701 is included. 1 The specific first reserved quantity information 701A corresponding to the start memory of the special symbol is highlighted. The jackpot symbol 3 determines that a round game based on the hit pattern 3 is executed together with the jackpot winning. The hit pattern 3 is to execute the 1st R and the 11th R as a round game in which the V winning to the specific area 38A is not detected. That is, during the execution of the round game in which the V prize is confirmed, the start of the first special symbol including the information indicating the jackpot symbol 3 (information indicating that the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol 3 has been won in the probabilistic game state). If there is a memory, it is confirmed that the game shifts to the ST mode (probability variation game state) after the end of the jackpot game state according to the V prize, but soon the jackpot symbol 3 is associated with the start memory. Based on this, there is a possibility that the jackpot game state will be set according to the hit pattern 3, and even though the number of digestion games in the ST mode is small, the jackpot game state may be reached immediately and then the time saving mode may be entered. .. In order to notify such a state, the specific first reserved quantity information 701A associated with the message image 750 of "DANGER" and the jackpot symbol 3 is displayed. If the start memory of the first special symbol including the information indicating the jackpot symbol 3 does not exist, the notification may be made by displaying, for example, a message image indicating that fact.

Further, as shown in FIG. 221 (B'), there are cases where, for example, four start memories of the first special symbol exist and one or less start memories of the second special symbol exist. In this case, On the screen of the display area 4A, four pieces of the first reserved quantity information 701 are displayed according to the start memory of the first special symbol, and the second reserved quantity information 702 is displayed according to the start memory of the second special symbol. For example, one is displayed.

Even in such a case, if the start memory of the first special symbol includes information indicating the jackpot symbol 3, as shown in FIG. 221 (C'), the display area 4A is displayed on the screen. , The message image 750 of "DANGER" is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 221 (D'), the screen of the display area 4A includes information indicating the jackpot symbol 3 in the first reserved number information 701 instead of displaying the message image 750 of "DANGER". The specific first reserved quantity information 701A corresponding to the start memory of the first special symbol is highlighted. At this time, the second reserved quantity information 702 is displayed as it is without any particular change in the display mode. That is, if there is one or less start memory of the second special symbol in the jackpot game state after the V prize is confirmed, the start memory of the first special symbol including the information indicating the jackpot symbol 3 is included. If is present, in order to notify such a state, the message image 750 of "DANGER" and the specific first reserved quantity information 701A associated with the jackpot symbol 3 are displayed.

On the other hand, there may be, for example, four start memories of the first special symbol and two or more start memories of the second special symbol. In this case, as shown in FIG. 221 (B "), four first reserved quantity information 701s are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A according to the start memory of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol is displayed. For example, two second hold quantity information 702s are displayed according to the start memory of the symbol.

In this way, even if the start memory of the first special symbol includes information indicating the jackpot symbol 3, two or more second reserved number information 702s are displayed according to the start memory of the second special symbol. If so, as shown in FIG. 221 (C "), the message image 750 of" DANGER "is not displayed on the screen of the display area 4A.

Further, as shown in FIG. 221 (D "), on the screen of the display area 4A, the specific first reserved number information 701A corresponding to the start memory of the first special symbol including the information indicating the jackpot symbol 3 is emphasized. It is not displayed. That is, even if the start memory of the first special symbol including the information indicating the jackpot symbol 3 exists during the execution of the round game in which the V prize is confirmed, the second special symbol If there is a possibility that a big hit will be won based on the start memory of the second special symbol due to the existence of two or more start memories, it is very likely that the mode will shift to the time saving mode immediately after the shift to the ST mode. Since it is not in the state, the message image 750 of "DANGER" and the specific first reserved quantity information 701A are not displayed. As described above, the conditions for determining the number of start memories of the second special symbol are not limited to 1 or less and 2 or more, for example, 2 or less and 3 or more, 3 or less, and 4 or more. It may be a condition such as.

Further, as shown in FIG. 222 (A), as in the screen shown in FIG. 221 (A), a V prize is shown on the screen of the display area 4A during the execution of the round game together with the image 730 for prompting right-handed strike. The image 740 of "V" may be displayed.

Then, as in the screen shown in FIG. 221 (B), assuming that, for example, four start memories of the first special symbol exist, but none of the start memories of the second special symbol exist, FIG. 222 (B). ), Four first hold quantity information 701s are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A according to the start memory of the first special symbol, and the second hold is made according to the start memory of the second special symbol. No quantity information 702 is displayed.

At this time, if there is no information indicating the jackpot symbol 3 in the start memory of the first special symbol (information indicating that the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol 3 has been won in the probabilistic game state), FIG. 222 (C). As shown in the above, the message image 750 of "DANGER" is not displayed on the screen of the display area 4A.

Further, as shown in FIG. 222 (D), the specific first reserved quantity information 701A is not highlighted on the screen of the display area 4A. That is, if the start memory of the first special symbol including the information indicating the jackpot symbol 3 does not exist during the execution of the round game in which the V prize is confirmed, the mode is immediately shifted to the time saving mode after the transition to the ST mode. Since there is no possibility, the message image 750 of "DANGER" and the specific first reserved quantity information 701A are not displayed. Even if there is a start memory of the first special symbol including information indicating the jackpot symbol 3, the start memory stored after that and indicates information indicating a jackpot symbol other than the jackpot symbol 3 (non-probability variation game state). In the case where there is a start memory of the first special symbol including the information indicating that the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol 3 other than the jackpot symbol 3 has been won, as shown in FIGS. 222 (A) to 222 (D), the "DANGER" The message image 750 and the specific first reserved quantity information 701A may not be displayed.

As a screen display example according to the second embodiment, FIGS. 223 to 225 show the period from the transition to the ST mode immediately after the end of the jackpot to the transition to the time saving mode through the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol 3 in the ST mode. It is a figure which shows the screen transition.

When the jackpot game state ends and the mode shifts to the ST mode, as shown in FIG. 223 (A), the stop display mode (for example, "888") at the time when the jackpot game state starts is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. The decorative symbol 700 is displayed, the first reserved quantity information 701 and the second reserved quantity information 702 are displayed, and the information display area 710 indicates that the mode is “ST mode”. In addition, an image 730 such as "→ right-handed" that prompts right-handed is also displayed. At this time, it is assumed that four pieces of the first hold quantity information 701 are displayed and two pieces of the second hold number information 702 are displayed. Further, the first reserved quantity information 701 includes specific first reserved quantity information 701A corresponding to the start memory of the first special symbol including the information indicating the jackpot symbol 3, but at this point, the second reserved quantity information 701 is included. Since two or more pieces of quantity information 702 are displayed, they are not highlighted as the specific first reserved quantity information 701A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 223 (B), on the screen of the display area 4A, the start memory of the second special symbol is preferentially used, so that the second reserved number information 702 is changed from two to one. It is reduced and displayed, and the variable display of the three decorative symbols 700 is started. At this time, since the number of the second reserved quantity information 702 is one or less, the specific first reserved quantity information 701A included in the first reserved quantity information 701 is highlighted. Further, a message such as "DANGER" is displayed in the information display area 710.

Then, as shown in FIG. 223 (C), on the screen of the display area 4A, one second reserved number information 702 is provided according to the start winning prize to the second starting port 33 during the variable display of the decorative symbol 700. May be displayed in addition to two. In this case, since the number of the second reserved quantity information 702 is two or more, the specific first reserved quantity information 701A is changed from the highlighted display mode to the normal display mode. Further, the information display area 710 is switched to a display state indicating that the ST mode is set.

After that, as shown in FIG. 223 (D), on the screen of the display area 4A, the decorative symbol 700 is stopped and displayed in the lost stop display mode based on the start memory of the second special symbol. Even at this point, the specific first reserved quantity information 701A is displayed in the normal display mode, and the information display area 710 indicates that the ST mode is in effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 223 (E), on the screen of the display area 4A, the start memory of the second special symbol is preferentially used, so that the second reserved number information 702 is reduced to one and displayed. Then, the variable display of the three decorative symbols 700 is started. At this time, since the number of the second reserved quantity information 702 is one or less, the specific first reserved quantity information 701A included in the first reserved quantity information 701 is highlighted again. Further, the information display area 710 is switched to a display state indicating a message of "DANGER".

After that, as shown in FIG. 223 (F), on the screen of the display area 4A, the decorative symbol 700 is stopped and displayed in the lost stop display mode based on the start memory of the second special symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 224 (G), on the screen of the display area 4A, the second reserved number information 702 becomes 0 by using the start memory of the second special symbol, and the three decorative symbols 700 Fluctuation display of is started. Also at this time, since the number of the second reserved quantity information 702 is one or less, the state in which the specific first reserved quantity information 701A included in the first reserved quantity information 701 is highlighted is maintained. Further, the information display area 710 is also maintained in a display state indicating the message "DANGER".

After that, as shown in FIG. 224 (H), on the screen of the display area 4A, the decorative symbol 700 is stopped and displayed in the lost stop display mode based on the start memory of the second special symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 224 (I), on the screen of the display area 4A, the first reserved number information 701 is reduced from 4 to 3 by using the start memory of the first special symbol. Then, the variable display of the three decorative symbols 700 is started. At this time, since the start memory of the first special symbol including the information indicating the jackpot symbol 3 is applied, the display itself of the specific first reserved quantity information 701A corresponding to the start memory is erased. Further, the information display area 710 is also switched to the display state indicating the ST mode.

Then, since the start memory corresponding to the deleted specific first reserved quantity information 701A includes the information indicating the jackpot winning corresponding to the jackpot symbol 3, the display area is as shown in FIG. 224 (J). On the screen of 4A, the two decorative symbols 700 on the left and right are stopped and displayed at, for example, "2", which are the same symbols, and the variable display of the decorative symbol 700 in the middle is continued.

After that, as shown in FIG. 224 (K), on the screen of the display area 4A, the decorative symbol 700 in the middle is stopped and displayed, and the three decorative symbols 700 correspond to the jackpot symbol 3, for example, the alignment of "222". Is displayed as.

In this way, when the three decorative symbols 700 are stopped and displayed at the alignment of "222", the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot symbol 3 is started, and as shown in FIG. 224 (L), on the screen of the display area 4A. Displays a message image 720 such as "big hit" indicating the start of the big hit game state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 225 (M), an image 730 prompting right-handed hitting is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A, and a round game based on the hit pattern 3 corresponding to the big hit symbol 3 is performed. In the round game based on the hit pattern 3, the 1st and 11th rounds are not the real rounds, and the 2nd to 10th rounds and the 12th round, which are the remaining number of rounds, correspond to the real rounds. As a result, in the round game based on the hit pattern 3, it is difficult to detect the V prize in the specific area 38A. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 225 (M), only the image 730 prompting right-handed is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A during the execution of the round game, and the “V prize” indicating that the V prize has been detected is displayed. Is extremely unlikely to be displayed.

Then, when the jackpot game state ends, as shown in FIG. 225 (N), a message image 742 such as "time saving mode entry" is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A.

When the time saving mode starts, as shown in FIG. 225 (O), the decorative symbol 700 is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A in the stop display mode (for example, “222”) at the time when the big hit game state starts. In addition to displaying the first reserved quantity information 701 and the like, the information display area 710 displays that the "time saving mode" is in effect. In addition, an image 730 such as "→ right-handed" that prompts right-handed is also displayed.

FIGS. 226 to 228 are diagrams showing a screen transition from the middle of the time saving mode in which the remaining number of times of the time saving mode is, for example, 16 times or more to the big hit corresponding to the big hit symbol 1 as a screen display example according to the second embodiment. ..

As shown in FIG. 226 (A), on the screen of the display area 4A, the decorative symbol 700 is stopped and displayed in the lost stop display mode, and the first reserved quantity information 701 and the second reserved quantity information 702 are displayed. In addition, it is assumed that "ST mode" is displayed in the information display area 710. In addition, an image 730 such as "→ right-handed" that prompts right-handed is also displayed. At this time, it is assumed that two pieces of the first hold quantity information 701 are displayed and two pieces of the second hold number information 702 are displayed. Further, the first reserved quantity information 701 includes specific first reserved quantity information 701A corresponding to the start memory of the first special symbol including the information indicating the jackpot symbol 3, but at this point, the second reserved quantity information 701 is included. Since two or more pieces of quantity information 702 are displayed, they are not highlighted as the specific first reserved quantity information 701A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 226 (B), on the screen of the display area 4A, the start memory of the second special symbol is preferentially used, so that the second reserved number information 702 is changed from two to one. It is reduced and displayed, and the variable display of the three decorative symbols 700 is started. At this time, since the number of the second reserved quantity information 702 is one or less, the specific first reserved quantity information 701A included in the first reserved quantity information 701 is highlighted. Further, the information display area 710 is switched to a display state indicating a message of "DANGER".

After that, as shown in FIG. 226 (C), on the screen of the display area 4A, the decorative symbol 700 is stopped and displayed in the lost stop display mode based on the start memory of the second special symbol. At this time, the start memory of the first special symbol is added according to the start winning to the first start port 32, and the first reserved quantity information 701 is set to 2 so as to correspond to the start memory of the first special symbol for this addition. It is assumed that the number is increased from three to three. Further, it is assumed that the start memory of the first special symbol added this time includes information indicating the jackpot symbol 1 or the jackpot symbol 2 corresponding to the hit pattern 1 or the like in which the V prize is easily won together with the jackpot winning. That is, the first reserved quantity information 701 includes special first reserved quantity information 701B corresponding to the start memory of the first special symbol including the information indicating the jackpot symbol 1 or the jackpot symbol 2. In this case, the first reserved quantity information 701 includes the specific first reserved quantity information 701A, but includes the special first reserved quantity information 701B which can be digested after that and become an advantageous jackpot game state. It becomes. At this time, although the number of the second reserved quantity information 702 is one or less, it is applied as a priority condition that the first reserved quantity information 701 includes the special first reserved quantity information 701B, so that the screen of the display area 4A is displayed. In the above, the specific first reserved quantity information 701A is changed from the highlighted display mode to the normal display mode. Further, the information display area 710 is switched to a display state indicating that the ST mode is set.

Next, as shown in FIG. 226 (D), on the screen of the display area 4A, the second reserved number information 702 becomes 0 by using the start memory of the second special symbol, and the three decorative symbols 700 Fluctuation display of is started. Also in this case, the number of the second reserved quantity information 702 is one or less, but since it is applied as a priority condition that the first reserved quantity information 701 includes the special first reserved quantity information 701B, it is specific. The state in which the first reserved quantity information 701A is displayed in the normal display mode is maintained without being highlighted. Further, the information display area 710 also maintains the display state indicating the ST mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 226 (E), on the screen of the display area 4A, the decorative symbol 700 is stopped and displayed in the lost stop display mode based on the start memory of the second special symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 226 (F), on the screen of the display area 4A, the first reserved number information 701 is reduced from 3 to 2 and displayed by using the start memory of the first special symbol. Then, the variable display of the three decorative symbols 700 is started. At this time, since the start memory of the first special symbol including the information indicating the jackpot symbol 3 is applied, the display itself of the specific first reserved quantity information 701A corresponding to the start memory is erased.

Then, since the start memory corresponding to the deleted specific first reserved quantity information 701A includes the information indicating the jackpot winning corresponding to the jackpot symbol 3, the display area is as shown in FIG. 227 (G). On the screen of 4A, three decorative symbols 700 are displayed as a set of, for example, "222" corresponding to the jackpot symbol 3.

In this way, when the three decorative symbols 700 are stopped and displayed at the alignment of "222", the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot symbol 3 is started, and as shown in FIG. 227 (H), on the screen of the display area 4A. Displays a "big hit" message image 720 indicating the start of the big hit game state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 227 (I), an image 730 for prompting a right-handed hit is displayed, and a round game based on the hit pattern 3 corresponding to the jackpot symbol 3 is performed. In the round game based on this hit pattern 3, it is difficult to detect the V prize in the specific area 38A. Therefore, on the screen of the display area 4A during the execution of the round game, only the image 730 prompting right-handed is displayed, and there is a possibility that an image such as "V" indicating that the V prize has been detected is displayed. Extremely low.

Then, when the jackpot game state ends, as shown in FIG. 227 (J), a message image 742 such as "time saving mode entry" is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A.

When the time saving mode starts, as shown in FIG. 227 (K), the stop display mode (for example, “222”) at the time when the big hit game state starts is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A as in FIG. 227 (G). The decorative symbol 700 is displayed, the first reserved quantity information 701 and the like are displayed, and the information display area 710 indicates that the "time saving mode" is set. In addition, an image 730 that encourages right-handed striking is also displayed. At this time, the first reserved quantity information 701 includes special first reserved quantity information 701B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 227 (L), on the screen of the display area 4A, the first reserved number information 701 is reduced from two to one by using the start memory of the first special symbol. The variable display of the three decorative symbols 700 is started. At this time, the first reserved quantity information 701 includes special first reserved quantity information 701B. Further, the information display area 710 is maintained in a display state indicating the time saving mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 228 (M), on the screen of the display area 4A, the decorative symbol 700 is stopped and displayed in the lost stop display mode based on the start memory of the first special symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 228 (N), on the screen of the display area 4A, the first reserved number information 701 is reduced from 1 to 0 by using the start memory of the first special symbol. The variable display of the three decorative symbols 700 is started. At this time, for example, since the start memory of the first special symbol including the information indicating the jackpot symbol 1 is applied, the display itself of the special first reserved quantity information 701B corresponding to the start memory is erased.

Then, since the start memory corresponding to the erased special first reserved quantity information 701B includes the information indicating the jackpot winning corresponding to the jackpot symbol 1, the display area is as shown in FIG. 228 (O). On the screen of 4A, the three decorative symbols 700 are stopped and displayed as the alignment of, for example, "777" corresponding to the jackpot symbol 1. As a result, the time saving mode ends and the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the hit pattern 1 starts, and if a V prize is won, the mode generally shifts to the ST mode after the jackpot gaming state ends.

FIG. 229 and FIG. 230 are diagrams showing a screen transition from the time saving mode to the time saving mode through the big hit corresponding to the big hit symbol 3 as a screen display example according to the second embodiment, in the non-probability changing gaming state. , Is a diagram showing that a predetermined effect is performed depending on whether or not the first start memory includes information indicating a big hit.

As shown in FIG. 229 (A), on the screen of the display area 4A, the decorative symbol 700 is stopped and displayed in the lost stop display mode, and the first reserved quantity information 701 and the second reserved quantity information 702 are displayed. In addition, it is assumed that the information display area 710 is displayed to the effect that the "time saving mode" is set. Further, four pieces of the first hold quantity information 701 are displayed, and four pieces of the second hold number information 702 are also displayed. The first hold number information 701 includes information indicating the jackpot symbol 3. It is assumed that the specific first reserved quantity information 701A corresponding to the start memory of the first special symbol is included. At this time, since two or more second reserved quantity information 702s are displayed, they are not highlighted as the specific first reserved quantity information 701A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 229 (B), on the screen of the display area 4A, the start memory of the second special symbol is preferentially used, so that the number of the second reserved number information 702 is changed from 4 to 3. It is reduced and displayed, and the variable display of the three decorative symbols 700 is started. At this time, if the remaining number of times in the time saving mode is 15 times, information such as "15 times remaining in the time saving mode" indicating that fact is displayed in the information display area 710. Then, the specific first reserved quantity information 701A included in the first reserved quantity information 701 is changed from the normal display mode to the highlighted display mode. In this way, when the remaining number of times in the time saving mode is 15 times or less, the condition that the specific first reserved quantity information 701A is not highlighted if there are two or more second reserved quantity information 702 in the ST mode described above. The specific first reserved quantity information 701A is highlighted. However, the message "DANGER" is not displayed in the information display area 710.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 229 (C) and 229 (D), on the screen of the display area 4A, the decorative symbol 700 is stopped and displayed in the lost stop display mode based on the start memory of the second special symbol. At this time, the information display area 710 is displayed to indicate that the time saving mode is set.

After that, although not particularly shown, in a state where the remaining number of times in the time saving mode is 15 times or less, the variable display of the decorative symbol 700 and the stop display which is the stop display mode of the loss are repeated based on the start memory of the second special symbol. As a result, the second reserved quantity information 702 is sequentially reduced to 0, and then the decorative symbol 700 is variablely displayed based on the start memory of the first special symbol. Then, as shown in FIG. 229 (E), the decorative symbol 700 is stopped and displayed on the screen of the display area 4A in the lost stop display mode based on the start memory of the first special symbol. At this time, since the start memory of the first special symbol is used, the first reserved quantity information 701 is reduced from 4 to 3, and the first reserved quantity information 701 used in the following order is a specific first. The reserved quantity information 701A is highlighted.

After that, as shown in FIG. 230 (F), the first reserved number information 701 is reduced from 3 to 2 and displayed on the screen of the display area 4A by using the start memory of the first special symbol. The variable display of the three decorative symbols 700 is started. At this time, since the start memory of the first special symbol including the information indicating the jackpot symbol 3 is applied, the display itself of the specific first reserved quantity information 701A corresponding to the start memory is erased.

Then, since the start memory corresponding to the deleted specific first reserved quantity information 701A includes the information indicating the jackpot winning corresponding to the jackpot symbol 3, as shown in FIGS. 230 (G) and 230 (H). In addition, on the screen of the display area 4A, the three decorative symbols 700 are stopped and displayed as the alignment of, for example, "222" corresponding to the jackpot symbol 3.

In this way, when the three decorative symbols 700 are stopped and displayed at the alignment of "222", the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the jackpot symbol 3 is started, and as shown in FIG. 230 (I), on the screen of the display area 4A. Displays a "big hit" message image 720 indicating the start of the big hit game state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 230 (J), an image 730 for prompting a right-handed hit is displayed, and a round game based on the hit pattern 3 corresponding to the jackpot symbol 3 is performed. In the round game based on this hit pattern 3, it is difficult to detect the V prize in the specific area 38A. Therefore, on the screen of the display area 4A during the execution of the round game, only the image 730 prompting right-handed is displayed, and there is a possibility that an image such as "V" indicating that the V prize has been detected is displayed. Extremely low.

Then, when the jackpot game state ends, as shown in FIG. 230 (K), a message image 742 such as "time saving mode entry" is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. At this time, since the jackpot symbol 3 has been determined in the time saving mode (time saving game state), 100 times are given as the number of games in the time saving mode.

FIG. 231 and FIG. 232 are diagrams showing screen transitions from the time saving mode becomes a predetermined remaining number of times to the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol 4, as a modification of the second embodiment, and are in a non-probability changing gaming state. In the first start-up memory, it is a figure which shows that a predetermined effect is performed depending on whether or not the information indicating a big hit is included.

As shown in FIG. 231 (A), on the screen of the display area 4A, three decorative symbols 700 are variably displayed based on the start memory of the second special symbol, and in the information display area 710, " Information such as "15 times remaining in the time saving mode" is displayed. Further, the first reserved quantity information 701 is displayed in three pieces, and the second reserved quantity information 702 is displayed in two pieces, and the first reserved quantity information 701 includes information indicating the jackpot symbol 3. It is assumed that the specific first reserved quantity information 701A corresponding to the start memory of the first special symbol is included. At this time, since the remaining number of times in the time saving mode is 15, it is highlighted as the specific first reserved number information 701A.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 231 (B) and 231 (C), on the screen of the display area 4A, the decorative symbol 700 is variably displayed based on the start memory of the second special symbol, and then the loss is stopped and displayed. Stop is displayed. At this time, the start memory of the second special symbol is added according to the start winning to the second start port 33, and the second reserved quantity information 702 is set to 2 so as to correspond to the start memory of the additional second special symbol. The number is increased from 3 to 3. Further, it is assumed that the start memory of the second special symbol added this time includes information indicating, for example, the jackpot symbol 4 corresponding to the hit pattern in which the V prize is easily won together with the jackpot winning. That is, the second reserved quantity information 702 includes special second reserved quantity information 702A corresponding to the start memory of the second special symbol including the information indicating the jackpot symbol 4. In this case, the first reserved quantity information 701 includes a specific first reserved quantity information 701A, but includes a special second reserved quantity information 702A that can be digested earlier and become an advantageous jackpot gaming state. It will be. At this time, the remaining number of times in the time saving mode is 15 times or less, but the addition of the special second reserved quantity information 702A is applied as a priority condition, and on the screen of the display area 4A, it is specific. The first reserved quantity information 701A is changed from the highlighted display mode to the normal display mode.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 231 (D) and 231 (E), on the screen of the display area 4A, the remaining number of times in the time saving mode is 15 times or less, and the decoration is performed based on the start memory of the second special symbol. The variable display of the symbol 700 and the stop display which is the stop display mode of the loss are performed, and the second reserved number information 702 is reduced to two accordingly.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 232 (F) and 232 (G), on the screen of the display area 4A, the change display of the decorative symbol 700 and the stop display mode of the loss are again based on the start memory of the second special symbol. The stop display is performed, and the second reserved quantity information 702 is reduced accordingly to one. The second reserved quantity information 702 corresponds to the special second reserved quantity information 702A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 232 (H), on the screen of the display area 4A, the second reserved number information 702 is reduced from 1 to 0 by using the start memory of the second special symbol. The variable display of the three decorative symbols 700 is started. At this time, since the start memory of the second special symbol including the information indicating the jackpot symbol 4 is applied, the display itself of the special second reserved quantity information 702A corresponding to the start memory is erased.

Then, since the start memory corresponding to the erased special second reserved quantity information 702A includes information indicating the jackpot winning corresponding to the jackpot symbol 4, as shown in FIGS. 230 (I) and (J). In addition, on the screen of the display area 4A, the three decorative symbols 700 are stopped and displayed as the alignment of, for example, "888" corresponding to the jackpot symbol 3. In this way, when the three decorative symbols 700 are stopped and displayed at the alignment of "888", the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot symbol 4 is started. In this way, when the special second reserved quantity information 702A corresponding to the jackpot symbol 4 is digested first and the jackpot gaming state is started, the specific first reserved quantity information 701A corresponding to the jackpot symbol 3 is emphasized. It can be hidden.

FIG. 233 is a diagram showing screen transitions until the ST mode reaches a predetermined remaining number of times as a screen display example according to the second embodiment, and includes information indicating a big hit in the first start memory in the probabilistic game state. It is a figure which shows that a predetermined production is performed depending on whether or not it is performed.

As shown in FIG. 233 (A), on the screen of the display area 4A, the decorative symbol 700 is stopped and displayed in the lost stop display mode, and the first reserved quantity information 701 and the second reserved quantity information 702 are displayed. In addition, it is assumed that "ST mode" is displayed in the information display area 710. Further, four pieces of the first hold quantity information 701 are displayed, and four pieces of the second hold number information 702 are also displayed. The first hold number information 701 includes information indicating the jackpot symbol 3. It is assumed that the specific first reserved quantity information 701A corresponding to the start memory of the first special symbol is included. At this time, since two or more second reserved quantity information 702s are displayed, they are not highlighted as the specific first reserved quantity information 701A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 233 (B), on the screen of the display area 4A, the start memory of the second special symbol is preferentially used, so that the number of the second reserved number information 702 is changed from 4 to 3. It is reduced and displayed, and the variable display of the three decorative symbols 700 is started. At this time, if the remaining number of times in the ST mode is 10 times, information such as "ST mode remaining 10 times" indicating that fact is displayed in the information display area 710. Then, the specific first reserved quantity information 701A included in the first reserved quantity information 701 is changed from the normal display mode to the highlighted display mode. In this way, even when the number of remaining times in the ST mode is 10 or less, the condition that the specific first reserved quantity information 701A is not highlighted if there are two or more second reserved quantity information 702 in the ST mode described above. The specific first reserved quantity information 701A is highlighted.

[Effect of the gaming machine of the second embodiment]
According to the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

In such a configuration, the hit pattern 14 and the hit pattern 3 have a difference in the ease of accepting the game ball by the first big winning opening 36 and the second big winning opening 37. That is, in the hit pattern 14, although the total number of acceptances is relatively small from the total time during which the round game is open, the second big winning opening 37 is continuously open for a predetermined time at the 1st and 11th rounds. As a result, the round game that easily passes through the specific area 38A is executed, so that it becomes easy to shift to the probability variation game state. On the other hand, in the hit pattern 3, the time for the second big winning opening 37 to be in the open state is relatively short in the 1st and 11th rounds, so that a round game that is difficult to pass through the specific area 38A is executed. Although it is difficult to shift to the gaming state, the total number of acceptances is relatively large compared to the hit pattern 14 from the total time during which the game is open in all round games. Therefore, according to such a configuration, when the game shifts to the big hit game state, the hit pattern 14 and the hit pattern 14 and the hit pattern 14 and Since the jackpot gaming state corresponding to any one of the hit patterns 3 can be selected, it is possible to realize technical intervention that allows the player to select whether or not to shift to the probabilistic gaming state. Then, in selecting the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the hit pattern 14 or the hit pattern 3 by preferentially passing through the first passage gate 35A or the second passage gate 35B, the jackpot gaming state corresponding to any of the hit patterns is selected. Even so, since the profits and disadvantages in the game are generated, it is possible to appropriately maintain the balance between the profits and the disadvantages received by the player and the store where the game machine is installed.

Further, according to such a configuration, the content of the effect is that the control of the jackpot gaming state is started based on the jackpot symbol 2 and the control of the jackpot gaming state based on the jackpot symbols other than the jackpot symbol 2 is started. Therefore, the player decides whether or not to shift to the probabilistic gaming state depending on the passage of either the first passage gate 35A or the second passage gate 35B. It is possible to distinguish the situation where the determination ratio of the hit pattern is the same regardless of the passage of the first passage gate 35A and the second passage gate 35B, and the game is played against the first passage gate 35A or the second passage gate 35B. Before passing the ball, it is possible to clearly distinguish between a situation in which the player can choose whether or not to shift to the probabilistic game state and a situation in which such a choice cannot be made. For example, when the control of the jackpot gaming state is started based on the jackpot symbol 2 and it is possible to select whether or not to shift to the special gaming state accordingly, the jackpot game having a content that explicitly indicates that fact. By executing the effect according to the state (see FIG. 217 (F)), the player can surely recognize such a selectable situation, and the desired first passage gate 35A or the second passage gate 35A or the second. The game can be performed so as to aim at the passing gate 35B and pass the game ball.

Further, according to such a configuration, in the probabilistic game state, information indicating the jackpot symbol 3 of the hit pattern 3 and the determination result indicating the transition to the jackpot game state is stored in association with the first start memory. In other words, if the transition to the jackpot gaming state is confirmed, but it is difficult to transition to the probabilistic gaming state again after the transition to the jackpot gaming state, information corresponding to that fact is stored. Is notified (see FIGS. 223 and 224). The player who receives such a notification can quickly detect that it is difficult to shift to the probabilistic gaming state again in the probabilistic gaming state. The player who senses such a situation, for example, performs the game so as to give priority to the variable display and the stop display of the second special symbol based on the second start memory as much as possible, so that the probabilistic game state ends immediately. It is possible to avoid the memory.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 222, when it is notified that the information indicating the jackpot symbol 3 of the hit pattern 3 that is difficult to shift to the probabilistic gaming state is not stored, the variation display and the stop display of the second special symbol are displayed. Since it is not necessary to give priority to the game, the game can be interrupted with peace of mind. In this way, since the method of proceeding with the game changes according to the content to be notified, the monotony of the game can be eliminated.

Further, according to such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 223 and 224, when the number of second start memories is, for example, less than two, the determination result is that the game shifts to the jackpot game state in which it is difficult to shift to the probability variation game state. It is notified that the first start memory indicating the above is stored. In other words, when there are two or more second start memories and the variation display and stop display of the second special symbol are preferentially performed, whether or not such a first start memory is stored is determined. It will not be notified in particular. This gives a sense of security that the probabilistic gaming state will not be interrupted for a while if the number of second start memories exists to some extent and there is no disadvantageous situation for the player even if the above notification is not given. You can proceed with the game while playing.

Further, according to such a configuration, there is a case where the first start memory indicating the determination result of shifting to the jackpot gaming state where it is difficult to shift to the probabilistic gaming state is stored, and further, it is stored after that. If there is another first start memory that has been played and the other first start memory does not indicate a judgment result that the player shifts to the jackpot game state in which it is easy to shift to the probability change game state, the state shifts to the probability change game state. It is notified that the first start memory to the effect that it is difficult to do is stored. In other words, as shown in FIGS. 226 to 228, even if the first start memory indicating that it is difficult to shift to the probabilistic gaming state is stored, it is easy to shift to the probabilistic gaming state after that. When the first start memory is stored, the first start memory to be digested first is not particularly notified. That is, although it temporarily shifts to the non-probability changing gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it then shifts to the jackpot gaming state based on the other first start memory, and it is easy to shift to the probability changing gaming state again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. When it is confirmed that the above notification is not performed, it is possible to prevent unnecessary notification from being excessively performed, and it is possible to appropriately notify useful information depending on the situation. It can be done, and by extension, the game can proceed with peace of mind.

Further, according to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 233, after the end of the jackpot game state, the number of times the change of the special symbol is displayed is a special number of times in the probability change game state (the number of times the probability change game state is the remaining 10 times). If the number of times remaining until the predetermined number of times (190 times) at which the probability-changing game state ends is reduced to some extent, the first start memory that determines the jackpot symbol 3 of the hit pattern 3 that is difficult to shift to the probability-changing game state is stored. Since the notification to that effect is given, it is possible to perform a significant notification that contributes to the interests of the player as a notification of the content indicating whether or not to shift to the probability-changing gaming state again in the probability-changing gaming state. That is, since the first start memory is not digested preferentially over the second start memory, the variation display of the first special symbol based on the first start memory is not performed until the end of the probabilistic game state unless a predetermined notification is given. There is a risk. Further, since the target to be notified is the first start memory that determines the jackpot symbol 3, when the variation display based on the first start memory is performed, the state does not shift to the probabilistic game state. In short, the first start memory may determine the jackpot game state in the probabilistic game state based on the information indicating the random number for hit determination, but does not determine the jackpot game state in the non-probability variable game state. Since there is a possibility, the player may be disadvantaged without shifting to the jackpot game state. In order to deal with such a case, by performing the predetermined notification as described above, it is possible to promote the variable display based on the first start memory that is not preferentially digested, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged. can do. That is, although the profit related to the probabilistic gaming state is lost, the loss of the profit related to the jackpot gaming state can be prevented as much as possible.

Further, according to such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 231 and 232, even in the time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game state, the number of times of variation display of the special symbol is the special number of times (the time-saving game state remains 15 times). When the number of times remaining is reduced to a certain extent (100 times or 30 times), which is the end of the time-saving gaming state, for example, the first big hit symbol 3 of the hit pattern 3 which is difficult to shift to the probabilistic gaming state is determined. If the start memory is memorized, that fact is notified, so that it is possible to perform significant notification that contributes to the benefit of the player even in the time-saving gaming state. That is, since the time saving game state is more likely to be given a larger number of time saving times than the non-time saving gaming state, it is possible to obtain a further benefit related to the time saving gaming state by performing a predetermined notification.

Next, the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, which is partially different from the second embodiment described above, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 234. The same or similar components as those according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, only one passing gate 35A is provided as a passing gate, and the player is allowed to select a hit pattern according to the timing at which the game ball passes through the passing gate 35A. It is configured as follows. In the present embodiment, for convenience, only the jackpot symbol 2 is determined as the jackpot symbol, and either the hit pattern 3 or the hit pattern 14 is determined as the hit pattern.

[Game flow of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment]
FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing a game flow of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment. The flowchart of the figure shows the main flow of the entire game, and does not distinguish between the processing by the main CPU 61 and the processing by the sub CPU 71. Therefore, the execution subject of each process is simply described as a CPU.

As shown in FIG. 234, in S4000, the CPU determines whether or not there is a start memory. If it is determined that there is a start memory, the CPU shifts the process to S4001. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no start memory, the CPU repeatedly executes the process of S4000 until it is determined that there is a start memory.

In S4001, the CPU executes the jackpot determination process based on the probability according to the game state. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S4002.

In S4002, the CPU performs a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit. When the CPU determines that it is a big hit, it shifts the processing to S4004. On the other hand, when the CPU determines that it is not a big hit, it shifts the process to S4003.

In S4003, the CPU performs a process of stopping and displaying the lost symbol after changing the special symbol for a predetermined time. After that, the CPU shifts the processing to S4000 again.

In S4004, the CPU performs a process of stopping and displaying the jackpot symbol after changing the special symbol for a predetermined time. In the present embodiment, the jackpot symbol 2 is stopped and displayed. After that, the CPU shifts the processing to S4005.

In S4005, the CPU performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the hit pattern determination timer after starting the control of the big hit game state. The hit pattern determination timer is a timer for timing a plurality of predetermined times (periods) until the game ball passes through the passing gate 35A. As the predetermined value, for example, a value corresponding to 6 seconds is set as the first period. After that, the CPU shifts the processing to S4006.

In S4006, the CPU performs a process of setting data for determining a hit pattern. In the present embodiment, the data for determining the hit pattern 14 is set as the data for determining the hit pattern corresponding to the first period. After that, the CPU shifts the processing to S4007.

In S4007, the CPU performs a process of setting the broadcast data corresponding to the hit pattern determination data. That is, in the present embodiment, notification data for notifying that the hit pattern 14 is executed when the game ball passes through the passing gate 35A within the time of the first period is set. After that, the CPU shifts the processing to S4008.

In S4008, the CPU performs a process of determining whether or not the passage of the game ball at the passing gate 35A is detected based on the detection signal from the passing gate switch. In this process, when the CPU determines that the passage of the game ball at the passage gate 35A is detected, the CPU shifts the process to S4009, and when it determines that the passage of the game ball at the passage gate 35A is not detected, S4010 Move the process to.

In S4009, the CPU performs a process of determining a hit pattern based on the hit pattern determination data. For example, when the hit pattern determination data corresponding to the first period is set, the hit pattern 14 is determined. On the other hand, there is a case where the hit pattern determination data corresponding to the second period described later is set, and in this case, the hit pattern 3 is determined. After that, the CPU shifts the processing to S4015.

In S4010, the CPU performs a subtraction process on the hit pattern determination timer. For example, in the process of S4005, when "3000" is set as a predetermined value corresponding to 6 seconds in the hit pattern determination timer, the process is executed so as to subtract 1 every 2 ms. As a result, a period corresponding to 6 seconds is measured. After that, the CPU shifts the processing to S4011.

In S4011, the CPU performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the hit pattern determination timer is "0". In this process, when the CPU determines that the value of the hit pattern determination timer is "0", it shifts the process to S4012, and when it determines that the value of the hit pattern determination timer is not "0". Returns the process to S4008.

In S4012, the CPU again performs the process of setting a predetermined value in the hit pattern determination timer. In this S4012, as the predetermined value, a value corresponding to 6 seconds is set as the second period, for example, after the lapse of the first period. On the other hand, if the second period has elapsed, a value corresponding to 6 seconds is set as the first period. In the present embodiment, the first period and the second period both have the same time (6 seconds), but may be different times. For example, the first period corresponding to the hit pattern 14 may be a relatively long time, and the second period corresponding to the hit pattern 3 described later may be a relatively short time. After that, the CPU shifts the processing to S4013.

In S4013, the CPU performs a process of changing the hit pattern determination data. In this process, if the hit pattern determination data corresponding to the hit pattern 14 is set at the present time, the CPU changes to the hit pattern determination data corresponding to the hit pattern 3 and corresponds to the hit pattern 3 at the present time. If the hit pattern determination data is set, the data is changed to the hit pattern determination data corresponding to the hit pattern 14. After that, the CPU shifts the processing to S4014.

In S4014, the CPU performs a process of setting the broadcast data corresponding to the changed hit pattern determination data. That is, in the present embodiment, after the lapse of the first period, notification data for notifying that the hit pattern 3 is executed when the game ball passes through the passing gate 35A within the time of the second period is set. To. Further, after the lapse of the second period, notification data for notifying that the hit pattern 14 is executed when the game ball passes through the passing gate 35A again within the time of the first period is set. Based on such notification data, before passing the game ball through the passing gate 35A, the corresponding hit pattern 3 or hit pattern 14 is executed according to the first period or the second period when the ball is passed at the present time. You will be informed about that. Further, until the game ball passes through the passing gate 35A, the first period and the second period are sequentially switched, and each time the first period and the second period elapse, the hit pattern 3 and the hit pattern 14 and related data are displayed. Prepared alternately. After that, the CPU returns the process to S4008.

In S4015, the CPU controls to open and close the big winning opening based on the hit pattern in order to execute the round game in the big hit game state. After that, the CPU shifts the processing to S4016.

In S4016, the CPU performs a process of determining whether or not the final round game is completed. In this process, when it is determined that the final round game is completed, the CPU shifts the process to S4017, and when it is determined that the final round game is not completed, the CPU returns the process to S4015.

In S4017, the CPU performs a process of determining whether or not the game ball has passed the specific area 38A (V winning). In this process, when the CPU determines that the game ball has passed through the specific area 38A, it shifts the process to S4018, and when it determines that the game ball has not passed through the specific area 38A, the first S4000. Return the process to.

In S4018, the CPU performs a process of controlling the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state to the probabilistic gaming state. If the game ball has not passed through the specific area 38A, the game returns to the first S4000, and the game state after the end of the big hit game state is controlled as the non-probability change game state.

As a result, when the determination result that the CPU (main CPU 61) in the present embodiment shifts to the specific game state is obtained by the specific game state transition determination means, at least the first period and the second period are set as a plurality of periods. Has been realized as a period setting means that can be set. Further, the CPU (main CPU 61) that functions as the round game pattern determining means is a first variable winning device (first variable winning device) on condition that the game medium has passed through the passing area 38A in the first period set by the period setting means. The first prize opening 36) includes a round game in which the first aspect and the second aspect are varied, and the second variable winning device (second grand prize opening 37) facilitates the passage of the game medium into a specific area. It is possible to determine the first round game pattern (hit pattern 14) including the easy-to-pass round game that varies in the first aspect and the second aspect, and the game medium passes through the passing area 38A in the second period set by the period setting means. On condition that the first variable winning device includes a round game that varies to the first and second aspects, and the second variable winning device makes it difficult for the game medium to pass through the specific area. It is possible to determine the second round game pattern (hit pattern 3) including the difficult-to-pass round game that varies depending on the mode and the second mode.

[Effect of the gaming machine of the third embodiment]
According to the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

According to such a configuration, when shifting to the jackpot game state, the passing gate 35A is allowed to pass the game ball within the time of the first period or to pass the game ball within the time of the second period. Therefore, since the jackpot gaming state corresponding to either the hit pattern 14 or the hit pattern 3 can be selected, it is possible to realize the technical intervention that allows the player to select whether or not to shift to the probabilistic gaming state. be able to. Then, in selecting the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the hit pattern 14 or the hit pattern 3 by passing the passing gate 35A within either the first period or the second period, which hit pattern is supported. Even if the jackpot game state is selected, profits and disadvantages in the game are generated, so that the balance between the profits and disadvantages received by the player and the store where the game machine is installed can be appropriately maintained.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment.

For example, the effect mode and the decorative symbol may be determined according to the type of the jackpot symbol as follows. If the decorative pattern is a golden pattern with "7" aligned, the Super Big Bonus will be confirmed. In addition, when the decorative symbols are set to "3" and the red symbol is used, the success of the challenge bonus is confirmed on the condition that the first special symbol is the jackpot symbol, and the second special symbol is the jackpot symbol. The special effect mode defined in advance is executed under the condition of, and the execution of the actual 15R is confirmed. In addition, when the decorative symbol is a pink symbol with "1" or "5" aligned, the success probability of the challenge bonus is relatively high on condition that the first special symbol is a big hit symbol, and the second special On condition that the symbol becomes a big hit symbol, it is set as an additional bonus (substantially 8R or more confirmed or the probability of real 4R is relatively low) that is more advantageous than the blue symbol described later. If the decorative symbols are "2", "4", or "6" and the blue symbol is used, the success probability of the challenge bonus should be relatively low on condition that the first special symbol is a big hit symbol. Alternatively, it is set to 0, and on condition that the second special symbol becomes a big hit symbol, it is an additional bonus that is more disadvantageous than the pink symbol.

Further, as the various effect patterns executed in the big hit game state, one may be selected from those predetermined according to the type of the big hit game state, and may not be determined for each round game.

In the above-described embodiment, as the effect pattern in the challenge bonus and the additional bonus, the effect pattern of each round game is determined each time on the condition that the game shifts to the jackpot game state, but from all the predetermined effect patterns. By selecting one effect pattern, all the effect patterns executed in the challenge bonus and the additional bonus may be determined in one determination process.

In the above-described embodiment, the challenge bonus determines the production content based on the three types of production patterns, refers only to the production content of the production pattern selected by the player, and refers to the production content of the other production patterns. Although it is designed to be discarded, the effect content corresponding only to the effect pattern selected by the player may be determined.

Before the start of the jackpot game state related to the challenge bonus, three types of effect patterns in the challenge bonus may be determined and the player may be made to select the effect pattern. In this case, it is possible to display the icon and notify the execution of the round game in which V winning is easy before the start of the challenge bonus in advance.

In the additional bonus, the display mode of the displayed numerical values such as the number of payout prize balls and the total number of prize balls may be different from the above-described embodiment. For example, in the above-described embodiment, the number of winnings for the large winning opening is one and the numerical value added and displayed on the blue meter is "10", but the numerical value added and displayed for each winning number is, for example, "1". May be. Further, the addition may be expressed by changing the color according to the number of winnings. Specifically, white is displayed when the number of prizes is "0", blue is displayed when the number of prizes is "10", and blue is displayed when the number of prizes is "50". There is a way of expression. Such a method of expressing addition by color change can be similarly applied to a red meter.

Further, in the additional bonus, even if the maximum number of winnings is exceeded, the numerical value corresponding to the excess may be reflected in the number of payout prize balls displayed on the blue meter. For example, if "11" game balls that exceed the maximum number of prizes are won in the large prize opening, the number of prize balls to be paid out is "110" after adding the number of prize balls "10" corresponding to the prize of one game ball. May be added and displayed. However, when such an additional display of the blue meter is performed, the value corresponding to the amount exceeding the upper limit winning number is additionally displayed even in the red meter, so that the blue meter and the red meter are displayed when the round game is executed thereafter. It is preferable that there is no contradiction in the displayed contents of.

In the above-described second embodiment, the first passing gate 35A and the second passing gate 35B related to the ordinary symbol lottery are started to control the big hit game state, and the big winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) is selected by the player. Although it was also used as a mechanism for causing the movement, such a mechanism may be provided separately from the passing gate related to the ordinary symbol lottery.

Further, in the second embodiment and the third embodiment, it is determined whether or not to shift to the probabilistic gaming state depending on whether or not the specific region 30A is V-winning, but the probabilistic change The same configuration as in the second embodiment and the third embodiment can be applied to a gaming machine configured to determine whether or not to shift to the gaming state by lottery as in the case of winning a big hit. Further, as shown in FIG. 186, the same configuration as that of the second embodiment or the third embodiment can be applied to a gaming machine provided with only one large winning opening. At this time, in order to correspond to one big winning opening, the hit patterns 1 to 13 shown in FIG. 187 are applied as the hit patterns 1 to 13 in FIG. The hit pattern in which the 11th Rth is the opening / closing pattern A may be applied. In this case, for example, the 1R round game that becomes the opening / closing pattern B when the displacement member operates is executed as an easy-to-pass round game, and other round games (including the 11R round game that becomes the opening / closing pattern A). Is executed as a difficult-to-pass round game because the displacement member is inactive. That is, if the displacement member operates and the hit pattern has an opening time (opening mode) such that V winning is easy, the round game of the hit pattern is a round game that is easy to pass. Therefore, the round game of the hit patterns A, D, and E can also be a round game that is easy to pass on condition that the displacement member is operated.

In the second embodiment, the number of STs (190 times) is larger than the number of time reductions (100 or 30 times). For example, the number of STs is set to 100 or 30 times. The number of times may be set to 5, and the number of time reductions may be larger than the number of STs. Further, as the number of time reductions, for example, 0 times may be determined, and the time reduction game state may not be entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In addition, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery may be higher than 0% in the non-time saving game state.

As a modification of the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 193, the jackpot symbols 1 to 4 and the hit patterns 1 to 12, 14 may be associated with each other. In this case, as an example, the following can be performed.
(Big hit design 1)
-The hit pattern 1 is always determined with a 100% probability without switching between the first period and the second period.
-During the big hit game state, the type of hit pattern (hit pattern 1) is notified until the hit pattern is determined.
(Big hit design 2)
The time when the hit pattern 1 can be selected is, for example, 0.03 seconds, the time when the hit pattern 2 can be selected is, for example, 0.03 seconds, and the time when the hit pattern 3 can be selected is, for example, the c period. It is set to 0.22 seconds, and the time during which the hit pattern 14 can be selected is set to, for example, 0.22 seconds as the d period. Then, the state in which the a period, the b period, the c period, and the d period elapse in this order is defined as one set, and the period in which 10 sets are performed is defined as the A period (5 seconds). During this period A, the type of hit pattern is not notified (not notified) during the jackpot game state.
-As a period to be switched next to the A period, a B period (5 seconds) in which only the hit pattern 3 can be selected is provided. Period B corresponds to the second period in the third embodiment. In this B period, the type of hit pattern (hit pattern 3) is notified.
-As a period to be switched next to the B period, a C period (5 seconds) in which only the hit pattern 14 can be selected is provided. The C period corresponds to the first period in the third embodiment. Also in this C period, the type of hit pattern (hit pattern 14) is notified.
-By switching in the order of A period, B period, and C period, a period in which notification is performed and a period in which notification is not performed are provided.
(Big hit design 3)
-The hit pattern 3 is always determined with a 100% probability without switching between the first period and the second period.
-During the big hit game state, the type of hit pattern (hit pattern 3) is notified until the hit pattern is determined.
(Big hit design 4)
-The time during which the hit patterns 1, 4 to 12 can be sequentially selected is switched every 0.02 seconds, for example, and during this period, the type of the hit pattern is not notified (not notified) during the big hit game state.

When many hit patterns exist as in the modified example of the third embodiment described above, the type of hit pattern may not be notified in any period.

In addition, in each of the above-described embodiments, the techniques in the other embodiments can be applied to each other as long as the characteristic configuration and the essential effect are not impaired.

1 Game board 1p Game area 4 Liquid crystal display device (notification means, display means, effect execution means)
32 1st starting port (1st starting area)
33 Second starting port (second starting area)
34 Blade member (variable member)
35A 1st passage gate (1st passage area)
35B 2nd passage gate (2nd passage area)
36 1st Grand Prize Opening (1st Variable Winning Device)
36A 1st Grand Prize Opening Shutter (1st Variable Winning Device)
37 2nd Grand Prize Opening (2nd Variable Winning Device)
37 2nd Grand Prize Opening Shutter (2nd Variable Winning Device)
38A Specific area 38B Non-specific area 39, 39'Displacement member 53 First special symbol display unit (first identification information display means)
54 Second special symbol display unit (second identification information display means)
61 Main CPU (specific game state transition determination means, specific game state control means, special game state control means, non-special game state control means, first round game execution means, second round game execution means, first specific game state transition Judgment means, second specific game state transition determination means, round game pattern determination means, round game execution means, special game state control means, non-special game state control means, specific number of times determination means, period setting means)
63 Main RAM (1st storage means, 2nd storage means)
71 Sub CPU (notification means, display control means, advance notification means, schedule grant quantity determination means, notification quantity change means, effect execution means)
73 Work RAM (storage means, first storage means, second storage means)
83 Payout device (means for adding game value)

Claims (1)

A game board having a game area in which the game medium can be rolled, and
A passing area provided in the game area and through which the game medium can pass,
A determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state on condition that the gaming medium has passed through the passing area.
A game state transition means for shifting to the specific gaming state based on the determination result of the determination means, and
A variable winning device that can be displaced into an open state in which it is easy to accept the game medium and a closed state in which it is more difficult to accept the game medium than in the open state.
A non-special game state control means that is a game state that is controlled after the specific game state ends and can be controlled to a non-special game state that is difficult to shift to the specific game state.
A special game state control means capable of controlling a special game state in which the specific game state is easily shifted to the specific game state after the specific game state is completed.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
In the specific game state, a round game for controlling the opening and closing of the variable winning device can be executed a plurality of times.
Even during the opening / closing control, if a predetermined number of winnings are generated in the variable winning device, it is possible to execute the control to end the round game of that time.
When the first round game is started, the effect executing means can win a prize determined from a plurality of types of prizeable numbers with respect to the display regarding the number of prizes that can be won in the variable winning device in one specific game state. Based on the fact that after the initial display regarding the number is performed, the initial display is continuously displayed even after the first round game is completed and the variable winning device is closed, and the subsequent round game is started. Therefore, it is possible to execute an additional display effect in which the number related to the winning number is increased from the initial display.
At least from the special gaming state, a specific display based on the cumulative total of game values given to the player in the round game from the start of the specific gaming state to the transition to the special gaming state to the transition to the non-special gaming state is displayed. When the round game is executed a plurality of times in the shifted specific game state, it can be displayed together with an effect image showing the end display pattern of the specific game state.
The specific indication and wherein the go not appear when a particular round game not appear effect image indicating the completion display pattern in the case of executing a plurality of times the round game in the specific game mode is executed A game machine to play.

Images